Admin - 6Z0XU - As248inst PDF

V6.
cover
Front cover
System Operator Workshop

for IBM i
(Course code AS24)
Instructor Guide
ERC 8.1
Instructor Guide
Trademarks
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
The following are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United
States, other countries, or both:
Active Memory
AS/400
Electronic Service Agent
OS/400
PowerPC
POWER7
Redbooks
System Storage
WebSphere
AIX 5L
BladeCenter
iSeries
Power
PowerVM
POWER8
System i
System x
xSeries
AIX
DB2
i5/OS
POWER
POWER6
Print Services Facility
System p
System z
Adobe is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in

the United States, and/or other countries.
Pentium is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in
the United States and other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or
both.
Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States, other countries, or both.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Oracle and/or its affiliates.
VMware and the VMware "boxes" logo and design, Virtual SMP and VMotion are registered
trademarks or trademarks (the "Marks") of VMware, Inc. in the United States and/or other
jurisdictions.
Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies.
December 2011 edition

The information contained in this document has not been submitted to any formal IBM test and is distributed on an as is basis without
any warranty either express or implied. The use of this information or the implementation of any of these techniques is a customer
responsibility and depends on the customers ability to evaluate and integrate them into the customers operational environment. While
each item may have been reviewed by IBM for accuracy in a specific situation, there is no guarantee that the same or similar results will
result elsewhere. Customers attempting to adapt these techniques to their own environments do so at their own risk.
Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2001, 2011.

This document may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.
Note to U.S. Government Users Documentation related to restricted rights Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions
set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
V6.0
Instructor Guide
TOC
Contents
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Instructor course overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
Course description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxix
Agenda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxi
Unit 1. Power i and IBM i concepts and overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
The IBM Systems family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Power i expands on a rich heritage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Processor technology roadmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Innovative IBM i technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Central processing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
What is installed here? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Other system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Integrated by design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
IBM i overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Application software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Other licensed program products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Installed software using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Installed software using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Disk storage management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
ASPs: Up to 32 user ASPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Independent ASPs (ASP 33-255) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
What is a partition? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Partition characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
Partition resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Logical partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
Virtual i partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
xSeries server integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
Integrate System x and BladeCenter with Power i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
Linux support (POWER and x86) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
Java support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
Integrated Web serving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
PASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
Capacity on demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
Clustering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
System i Access family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
Which console type? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-73
Operations console (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Contents
iii
Instructor Guide
Operations console (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-77

Hardware Management Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-79
Systems Director Management Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-82
SDMC features versus HMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-85
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-88
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-90
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-92
Unit 2. Reference material and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
IBM i and Power i Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
IBM i Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
IBM Power i homepage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Support: Power i technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
IBM Redbooks page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
IBM Systems Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Unit 3. Overview of 5250 emulation and help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
System displays: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Menu display overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
How to display a menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Menu navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Menu display help (1 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Entry display overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Entry display help (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Entry display help (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
List display overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
List display help: Opt column versus F20 (enlarge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Information display overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Additional help: Information Assistant Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Information Assistant option 1:Where Do I Look for Information? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Information Assistant option 2:How Can I Comment On Information? . . . . . . . . . .3-41
Using the System Request panel group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
Accessing the System Request panel group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46
Question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48
TFRSECJOB command or system request opt 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-50
F9: Retrieve previous command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52
Using the Command Entry display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54
Retrieve a prior command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-56
Operational Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58
Operational Assistant menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-60
iv
System Operator Workshop for IBM i

V6.0
Instructor Guide
TOC
Assistance levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Your choice: Basic or intermediate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User assistance level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-62
3-65
3-67
3-69
3-71
3-73
3-75
Unit 4. Overview of System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
What is System i Access for Windows? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
What you can do with System i Access for Windows? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
What is Navigator? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
What can you do with Navigator? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Navigator main panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Main panel: Left pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Main panel: Right pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Main panel: Taskpad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Object context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
View drop-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Customize this View dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Help drop-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Help Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Direct help button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Help icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Unit 5. Overview of Systems Director Navigator for IBM i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.1. What is it and how does it work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
What is Systems Director Navigator for IBM i? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
How do you get it? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
What is included? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
What is not included? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
How it works (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
How it works (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
What is included: Base functions (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
What is included: Base functions (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
What is included: Additional LPPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.2. Overview of this interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Enter the URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Certificate exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Secure port: Sign-on window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Expired password limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Contents
Instructor Guide
Web console interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

New controls overview (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
New terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
5.3. Manage and set open pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Manage Open Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48
Setting My Startup Pages (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50
5.4. Overview of System task page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-57
Set Target System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-58
System status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-60
History log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-62
Display disk status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-64
Setting up 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-66
5250 emulation session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-68
Change password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-70
Application Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-72
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-74
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-76
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-78
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80
Unit 6. Messaging concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Types of messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Where messages come from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
What is a message queue? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
How are message queues created? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
How are message queues allocated? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16
Unit 7. Messaging using 5250 emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
How are message queues allocated? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
General System Tasks menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Message menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
Option 1: Send Message: SNDMSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
Option 2: Send Message: SNDBRKMSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Option 3: Display Message: DSPMSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Display your messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Display inquiry messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Option 4: Display QSYSOPR messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
Display message details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
Option 6: Work with Message Queues: WRKMSGQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-26
vi

V6.0
Instructor Guide
TOC
How messages are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Work with Object Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grant Object Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-28
7-30
7-32
7-34
7-36
7-38
7-40
Unit 8. Messaging using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Basic Operations > Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Messages context menu: Send Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Inquiry versus informational message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Request a reply: Send reply to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Send Message: Send to users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Send Message: Send to workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Send Message: Interrupt user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Display message properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Customize messages: Include (F11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Include (F11): System operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Customize messages: Columns (F12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Unit 9. Messaging using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Basic Operations > Send a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Inquiry versus informational message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Request a reply: Send reply to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Send Message: Send to users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Send Message: Send to users (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Send Message: Send to users (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Send Message: Send to workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Send Message: Interrupt user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Display Messages: Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Properties: General and Detail tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Customize: View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Customize: Include . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Customize: Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Unit 10. CL command concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Control language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Contents
vii
Instructor Guide
CL commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
CL command structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Some other CL command facts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15
Unit 11. CL commands using 5250 emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2
Where to enter a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-4
Command prompting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6
F11: Keywords or choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9
Conditional parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11
Free format method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13
Finding a command: Major Command Groups menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Finding a command by category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-17
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-19
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-21
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-23
Unit 12. Concepts: Object, library, and the IFS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-2
12.1. Object concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5
Object-based architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-6
Object: A definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-8
IBM: Supplied objects start with Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-10
Working with an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-12
12.2. Library and library list concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-15
What is a library? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-16
Purpose of libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-18
IBM: Supplied libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-21
Native library structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-23
Library list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-25
Finding an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-28
Quiz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-31
Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-33
12.3. Integrated file system concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-35
What is the integrated file system? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-36
File system concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-38
Overview of the IFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-40
File systems supported by the IFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-43
IFS accessed with Windows browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-46
Stream files versus database files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-48
IFS structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-50
Locating objects in the IFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-53
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-56
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-58
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-60
viii

V6.0
Instructor Guide
TOC
Unit 13. Object management using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.1. Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
The DATA and FILE menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Work with Objects command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Work with Objects display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Display Object Description command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Display Object Description details (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Display Object Description details (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Create Duplicate Object command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Copy File command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
13.2. Libraries and library lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
Library and Library Commands menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
Work with Libraries command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
Create Library command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28
Display Library List command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
Library List: Add and Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
13.3. IFS concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
IFS access using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
Work with Object Links display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-40
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-44
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-46
Unit 14. Object management using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.1. User profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
User Profile: Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
User Profile: Jobs > Session startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
14.2. Running commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Run a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Run a command using prompting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Management Central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
System groups: Run Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
14.3. Creating a library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
Database: New library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
File Systems: New library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24
Display libraries on the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26
Display contents of your team library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28
14.4. Object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31
Supported actions by object type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
Object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34
File Systems: Copy and Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36
Database: Copy and Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-38
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-40
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-42
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-44
Contents
ix
Instructor Guide
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-46

Unit 15. Object management using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i . . . . . .15-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-2
15.1. User profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-5
Users and Groups task: Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-6
Users: Click arrow for a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8
Users: Create a new user based on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-10
Users: Other profile data displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-12
Users: Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-14
Jobs: Session startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-16
15.2. Running commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-19
System: Run a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-20
Run a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-22
Run a command using prompting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-24
15.3. Creating a library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-27
Databases: Your database (i520BL2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-28
Schemas: New Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-30
File systems: New Folder (library) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-32
IFS: Display list of libraries (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-34
IFS: Display list of libraries (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-36
Databases: Display list of libraries (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-38
Databases: Display list of libraries (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-40
Display contents of your team library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-42
15.4. Object properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-45
Supported actions by object type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-46
Object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-48
File systems: Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-50
Database: Copy File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-52
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-54
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-56
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-58
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-60
Unit 16. Introduction to work management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-2
Methods of processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-4
What is a job? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-6
Types of jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-8
The life cycle of a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-10
What is a job queue? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-13
Job name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-16
Job/thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-19
What is a job description? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-22
How a user profile relates to a job description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-24
What is a subsystem? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-26
Subsystem description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-28
Subsystem configurations shipped by IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-30
x

V6.0
Instructor Guide
TOC
Memory pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work management overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-33
16-36
16-39
16-41
16-43
Unit 17. Work management using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Job description: What is it? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Job description: Library list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
How a user profile relates to a job description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8
Work with Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
Work with System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-12
Using the additional function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-14
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-16
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-18
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-20
Unit 18. Job control using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Work with User Jobs command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Work with User Jobs display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
Working with Signed-On Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
Work with Active Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
Option 5: Work with Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-13
Question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16
Submitting a batch job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-18
Work with Submitted Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20
Work with Job Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-22
Working with jobs on a job queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-25
Working with job scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-28
Working with advanced job scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-31
Ending a user job abnormally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-33
Disconnecting a user job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-35
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-37
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-39
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-41
Unit 19. Job control using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
Basic Operations > Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4
Work Management > Active Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6
Active Jobs: Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8
Active Jobs > Customize this View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10
Customize this View > Include (F11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-13
Customize this View > Columns (F12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-15
Qualified job: Name, Current User, Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-17
Job Properties (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-19
Contents
xi
Instructor Guide
Job Properties (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-21

Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-24
Subsystems > Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-26
Job queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-28
Explore Qbatch job queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-30
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-32
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-34
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-36
Unit 20. Job control using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-2
Basic Operations: User jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-4
User jobs: Include . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-6
Work Management: Active Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-8
Active Jobs: Configure columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-10
Active Jobs: Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-12
Active Jobs > Customize your window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-15
Customize this view > Include . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-18
Customize this view > Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-20
Customized to show qualified job name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-22
Job properties (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-24
Job properties (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-26
Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-29
Subsystems > Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-31
Active Job Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-33
Explore Qbatch job queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-35
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-37
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-39
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-41
Unit 21. Print concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-2
IBM i printing process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-4
How are output queues created? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-7
Why did the output end up there? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-9
What can you do with a spool file? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-12
Start Printer Writer command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-14
Printer load balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-16
Question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-18
Set an expiration date for spool file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-20
Detach spooled files from jobs: QSPLFACN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-22
Work management overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-24
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-27
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-29
Unit 22. Print control using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-2
Printer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-4
xii

V6.0
Instructor Guide
TOC
Work with All Spooled Files (WRKSPLF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-6

Work with User Jobs: Spooled Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-8
Change Spooled File Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-10
Delete Expired Spooled files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-12
Work with Output Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-15
Work with Writers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-17
Restarting a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-19
Start Printer Writer command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-21
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-23
The flow of a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-25
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-27
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-29
Unit 23. Print control using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
Basic Operations: Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4
Customize: Include (F11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-6
Customize: Columns (F12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-8
Printer Output: Individual report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-10
Printer Output: Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-12
Properties: General and Printer/queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-14
Properties: Copies/Pages and Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-16
Properties: Layout and Staples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-18
Properties: Overlay and Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-20
Properties: Origin/Expiration and User-defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-22
Properties: Other 1 and Other 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-24
Drag and drop output to Windows desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-26
Active Jobs: Right-click job> Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-28
Work Management: Output Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-30
Printers: Customize > Columns (F12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-32
Printer Output: Convert to PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-34
Printers: Printer output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-36
System Values: Detach printer output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-38
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-40
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-42
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-44
Unit 24. Print control using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
Basic Operations: Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-4
Printer Output: Include . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-6
Printer Output: Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-8
Printer Output: Individual report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-10
Printer Output: Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-12
Options for a spool file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-14
Spoolfile Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-16
Properties: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-18
Properties: Printer/Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-20
Contents
xiii
Instructor Guide
Properties: Copies/Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-22

Properties: Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-24
Properties: Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-26
Properties: Staples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-28
Properties: Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-30
Properties: Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-32
Properties: Origin/Expiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-34
Properties: User-defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-36
Properties: Other 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-38
Properties: Other 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-40
Printer Output: Export as ASCII Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-42
Active Jobs: Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-44
Work Management: Output Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-46
Add a Printer wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-48
Printers: Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-50
Printers: Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-52
System Values: Detach printer output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-54
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-56
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-58
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-60
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-62
Unit 25. Starting and stopping the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-2
25.1. Starting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-5
IPL overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-6
IPL speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-9
Change IPL Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-12
What can you do using the control panel? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-15
Control panel function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-17
Overview of unattended (normal) IPL steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-20
Power On and Off Tasks menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-22
Schedule power on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-24
When to perform an attended (manual) IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-27
Attended (manual) IPL steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-29
Attended IPL: IPL or Install the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-32
Attended IPL: Sign On display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-34
Attended IPL: Select Products to Work with PTFs display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-36
Attended IPL: IPL Options display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-38
Attended IPL: Set Major System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-40
Attended IPL: Define or Change the System at IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-43
IPL types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-45
What is a system value? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-48
System values and IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-50
System startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-53
Startup program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-55
Automatic IPLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-58
System value using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-61
xiv

V6.0
Instructor Guide
TOC
System values using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System values using Systems Director Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.2. Stopping the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping the system: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steps prior to power down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Power Down System command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlled power-down with time limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Power push button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25-63
25-65
25-67
25-68
25-70
25-73
25-76
25-78
25-80
25-82
25-84
Unit 26. System security concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2
Types of security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-4
Types of security control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-6
Setting up a new user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-8
Type of user: Privilege class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-10
System privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-13
Group profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-16
Authorization list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-18
Public versus private authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-20
Object authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-22
System values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-24
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-26
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-28
Unit 27. System security using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2
Change Password: CHGPWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-4
Display User Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-6
Enable a disabled user profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-8
Work with Objects by Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-10
Display Object Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-12
Grant Object Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-14
Work with Authorization Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-16
Display Authorization List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-18
Security system values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-20
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-22
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-24
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-26
Unit 28. System security using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2
Change Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-4
User profile > Properties (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-6
User profile > Properties (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-8
Capabilities: Privilege class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-10
Contents
xv
Instructor Guide
Capabilities: System privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-13

Capabilities: Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-16
User profile: Owned Objects (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-19
Password System Values (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-24
Password System Values (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-26
Authorizing objects: Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-28
Permissions: Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-30
Permissions: Details (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-32
Permissions: Details (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-35
Permissions: Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-37
New Authorization List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-39
New Group profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-41
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-43
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-45
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-47
Unit 29. System security using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i . . . . . . . . . .29-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-2
Change Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-4
User profile > Properties (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-6
User profile > Properties (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-8
Capabilities: Privilege class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-10
Capabilities: System privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-13
Capabilities: Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-16
System Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-22
Password System Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-24
Authorizing objects: Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-26
Permissions: Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-28
Permissions: Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-30
Permissions: Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-33
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-35
New Authorization List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-37
Authorization List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-39
New Group profile (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-41
New Group profile (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-43
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-45
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-47
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-49
Unit 30. System configuration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-2
Sample configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-4
Question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-6
Locally attached: CD-ROM, tape drives, and controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-8
Locally attached: Workstation controller (twinaxial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-10
xvi

V6.0
Instructor Guide
TOC
LAN attached . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remotely attached: Remote workstation controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal systems attachment summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power i consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30-12
30-14
30-16
30-18
30-21
30-23
Unit 31. Configuration using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-2
System control system values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-4
Printer device system value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-6
Creating device description automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-8
Creating device description manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-11
Work with messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-13
Display Messages: Assistance level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-15
Work with Hardware Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-17
Work with Hardware Resources: Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-19
Managing devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-21
The command used to manage devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-23
Menu to manage communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-26
Command used to manage communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-28
Printing device addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-31
Start System Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-34
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-37
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-39
Unit 32. Configuration using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2
System Values: Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-4
System Values: Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-6
System operator message queue (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-8
System operator message queue (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-10
Monitoring hardware status (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-16
Monitoring hardware status (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-18
Hardware resource properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-20
Start SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-22
SST: Display disk and graphical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-24
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-27
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-29
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-31
Unit 33. Configuration using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Values: Power control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Values: Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Values: Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
33-1
33-2
33-4
33-6
33-9
xvii
Instructor Guide
System operator message queue (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33-11

System operator message queue (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33-13
Using SST functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33-15
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33-17
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33-19
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33-21
Unit 34. Save concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-2
The save/restore facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-4
Information that can be saved and restored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-6
What you cannot save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-8
What happens when an object is saved? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-10
Save considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-12
Free storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-14
34.1. Save to tape media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-17
Option 1: Save to tape media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-18
Purposes of tape on Power i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-20
Using tape labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-22
Question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-24
34.2. Save to save file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-27
Option 2: Save to save file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-28
34.3. Save to virtual tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-31
Option 3: Save to virtual tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-32
Overview and implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-34
Virtual tape support advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-36
Virtual tape support considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-39
34.4. The tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-41
Tools used to save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-42
Question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-44
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-47
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-49
Unit 35. Save using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-2
35.1. Tape operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-5
Tape menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-6
Display Tape: DSPTAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-9
Contents of a tape: *LABELS format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-11
Contents of a tape: *SAVRST format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-13
Initialize Tape: INZTAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-15
35.2. Save file operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-17
Save File Commands menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-18
Create Save File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-20
Save library to a save file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-22
Other save file commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-24
35.3. Virtual tape operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-27
Overview and implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-28
xviii System Operator Workshop for IBM i

V6.0
Instructor Guide
TOC
Image Commands menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Create Device Desc and vary on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create virtual tape image catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create virtual volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Image Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work with Image Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving to a virtual volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplicating virtual volume to physical tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35.4. Save menus and commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define Save System and User Data Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operational Assistant backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic default backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save menu option 21: Entire system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save menu option 22: System data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save menu option 23: All user data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35-30
35-32
35-34
35-36
35-38
35-40
35-43
35-45
35-47
35-48
35-50
35-52
35-54
35-56
35-59
35-61
35-64
35-66
35-68
35-70
35-72
35-74
Unit 36. Save using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-2
36.1. Setting up virtual tape support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-5
Overview and implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-6
Stand-Alone Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-8
Create virtual device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-10
Device: Make Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-12
Create Image Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-14
Create Catalog pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-16
Add volumes (create virtual images) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-18
Add volume details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-20
List Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-23
Load the image catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-25
36.2. The backup function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-27
Backup > Policies > Daily: General tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-28
Backup > Policies > Daily: What tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-30
Backup > Policies > Daily: When tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-32
Backup > Policies > Daily: Where tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-34
36.3. BRMS function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-37
Backup, Recovery, and Media Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-38
BRMS: Backup control group policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-40
36.4. Saving an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-43
Navigator: Save an object using BRMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-44
Save information for an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-46
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-48
Contents
xix
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36-50
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36-52
Unit 37. Save using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-2
37.1. Setting up virtual tape support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-5
Overview and implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-6
Configuration tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-8
Create virtual tape device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-10
Device: Make available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-12
Create Tape Image Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-14
Create tape image catalog parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-16
Add volumes (create virtual images) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-18
Add volume parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-20
List virtual volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-23
Load the image catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-25
37.2. BRMS function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-27
Backup, Recovery and Media Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-28
BRMS tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-30
BRMS drop-down menu: Manage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-32
Manage devices: New Media Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-34
37.3. Saving an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-37
BRMS: Backup specific items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-38
BRMS: New Backup Control Group wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-40
System: Run a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-42
Prompting the save object command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-44
Prompting the save library command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-46
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-48
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-50
Unit 38. Restore concepts and overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-2
Restoring objects to disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-4
Restore menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-6
Restore commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-8
What is restored? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-10
Restore menu option 21: System and user data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-12
Restore menu option 22: System data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-14
Restore menu option 23: All user data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-16
Complete system restore (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-18
Complete system restore (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-21
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-24
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-26
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-28
Unit 39. Problem determination using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39-2
Problem solving tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39-4
xx

V6.0
Instructor Guide
TOC
Problem determination steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-7

Using the Work with Job command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-9
Option 10: Job Log or DSPJOBLOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-12
Job log printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-15
Work with Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-18
Work with System Status (WRKSYSSTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-20
Work with Disk Status (WRKDSKSTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-23
USERHELP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-25
TECHHELP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-28
Option 1 or DSPMSG QSYSOPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-31
Problem Summary Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-33
Problem Handling menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-35
Option 2 or WRKPRB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-37
Status for a problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-40
Analyze a problem (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-43
Analyze a problem (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-46
PROBLEM2 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-48
Analyzing problems with a system reference code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-51
History log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-54
Problem analysis: History log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-56
Saving and deleting history logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-58
Operational Assistant cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-60
Functions that are automatically cleaned up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-63
Automated problem management: DSPSRVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-65
Copy screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-67
Network Management menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-69
Network Problem Handling menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-72
IBM Redbook SG24-8253 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-75
Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-77
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-79
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-81
Unit 40. Problem determination using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-2
Active Jobs: Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-4
Active Jobs: Elapsed Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-6
Job Log: Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-8
Active Pools: Customize Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-10
Work with System Status (WRKSYSSTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-12
System Status: General / Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-14
System Status: Processors / Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-17
System Status: Disk Space / Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-19
Disk Status and Disk Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-21
System operator messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-24
Electronic Service Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-27
Configuration of Electronic Service Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-30
IBM Electronic Services on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-33
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-35
Contents
xxi
Instructor Guide
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40-37

Unit 41. Overview of the PTF process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-2
What is a fix or PTF? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-4
PTF process overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-6
Types of fixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-8
How to determine available PTFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-10
Ordering fixes (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-13
Ordering fixes (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-15
PTF maintenance strategy: Preventive service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-17
PTF maintenance strategy: Corrective service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-19
OS and LPP PTF installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-21
LIC PTFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-23
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-26
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-28
Unit 42. PTFs using 5250 emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-2
Working with PTFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-4
Ordering a fix using ECS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-7
Ordering a fix using the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-10
Receiving a fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-12
Sample PTF cover letter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-14
Copy the cover letter to IBM i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-16
Display / Print the cover letter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-18
Option 8: Install PTF package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-20
Option 7: Install PTF off a list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-22
Install PTF: Similar to PTF menu option 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-24
Display PTF Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-26
Verifying PTF installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-28
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-30
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-32
Unit 43. PTFs using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43-2
Management Central: Fix wizards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43-4
Copy fixes from media (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43-7
Copy fixes from media (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43-9
System group: Update fix inventory (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43-11
Update fix inventory (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43-14
Compare and Update fixes (1 of 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43-16
xxii System Operator Workshop for IBM i

V6.0
Instructor Guide
TOC
Compare and Update fixes (8 of 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Compare and Update fixes (9 of 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compare and Update fixes (10 of 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install Fixes (1 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install Fixes (2 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install Fixes (3 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install Fixes (4 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install Fixes (5 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verifying the status of the fixes (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verifying the status of the fixes (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced fixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean up fixes (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean up fixes (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43-31
43-33
43-35
43-37
43-39
43-41
43-43
43-45
43-48
43-50
43-52
43-54
43-56
43-58
43-60
43-62
43-64
43-66
43-68
Unit 44. Class summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Course summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Operator Workshop for IBM i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44-1
44-2
44-4
44-6
44-8
Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Contents
xxiii
Instructor Guide
xxiv System Operator Workshop for IBM i

V6.0
Instructor Guide
TMK
Trademarks
The reader should recognize that the following terms, which appear in the content of this
training document, are official trademarks of IBM or other companies:
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
The following are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United
States, other countries, or both:
Active Memory
AS/400
OS/400
PowerPC
POWER7
Redbooks
System Storage
WebSphere
AIX 5L
BladeCenter
iSeries
Power
PowerVM
POWER8
System i
System x
xSeries
AIX
DB2
i5/OS
POWER
POWER6
Print Services Facility
System p
System z
Adobe is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in

the United States, and/or other countries.
Pentium is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in
the United States and other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or
both.
Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States, other countries, or both.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Oracle and/or its affiliates.
VMware and the VMware "boxes" logo and design, Virtual SMP and VMotion are registered
trademarks or trademarks (the "Marks") of VMware, Inc. in the United States and/or other
jurisdictions.
Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies.

Trademarks
xxv
Instructor Guide
xxvi System Operator Workshop for IBM i

V6.0
Instructor Guide
pref
Instructor course overview

Market Requirement
Power i system operations, while extremely user-friendly when
compared to the same function on many other systems, can be very
intimidating to the new and inexperienced system operator. Many
tasks that the system operator must perform on a regular basis require
an understanding of system concepts and terminology that can best
be taught in an interactive classroom environment.
System operators tend to perceive their greatest need as knowing how
to perform a task, not why. While it is almost impossible to perform a
task without understanding how, it is equally difficult to perform the
task efficiently or to extend one's capabilities without understanding
something about why.
This course attempts to address both the how and why aspects of
system operations with the emphasis on the how.
Instructor course overview

xxvii
Instructor Guide
xxviii System Operator Workshop for IBM i

V6.0
Instructor Guide
pref
Course description
Duration: 4 days
Purpose
This course enables a new system operator to develop basic to
intermediate level skills needed for day-to-day operations of the Power
i system and IBM i. Specifically, the course explains how to:
Use the online help and references
Send, display, and reply to messages
Monitor and control jobs, devices, and job and output queues
Start and stop the system
Create and change user profiles
Use authorization lists and group profiles
Manage system configuration
Save and restore objects, libraries, and the system
Monitor job and history logs
Diagnose a system problem
Order, receive, and apply PTFs
Perform all of these functions using a 5250 emulation session as
well as System i Navigator and Systems Director Navigator for IBM
i
Hands-on exercises reinforce the lecture topics and prepare the
student to successfully operate a Power i system.
Audience
This course is intended for the person who has responsibility for daily
system operations.
It is not intended for technical audiences who are seeking an in-depth
look at how the Power i works. This audience should instead attend
the IBM i Programming Facilities Workshop, OE49 or OV49.

Course description
xxix
Instructor Guide
Prerequisites
None.
Objectives
After completing this course, you should be able to:
Send, display, and respond to messages
Use the online help and reference materials
Monitor and control job queues, active jobs, and output queues
Start and stop the operating system (i or IBM i)
Manage system devices, user display stations, and printers
Save and restore objects and libraries
Order, receive, and install PTFs
Curriculum relationship
This course is part of the Power i curriculum. There is one additional
operations course:
Advanced System Operator for IBM i, the classroom course code is
AS27 or the Instructor Led Online (ILO) is OV27.
xxx

V6.0
Instructor Guide
pref
Agenda
Day 1
(00:50) Unit 1: Power i and IBM i concepts and overview
(00:15) Unit 2: Reference material and support
(00:40) Unit 3: Overview of 5250 emulation and help
(00:35) Exercise 1: Using the keyboard and system displays
(00:20) Unit 4: Overview of System i Navigator
(00:20) Exercise 2: Overview of System i Navigator
(00:20) Unit 5: Overview of Systems Director Navigator for IBM i
(00:20) Exercise 3: Overview of Systems Director Navigator for IBM i
(00:10) Unit 6: Messaging concepts
(00:25) Unit 7: Messaging using 5250 emulation
(00:15) Exercise 4: Messages using 5250 emulation
(00:15) Unit 8: Messaging using System i Navigator
(00:20) Exercise 5: Messages using System i Navigator
(00:10) Unit 9: Messaging using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i
(00:10) Exercise 6: Messages using Systems Director Navigator for
IBM i
(00:10) Unit 10: CL command concepts
(00:10) Unit 11: CL commands using 5250 emulation
(00:25) Unit 12: Concepts: Object, library, and the IFS

Agenda
xxxi
Instructor Guide
Day 2
(00:25) Unit 13: Object management using 5250 emulation
(00:45) Exercise 7: Object management using 5250 emulation
(00:25) Unit 14: Object management using System i Navigator
(00:30) Exercise 8: Object management using System i Navigator
(00:15) Unit 15: Object management using Systems Director
Navigator for IBM i
(00:20) Exercise 9: Object management using Systems Director
Navigator for IBM i
(00:20) Unit 16: Introduction to work management
(00:15) Unit 17: Work management using 5250 emulation
(00:15) Exercise 10: Work management using 5250 emulation
(00:15) Exercise 11: Work management using System i Navigator
(00:10) Exercise 12: Work management using Systems Director
Navigator for IBM i
(00:20) Unit 18: Job control using 5250 emulation
(00:25) Exercise 13: Job control using 5250 emulation
(00:20) Unit 19: Job control using System i Navigator
(00:20) Exercise 14: Job control using System i Navigator
(00:15) Unit 20: Job control using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i
(00:20) Exercise 15: Job control using Systems Director Navigator for
IBM i
(00:15) Unit 21: Print concepts
(00:15) Unit 22: Print control using 5250 emulation
(00:25) Exercise 16: Print control using 5250 emulation
xxxii System Operator Workshop for IBM i

V6.0
Instructor Guide
pref
Day 3
(00:15) Unit 23: Print control using System i Navigator
(00:20) Exercise 17: Print control using System i Navigator
(00:15) Unit 24: Print control using Systems Director Navigator for IBM
i
(00:20) Exercise 18: Print control using Systems Director Navigator for
IBM i
(00:35) Unit 25: Starting and stopping the system
(00:10) Exercise 19: System values using 5250 emulation
(00:10) Exercise 20: System values using System i Navigator
(00:10) Exercise 21: System values using Systems Director Navigator
for IBM i
(00:15) Unit 26: System security concepts
(00:15) Unit 27: System security using 5250 emulation
(00:30) Exercise 22: System security using 5250 emulation
(00:20) Unit 28: System security using System i Navigator
(00:20) Exercise 23: System security using System i Navigator
(00:20) Unit 29: System security using Systems Director Navigator for
IBM i
(00:20) Exercise 24: System security using Systems Director
Navigator for IBM i
(00:10) Unit 30: System configuration overview
(00:20) Unit 31: Configuration using 5250 emulation
(00:15) Unit 32: Configuration using System i Navigator
(00:10) Unit 33: Configuration using Systems Director Navigator for
IBM i
(00:30) Exercise 25: Managing your system configuration

Agenda
xxxiii
Instructor Guide
Day 4
(00:25) Unit 34: Save concepts
(00:45) Unit 35: Save using 5250 emulation
(00:30) Exercise 26: Save using 5250 emulation
(00:25) Unit 36: Save using System i Navigator
(00:30) Exercise 27: Save using System i Navigator
(00:30) Unit 37: Save using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i
(00:20) Unit 38: Restore concepts and overview
(00:20) Exercise 28: Restore using 5250 emulation
(00:20) Exercise 29: Restore using System i Navigator
(00:35) Unit 39: Problem determination using 5250 emulation
(00:45) Exercise 30: Problem determination
(00:20) Unit 40: Problem determination using System i Navigator
(00:15) Unit 41: Overview of the PTF process
(00:15) Unit 42: PTFs using 5250 Emulation
(00:45) Unit 43: PTFs using System i Navigator
(00:15) Unit 44: Class summary
xxxiv System Operator Workshop for IBM i

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 1. Power i and IBM i concepts and overview

Estimated time
00:50
What this unit is about

In this unit, you begin to familiarize yourself with the Power i hardware
and software.
What you should be able to do

After completing this unit, you should be able to:
Describe the functions provided by the operating system
Explain the layers of software
Explain how data is stored on the system
Explain what a logical partition is and the functions it can provide
Describe the clustering capability of the system
Explain capacity on demand
List the different types of supported consoles
How you will check your progress

Accountability:
Checkpoint questions

1-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Explain what a logical partition is and the functions it can
provide
Copyright IBM Corporation 2011
Figure 1-1. Unit objectives
AS248.1
Notes:
1-2

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose Discuss the material in the student materials kit, particularly the student
notebook and student exercises.
Details This might well be the first formal IBM training on the Power i for many of the
students, and they could be intimidated by the experience. Try to establish an atmosphere
that makes them feel at ease.
Take your time during the discussion of the student materials kit and facilities. Give them
time to get their feet on the ground.
It is particularly important that you pay close attention to the students during introductions.
Try as much as possible to understand why each one is in the class. Depending on the
makeup of your audience, you might want to present certain topics in the course in either
more or less depth than is indicated by this guide.
The overview must be just that. You do not have time to go into detail about hardware and
software. If students have questions, refer them to the appropriate documentation or take
questions offline at break or lunch.
Additional information Remind the students to put their names on a tent card and set it
up.
Ask them to fill out their student questionnaires so that you can collect them later.
Explain the purpose of the Class Evaluation form, and let them know that you will collect
these forms at the end of class.
Transition statement

1-3
Instructor Guide
The IBM Systems family

IBM i
Innovative, proven technology providing platform choice to

match unique business needs
BladeCenter
Simplify data center
complexity.
Power i
System z
Install faster, maintain easier.
The flagship for IBM

Systems innovation and the
heart of a highly secure,
resilient and integrated
infrastructure.
System x
System Storage
Innovation comes standard.
Connected. Protected. Complete.
System p
Get the power to do more,
spend less.
Figure 1-2. The IBM Systems family
AS248.1
Notes:
All of IBMs systems and storage, along with the microelectronics upon which they are built
are part of the same group today; the same management structure. The best of IBMs
technology is freely shared among all of the product lines. As a result, IBM has the most
comprehensive and competitive systems and storage products in the industry today.
Though many common technologies are shared among the various products, each
remains distinct in the markets they serve. Each grew out of separate beginnings.
System z is the class leader in the industry for mainframes.
BladeCenter leads the industry in its category, and System x, our Intel-based offering, is
gaining share against the competition.
System p leads the industry for UNIX-based servers.
System Storage has forged ahead with storage virtualization technologies.
Power i is in a class by itself. Its beginnings, its roots, are in business computing. It does
not require the technical expertise of a mainframe, yet it has the same power.
1-4

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
For an Instructor Led Online (ILO) class: Ask the students to place a checkmark or X on
the slide using the whiteboard tools to indicate which systems they have installed in their
company or organization.
For a Face to Face (FTF) class: Ask the students to raise their hands if they have any IBM
systems other than Power i at their organization.
Additional information
Transition statement Power i has grown from a heritage of business computing, and
this is its strength. It installs faster and is easier to maintain.

1-5
Instructor Guide
Power i expands on a rich heritage

IBM i
AS/400e
iSeries
eServer i5
AS/400
Power i
A technology-friendly
architecture supporting
continuous innovation
without disruption
Figure 1-3. Power i expands on a rich heritage
AS248.1
Notes:
Twenty years ago IBM introduced the AS/400, bringing together two of IBM's most
successful platforms of the time: S/36 and S/38. It was the first of a new generation of
servers with a revolutionary virtualized operating system. It allowed companies to simply
write business applications that exploited its integrated database.
1-6

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

1-7
Instructor Guide
Processor technology roadmap

IBM i
Figure 1-4. Processor technology roadmap
AS248.1
Notes:
This visual charts the evolution of the POWER processors from the early days of POWER4
in 2001 to the current generation, POWER7, and even points to the future with POWER8.
Some details are provided as to the density of the components on each generation. The
numbers in the boxes below the graphic of the processor chips represent, in rough terms,
the spacing of components in nanometers or microns.
As these numbers get smaller over time we are seeing the evolution of the technology, of
creating processors with the components more tightly squeezed together. The advantage
of this is to increase the functionality of the processor and at the same time to reduce
performance draining latency.
The boxes below each generation highlight some of the enhancements to functionality
associated with the processor.
POWER4 was the first to have more than one processor core on a chip (chip
multiprocessing).
POWER5 introduced simultaneous multi-threading (SMT).
1-8

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
POWER6 included Altivec extensions which extended the range of high performance
workloads that could be deployed on Power systems.
POWER7 increases the number of cores per chip, includes L3 cache on the chip, and
extends SMT.
For IBM POWER7 clients, there is the certainty of the POWER architecture roadmap and
the sense of investment protection along with the proven evolution of the architecture to
higher and higher levels of functionality and performance.

1-9
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
1-10 System Operator Workshop for IBM i

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Innovative IBM i technology

IBM i
Figure 1-5. Innovative IBM i technology
AS248.1
Notes:
Innovative technology has been built into the Power i family of products operating system
throughout its life cycle.
This visual lists some of the technologies that have been built into the operating system
(OS) known as IBM i.
On our system, these technologies have been designed into the OS from the inception,
designed from the ground up. Whereas on other systems, these are additional layers of
software that must be purchased and installed on their system.
These are just some of the components that make our OS better than other operating
systems.

1-11
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Central processing unit

IBM i
Many generations of processors

Choice of processing speeds with a range of:
Processor cycle speed (MHz rating)
L1/L2/L3 cache
Multiple threads
Multiple processors:
Core systems (Core = 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 24, 32, 64)
Capacity on demand (CoD)
Range of throughput capacities based on combination of:

Generation of processors
Number of processors
Figure 1-6. Central processing unit
AS248.1
Notes:
The Power i family of servers consists of different system types and models, each with
different capabilities and processing speeds. On the Power i family of servers these are
measured by commercial processing workload (CPW).
CPW is a measure used in IBM's Power i family of servers used to compare computer
system models in terms of how efficiently each system processes a typical workload of
commercial applications involving frequent database access. The CPW also represents a
test of database commitment control, concurrent data access by many users, and a range
of updating complexity.

1-13
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Tell students that the System Handbook is the best place to get all of the
technical information for a particular model of the Power i.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
What is installed here?

IBM i
System values for processor

using:
System value . . . . . : QMODEL

Description . . . . . : System model number
Model number . . . . . :
520
5250 emulation:
System value . . . . . : QPRCFEAT
Description . . . . . : Processor feature
QMODEL - System model

number
Processor feature . . : 7457
QPRCFEAT - Processor feature
System value . . . . . : QSRLNBR

Description . . . . . : System serial number
QSRLNBR - System serial

number
Serial number . . . . :
65FB92D
System i Navigator and

Systems Director Navigator for
IBM i
Configuration and service
System values
Figure 1-7. What is installed here?
AS248.1
Notes:
System values are provided as part of the OS. They are used by the system to control
certain operations in the OS and to communicate the status of certain conditions.
Changes to some system values take effect immediately, some do not take effect until new
jobs are started, and others do not take effect until the next initial program load (IPL). More
information about system values is in the Work Management information in the Power i and
IBM i Information Center at:
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/iseries/?topic=/rzahg/icmain.htm
Use the work with system values (WRKSYSVAL) command to display and change system
values on the system.
System model number (QMODEL): This is the number or letters used to identify the
model of the system.
Processor feature (QPRCFEAT): This is the processor feature code level of the
system. The processor feature system value is the same in each partition on a system.

1-15
Instructor Guide
System serial number (QSRLNBR): This value cannot be changed. It is retrieved from
the data fields by the system when installing the operating system licensed program.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

1-17
Instructor Guide
Other system components

IBM i
Memory:
Multiple memory cards
Choice of memory capacity
What is installed seen using green screen and GUI?
Storage cards
Capacity per card
System i Navigator (only available using GUI)
I/O buses
Dependent on attached peripheral I/O processors
I/O processors provides support for:
Disk
Tape
Communication adapters
Workstation adapters
Note: Each hardware component is

identified by a four digit feature code.
Figure 1-8. Other system components
AS248.1
Notes:
The system provides the capability to see what hardware and software is installed. This
information can be displayed and, in some cases, changed using either the 5250 emulation
interface, System i Navigator, or Systems Director Navigator for IBM i.
To see this information using 5250 emulation, use the Work Hardware Resources
(WRKHDWRSC) command. This information can also be seen by way of the supported
graphical interfaces using the Configuration and Service branch or task.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Recommend that students become familiar with the System Handbook,
SG24-7486.

1-19
Instructor Guide
Peripherals
IBM i
Disk drives
Tape drives
Communications adapters
Workstations
Figure 1-9. Peripherals
AS248.1
Notes:
Depending on the specific system model installed, each will support a specific model of
disk drives. The different disk drives supported have a variety of storage capacity and
access speeds. What is installed on your system can be displayed by using the Work with
Disk Status (WRKDSKSTS) command through the 5250 emulation or interface or by using
the Configuration and Service branch or task.
There are also a large variety of tape drives that are supported on this family of servers.
Each of the different tape systems that can be connected have different capacities with
different read and write speeds and performance.
Depending on the customers requirements, different communications adapters can be
installed to support connectivity through fiber optics or Ethernet.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

1-21
Instructor Guide
Integrated by design
IBM i
Traditional systems
Power i
IBM i
Higher level functions exposed to users and
applications based on SLIC services
Graphical user interface
Vast range of high level language functions
(C/C++, RPG, COBOL)
Directory
Backup and
recovery
on s
unicati
Comm
Online transaction
processing
Technology Independent Machine Interface - TIMI
Security
Relational
database
Sys
man tems
agem
ent
Java
Operating system
Hardware and microcode
System Licensed Internal Code (LIC)

Process control
Resource management
Integrated SQL-compliant database
Security enforcement
Network communications
File systems
Storage management
Java virtual machine (JVM)
Other primitives
64-bit POWER Systems
Figure 1-10. Integrated by design
AS248.1
Notes:
In addition to knowing which devices are attached to your Power i and how to operate
them, you should also be familiar with the system software that is installed.
There are four primary categories of software on the Power i which build on each other:
Licensed Internal Code (LIC)
Operating system, named IBM i
Programming support
Application support
These will be discussed in more detail on the next couple of pages.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Emphasize the following:
Hardware layer
LIC and the function it serves
TIMI - important to discuss what function this servers
IBM i - the OS (covered in more detail on the following pages)
Point out that the software is like building blocks. That is, IBM i requires LIC, programming
support requires IBM i and LIC, and application support requires LIC, IBM i, and, in most
cases, programming support.

1-23
Instructor Guide
IBM i overview
IBM i
System software:
Operating system (5770-SS1)
Support for applications native to other operating systems
Integrated xSeries server
System resource management:

Processors
Memory
Disk
System control interface:

Control language (CL) support
System or user-written commands
Integrated support:
Security
Communications
System management
Database management system (DBMS) - DB2 UDB for i
Figure 1-11. IBM i overview
AS248.1
Notes:
The operating system software is knows as IBM i and is licensed program 5770-SS1.
Previously, it was named OS/400; then it became i5/OS, and now it is known as IBM i or i.
The most current version is V7R1 (Version 7 Release 1) or 7.1.
As we saw on the previous page, several functions are integrated into the operating
system. These include:
Database management system (DBMS) known as DB2 UDB for i
Security
Communications:
- Systems Network Architecture (SNA) and Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP)
- Windows Network Neighborhood support
- HTTP/Apache and so forth

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
System management:
- System-managed access-path protection (SMAPP)
- System i Navigator and Management Central
Support for applications native to other operating systems:
-
UNIX application programming interfaces (API)

Portable Application Solutions Environment (PASE)
AIX-based applications
Linux
Integrated xSeries server

The OS provides commands and graphical interface options to manage the system
resources, such as:
Processors
Memory
Disk
The following support is available to interface with the system:
Control language (CL) support
High level programming language
System or user-written commands

1-25
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Application software
IBM i
Traditional applications
Workload
Interactive, character-based (ICPW)
Batch (no on going user interaction)
Support through specific IBM i jobs

Application users = IBM i users - refer to work management
Client/server applications
Workload:
Information processing (interactive or batch)
Database serving
Interaction with IBM i jobs
Application users might not be known to IBM i.
Figure 1-12. Application software
AS248.1
Notes:
The performance capacity of all Power i servers is represented by CPW. CPW values are
assigned to all Power i processors and are derived by performing various monitored and
measured workloads.
The reported values or results are used to compare relative performance characteristics of
processor features offered for Power i servers. They serve as a means to compare
performance.

1-27
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Other licensed program products

IBM i
TCP/IP Connectivity Utilities (TC1)

Backup and Recovery Media Services (BR1)
Application Development Tools (WDS):
Program Development Languages
Control Language (included with IBM i)
Query (QU1)
DB2 Query Manager (ST1)
Performance Tools (PT1)
Performance Management (PM1)
Cryptographic Support (CR1)
Advanced Job Scheduler (JS1)
Lotus Domino (LD7), and so forth
Figure 1-13. Other licensed program products
AS248.1
Notes:
There are many more software products available for the Power i than those listed in this
visual.
Depending on the version and release level of the OS installed on your system, the
program numbers for the software will change. For example, the licensed program number
for the TCP/IP Connectivity Utilities is 5770-TC1 on a system running at V7R1. On a
system running at V6R1, the program number is 5761-TC1.
Whenever a new version or release for the OS becomes available, the numbering for the
licensed program software will change.

1-29
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Question
IBM i
How do you use the Power i in your organization?
Figure 1-14. Question
AS248.1
Notes:

1-31
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Ask the students to use the type text on
screen tool to describe in a sentence the functions their Power iPower i performs or will be
performing at their organization.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Ask the students to raise their hands and select two or
three students to briefly describe the functions their Power i performs or will be performing.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Installed software using 5250 emulation

IBM i
Figure 1-15. Installed software using 5250 emulation
AS248.1
Notes:
To see this menu, issue the GO LICPGM command; then select option 10.
On the Display Installed Licensed Programs screen, press the F11 key to see all of the
additional information available on this screen.

1-33
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Ask the students to check Yes or No using the
polling options if they have used the LICPGM menu before.
Once you have finished the polling question, play file AS248-U01-F15 in the multimedia
library of Elluminate to provide the students a video demonstration of how to use the
LICPGM command.
1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate.
2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U01-F15 and click Play.
3. Ask the students to indicate via a green checkmark when they have finished the file.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Ask the students to raise their hands to indicate if they
have ever used the LICPGM menu before. Optionally, you can then play file
AS248-U01-F15 on your PC to provide the students with a video demonstration of the
LICPGM command.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Installed software using System i Navigator

IBM i
Figure 1-16. Installed software using System i Navigator
AS248.1
Notes:
On this visual is a System i Navigator view of installed software on a system. To see this
window perform the following steps:
Open a System i Navigator window.
Click to expand My Connections.
Click your system, and sign on with your user ID and password when prompted.
Click to expand Configuration and Service.
Click to expand Software.
Click Installed Products to update the right pane to show the software installed on
your system.
This function is not yet available using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i, which is the
other interface that will be covered in this class. There is a Configuration and Service task,
but it does not include a link to display software. Perhaps this function will be added in the
future.

1-35
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details System i Navigator is one of two GUIs to be presented in this class.
This function is not yet available using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i. There is a
Configuration and Service task but it does not include a link to display software. Perhaps
this function will be added in the future.
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Ask the students to check yes or no using the
polling options if they have ever used System i Navigator before.
You can then play file AS248-U01-F16 in the multimedia library of Elluminate to provide the
students with an exercise of how to view licensed programs in System i Navigator.
To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate.
Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U01-F16 and click Play.
Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Ask the students to raise their hands to indicate if they
have ever used System i Navigator before. You can then play file AS248-U01-F16 on your
PC to provide the students with a demonstration of how to view licensed programs in
System i Navigator.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Disk storage management

IBM i
Data
IBM i
All data spread across available disk arms

Not all information necessarily contiguous
Optional rebalancing
Minimal database administration
Figure 1-17. Disk storage management
AS248.1
Notes:
On this system when you create or restore an object, data is spread across all of the
available disk drives. This is done to optimize performance when reading or writing data.
Therefore, all of the data on your Power is not necessarily stored in a contiguous location.
This helps improve performance; there is a more balanced disk arm utilization.
One of the options available to a system administrator when signed on through service
tools is that you can choose an option to rebalance your disk drives. This is something that
is typically done whenever new disk drives are added to the system. This is also something
that is done whenever a disk drive is replaced on your system (after a service call).
This system requires minimal database administration. When a user creates a new object
or when an object is restored on the system there are three pieces of information that are
required. An object must have a unique name, you must specify what type of object is
being created or restored, and you must specify the name of the library for the object. The
OS is responsible to managing the specific location (the address on the disk where this
data will be located).

1-37
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
ASPs: Up to 32 user ASPs

IBM i
Data
IBM i
ASP-1
(System + Appl-1)
Database
changes
ASP-2
(Journal Receiver)
ASP: Auxiliary storage pool (disk pool)

A collection of disks used to isolate
IBM i objects from others on another
collection of ID disks.
Data
ASP-3
(Appl-2)
Figure 1-18. ASPs: Up to 32 user ASPs
AS248.1
Notes:
An auxiliary storage pool (ASP) is one or more physical disk units assigned to the same
storage area. ASPs allow you to isolate types of objects on specified physical disk units.
The server ASP isolates server programs and the temporary objects that are created as a
result of processing by server programs. User ASPs can be used to isolate user objects,
such as libraries, SQL objects, journals, journal receivers, applications, and data.
The Power i supports up to 32 basic user ASPs and 223 independent user ASPs. Isolating
libraries or objects in a user ASP protects them from disk failures in other ASPs and
reduces recovery time.
In addition to reduced recovery time and isolation of objects, placing objects in an ASP can
improve performance. If a journal receiver is isolated in a user ASP, the disks associated
with that ASP are dedicated to that receiver. In an environment that requires many read
and write operations to the database files, this can reduce arm contention on the disks in
that ASP and can improve journaling performance.

1-39
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Independent ASPs (ASP 33-255)

IBM i
Auxiliary storage pools

(ASPs or disk pools)
System
*SYSBAS
User
Basic
Independent
*SYSBAS
*SYSBAS
HSL
Independent ASP
(switchable disks) can
be switched between
Power i servers without
restarting the servers.
IASP
Figure 1-19. Independent ASPs (ASP 33-255)
AS248.1
Notes:
An independent ASP is a collection of disk units that you can bring online or take offline
independent of the rest of the storage on a system.
Independent ASPs contain any of the following:
One or more user-defined file systems
One or more external libraries
Each independent ASP contains all of the necessary Power information associated with the
data it contains. Therefore, while the Power is active, you can take the independent ASP
offline, bring it online, or switch between systems.
When you vary on an independent ASP, several changes occur within the root (/) file
system.

1-41
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
What is a partition?
IBM i
A partition allocates one systems resources to create

logically separate systems.
Each partition is an independent operating environment.
From one to many
Figure 1-20. What is a partition?
AS248.1
Notes:
When a Power i is subdivided into multiple, independent operating Power images, those
independent operating environments are called partitions. The resources on the system
are divided up among the partitions. Applications running on a partitioned system do not
have to be redesigned for the partitioned environment.
Each partition runs its own operating system which might or might not match operating
systems in other partitions on the same system. Each partition can be started and stopped
independently of other partitions.

1-43
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Partition characteristics
IBM i
Each partition has its own:

Operating system
LIC for IBM i or Open Firmware for AIX 5L and Linux
Console
Load source disk or boot resources
ASPs and memory pools
Other components expected in a stand-alone operating system
environment
Figure 1-21. Partition characteristics
AS248.1
Notes:
The list in the visual illustrates how each partition is independent. As stated before, each
partition runs its own operating system which can be IBM i or Linux or AIX.
Each partition shares a few physical system attributes, such as the system serial number,
system model, and processor feature code, with other partitions. In addition, you can
choose to share other hardware among partitions.
Other components expected in a standalone operating system environment include:
Problem logs
Data (libraries, objects, file systems)
Performance characteristics
Language feature codes
Network identity
Date and time

1-45
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Partition resources
IBM i
Resources are allocated to partitions:

Memory
Processing units
I/O slots including virtual devices
5250 emulation (interactive) for IBM i
Load source IOP and disk unit
Console
Virtual resources can be shared:

Ethernet
SCSI
Serial
Figure 1-22. Partition resources
AS248.1
Notes:
Resources
Resources are the system components that are configured into partitions. The maximum
number of partitions is related to the total amount of resources on system.
Minimum amount of resources
Each partition must be configured with a minimum amount of memory, one tenth of a
physical processor, and enough I/O devices to provide a load source (boot resources), to
have a console, and to connect to a network. The minimum is dependent on the model of
the system and the version and release of the OS.
Memory
Memory is allocated in 16 MB segments. A partition can be as small as 128 MB or as large
as all of the installed memory.

1-47
Instructor Guide
Processing units
Processing power is configured in processing units equivalent to 1/100 of a physical
processor. A partition can be configured with as little as one processing unit or as much as
the equivalent to all of the available installed physical processors.
I/O slots
I/O resources are allocated to partitions at the slot level. At minimum, you must configure a
partition with enough I/O resources to include the load source disk (boot resources) and a
network adapter.
5250 CPW (IBM i partitions only)
Your system has a certain amount of interactive performance based on the type of system
and the number of processors. The 5250 emulation refers to how much the user must
interact with (and respond to prompts from) the computer. You can contrast this with batch,
where no user intervention is required. Given the amount of interactive performance on
your system, you need to determine what percentage will be available for each partition.
Virtual devices
Other devices can be configured to be shared between partitions. Each partition can
configure virtual I/O slots which can be configured with a virtual adapter instance. These
virtual adapters can be an Ethernet interface.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

1-49
Instructor Guide
Logical partitions
IBM i
Partitions can support:

Consolidated operations
CPU
CPU
Multinational requirements
Multiple business units
CPU
CPU
CPU
CPU
CPU
CPU
CPU
CPU
IOP
IOP
CPU
IOP
IOP
Sys. integrators, outsourcing

IBM i
Mixed application server

Mixed test environments
Departmental systems
Integrated cluster
Constrained systems
LINUX
IBM i
IBM i
1
CPU
IOP
Firewall
IBM i (Hypervisor)
12-way Processor
Partitions can communicate with each other internally:

Over virtual LAN or
Physical LAN
System allocates a percentage of interactive workload to each

partition.
Figure 1-23. Logical partitions
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

1-51
Instructor Guide
Virtual i partitions
IBM i
IBM i-based virtualization:

Supports IBM i partition using I/O resources
from another IBM i partition
Eliminates requirement to buy adapters and

disk drives for each IBM i partition
i
Hypervisor
POWER6
Requires POWER6 processor-based

systems or newer with V6R1 or higher
Adds to IBM i storage virtualization capabilities:

AIX and Linux partitions
Integrated BladeCenter and System x servers running VMware,
Windows, or Linux
Figure 1-24. Virtual i partitions
AS248.1
Notes:
Virtual i partitions will be supported without requiring physical hardware adapters for the
partition, just like we have offered for POWER Linux and AIX partitions. You can easily add
partitions for tests and development.
This configuration requires at least a POWER6 system and a minimum of IBM i at V6R1 or
higher for both the host and client partitions.
Additionally, IBM i can get its storage from a Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) partition. The IBM i
partition does not own any physical adapters in this configuration. This requires a minimum
of a POWER6 Systems and IBM i V6R1 for the IBM i partition.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

1-53
Instructor Guide
xSeries server integration

IBM i
Integrated xSeries servers
Power
Power i i
Up to 60 per Power i
2.0 GHz Intel Xeon processor
Power i PCI Bus
Attach
512 KB L2
Up to three LAN adapters
Integrated xSeries adapters

Up to 60 per Power i:
Direct attach of N-way IBM xSeries servers
Connection using high-speed link (HSL)
Scalability
high-speed link
IBM
xSeries
Server
Figure 1-25. xSeries server integration
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

1-55
Instructor Guide
Integrate System x and BladeCenter with Power i

IBM i
Power i connects selected System x and BladeCenter

products using standard Ethernet cables and switches.
Power i exploits IBM i virtual
storage to manage Windows
storage.
Power i streamlines communication
between Windows and IBM i
applications with virtual Ethernet.
IBM i integrates operations and backup.
Figure 1-26. Integrate System x and BladeCenter with Power i
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

1-57
Instructor Guide
Linux support (POWER and x86)

IBM i
Linux runs in a Power i partition.

Leverages LPAR and integrated xSeries server
concept
Acts as a guest of a partition running IBM i
Uses Linux partition hardware:
Processor:
Minimum (0.1 processor/64 MB
memory)
Maximum (8 processors, 4 GB of
memory)
IBM i
IBM i
IBM i Host
PPP
PPPP
Linux
PP
Linux
LAN, virtual LAN, console

Disk
Virtual LAN
P = Processor
Figure 1-27. Linux support (POWER and x86)
AS248.1
Notes:
POWER Linux runs in a partition and requires a minimum of POWER5 or newer hardware.
x86Linux runs on iSCSI only, not IXS or IXA (VIO required).
Disk:
- Virtual disk
- Power i disk management
- Power i network storage device using Power i I/O processors
- Direct attach disk using Power i I/O adapters

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details For those customers who have the need, it is possible to run Linux in its own
separate LPAR.

1-59
Instructor Guide
Java support
IBM i
Java - the standard for dynamic Internet applications
Client
Server
Java development tools

(like VisualAge)
Java virtual Machine (JVM)

JVM integrated with IBM i
Toolbox for Java
Enabling Power i to take advantage of a growing

portfolio of Java applications
Figure 1-28. Java support
AS248.1
Notes:
The new IBM 64-bit Java virtual Machine (JVM) is the cross-platform JVM to be used on
the various IBM platforms. It has shown improved performance over the 32-bit classic JVM.
Both version are available.
Improvement is primary in Java Database Connectivity (JDBC) and DB2 for i and Java. It
includes 64 pages, and is only available on POWER5+ and beyond.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Impress on the students that Java:
1. Is built into the OS
2. Is supported at the hardware level
3. Has no special requirements to implement on this system

1-61
Instructor Guide
Integrated Web serving

IBM i
Client
HTML
Browser on PC
Multimedia
Server:
HTTP
HTML, XML, and so forth
Web application serving

WebSphere Application Server (WAS)
Network
HTTP/Apache
CGI-bin, and so on
Internet/intranet
DB
Internet/intranet
Browser
Security
URL
Clients
Servers
Network
Figure 1-29. Integrated Web serving
AS248.1
Notes:
Starting at V6R1, IBM i no longer supports a version of Tomcat. The IBM i integrated
WebSphere Application Server (WAS) replaces Tomcat. Customers can still download
Tomcat from the Apache Website, but the responsibility of installing, using, and servicing
Tomcat is up to the customer.
The performance goal is to have a Web container that can run on the smallest Power i
servers. We need this because of management tools like IBM Systems Director Navigator
for IBM i.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Impress on the students that Web serving is supported through different Web
servers supported on the Power i:
Apache
ASF Tomcat
WebSphere

1-63
Instructor Guide
PASE
IBM i
Portable Application Solutions Environment:

Is an integrated runtime environment
Supports selected UNIX applications
Provides broad subset of the support
IBM i PASE:
Supports direct execution of PowerPC machine instructions
Runs on the System Licensed Internal Code (SLIC) kernel on the
Power i
Figure 1-30. PASE
AS248.1
Notes:
Portable Application Solutions Environment (PASE) is an integrated runtime environment
for AIX applications run on IBM i.
PASE:
Supports selected UNIX applications
- Especially IBM-AIX Runtime Support
- Application binary interface (ABI) of AIX
- Other UNIX-based programs (must successfully compile on AIX)
Provides broad subset of the support
- AIX shared libraries, shells, and utilities
IBM i PASE:
Supports direct execution of PowerPC machine instructions
- No drawbacks of an emulation environment
Runs on the System Licensed Internal Code (SLIC) kernel on the Power i
- Not a UNIX operating system on Power i

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details PASE provides the capability to allow compiled AIX software to port to and run
on the Power i. It will run in an AIX environment.

1-65
Instructor Guide
Capacity on demand
IBM i
Capacity upgrade on demand (CUoD)

Permanent activation of processors or memory
Trial CoD
No charge 30-day activation of processors or memory
resources
On/Off CoD
Add reserve
resources
Ability to activate processor or memory resources

temporarily
Reserve CoD:
Processors only
Prepaid for certain number of days
Mobile CoD
Move permanent processor or memory activation from one
server to another
Figure 1-31. Capacity on demand
AS248.1
Notes:
CoD is a list of features that can be purchased. The bullets in the visual list the purchasing
options. These options are managed from the Hardware Management Console (HMC) and
require a license key to activate.
Capacity upgrade on demand (CUoD) requires a purchase agreement. Once
processors or memory are added, there is no ability to turn off the capacity.
Trial CoD is available for 30 days at no additional cost to allow testing and emergency
relief while the customer processes the purchase of permanent CUoD resources.
On/Off CoD provides temporary additional processor or memory resources. Activity is
reported to IBM, and there must be an On/Off Capacity agreement.
Reserve CoD adds reserve processor capacity to the shared processor pool if the base
shared pool capacity is exceeded. There must be a prepaid debit agreement for a set
number of days.
Mobile CoD is the ability to move a permanent activation of a resource (processor or
memory amount) from one server to another.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Testing is allowed for 30 days, at which point the customer must enter a
software key if they want to continue using the software. Otherwise, they will be locked out
of that software by the system.
For an Instructor Led Online (ILO) class: Ask the students to place a checkmark or X on
the slide using the whiteboard tools to indicate which systems they have installed in their
company or organization.
For a Face to Face (FTF) class: Ask the students to raise their hands if they have any IBM
systems other than Power i at their organization.

1-67
Instructor Guide
Clustering
IBM i
Demand for continuous availability (24x365):

Need to minimize planned downtime
Single Power i - 99.94% available (Ref: Gartner Report)
Power i implementation:
Shared-nothing model
Up to 128 Power i nodes
Availability through:
APIs
Application restart
Independent ASPs
Cluster Control
Figure 1-32. Clustering
AS248.1
Notes:
Clustering is the practice of connecting multiple processors or servers to cooperate on
complex workloads as a single unified computing resource.
Demand for continuous availability (24x365).
Need to minimize planned downtime:
- Maintenance
- Upgrades
Single Power i - 99.94% available (reference the Gartner Report)
Power i implementation:
Shared-nothing model:
- Each resource is owned by a host
- Critical (resilient) resources replicated over nodes
Up to 128 Power i nodes

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Availability through:
- APIs
IP address switching
- Application restart:
Custom code
High availability BP products
- Independent ASPs
Switchable disks

1-69
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Clustering is a very common tool used in the availability arena. For example, if a
customer has three systems:
System 1 is replicated onto system 2
If one of the three systems goes down, the other two have all of the application software
that would normally run on the system that is down.
In this environment, you should test that the replication is working. Take the systems down,
usually once a week, to verify that clustering is working.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
System i Access family

IBM i
These products provide the functionality and interfaces to gain access to applications,
data, and resources on i.
Figure 1-33. System i Access family
AS248.1
Notes:
Power i Access for Windows (5770-XE1).
Power i Access for Web (5770-XH2).
Power i Series Access for Wireless (5770-XP1).
IBM IBM i Toolbox for Java ME
Power i Access for Linux (5770-XL1).

1-71
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Which console type?

IBM i
Connect the console using:

Windows PC:
Connected by serial port
Serial Port
Connected by LAN
OR
Twinax (5250 terminal)

Twinax
Figure 1-34. Which console type?
AS248.1
Notes:

1-73
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Operations console (1 of 2)
IBM i
Provides system console session

Includes graphical control panel
Is included with System i Access for Windows:

LAN connect directly to Power i
Remote connect through TCP/IP dial-up connection
Figure 1-35. Operations console (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
Setting up an operations console is an option for those customers who do not have a
Hardware management console (HMC) or a Systems director management console
(SDMC) installed on their system.
It is used to provide graphical access to the system control panel.

1-75
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Operations console (2 of 2)
IBM i
Server code
Installable option of System i Access for Windows (5770-XE1)
System i Access code

System i Access family (5770-XW1 product)
EZ Setup includes the client
Console cable for System console functions
Connects into Async adapter on PC
Connects into MFIOP or ECS port on Power i
PC5250 or
Power i Navigator
Modem connection
TCP/IP only
RCS
Remote controlling system
LCS
Local controlling system
Control panel cable for control panel functions

Connects into Async adapter on PC
Connects into control panel (that is, SAMI/J19 port) on Power i
Figure 1-36. Operations console (2 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
The console cable is directly connected to the Power i multifunction I/O processor (MFIOP)
(similar to the way the PC console is connected).
The control panel application can be used if the required control panel cable is directly
connected to the Power i control panel.
Note
If you configure an Operations Console on a Power i that previously used a twinax console,
you must change the console mode in DST to Operations Console. During the manual IPL,
the Power i might detect a twinax workstation for use as the console before it finds
Operations Console. You can avoid this if you power down the twinax device or reconfigure
the cabling.

1-77
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The console cable is directly connected to the Power i MFIOP (similar to the way
the PC Console is connected). Specific cables are required to support this function.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Hardware Management Console

IBM i
For POWER5,POWER6 and POWER7 systems, the HMC is

required for:
Virtual console windows
LPAR configuration and operation management
CoD management
Service tools
Rack-mount
7310-CR2
HMC is a PC-based console:

Closed custom appliance
Remotely accessible
Connects to service processor
over private or open network
Desktop
7310-C03
Figure 1-37. Hardware Management Console
AS248.1
Notes:
HMC description
Officially, the name of the PC-based console is IBM Hardware Management Console for
Power i, also known as an HMC. It is available in a Desktop or a rack-mount model. The
user can only access the management application, and no additional applications can be
installed. A second HMC can be connected to a single managed system for redundancy.
Two managed systems can be managed by a single HMC.
The HMC is required for systems running LPARs.
Remote access to the HMC functions
Remote access to the HMC application is provided by using WebSM. The WebSM client
runs on Microsoft Windows PCs and on Linux and AIX 5L workstations. In addition, there
are extensive HMC command-line controls accessible through the secure shell (SSH).
HMC is independent from the managed system and its partitions.
The managed system refers to the Power i being managed by the HMC. While the HMC is
necessary for some functions, such as configuring LPARs, it does not affect the operational

1-79
Instructor Guide
status of any partitions if something goes wrong. The partition configuration information is
not only kept on the HMC but also in nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM) on the managed system;
therefore, if the HMC were to crash, the partitions would continue to run. In fact, you can
remove the HMC, replace it with another (after contacting your service provider), and then
download the partition data from the NVRAM on the managed system and not affect the
running of the partitions.
Service errors focal point
If a hardware error occurs, that error might be reported by multiple partitions. To prevent
confusion, the HMC is also used as a service focal point for error reporting. An application
on the HMC serves as a filter for errors to ensure IBM service calls are placed only once
per actual hardware error. Alternatively, a partition configured as the service partition might
collect system errors and report them to IBM.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

1-81
Instructor Guide
Systems Director Management Console

IBM i
Hardware Appliance
Software Appliance
Software Appliance:
SDMC Management Base
Systems Director Express
Edition
IBM-provided Hardware
Non Turn Key Solution
Plus Software Appliance:

SDMC Management Base
Systems Director Express
Edition
Utilize existing x86

virtualization infrastructure
Customer provided hardware
Finite set of server options
Turn Key Solution
Figure 1-38. Systems Director Management Console
AS248.1
Notes:
Systems Director Management Console is also known as SDMC.
Functions included:
All configuration, service and management capabilities provided by the HMC and IVM
today will be supported natively in IBM Systems Director:
- At a high level SDMC provides Server Management and PowerVM Virtualization
Management
- Console Management becomes a responsibility of Director
CLI Interface
- Same functionality (for the Server Management and PowerVM Management
functions)
- Syntactically there are no differences
Aliases have been provided to offer almost complete compatibility

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
GUI interface:
- Same functionality (for the Server Management and PowerVM Management
functions)
- Completely new to comply with Director look and feel
- Some modifications to simply user navigation and tasks

1-83
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
SDMC features versus HMC

IBM i
Capability
SDMC
v
s
SDMC provides simplified Virtualization

Management (versus HMC)
SDMC can manage Blades (HMC
cannot)
SDMC is offered in a virtual appliance
(HMC is not)
HMC
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Simplified Virtualization
Blades Management
Mobility between Blades
and Servers
Dual VIOS for Blades
Active Memory
Expansion for Blades
Virtual Appliance Option
Consistent Look and
Feel
OS Management and
Monitoring
SDMC integrates Power hardware,

service, and virtualization management
into a common look and feel (Director)
40
Figure 1-39. SDMC features versus HMC
AS248.1
Notes:
The Hardware Appliance is very similar to the HMC:
Will use 7042-CR6 hardware platform as the base (with additional DASD and Memory)
Can chose to run exactly the same software (OS and all) on an x86 Hypervisor (for
example, VMware or KVM)
When would you use the Hardware Appliance?
1. Required for all mid/high-end systems (> 550 / 750)
2. Want a turn-key solution that is delivered, pre-installed, and serviced as one entity
3. Never used an x86 Hypervisor before and do not feel a pressing need to learn
When would you use the Software Appliance?
1. All of the systems are Low / Mid-range systems (550/750 and below)
2. All of my systems have static IP addresses and do not rely on an HMC for DHCP

1-85
Instructor Guide
Note
While it is possible to use DHCP on the virtual appliance, it complicates the hypervisor
network configuration and cabling.
3. Already have an x86 virtualization infrastructure that can have network connectivity to
my Power systems.
Note
It is possible (and quite easy) to create a bare-bones infrastructure needed to run the
virtual appliance, however the hardware appliance is even easier.
4. Want to take advantage of x86 virtualization backups via snapshots, quick restores,
mobility, and so on.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual, you should
play file AS248-U01-checkpoint.
2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U01-checkpoint and click
Play.
3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248-U01-checkpoint and ask the students to
call out answers to the questions on the screen.

1-87
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or False: Security is built into the operating system.

2. The OS on this system, at V7R1, is now known as which of
the following?
a. OS/400
b. i5/OS
c. IBM i
d. All of the above
3. True or False: The data administrator tells the system where
data will be stored on the disk drives.
Figure 1-40. Checkpoint (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Checkpoint solutions (1 of 2)
IBM i

The answer is True.

the following?
a.
b.
c.
d.
OS/400
i5/OS
IBM i
All of the above
The answer is IBM i.

The answer is False.

1-89
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. Which of the following are found in every partition?

a. Operating system
b. Memory
c. Disk
d. All of the above
5. True or False: Linux is supported as a guest operating
system in a partition.
6. True or False: Capacity on demand is managed by the
system console.
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

a.
b.
c.
d.
Operating system
Memory
Disk
All of the above
The answer is All of the above.

The answer is True.

system console.

1-91
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i
Having completed this unit, you should be able to:

Explain what a logical partition is and the functions it can
provide
Figure 1-42. Unit summary
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Before continuing to the next unit, stop and ask the students if there are any
additional questions before continuing.

1-93
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 2. Reference material and support

Estimated time
00:15

In this unit, you go over the reference materials and the Web sites
available that provide support for your Power i.

List the steps required to access the Information Center
Describe the support available on the Information Center
List the Web sites that support the Power i family of products
Describe the purpose served by IBM Redbooks and explain how to
access these tools
Explain how to access support for System i Navigator
Explain how to access support for IBM Systems Director

2-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Describe the purpose served by IBM Redbooks and explain
how to access these tools
AS248.1
Notes:
2-2

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Perform a Web tour for this entire unit.
First launch the Web tour by clicking the Earth icon in the Elluminate toolbar.
Then enter the URL for the next slide,
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/iseries/?topic=/rzahg/icmain.htm.
Click the icon to the right of the URL address bar to past the URL into the text chat.
Remind the students to bookmark this for easy reference.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Open a Web browser and enter the Website URL:
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/iseries/?topic=/rzahg/icmain.htm.
Encourage the students to follow along on their classroom computers if possible.

2-3
Instructor Guide
IBM i and Power i Information Center

IBM i
Figure 2-2. IBM i and Power i Information Center
AS248.1
Notes:
The Information Center is the central navigation point for documentation. It replaces the
distribution of hardcopy manuals. The URL used to access this Web page is:
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/iseries/?topic=/rzahg/icmain.htm
The first page displayed will show the versions of the operating system that are currently
supported.
Click the link that applies to your system to see the window on the next page. In this
example, we will click i 7.1.
2-4

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Recommend to students that they connect to and save the Web pages
discussed in this unit.
Students should visit these pages regularly for any new or updated information.
Click the current version number to advance to the next visual in the presentation.

2-5
Instructor Guide
IBM i Information Center

IBM i
Figure 2-3. IBM i Information Center
AS248.1
Notes:
Notice the links available in the pane on the right.
The other option is to click and expand the links on the pane in the left. You can expand
until you find your area of interest.
Lastly, you can enter keywords in the search field to locate reference materials of interest.
2-6

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Enter the URL http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/i to advance to the next visual in the
presentation.

2-7
Instructor Guide
IBM Power i homepage

IBM i
Figure 2-4. IBM Power i homepage
AS248.1
Notes:
This is the home page for IBM Power i.
http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/i
This page is a good starting point from which to navigate to get the latest Power i
information.
Links are available on this Web page to learn more about the library (Redbooks and
Information Center), support, education, and the support available for both software and
hardware.
Click the Support and services link on the left to see the Web page on the next page in
the guide.
2-8

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Click the Support and services link on the left to see this Web page to advance
to the next visual.

2-9
Instructor Guide
Support: Power i technical support

IBM i
Figure 2-5. Support: Power i technical support
AS248.1
Notes:
Click the Support and services link on the Web page on the previous page in this guide to
see this Web page.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Note all of the links on the top left.
Transition statement Enter the URL http://www.redbooks.ibm.com to advance to the
next visual in the presentation.

2-11
Instructor Guide
IBM Redbooks page

IBM i
Figure 2-6. IBM Redbooks page
AS248.1
Notes:
Redbooks are excellent supplements to IBMs standard documentation.
The URL to access this Web page is:
http://www.redbooks.ibm.com
Students should connect to this site and save it as a favorite.
Users of this site must register the first time they connect. There is no charge, but they will
need their customer numbers.
When a new user registers, they will have the opportunity to sign up for email notifications.
Notifications come whenever new Redbooks are available for your interest areas.
Notifications cover as many interest areas as they might have (no charge).

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Transition statement Enter the URL:
http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/i/software/navigator/index.html
to advance to the next visual in the presentation.

2-13
Instructor Guide
System i Navigator
IBM i
Figure 2-7. System i Navigator
AS248.1
Notes:
System i Navigator is the graphical user interface for the Power i.
To access this page, use the following URL:
http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/i/software/navigator/index.html

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Transition statement Enter the URL:
http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/software/director/editions/index.html
to advance to the next visual in the presentation.

2-15
Instructor Guide
IBM Systems Director

IBM i
Figure 2-8. IBM Systems Director
AS248.1
Notes:
The URL used to access this Web page is:
http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/software/director/editions/index.html

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

2-17
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

Describe the purpose served by IBM Redbooks and explain
how to access these tools
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

2-19
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 3. Overview of 5250 emulation and help

Estimated time
00:40

This unit describes the 5250 emulation interface and the help facilities
available.

Describe and use green screen general display types:
-
Menu
List
Entry
Information
Access and use special green screen menus:

- Information Assist
- System Request
- Operational Assist
Access and use the command entry display
Access green screen help

Accountability:
Exercise

3-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Menu
List
Entry
Information

Information Assist
System Request
Operational Assist

AS248.1
Notes:
In this unit, you will learn how to:
Sign on to the system
Select a desired menu
Run options from a menu
Return to previous menus
You will also be able to identify the four types of system displays: menu, entry, list, and
information. You will learn how to use the command entry display as well as the System
Request menu. Lastly, you will be able to select the types of displays, whether basic or
advanced, that you want to work with.
3-2

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

3-3
Instructor Guide
System displays: Overview

IBM i
IBM I Main Menu
USER
User Tasks
User Tasks - Help
1. User tasks
2. Office tasks
3. General system tasks . . .
How to Use a Menu
1 Menu
2 Entry
3 List
4 Information
2
Submit Job (SBMJOB)
Work with All Output Queues

Type options, press Enter.
Type choices, press Enter.
2=Change
Command to run . . . . .___

______________________
Opt
Queue
Library
Figure 3-2. System displays: Overview
AS248.1
Notes:
Some terminology:
Screen - The surface of the workstation or terminal on which information is displayed.
Display - A predefined grouping of information arranged in a specified way and
displayed on a screen. Displays are sometimes referred to as green screens because
of the default colors used to display them (green letters on a black background).
IBM licensed programs use only the four display types listed on the visual to display
information.
3-4

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details A word of caution: The term panel is a System Application Architecture (SAA)
term primarily used to define the layout of information which is displayed on a workstation
screen. A panel can consist of one or multiple windows. From the perspective of most
system operators, what they see on the workstation screen at any particular instant is
probably best termed a display.
A system operator sees information presented in the format defined by each of the four
display types shown on the visual. Point out to the students that the displays are
sometimes called green screens, as opposed to the graphical user interface (GUI) of
System i Navigator.
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: You should play file AS248-U03-F03 in the
multimedia library of Elluminate in place of the next visual.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You should play file AS248-U03-F03 on your instructor
PC in place of the next visual.

3-5
Instructor Guide
Menu display overview

IBM i
2
1
3
4
5
6
Figure 3-3. Menu display overview
AS248.1
Notes:
Once a user has signed on, a general menu is displayed. This is the most common type of
green screen display and the one you use most often. It allows you to easily select work
that needs to be done without having to remember and enter a long command every time
you want to do something.
The IBM i Main Menu shown in the visual is the most powerful menu provided by IBM i
operating system. From this menu, just typing the number of a menu option allows you to
access any function in the system for which you are authorized. Except for option 90, all
options on this menu cause some other menu to be displayed.
The IBM i Main menu shows the characteristics of most system menus.
1. Title
The name of the menu. The title is located in the center of the top line.
2. Menu ID
The shortened title which is shown in capital letters in the upper

left-hand corner of the first line. Menus are the only types of displays
that have IDs. You can use the menu ID to access a particular menu
quickly.
3-6

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
3. List of options
The functions which you can perform from this menu. The list of
options includes a list of numbers and descriptions. To perform a
function, enter the option number on the command line. This list of
options will vary by menu.
4. Command line
An input area which is provided for entering a menu option, number, or

command.
5. Function keys
Keyboard keys (sometimes called active function keys) that allow a

user to select keyboard or programmer functions. They are located
below the command line and differ by menu. If there are more function
keys than can be shown on a single display, a user can press F24
(more keys) to display the additional keys.
6. Message line
A blank line (or a line which contains copyright information) at the

bottom of the display. If the system needs to communicate with you, a
message will be displayed here.

3-7
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details It is recommended you show all of the displays on the visuals in this unit from
your PC attached to a Barco.
Probably the most common type of display used by system operators is the menu. The IBM
i Main Menu illustrates the structure and content of most system menus.
Each option on the IBM i Main Menu causes another menu to be displayed, and from that
menu another menu can be selected, and then another, and so on, moving down to a point
where a specific command can be run.
3-8

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
How to display a menu

IBM i
IBM i Main Menu

1. User tasks
2. Office tasks
3. General system tasks
Menu options
or
GO Command
General System Tasks

1. Jobs
2. Status
3. Messages
Messages
1. Send a message
2. Send a break message
3. Display messages
Go to Menu (GO)
Menu..............______
Library........ *LIBL
Return point...*YES
Name, generic*, *ALL

Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB...
*YES, *NO
Figure 3-4. How to display a menu
AS248.1
Notes:
There are a couple of ways you can display a menu. You can:
1. Enter menu options to walk through many menus as shown on the top half of the visual.
2. Use the GO command to go directly to a menu (this is shorter) as shown in the visual.
To use the GO command, you must know the menu ID.
If you need to display a menu but can only remember the first character or two of its
name, use the go x* form of this command, replacing the x with those beginning
characters of the menu name which you do remember. After you enter this command,
IBM i displays a list of all menus whose names begin with those characters and allows
you to select the one you want to display.
When the GO command is used to move from one menu to the next, the system
remembers the names of the last 10 menus used in the job. Using F12 lets the user
back out through those same 10 menus, one at a time.

3-9
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The GO command lets a user select the menu they want to use and proceed
directly to that menu. Options on system menus that cause another menu to be displayed
use this command behind the scenes.
If the user is looking for a command to perform a needed function but does not know how to
spell it, there are some helpful menus. Use of the Major Command Groups menu and other
forms of the GO command (go major, go cmd*, and go cmdxxx) are discussed in the
CL commands unit.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Menu navigation
IBM i
IBM i Main Menu

1. User tasks
2. Office tasks
3. General system tasks

1. Jobs
2. Status
4. Messages
Messages
1. Send a message
2. Send a break message
3. Display messages
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
F16=System Main menu
F23=Set initial menu
Figure 3-5. Menu navigation
AS248.1
Notes:
Function keys 3 and 12 (F3 and F12) are both used to back up through a stack of menus
which you have displayed; however, there is a difference in how the two work. F12 always
displays the previous menu in the stack, while F3 might skip one or more menus while
backing up.
In this example, we used option 3 on the IBM i Main Menu to display the General System
Tasks menu. We then used option 4 on the General System Tasks menu to display the
Messages menu. With the Messages menu displayed, pressing F12 returns us to the
General System Tasks menu, while pressing F3 from the Messages menu returns us to the
IBM i Main Menu.
Pressing function key 16 (F16) from either the General System Tasks or Messages menu
will cause the IBM i Main Menu to be displayed. On other menus, F16 can have a different
function.
The first menu a user sees after sign on depends on the user profile. With proper authority,
the user may change the initial sign on menu. To do this, the user should display the menu
desired at sign on and then press function key 23 (F23). Doing this permanently changes
the user profile.

3-11
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details To select a function from a menu, the user types the corresponding option
number on the command line and presses Enter. If another menu is displayed (General
System Tasks on this visual), the user can type the appropriate option number and press
Enter again. On this visual, yet another menu (Messages) is displayed. After the user has
selected and completed an option from this menu and wants to return to the immediately
preceding display (on this visual, General System Tasks), they should use F12 to perform
that function.
F3 lets the user exit from a function and return to a previous system menu, but it might not
be the menu immediately preceding the current one. On this visual, using F3 while the
Messages menu is displayed causes a return directly to the IBM i Main Menu, bypassing
the General System Tasks menu altogether.
F16 on the General System Tasks and Messages menus returns the user directly to the
IBM i Main Menu. On other menus, F16 can have a different function.
A user might be able to change their initial menu (the first one displayed when they sign on)
by using F23 even though this function key is not displayed. If they have the authority to
use this function, the menu which is displayed when F23 is pressed becomes their initial
menu. This is a permanent change to their user profile.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Menu display help (1 of 5)

IBM i
Cursor in a general area
Figure 3-6. Menu display help (1 of 5)
AS248.1
Notes:
The Help function on the Power i displays is cursor sensitive. This means that depending
on the position of the cursor on the display, the corresponding help is shown.
On this menu display, the cursor is not in the function key description area or the area
where an option is described when the F1 key or the Help key is pressed. This shows the
help about the whole display.

3-13
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty

IBM i
Cursor on options description or option number typed
AS248.1
Notes:
Either the cursor is positioned in the area where a menu option is described, in this case,
option 4, or the option is typed in the Selection or command area and F1 or Help is
pressed.
F22 (extended help) expands from showing only help text for the area selected, in this
case, help for option 4, to include all the help text available for the whole display.

3-15
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty

IBM i
Hypertext links to additional help
F1
SYSTEM
Select one of the following:

1. Jobs
2.
3.
Option 1 - Help
4.
5. Select this option to contro
6. example, you can:
7. o Work with:
8.
- Jobs
9.
- Statistics for active jobs
10. - Printer devices
- Job queues
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Jobs
Job
A job is a unit of work on the system.
Jobs run in subsystems and use system resources, such as
storage, disk and processor cycles, to perform their tasks.
Jobs can be allocated priorities and can run either
interactively or in batch.
Enter
Enter
1. Jobs
2.
3.
Subsystem
4.
5. Jobs are run in a subsystem. A subsystem creates a suitab
6. environment for a job to do its work. The system can cont
7. one or many subsystems that can be created or deleted by t
8. user.
9.
10. As the number of different types of jobs increases in the
system, more subsystems can be defined to manage those j
AS248.1
Notes:
Hypertext links together a series of help information displays by keywords or phrases.
These words or phrases are called reference phrases and are easy to spot. They are
yellow and underlined on color displays or bright and underlined on monochrome (black
and white) displays. A reference phrase indicates that a hypertext link to additional help
information is available.
You can move through hypertext links by positioning the cursor on a hypertext link and
pressing the Enter key or double-clicking. If you get lost while using hypertext, do not
worry. You can press F6 (Viewed Topics) from any of the help displays to view all of the
hypertext displays in the order in which you viewed them, or you can use F12 to back up
through the topics one-by-one.

3-17
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details In this hypertext example, a user presses Help while the cursor is positioned on
the General System Tasks title line. As the user reads the help information that is
displayed, they run into a word they are not familiar with: job. This word happens to be
underlined (which mean it is a hypertext link), therefore, they move the cursor under the
word job and press Enter. More help information is displayed which explains what a job is.
As they read about a job, they run across another word they do not understand:
subsystem. This also happens to be underlined. They move the cursor under the word
subsystem and press Enter. Help information explaining what a subsystem is appears.
If you get lost while using hypertext, do not worry. You can use F6 (Viewed Topics) to view
a window of all hypertext information topics viewed in the order you viewed them, or you
can use F12 to back up through the topics one-by-one.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty

IBM i
Cursor in Function Keys area
AS248.1
Notes:
The cursor is positioned in the area where the function keys are described, and F1 or Help
is pressed.

3-19
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty

IBM i
Cursor in Selection or command area where DSPLIB typed
AS248.1
Notes:
A command, in this case DSPLIB, is typed in the Selection or command area, and F1 or
Help is pressed.

3-21
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Explain the steps detailed in the student notes on this page then perform the following.
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class. You should play file AS248-U03-F10 in the
multimedia library of Elluminate to allow the students to practice navigating the help
menus.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You should play file AS248-U03-F10 on your PC from in
the multimedia library of Elluminate to allow the students to practice navigating the help
menus. Prompt the students for each step in the exercise.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Entry display overview

IBM i
2
3
5
6
Figure 3-11. Entry display overview
AS248.1
Notes:
Entry displays present information and prompts or allow a user to enter new information.
The Submit Job (SBMJOB) display shows the characteristics of entry displays:
1. Title
The name of the entry display (located in the center of the top line).
2. Default value
Value that the system assumes if no other value is entered into the
field. The first time you use an entry display, the system fills in most of
the fields with default values.
3. Blank field
Field into which you might have to enter a value. Some blank fields
can be skipped. The system uses a default value.
4. Choices
Valid values that you can enter into the field.
5. Function keys
Keyboard keys that allow a user to select keyboard or programmer

functions. These are sometimes called active function keys. They are
located at the bottom of the display and differ by display.

3-23
Instructor Guide
6. Message line
Line at the bottom of the display which normally is blank or contains

copyright information. If the system needs to communicate with a user,
a message is displayed on this line.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details An entry display allows the user to view and change existing data or enter new
data.
Applications might have displays similar to this one. Each value to be entered has prompts,
an input area, and some possible choices listed. The descriptions of any function keys
available are also shown at the bottom of the entry display.
Point out the underlines on the display. Underlines have special meaning on system
displays. All underlined fields are input capable; that is, you can type new information into a
blank, underlined field. If information has been entered in an underlined field, you can
change it.

3-25
Instructor Guide
Entry display help (1 of 2)

IBM i
Position
cursor,
press Help.
In addition to field help, you can get:

Extended help
Message help
Figure 3-12. Entry display help (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
To obtain help information for a field, position the cursor on a field (the field can be blank or
filled in) and press Help. Help information about the field is displayed.
On this display, an attempt was made to execute the DSPJOB command which resulted in
the error message:
*FILE not valid for parameter OPTION.
From this point, any of the online help information methods shown on the visual can be
used to help solve the error.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details If a user has requested prompting for a command but has questions about the
command or about one or more parameters, the Help key can be of assistance by
providing:
1. General command information
2. Detailed parameter information
3. Message help
4. Entry to the search index function known as InfoSeeker
In this visual, the greater than symbol (>) to the left of four parameters indicates that IBM i
has recognized that these parameters no longer contain their system default values. The
greater than symbol (>) and the fact that those parameter values are in uppercase (not to
mention the error message at the bottom of the display) are evidence that either Enter or a
function key has been pressed.
There is an error with the OPTION parameter. The cause of this error might be obvious to
the students, but, if not, what could they do?
If the cursor is positioned on the OPTION parameter and Help is pressed, detailed help
information describing this specific parameter is displayed.
If F2 (Extended help) is pressed on the Option (OPTION) - Help display, additional help
information for the option is displayed. If F11 (InfoSeeker) is pressed on the Option
(OPTION) - Help display, InfoSeeker is displayed. If the cursor is positioned on the error
message at the bottom of the display and Help is pressed, additional help information for
the message is displayed.

3-27
Instructor Guide
Entry display help (2 of 2)

IBM i
Cursor in an entry field
Figure 3-13. Entry display help (2 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
This is the help display that results when the cursor is positioned in the area shown in the
previous visual and F1 or Help is pressed.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

3-29
Instructor Guide
List display overview

IBM i
4
5
6
Figure 3-14. List display overview
AS248.1
Notes:
A list display is a list of objects (for example, jobs, libraries, files, or output queues) which is
requested by a user, gathered from within the system, and displayed in lists (or columns).
The Work with All Output Queues display is an example of a list display. Most work with
commands display a list display.
A list display has the following characteristics:
1. Title
Name of the list display (located in the center of the top line).
2. List
Column of information which is identified by a short title. For example,

there are five columns on this display (Queue, Library, Files, Writer,
and Status).
3. Input field
Field into which you can enter one of the options shown at the top of
the list display. Options vary depending on the list display and your
user authority.
4. Command line
Blank line which is usually provided for entering a menu option,

number, or a command.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
5. Function keys

functions.
6. Message line
Normally, a blank line or a line which contains copyright information. If

the system needs to communicate with a user, a message will be
displayed on this line.
To perform one of the options listed on the display (for example, 2 = Change or 4 = Delete),
just type the associated option number (for example, 2 or 4) in the Opt column along the
left-hand side of the display next to the list element (or elements) on which you want to
perform the function. Different options can be specified for different elements.
If More... is displayed in the lower right-hand corner, there are more list elements
available than can be displayed on one display. Use the Page Down/Up (or Roll Up/Down)
keys to view these additional list elements.

3-31
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Most of the work with commands use a list display. Options are shown at the top
of the display and function key descriptions at the bottom. There is also a command line.
Options are entered at the left side of the display in the Opt column. A system operator
uses this type of display often when working with jobs and spooled output.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
List display help: Opt column versus F20

(enlarge)
IBM i
Figure 3-15. List display help: Opt column versus F20 (enlarge)
AS248.1
Notes:
This help display shows up when the cursor is positioned in the Opt column of a list and F1
or Help is pressed.
The screen capture in the lower right shows how the screen can be enlarged using F20
(Enlarge). If USROPT (*HLPFULL) is specified in a users profile, help initially appears in
full-screen format.

3-33
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Information display overview

IBM i
Figure 3-16. Information display overview
AS248.1
Notes:
Click the Help key from most displays and you see a typical information display.
Information displays simply display information; the information cannot be changed, and
new information cannot be added.
The Work with All Output Queues - Help display shows the characteristics of an information
display:
1. Title
Name of the information display (located in the center of the top line.
2. Information
Information you requested from the system. Sometimes the

information appears in narrative form, and other times it appears in
columns.
3. Function keys

functions. These are sometimes called active function keys. They are
located at the bottom of the information display and differ by display.
There can be one or two lines of active function keys.

3-35
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Information displays present information but do not allow it to be changed or any
new information to be entered. Generally, the only keys that can be used when an
information display is shown are functions keys, roll keys, or Help and Enter keys.
The information display shown in this visual is used to display online help text.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Additional help: Information Assistant Options

menu
IBM i
Option 10 from the IBM i main menu
F13 from the Help display
GO INFO
Figure 3-17. Additional help: Information Assistant Options menu
AS248.1
Notes:
To display the Information Assistant Options menu, enter option 10 from the IBM i Main
Menu, press F13 from most help menus, or type the GO INFO command on a command
line.

3-37
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Use the Information Assistant Options menu to do the following:
1. Where do I look for information?
Select option 1 to find out how to use the Softcopy Library to find online books, which
are good if you are getting started on the Power i system. Also select option 1 to learn
how to find and order printed publications and where to look on the Internet for the latest
Power i information.
2. How can I comment on information?
Select option 2 to learn how to comment on all types of Power i information.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Information Assistant option 1:

Where Do I Look for Information?
IBM i
Figure 3-18. Information Assistant option 1:Where Do I Look for Information?
AS248.1
Notes:
This display contains links to help text about reference material.

3-39
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Information Assistant option 2:

How Can I Comment On Information?
IBM i
Figure 3-19. Information Assistant option 2:How Can I Comment On Information?
AS248.1
Notes:
This visual explains how to send your feedback to IBM.

3-41
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Using the System Request panel group

IBM i
Shift (or Alt) + Sys Req

Enter
Figure 3-20. Using the System Request panel group
AS248.1
Notes:
The key sequence to call up this display is:
Shift (or Alt) + Sys Req + Enter
A special menu you might find helpful is the System Request menu.
Look at option 1 (Display sign on for secondary job). This option allows you to suspend
whatever you are doing, start an entirely new job, and then return to exactly where you
were in your initial job when required.

3-43
Instructor Guide
Options 10 to 14 perform the following functions:

Option 10
Suspend the job at the current system and

transfer back to the previous system (the
source or client system for the current
system).
Transfer back to the home system (the first
system on which you entered the
pass-through command or the TELNET
command).
Transfer back to the alternative interactive
job on the previous system.
Transfer back to the alternative interactive
job on the home system.
Option 13
Option 11
Option 14

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The System Request function allows a user who is already signed on and
running one job at a workstation (called a primary job) to start a secondary interactive job at
the same workstation. This function allows the user to interrupt one job (a system operator
function), start a second job (a business application), and return to the first without ending
either job.

3-45
Instructor Guide
Accessing the System Request panel group

IBM i
Non-intelligent workstations:
Shift + Sys Req
Enter
PCs attached using personal communications:

Actions
Display pop-up keypad
SysRq
Figure 3-21. Accessing the System Request panel group
AS248.1
Notes:
For PCs attached through personal communications, choose Actions from the menu bar,
then Display pop-up keypad, and click SysRq.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

3-47
Instructor Guide
Question
IBM i
What are some possible scenarios where you could use the
System Request function?
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Ask the students to use the type text on screen
tool to describe briefly explain how they would use the system request function.
three students to briefly explain how they would use the system request function.

3-49
Instructor Guide
TFRSECJOB command or system request opt 1

IBM i
Two interactive jobs

Job 1
Job 2
User
application
Operating
the system
General Systems Tasks
1 Shift (or Alt) + Sys Req
Application Menu
1.Jobs
2.Status
2 Enter
Figure 3-23. TFRSECJOB command or system request opt 1
AS248.1
Notes:
CL command TFRSECJOB or option 1 (Display sign on for secondary job) on the System
Request menu allows a user to easily switch back and forth between two jobs at one
workstation. This is a great productivity aid; however, if the user is performing the same or
similar functions in both jobs, it can be difficult to remember which job they are in at the
time.
To assist a user in determining which job they are in, they can use the Display Work Station
User (DSPWSUSR) command. This command lists all jobs in the system currently active or
suspended at the display station where the command is entered and shows which is active.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details A user can use CL command TFRSECJOB or option 1 to go back and forth
between two jobs. Either job can be ended first. The secondary job can use the same user
profile as the primary job or a different one. A maximum of two jobs can be started at a
workstation using this facility.
Student notes reference the Display Work Station User (DSPWSUSR) command. If you
have not done so already, try running this command with multiple jobs active at a single
workstation to show the students the information that the DSPWSUSR command displays.

3-51
Instructor Guide
F9: Retrieve previous command

IBM i
MAIN
IBM I Main menu
1. User tasks
MAIN
2. Office tasks
Selection or command
===> addlible ol29lib
F3=Exit F4=Prompt F
Enter
IBM I Main menu
1. User tasks
2. Office tasks
===>________________________________
F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve
Library OL29LIB added to library list.
MAIN
IBM I Main menu
1. User tasks
2. Office tasks
F9
===> addlible ol29lib
_____________________________________
Figure 3-24. F9: Retrieve previous command
AS248.1
Notes:
While using any system menu, a user can retrieve previously entered commands by using
F9. IBM i remembers all the commands the user entered since signing on.
The first time the user presses F9, the last command the user entered is retrieved. Each
subsequent time the user presses F9 (without pressing Enter or one of the supported
function keys) the next older command is retrieved.
Once the correct command is displayed, that command can be optionally modified and
then run again by pressing Enter. This can reduce much of the need to re-enter
commands.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

3-53
Instructor Guide
Using the Command Entry display

IBM i
Call QCMD + Enter
Figure 3-25. Using the Command Entry display
AS248.1
Notes:
The Command Entry display is an optional entry display for commands.
To access this display, type call qcmd on a command line, and press Enter.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Another display used to enter commands is the Command Entry display. It is
accessed by calling the program QCMD (CALL QCMD). This display can be used as an
alternative to entering menu options or commands on a menu command line; however, its
true value is shown on the next visual.

3-55
Instructor Guide
Retrieve a prior command

IBM i
1 Press F10.
Command Entry
All previous commands and messages:
>_dsplibl
> dspjob
I520DVL2
Request level:
4
Type command, press Enter.

===> _______________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F9=Retrieve
F10=Exclude detailed messages
2 Position cursor on command to be retrieved, and press F9.

Command Entry
All previous commands and messages:
>_dsplibl
> dspjob
I520DVL2
Request level:
4
Type command, press Enter.

===> dsplibl ________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F9=Retrieve
F10=Exclude detailed messages
Figure 3-26. Retrieve a prior command
AS248.1
Notes:
From the Command Entry display a user can retrieve any command entered since signing
on. To do this:
Press F10 (Exclude detailed messages). All of the commands previously entered since
signing on are displayed.
Position the cursor on the command to be retrieved, and press F9 (Retrieve).

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details F9 can be used on the Command Entry display to directly retrieve any command
entered since a user signed on. A user can press F10 to view all of the commands that
have been entered since signing on; then, the user should position the cursor on the
command to be retrieved and press F9 once, not multiple times, as on a menu. This
selective retrieve facility simplifies operations which require repetition of several different
commands in the same sequence.
If the command that is needed does not appear in the top portion of the display, the
operator can scroll backward to find it.
How can you make working with system functions easier while you gain operational
experience? Answer: Operational Assistant.

3-57
Instructor Guide
Operational Assistant
IBM i
OA
For system operator, administrator, user
Tasks simplified:
Managing printer output

Controlling jobs
Handling messages
Changing password
Scheduling:
Automatic power off and on
Automatic disk cleanup
System management:
System backup
Device control
User enrollment
Figure 3-27. Operational Assistant
AS248.1
Notes:
Operational Assistant (OA) provides easy access to the most commonly performed
functions.
It is provided free of charge with IBM i and is available to all users on all systems.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Make sure the students understand that OA does not provide any function that
cannot be performed by way of a standard system menu option or a CL command.
OA simply provides a user-friendly interface to the more common system functions, such
as managing printer output, controlling jobs and handling messages, scheduling and
performing power on and off functions, disk cleanup tasks, managing system backup,
controlling devices, and enrolling new users on a Power i system.
Most of the function of OA can be used without ever disrupting the Operational Assistant
menu. This type of access can be provided by an installation's programming staff through
direct calls to OA programs or, more commonly, through a feature called basic assistance
level.

3-59
Instructor Guide
Operational Assistant menu

IBM i
Figure 3-28. Operational Assistant menu
AS248.1
Notes:
The OA functions can be accessed by displaying the Operational Assistant Menu. To
display this menu, enter the go assist command on any command line.
IBM i tailors this menu based on the security class of the user accessing the menu.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The Operational Assistant Menu provides the most common method of access
to OA.
When displayed, this menu is automatically tailored by IBM i based on the class of the
user accessing OA.

3-61
Instructor Guide
Assistance levels
IBM i
Basic
Displays that provide the most assistance

Supports the more common user and operator tasks
Does not use computer terminology
Intermediate
Displays that support all system tasks

Uses computer terminology
Complex tasks can be done using this level
Advanced
Same type of displays as intermediate assistance level

Displays contain as many lines of information as possible
Function keys and options not displayed
Figure 3-29. Assistance levels
AS248.1
Notes:
The system allows you to choose the amount of assistance you want to receive when you
are interacting with the system. The various degrees of assistance are referred to as
assistance levels. There are three assistance levels: basic, intermediate, and advanced.
The level of assistance that a user chooses determines the number and complexity of the
displays they see. To select the assistance level you want, simply press F21 (Select
assistance level) from a display. Not all assistance levels are available from all displays.
As a system operator, many of the functions you perform require the use of the
intermediate assistance level, and as you become more familiar with system functions, you
might even decide to use the advanced level.
This course is designed around the intermediate assistance level. The default assistance
level shipped is *BASIC and is stored in the assistance level (QASTLVL) system value.
Where the displays or system actions are significantly different between basic and
intermediate levels, basic interface displays are also discussed.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
The commands below, most of which are discussed later in this course, support the basic
assistance level. To select the basic assistance level from these command displays, press
F21.
DSPMSG: Display messages

WRKMSG: Work with messages
WRKUSRJOB: Work with user jobs
WRKSPLF: Work with spooled files
WRKWTR: Work with writers
WRKCFGSTS: Work with configuration status
DSPSYSSTS: Display system status
WRKUSRPRF: Work with user profiles

3-63
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details As described on this visual, IBM i provides three different levels of assistance for
interfacing to system functions. The primary differences between the levels are:
The language used
The complexity of the tasks which can be performed
The amount of descriptive information contained on system displays
Not all assistance levels are available with all functions.
Many of the functions performed by a system operator require the use of the intermediate
assistance level. As the students become more familiar with system displays, they might
even decide to use the advanced level.
This course is designed around the intermediate assistance level. Where the displays or
system actions are significantly different between basic and intermediate levels, basic
assistance level displays are also discussed.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Your choice: Basic or intermediate

IBM i
* BASIC
OR
* INTERMED
Figure 3-30. Your choice: Basic or intermediate
AS248.1
Notes:
These two displays present identical information, but note the difference in format and
wording between the two. Most commands which support basic assistance level:
Allow you to use F21 to toggle between basic and intermediate level
Remember the level you request each time you use the command
Use that same level when you use the command again.
The default assistance level for a Power is set with a system value by the system
administrator.

3-65
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details In class, the students use the intermediate assistance level, but on their own
system the choice of assistance level is left up to the individual.
Every student should use the one which allows them to most efficiently perform their job.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
User assistance level

IBM i
Menu: F21 (where available):

Changes the assistance level for the individual session
Not available from System i Navigator
CL command
Changes user profile:
F11 - Keywords for command
CHGPRF ASTLVL(*BASIC, *INTERMED, or *ADVANCED)
Changes the assistance level for the individual user
System value QASTLVL

Sets the default assistance level for system
Figure 3-31. User assistance level
AS248.1
Notes:

3-67
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Exercise
IBM i
Refer to Exercise Guide - Appendix A

Instructor will provide the information listed; this data is used
to perform the exercises.
Exercise: Using the keyboard and systems displays
Inform instructor when you have completed

your exercise.
Figure 3-32. Exercise
AS248.1
Notes:
Fill in the information in Appendix A of the Exercises Guide. This information will be
provided by the instructor. Use the information on this worksheet to perform the exercises.

3-69
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Be aware that in order to perform the lab exercise, three of the students will use the
Web server created by the instructor as part of lab setup (Appendix B or C).
- Tell students to choose a Web server based on what is available to them in their
work environment.
- If there is no preference, instruct a student to use the Web server Appendix C
option.
- The greater the number of students using the Web server, the better it should
perform.
Optionally, the students can choose to run the exercises in both Appendix B and
Appendix C. The lab set up program has created a separate user ID that has
QSECOFR authority required to run these labs. The user ID is AS24Bxx and the
password is AS24PWD. The profile has been created as disabled with the password
expired. The instructor must enable this profile for the student in order to run this one
lab. Once students have completed the exercises in Appendix B and C, the instructor
must disable the profile so that is not used by the student for any other exercises.
Using the WRKOBJOWN command, verify that this profile was not used by a sneaky
student to create a profile with more authority than what they are supposed to have for
this class.
Remind students that if they create their own server, they should also follow the steps to
delete all of their user-created Web objects at the end of the last class at the end of the
week.
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual you should
Play.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or False: Any menu can be accessed on the system

with the GO command.
2. Which function key is used to access Help?
a.
b.
c.
d.
F1
F3
F9
F12
3. Which function key is used to retrieve a command that was

previously entered?
a.
b.
c.
d.
F1
F3
F9
F12
AS248.1
Notes:

3-71
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

The answer is True.

a. F1
b. F3
c. F9
d. F12
The answer is F1.

previously entered?
a. F1
b. F3
c. F9
d. F12
The answer is F9.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. True or False: The default assistance level for a system is set

with a system value by the system administrator.
5. True or False: The Operational Assistant menu will support
functions performed by a user, a system operator or by a
system administrator?
6. True or False: The command entry display will show what
commands have been entered since you signed on to the
system.
AS248.1
Notes:

3-73
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

The answer is True.

The answer is True.

system.
The answer is True.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

Menu
List
Entry
Information

Information Assist
System Request
Operational Assist

AS248.1
Notes:

3-75
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 4. Overview of System i Navigator

Estimated time
00:20

This unit describes the System i Navigator graphical user interface
(GUI). We will also discuss the help facilities available for this
interface.

Explain how you get System i Navigator
List the functions supported by System i Navigator
List the functions that can only be performed using Navigator
Describe the Navigator main panel
Describe the functions performed by the taskpad
Explain how to customize what Navigator will display
Describe how to access the different help support that is available
for this interface

Accountability:
Exercise

4-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Describe the functions performed by the task pad
Describe how to access the different help support that is
available for this interface
AS248.1
Notes:
4-2

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details System i Navigator continues to be enhanced in each release; however, it still
does not contain all of the functions available with green screens, such as creating new
devices (CRTDEVTAP).

4-3
Instructor Guide
What is System i Access for Windows?

IBM i
System i Access for Windows 5770-XE1

Integrate with Windows
(32-bit and 64-bit) interface
Manage network resources using:
My Computer
Windows Explorer
Network Neighborhood
Create new connections

Right mouse button
Access System i Access programs and functions using:

Taskbar, Online Help, Control Panel
www-03.ibm.com/systems/i/software/access/windows/index.html
Figure 4-2. What is System i Access for Windows?
AS248.1
Notes:
4-4

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

4-5
Instructor Guide
What you can do with System i Access for

Windows?
IBM i
System i Access for Windows

provides support for:
Emulation services:
5250 display station emulation
Printer emulation
File server
Database server
ODBC and OLE
System i Navigator
Figure 4-3. What you can do with System i Access for Windows?
AS248.1
Notes:
4-6

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

4-7
Instructor Guide
What is Navigator?
IBM i
System i Navigator is an easy-to-use GUI for managing the

system
Typical users are system administrators and system operators
It is fully integrated into the Windows environment:
Windows skills can be used to administer a Power i
End users do not have to learn green screen interface
Some functions can only be performed using this GUI:

DNS setup
Graphical performance
Graphical database management tools
Navigator is continually being enhanced

Figure 4-4. What is Navigator?
AS248.1
Notes:
Navigator is the graphical user interface (GUI) for managing the system. It simplifies
operations by combining multiple tasks and minimizing the number of options needed to
complete a task. It also allows multiple environments to be managed from one application
window.
Navigator is fully integrated into Windows. This means that system administrators and
system operators who are familiar with Windows can handle IBM i tasks the same way as
they would Windows tasks. For example, they can drag and drop a user onto a group to
add the user to that group, use context menus, the File option on the menu bar, and the
properties function to display or change information. With System i Navigator, there is little
need to learn Power i system displays and CL commands.
Some Power i functions can be performed only from System i Navigator; they cannot be
performed from IBM i green screens. For example, DNS server setup (or configuration),
which is part of network setup, and graphical performance, which displays real-time
performance graphs of selected metrics, can be performed only from Navigator. Navigator
is continually being enhanced.
4-8

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Navigator is an optionally installed component of Client Access for Windows.
Every Power i Power is shipped with System i Navigator, which does not require a Client
Access for Windows license.
Navigator was first shipped with V3R1M1 of Client Access for Windows 95. With each
release of Client Access, Navigator has been enhanced.
Navigator continues to be enhanced. Some IBM i functions are added to Navigator but are
not added to the green screens. Other functions, which currently can be performed from
the green screens, will probably never be added to Navigator.

4-9
Instructor Guide
What can you do with Navigator?

IBM i
Navigator allows you to:

Manage:
Messages
Printer output
Printers
User jobs
System jobs
Subsystems
Memory pools
Secure your network

Work with database records
Connect your network
Limit application availability
Manage multiple systems with Management Central
Figure 4-5. What can you do with Navigator?
AS248.1
Notes:
Navigator provides a powerful suite of functions to handle your system administration
tasks.
The Management Central technology, which is an integral part of Navigator, allows you to
manage tasks across one or more servers simultaneously. You can simplify your system
management with task scheduling, real-time performance monitoring, managing fixes or
program temporary fixes (PTFs), distributing objects, managing users and groups, running
commands from a central system, and so on.
You can use Navigator to access your LPAR information, change LPAR configuration,
manage security, and change processing resources without requiring a system restart.
Navigator has several integrated features that help build a strong defense against the
security risks you might encounter in a the network. Use Navigator to configure everything
from your basic system security policy to secure end-to-end VPN connections and to
implement filter rules, address translation, Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), enterprise identity
mapping, and so on.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
You can perform many of your database tasks using Navigator. These tasks include
creating and maintaining database objects, inserting or changing data, monitoring and
analyzing query performance, and creating a map of your database.
You can use the network component of Navigator to configure and manage network
communications on your server. You can find wizards to easily configure the interfaces,
routes, and servers that are necessary for network communications. You can verify
connectivity by using the PING and trace route utilities.
System jobs are created by the operating system to control system resources and perform
system functions. System jobs run when the Power i server starts, without user input.
These jobs perform a variety of tasks, from starting the operating system to starting and
ending subsystems and to scheduling jobs.
Application Administration allows administrators to limit or grant access to functions,
including several Navigator functions, and to other applications for the users and groups on
a specific Power i server. Administrators can also centrally manage many of the properties
used by IBM Power i Access for Windows clients and use the advanced Application
Administration settings to centrally control environment, password, connection, service,
and language settings.

4-11
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: You should play flash file AS248-U04-F06 in
place of the next slide for the students to explore the sections of the System i Navigator
screen. You can also choose to perform an application share.
To perform an application share:
1. Select the share applications or Desktop icon in the Elluminate toolbar which looks like
a monitor with a green arrow inside it.
2. Once the application share window opens select the application you want to share from
the list and select OK.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Starting with the next visual, it is recommended you show
a live demo of all of the screen shots on the visuals in this unit from your PC.
To display the System i Navigator main window, do one of the following:
1. Double left-click the System i Navigator icon on the Desktop.
2. Double left-click the System i Navigator icon in the IBM Power i Access for Windows
folder.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Navigator main panel

IBM i
1
2
6
8
Figure 4-6. Navigator main panel
AS248.1
Notes:
There are a number of ways to open the Navigator main window. The most common is to
double-click the System i Navigator icon on the Desktop.
Once you have signed on, the Navigator main window shown on the visual appears. From
this window, you can use any system functions to which you have been granted access by
clicking the function icon.
Following is an explanation of the Navigator main window:
1. System i Navigator icon
Located in the top corner of the window.
2. Menu bar
Contains the available options for this window. To perform

an option, click it. The functions available for the displayed
window will appear in a drop-down box.
3. Toolbar
The available tools for this window are represented by smart

icons. Not all tools are available for all windows. Placing
your mouse cursor over a smart icon brings up the name of
the tool. To open a tool, click it.

4-13
Instructor Guide
4. Left pane
Contains the Management Central icon and the My

Connections icon. Under that is an icon for each Power i
system configured on the workstation. Under each Power
icon are icons representing the System i Navigator functions
available for that system.
5. Right pane
If a user clicks a System i Navigator icon in the left pane, the

options for this function are displayed in the right pane.
Optionally, the icon can be right-clicked and the Explore
option selected.
6. Taskpad
Shows the tasks available for the element selected in the left
pane of the window. The taskpad changes to show the
shortcuts available for each element selected in the left
pane.
7. My taskpad
The left part of the taskpad, also known as My taskpad, can

be customized by adding your favorite tasks from the right
pane. This part of the task does not change when different
elements are selected in the left pane.
8. Status bar
Shows the status of the action being performed.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

4-15
Instructor Guide
Main panel: Left pane

IBM i
Figure 4-7. Main panel: Left pane
AS248.1
Notes:
Clicking the plus sign (+) in the box beside My Connections in the left pane (also called
expanding My Connections) causes nested listed items for each system configured for the
workstation to appear. Expanding a system brings up the System i Navigator functions you
can work with on this system. The available functions depend on:
The version and release of the operating system (IBM i) on the Power i
The version and release of Power i Access on the Power i
Whether the user has been granted access to the functions by the system administrator
Expanding one of the functions causes one or more functions in the nested list below it to
appear. In this example, expanding Basic Operations shows the functions Messages,
Printer Output, Printers, and Jobs.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Make sure the students understand that the available functions depend on what
version and release of IBM i and Power i Access is installed on the system and on whether
the user has been authorized to use the functions. If more than one system has been
configured for a workstation, potentially different System i Navigator functions can be
displayed for each system.

4-17
Instructor Guide
Main panel: Right pane

IBM i
Figure 4-8. Main panel: Right pane
AS248.1
Notes:
Clicking any function in the left pane causes objects associated with that branch in the
function tree to appear in the right pane.
In this example, the users clicked the system and signed on to the system; then the user
clicked and expanded Work Management, which will show the different sub-branches on
the function tree. Lastly, the user clicked the Active Jobs branch in the left pane to show
its associated data in the right pane.
Note
All of the navigation described in lectures and labs will be shown in an abbreviated format.
The following abbreviation will be shown as opposed to the long formatted description in
the previous paragraph.
Click System > Work management > Active jobs

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

4-19
Instructor Guide
Main panel: Taskpad

IBM i
Figure 4-9. Main panel: Taskpad
AS248.1
Notes:
The System i Navigator taskpad, which is the lower right pane, serves as a quick launching
point for tasks that are performed frequently. You can launch a task from the taskpad by
clicking it.
The tasks shown in the taskpad are those related to the System i Navigator function that
you are currently working with. In the visual, two examples of the taskpad are shown.
The example on the top is what you see when you click on the system branch.
The example on the bottom is what you see when you click Work Management.
The lower right pane shows the customized taskpad that includes all of your frequently
used tasks, no matter which function they are associated with.
To customize your taskpad:
1. Expand the folder that you want to work with. The taskpad updates when you change
folders.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
2. When a task that you want to add to your customized taskpad is shown in the taskpad,
right-click it and select Add to My Tasks.
3. To add more than one task from a function, right-click anywhere in the taskpad and
select Customize Taskpad. You can select multiple tasks and change the order in
which they appear.
4. Once you have selected your tasks, you can choose to display only the tasks in your
customized taskpad. On the Customize Taskpad dialog, select the View tab, and then
select Display My Tasks only.

4-21
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Object properties
IBM i
Figure 4-10. Object properties
AS248.1
Notes:
To see the properties of an item in the right pane, perform the following:
Expand File Systems > Integrate file system > QSYS.LIB. Locate and click your library.
Locate your object in the right pane, and either double-click the item name or right-click it
and select Properties.

4-23
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Object context menu

IBM i
Figure 4-11. Object context menu
AS248.1
Notes:
Right-clicking an item brings up a context menu. The options in the menu depend on the
type of object. Some options on the pop-up menu might even include a sub-menu. When
you click or select User Objects, it will show a sub-menu with more options.

4-25
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
View drop-down menu

IBM i
Figure 4-12. View drop-down menu
AS248.1
Notes:
Not only can you choose which elements of the GUI window you want to see (Status Bar,
Taskpad), you can also choose how you want to display the information in the right pane
(Small or Large Icons, Details).
For some views in the right pane, you can customize what is displayed and how much is
displayed. The Customize this View drop-down menu is shown on the next visual.

4-27
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Customize this View dialogs

IBM i
Figure 4-13. Customize this View dialogs
AS248.1
Notes:
You can also choose Customize this View from the View drop-down menu. There are two
things that can be customized.
The Include dialog is used to control what information is displayed in the right panel. For
example, when you click Messages this would allow you to specify whose messages
you want to see.
The Columns dialog is used to control what columns of information are displayed in the
right panel.
For example, once you clicked Messages and told it whose messages to display, this
options allows you to specify which columns of information to display.
- For every function that you click there will be some columns that are shown as a
default, but there might be additional columns of information that can be displayed.
- This is equivalent to the emulation session when you press the F11 key to see
additional columns of information.

4-29
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Help drop-down menu

IBM i
Figure 4-14. Help drop-down menu
AS248.1
Notes:
The Help drop-down menu is always available.
This drop-down menu provides an option for Help topics, which is displayed on the next
page, and it also provides an option to access the Power i Information Center.

4-31
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Help Topics
IBM i
Figure 4-15. Help Topics
AS248.1
Notes:
This is displayed when you click Help Topics on the Help drop-down menu.
You can use this to answer questions or to learn how to perform functions when using
System i Navigator.

4-33
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Be aware that the Help interface has been changed at V5R4 and V6R1.
This is an excellent learning tool that you can recommend to the students to help them
learn Navigator.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Direct help button

IBM i
Figure 4-16. Direct help button
AS248.1
Notes:
Direct help for specific System i Navigator functions is available through the Help button on
many System i Navigator panels. Left-clicking Help displays the available help. The visual
shows the help available for creating a new user.

4-35
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Help icon
IBM i
Figure 4-17. Help icon
AS248.1
Notes:
This visual shows another form of Help. In some panels, a question mark (?) is shown in
the top right corner. Clicking the question mark (?) causes the mouse pointer to change to
a help cursor. Moving the Help cursor to any area of the window with which you need help
and clicking causes specific Help information for that part of the window to appear. In this
visual, the small window which has the text that begins Lists the user name. . . is
just such help.

4-37
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Exercise
IBM i

Instructor will provide the information listed; this data is used
to perform the lab exercises.
Exercise: System i Navigator Overview

your exercise.
AS248.1
Notes:
Fill in the information in Appendix A of the Exercises Guide. This information will be
provided by the instructor. Use the information on this worksheet for performing the
exercises.

4-39
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or False: System i Navigator does not require any

additional software to be installed on the PC.
2. System i Navigator allows you to manage which of the
following?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Messages
Jobs
Security
All of the above
3. True or False: Help is available for the functions performed

with the System i Navigator.
AS248.1
Notes:

4-41
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i


following?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Messages
Jobs
Security
All of the above

The answer is True.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. True or False: System i Navigator is fully integrated into

Windows.
5. Which of the following customize options will allow you to
control what is displayed in the right pane when you click on
a function?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Sort
Include
Columns
Auto refresh
6. True or False: System i Access for windows is available in

32-bit or 64-bit.
AS248.1
Notes:

4-43
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

Windows.
The answer is True.

a function?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Sort
Include
Columns
Auto refresh
The answers are Include and Columns.

32-bit or 64-bit.
The answer is True.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

Describe the functions performed by the task pad
Describe how to access the different help support that is
available for this interface
AS248.1
Notes:

4-45
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 5. Overview of Systems Director Navigator

for IBM i
Estimated time
00:20

This unit describes the System i Navigator for IBM i GUI.

Describe Systems Director Navigator and how to install it on the
system
List what functions are and are not included with this GUI
Explain which jobs need to be active on the system to support this
GUI
Explain the steps to start this GUI and sign on
Explain how to access the tasks available in this GUI
Explain how to set up which pages open at startup
Explain how to customize which tasks and functions a user can
access

Exercise
Unit 5. Overview of Systems Director Navigator for IBM i

5-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Describe Systems Director Navigator and how to install it on
the system
Explain which jobs need to be active on the system to support
this GUI
Explain how to customize which tasks and functions a user
can access
AS248.1
Notes:
5-2

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details System i Navigator continues to be enhanced in each release.

5-3
Instructor Guide
5-4

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
5.1. What is it and how does it work

Instructor topic introduction
What students will do
How students will do it
What students will learn
How this will help students on their job

5-5
Instructor Guide
What is Systems Director Navigator for IBM i?

IBM i
It is the strategic management console for i.

It is the Web-based console included in IBM i starting with
V6R1.
It uses the same Integrated Solutions Console (ISC)
framework as the Web-based IBM Systems Director.
It is considered a level one console used to manage a
POWER i server. Starting at V7R1 you can specify which
server to access.
It contains all the currently Web-enabled functions of System i
Navigator (over 300 tasks).
Figure 5-2. What is Systems Director Navigator for IBM i?
AS248.1
Notes:
IBM Director manages a limited set of IBM i functions. It ships with an order for IBM i. IBM
Director provides some extension support for Virtualization Manager, IBM Active Energy
Manager, and Electronic Service Agent.
IBM Systems Director Navigator means the following:
Director means it is progressing towards director interfaces and functionality.
Navigator means it comes from System i Navigator heritage.
It is included as part of IBM i.
IBM Systems Director Navigator runs in the IBM i Integrated Application Server.
IBM System Director Navigator ca be used instead of System i Navigator and 5250 green
screen display terminal.
5-6

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-7
Instructor Guide
How do you get it?

IBM i
IBM Systems Director Navigator for IBM i is included as part of

the base operating system option 3 (5770-SS1 option 3).
The following products must also be installed (these should
already be on your system):
Host servers
5770-SS1 option 12
Qshell
5770-SS1 option 30
PASE
5770-SS1 option 33
IBM HTTP server for IBM i
5770-DG1
IBM Developer Kit for Java
5770-JV1
J2SE 5.0 32 bit
5770-JV1 option 8
IBM Toolbox for Java
5770-JC1
Figure 5-3. How do you get it?
AS248.1
Notes:
5-8

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-9
Instructor Guide
What is included?
IBM i
All Web-enabled functions of System i Navigator are included:

Organized into 13 different task categories (over 300 tasks total)
Jobs, messages, system values, database, users, file systems,
security, performance, and so forth
In addition, functions from the following for-purchase licensed

program products (LPPs) will be available in the console when
the LPPs are installed:
iHASM (Power i High Availability Solutions Manager)
5770-HAS
BRMS (Backup, Recovery, & Media Services)
5770-BR1
IBM Performance Tools for IBM i (DiskWatcher)
5770-PT1
IBM Performance Tools for IBM i (JobWatcher)

option 3
5770-PT1
Figure 5-4. What is included?
AS248.1
Notes:

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-11
Instructor Guide
What is not included?

IBM i
Management Central functions

Use IBM Systems Director products for multisystem tasks on the Web
Database functions that involve graphics and charts:

SQL scripts
Visual Explain
Database Navigator
SQL Assist
Disk management:
Graphical View
Disk Unit Physical Location
Disk Unit/ASP Capacity chart
Figure 5-5. What is not included?
AS248.1
Notes:
Database functions are tied to Windows APIs.
There are a lot of database non-graphical functions in Systems Director Navigator for i.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-13
Instructor Guide
How it works (1 of 2)
IBM i
Ensure the HTTP administration servers are running.

These are auto start servers beginning in V6R1; starts with the
TCP/IP servers.
Figure 5-6. How it works (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
Is also possible to ensure the HTTP administrator server running by 5250 screen with work
active job screen WRKACTJOB and looking at QHTTPSVR subsystem.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-15
Instructor Guide
How it works (2 of 2)
IBM i
Starting with V6R1, all Web-based

consoles run on the Integrated Web
Application Admin servers.
HTTP Web Admin GUI, LDAP,

Web Navigator, IPP
IBM Systems Director Navigator,

Secure Perspective, Cluster Services,
HASM
IBM Access for Web
Figure 5-7. How it works (2 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
Starting with V6R1, all of the Web-based consoles run on the Integrated Web Application
Admin servers.
The Admin2 job must be running in the Qhttpsvr subsystem in order for a user to use the
Systems Director Navigator for IBM i interface and connect to your system.
These are jobs (Admin, Admin2, and Admin3) that automatically start when your system is
started or powered on or when the administrator runs the Start TCP (STRTCP) command.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-17
Instructor Guide
What is included: Base functions (1 of 2)

IBM i
System
Commonly used system tasks include viewing system

status, messages, disk status, and passwords.
Basic Operations
Basic tasks to easily manage lists of messages, printer

output, and printers.
Work Management
Control the work performed on the system, including

support for interactive and batch work. Distribute
resources to ensure applications run well.
Configuration and
Service
Functions to help you manage both hardware and

software on your system, including system values, time
management, and disk units.
Network
Control TCP/IP configuration, remote access services,

networking servers, and IP policies.
Integrated Server
Administration
Manage servers hosted by i and enroll and manage users

and groups.
Security
Plan and implement security on your system, including

authorization lists, object permissions, and cryptographic
functions.
Figure 5-8. What is included: Base functions (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
This all functions will show after open IBM i Management main item.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-19
Instructor Guide
What is included: Base functions (2 of 2)

IBM i
Users and Groups
Display and manage a complete list of the users and

groups, and create, delete, and modify users and lists.
Databases
Perform many common admin database operations,

access and modify objects, work with performance
monitors, and access the health center.
Journal
Management
Work with journals and journal receivers.
Performance
Collect performance data, and view the collection to

investigate potential performance issues.
File Systems
Link to the most commonly used file systems tasks,

integrated file system, i NetServer, network file system.
Internet
Configurations
Work with IBM i Internet configuration tasks, HTTP server,

digital certificates, IBM IPP, Web-based help server, and
Internet Setup wizard.
Figure 5-9. What is included: Base functions (2 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-21
Instructor Guide
What is included: Additional LPPs

IBM i
Backup, Recovery, Simply and easily manage your most critical and complex
and Media Services backups, including online backups of Lotus servers. You can
also recover your system fully in the event of a disaster or
hardware failure.
Cluster Resource
Services
Use a task-based approach to set and manage your high

availability solution. Create a customized high availability
solution by separately creating each element of the high
availability solution. Create and manage clusters, cluster
resource groups, device domains, and cluster administrative
domains, and perform switchovers.
High Availability
Solutions Manager
Use an easy, guided approach to set up high availability. This

interface ensures and validates prerequisites, configures all
necessary technologies for the selected solution, and tests the
setup. This management solution interface is best for smaller
businesses which want simpler solutions requiring fewer
resources.
Performance
Use browser-based performance tasks to manage performance

data collections, use GUI to collect performance data, and
graphically view and analyze performance data using Collection
Services, Job Watcher, and Disk Watcher.
Figure 5-10. What is included: Additional LPPs
AS248.1
Notes:
Additional LPPs function will be available after install this products.
Performance function exist in this same page also in basic like in additional functions. In
basic is only collection data or view collected performance data. The additional
performance function give you GUI and tools to analyze performance data.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-23
Instructor Guide

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
5.2. Overview of this interface


5-25
Instructor Guide
Enter the URL

IBM i
Enter the following URL into a browser:

http://system:2001 (either sysname or IPaddress)
Supports the following browsers:

Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 6.0 or later
Mozilla Firefox Version 1.0 or later
Figure 5-11. Enter the URL
AS248.1
Notes:
Connection by Web browser for system name or IP address and port number 2001.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-27
Instructor Guide
Certificate exchange
IBM i
Accept the certificate warnings.

The console runs on SSL.
Firefox 2
Internet Explorer 6
Internet Explorer 7
Figure 5-12. Certificate exchange
AS248.1
Notes:

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-29
Instructor Guide
Secure port: Sign-on window

IBM i
The URL will be re-routed to secure path Port 2005.

Enter your IBM i user ID and password for this system.
Figure 5-13. Secure port: Sign-on window
AS248.1
Notes:
On this window, enter your user ID and password to sign on to Systems Director Navigator
for IBM i.
Browser will be redirected to a secure path, similar to the following:
https://<systemname>:2005/ibm/console/logon.jsp

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-31
Instructor Guide
Expired password limitation

IBM i
Interface does not support expired password.
Figure 5-14. Expired password limitation
AS248.1
Notes:
At V7R1, this interface does not support expired passwords. If your password has expired
and you are working with either a 5250 emulation session or with System i Navigator, you
will be allowed to specify a new password and continue the sign on process; however, this
interface does not allow a user the option to specify a new password. This is a known
limitation at V7R1.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-33
Instructor Guide
Web console interface

IBM i
Expand IBM i Management to view the task categories.

Click the desired task to view Welcome page for that task.
Click a task on the Welcome page or click Show All Tasks to
view all Web-enabled tasks for that category.
Each selected task appears in a separate portlet, and a tab
appears at the top of the work space.
Figure 5-15. Web console interface
AS248.1
Notes:
All the functions which were access by port 2001 earlier (V5R4 or earlier) can be reached
by open link IBM i task page.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-35
Instructor Guide
New controls overview (1 of 4)

IBM i
New tab for each view!
Left navigation groups

all the tasks in logical
compartments.
Select Action menu
Help link!
Most common
functions
included on
each Welcome
menu
All functions
Figure 5-16. New controls overview (1 of 4)
AS248.1
Notes:
On the left navigation, there are four main navigation items.
1. Standard Welcome page
2. Customizing My Startup Page (here the user can customize startup page, adding pages
which will be shown after logon
3. System with base functions to manage server and also additional installed LPPs like
BRMS
4. Settings like Credential Store, and Console Logging and Tracing
For each open page, view will open as a separate tab
On the Select Action menu, you can manage opened pages or adding pages to users My
Startup Page.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-37
Instructor Guide

IBM i
The All Tasks view

shows every
task that is
supported for
this category in
a tree view.
1. Click arrows to
see actions that
you can
perform.
2. Click an action
or click Close.
AS248.1
Notes:
Clicking Show All Tasks on the previous visual shows the window captured on this visual.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-39
Instructor Guide

IBM i
Select from the available actions

Fast path icons to table tasks!
Filters
Sorts
Entry selection
Object tasks
Category tasks
Table tasks
- Columns, Filters, Sorts
Select an entry
Click the arrow
Tasks for object
AS248.1
Notes:
To perform actions against the listed you objects, you can either:
Click the arrow for your object, and then select an action from the drop-down menu.
Select an object (place a checkmark), and then click the down arrow for the Select
Action, and click an Action in the drop-down menu; then click Go.
On some tabs, the object might be underlined, which means you can double-click it to
open or expand it.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-41
Instructor Guide

IBM i
Operations are broken

down to tasks with logical
groupings
Wizard like interfaces to

organize values
AS248.1
Notes:
This window is displayed when you click the Users and Groups task. Click Create User
Link to see the tab captured in the upper left hand of the visual.
Click Personal to show the window in the lower right corner on this visual. Security is
explained in a later topic. At this point, we just want show how navigation work with this
graphical interface.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details When performing an application share or live demo, do not create a user profile.
This is merely to show how to navigate.

5-43
Instructor Guide
New terminology
IBM i
Banner Common image

across all consoles
Page bar navigate

between pages
Navigation Tree
group tasks
Work area
Figure 5-20. New terminology
AS248.1
Notes:
Page opened from navigation tree group task will display in a separate tab on page bar.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-45
Instructor Guide

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
5.3. Manage and set open pages


5-47
Instructor Guide
Manage Open Pages

IBM i
From far right drop-down,

select the Manage Open
Pages link.
Manage large
numbers of
open pages:
View
Close
Navigate
Figure 5-21. Manage Open Pages
AS248.1
Notes:

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-49
Instructor Guide
Setting My Startup Pages (1 of 3)

IBM i
Sign in and specified pages automatically opened

Great for watching important system functions and activities
Figure 5-22. Setting My Startup Pages (1 of 3)
AS248.1
Notes:

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-51
Instructor Guide

IBM i
Open desired page; In far right drop-down,

select Add to My Startup Pages.
AS248.1
Notes:

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-53
Instructor Guide

IBM i
Click OK on the confirmation screen.
AS248.1
Notes:
If you work with a task or page a lot (for instance, System Operator Messages), you can
add it to your list of startup pages.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-55
Instructor Guide

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
5.4. Overview of System task page


5-57
Instructor Guide
Set Target System

IBM i
Figure 5-25. Set Target System
AS248.1
Notes:
The steps to set your system are:
Click Set Target System,
Then choose Manage local system, then click OK, or
Manage another system, at which point you can specify:
- System name or IP address
- User ID and password for target system
Notice the current target system is the system to which this browser was started. It shows
the current system IP address and the release of the operating system.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-59
Instructor Guide
System status
IBM i
Figure 5-26. System status
AS248.1
Notes:
Clicking System Status will show you the equivalent to running the work with system
status (WRKSYSSTS) command on a 5250 emulation session.
You can see most of the system health information like number of jobs, disk, processor
usage and so on.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-61
Instructor Guide
History log
IBM i
Figure 5-27. History log
AS248.1
Notes:
Select History log to display and work with the current system history log.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-63
Instructor Guide
Display disk status

IBM i
Figure 5-28. Display disk status
AS248.1
Notes:
Display disk status will show disk statistics and usage of storage for specific disks.
Note
This function does not require a DST user ID. What you see on this window is equivalent to
running the work with disk status ( WRKDSKSTS) command on a 5250 emulation session.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-65
Instructor Guide
Setting up 5250 emulation

IBM i
Figure 5-29. Setting up 5250 emulation
AS248.1
Notes:
For those users who prefer to work with a traditional green screen 5250 interface, this GUI
provides an option to open or start an emulation window.
You can set the parameters for your emulation session.
Click Start session button to see the window on the next page.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-67
Instructor Guide
5250 emulation session

IBM i
Figure 5-30. 5250 emulation session
AS248.1
Notes:
After you perform the steps on the previous page, you will see this window.
With this interface, some of the function buttons are listed on the top and some are at the
bottom of the screen.
To use your keyboard, press the Keyboard function key button. This is a toggle switch, it
will turn on the green light indicator next to Keyboard focus to inform you when the function
keys are active.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-69
Instructor Guide
Change password
IBM i
Figure 5-31. Change password
AS248.1
Notes:
Use this option to change your own password.
Assuming you are authorized to do so, you can use this window to change the user profiles
for other users.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-71
Instructor Guide
Application Administration
IBM i
Figure 5-32. Application Administration
AS248.1
Notes:
The option is used by system administrators. This option will allow an administrator to to
specify which users can use specific options with this GUI.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

5-73
Instructor Guide
Exercise
IBM i

Instructor will provide the information listed; this data
is used to perform the exercises.
Exercise: Overview of Systems Director Navigator for IBM i

your exercise.
AS248.1
Notes:

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.
call out answers to the questions on the board.

5-75
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or False: Systems Director Navigator for IBM i requires

that additional software be installed on the PC.
2. True or False: Systems Director Navigator for IBM i is
included in the OS?
3. Which of the following is not included in Systems Director
Navigator for IBM i?
a. Basic operations
b. Work management
c. Configuration and service
d. Management Central
AS248.1
Notes:

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i


included in the OS?
The answer is True.

a.
b.
c.
d.
Basic operations
Work management
Management Central
The answer is Management Central.


5-77
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. Which of the following jobs must be running on your system

in order for a user to connect to your system using Systems
Director Navigator for IBM i?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Admin
Admin2
Admin3
Qhttpsvr
5. True or False: In the browser, the user will always specify

port 2005 when they start the connection request.
6. True or False: In Systems Director Navigator for IBM I, you
cannot customize the startup page.
AS248.1
Notes:

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

Director Navigator for IBM i ?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Admin
Admin2
Admin3
Qhttpsvr
The answer is Admin2.


cannot customize the startup page

5-79
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

Describe Systems Director Navigator and how to install it on
the system
Explain which jobs need to be active on the system to support
this GUI
Explain how to customize which tasks and functions a user
can access
AS248.1
Notes:

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose

5-81
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 6. Messaging concepts

Estimated time
00:10

This unit describes the concepts of messaging and how this function
works on the Power i.

Describe how the message function works
Explain what a message queue is and how they are created
List the different types of messages that can be sent
List where messages can be sent from and where they can be sent
to

Accountability:

6-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

List where messages can be sent from and where they can be
sent to
AS248.1
Notes:
6-2

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

6-3
Instructor Guide
Types of messages
IBM i
Informational
The manufacturing program completed successfully.
The system will shutdown at 9:00 p.m.
Inquiry: Requires reply

Are you finished with the report?
Do you have the licensed program tape?
Verify alignment on device PRT01. (I C G N R)
Figure 6-2. Types of messages
AS248.1
Notes:
A message is a communication sent from a person or program to another person or
program. Messages are the means of communication among workstation users, between
the system operator and workstation users, and between programs and workstation users.
There are two main types of messages that you, as a system operator, will send.
Informational
These messages do not require a reply.
Inquiry
An inquiry message requires a reply. It might also contain information.
6-4

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details While there are many different types of messages defined by the IBM i operating
system (each with its own predefined type identifier), a system operator normally sends
either informational (*INFO) or inquiry (*INQ) messages.
Every command that can be used to send a message has a parameter to control what type
of message is sent: informational (*INFO) and inquiry (*INQ). The default message type for
the commands that a system operator normally uses to send messages is *INFO.
An informational message merely conveys information to another user or to the system
operator. Even if the message text is a question, as long as the message type on the
sending command is *INFO, IBM i treats the message as informational only.
An inquiry message requires a reply. Even if the message text does not contain a question,
as long as the message type on the sending command is *INQ, IBM i treats the message
as an inquiry only.
In System i Navigator, the distinction between an informational and an inquiry message, for
the sender of the message, is whether the Request a reply checkbox is checked.

6-5
Instructor Guide
Where messages come from

IBM i
System programs
System operator
System going down
Cursor in protected area
Workstation
Can accounts receivable

program run?
Mfg. program completed

successfully
Other workstations
Application programs
Figure 6-3. Where messages come from
AS248.1
Notes:
6-6

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

6-7
Instructor Guide
What is a message queue?

IBM i
Think of a message queue as being a kind of mailbox.
Prt01 is out of forms.

The system will be IPLed in 10 minutes.
The workstation DSP03 is offline.
Do you have the licensed program tape?
The program OPR01 compiled
successfully.
Figure 6-4. What is a message queue?
AS248.1
Notes:
Even though it might appear that a message is being sent directly to a user or a
workstation, messages are always sent to a message queue.
A message queue is similar to a mailbox.
It receives and holds messages (just like your mailbox receives and holds your mail)
until the messages can be read.
Just as you can decide when to view and respond to your mail, you can decide when to
view and respond to messages.
6-8

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Communication using messages on a Power i occurs through a type of object
known as a message queue. Messages are actually sent to a message queue, not to a
user or a workstation. When messages are displayed, it is really the contents of a message
queue that are displayed, that is, the messages on the queue.
Discuss the messages (shown on the visual) that a system operator and other workstation
users might send and that might be used to communicate between a system or application
program and a workstation user. Point out the informational messages (System going
down, Cursor in protected area, Manufacturing program completed
successfully) and the inquiry message (Can accounts receivable program
run?).

6-9
Instructor Guide
How are message queues created?

IBM i
User profile is
created.
Workstation device
description is created.
PROFILE
DSP01
AS2401
DSP01
AS2401
Workstation
message queue
User
message queue
ARDEPT
QSYSOPR
User-created
message queue
System operator
message queue
CRTMSGQ
System supplied
Figure 6-5. How are message queues created?
AS248.1
Notes:
A message queue can be created whenever:
A device description for a workstation (display) is created.
A workstation message queue is automatically created when a workstation (or display)
is created. A workstation message queue is created for each display configured on the
system. The message queue name is the same as the display name.
A user (profile) is created.
A user message queue is created when a user profile is created. A user message
queue exists for each user profile. The name of the user message queue is the same as
the user profile name unless it is specified differently.
The system operator message queue (QSYSOPR) is supplied as part of i. When the
Power is configured for the first time, QSYSOPR is created.
Other message queues can be created by Power implementers with the Create
Message Queue (CRTMSGQ) command.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

6-11
Instructor Guide
How are message queues allocated?

IBM i
At sign-on, you are assigned certain messages queues:

Workstation device message queue
User profile message queue
Optionally, you can allocate a message queue:

By assigning a message queue to yourself:
CHGMSGQ QSYSOPR *BREAK
CHGMSGQ ARDEPT *NOTIFY
Assuming your user profile has been authorized to that specific

message queue
Figure 6-6. How are message queues allocated?
AS248.1
Notes:
At sign-on, the user is assigned certain message queues. When working with a 5250 green
screen session, the following messages are automatically allocated:
The Change Message Queue (CHGMSGQ) command changes the attributes of the
specified message queue.
Delivery (DLVRY) specifies how the messages that are sent to this message queue are
delivered.
*HOLD
*BREAK
*NOTIFY
*DFT

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248-7U06-checkpoint and ask the students
to call out answers to the questions on the screen.

6-13
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. Which of the following message types is requesting a reply?

a.
b.
c.
d.
Informational
Questioning
Inquiry
User
2. When you create a user profile, which of the following is automatically

created?
a.
b.
c.
d.
User message queue

Workstation message queue
System operator message queue
Application message queue
3. Which message type will interrupt a user who is signed on to a 5250

emulation session?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Informational
Inquiry
Workstation
Break
Figure 6-7. Checkpoint
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Checkpoint solutions
IBM i
1.
Which of the following message types is requesting a reply?

a. Informational
b. Questioning
c. Inquiry
d. User
The answer is Inquiry.

created?
a. User message queue
b. Workstation message queue
c. System operator message queue
d. Application message queue
The answer is User message queue.

emulation session?
a. Informational
b. Inquiry
c. Workstation
d. Break
The answer is Break.

6-15
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

List where messages can be sent from and where they can be
sent to
AS248.1
Notes:
As a system operator, you are expected to be the message expert. Not only do you display,
send, receive, and remove messages, but you are also asked to help others with their
questions. You are asked to explain what the messages mean and how to respond to them.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose

6-17
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 7. Messaging using 5250 emulation

Estimated time
00:15

This unit describes how to work with and manage the messaging
function when working with a 5250 emulation session.

How message queues get allocated
The menus and commands used to work with messaging
Describe the difference between a message and break message
Explain the process used to display and manage messages
Explain the difference between an informational and an inquiry
message
Explain the different ways that messages are displayed on your
screen
Explain how to determine who has allocated a message queue to
themselves

Accountability:
Exercise

7-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Describe the difference between a message and break
message
message
Explain the different ways that messages are displayed on
your screen
Explain how to determine who has allocated a message queue
to themselves
AS248.1
Notes:
7-2

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

7-3
Instructor Guide
How are message queues allocated?

IBM i
At sign-on, you are assigned certain messages queues:

Optionally, you can allocate a message queue:

By assigning a message queue to yourself:
CHGMSGQ QSYSOPR *BREAK
CHGMSGQ ARDEPT *NOTIFY
Assuming your user profile has been authorized to that specific

message queue
Figure 7-2. How are message queues allocated?
AS248.1
Notes:
At sign-on, the user is assigned certain message queues. When working with a 5250 green
screen session, the following messages are automatically allocated:
Workstation device message queue: The upper right-hand corner on the sign-on
screen will show the name of the workstation device for your session. The message
queue assigned to that device or workstation session will automatically be assigned to
the user.
User profile message queue: A message queue is automatically created for each user
profile created on the system. The user message queue is automatically allocated when
the user signs on.
The Change Message Queue (CHGMSGQ) command changes the attributes of the
specified message queue. If the delivery mode is being changed to *BREAK or *NOTIFY,
and if the message queue is not already in *BREAK or *NOTIFY mode or specifically
allocated to another job, it is implicitly allocated by this command.
7-4

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Delivery (DLVRY) specifies how the messages that are sent to this message queue are
delivered. The method of delivery is in effect only as long as the message queue is
allocated to the job. When the queue is no longer allocated, the delivery mode is changed
to *HOLD for workstation, system operator, and user message queues.
*HOLD
The messages are held in the message queue until they are requested by the
user or program.
*BREAK
When a message arrives at the message queue, the job to which the
message queue is allocated is interrupted, and the program specified for the
Break handling program (PGM) parameter is called, or the Display Message
(DSPMSG) command is processed. When changing to *BREAK mode, if a
program name is not specified, or if PGM(*SAME) is specified, the PGM
parameter defaults to *DSPMSG for the break program and *ALWRPY for the
allow other jobs to reply attribute.
*NOTIFY
When a message arrives at the message queue, an interactive job to which

the message queue is allocated is notified by the Message light turning on
and a buzzer sounding (if you have that feature).
*DFT
Messages requiring replies are answered with their default reply. No

messages are added to the message queue unless the message queue is
QSYSOPR.

7-5
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details A message queue can be allocated to one user at a time. If you want to free up
or to put the message queue back on the shelf so that somebody else can allocate it to
them self, then put it back into *Hold mode.
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Starting with the next visual, you should
perform an application share to show a live demo of your 5250 emulation screen where
possible.
1. Open a 5250 emulation session and logon with your instructor ID.
3. Once the application share window opens, select the application you want to share from
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Perform a live demo by running 5250 emulation on your
instructor PC where possible.
To perform a live demo:
7-6

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
General System Tasks menu

IBM i
Figure 7-3. General System Tasks menu
AS248.1
Notes:
The menu displayed on this page is the General System Tasks menu. The command used
to display the General System Tasks menu is GO SYSTEM.

7-7
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
7-8

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Message menu
IBM i
Figure 7-4. Message menu
AS248.1
Notes:
The menu displayed on this page is the Messages menu.
The command used to display the Messages menu is Go Message.
Another way to display this menu is to select option 4 - Messages from the General
System Tasks menu, the menu displayed on the previous page.

7-9
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Option 1: Send Message: SNDMSG

IBM i
Figure 7-5. Option 1: Send Message: SNDMSG
AS248.1
Notes:
The Send Message (SNDMSG) command is used by a display station user to send an
immediate message from their display station to one or more message queues. The
message can be sent to the system operator, to other display station users, to a user's
message queue, to all currently active users' message queues, or to the system history log,
QHST. The sender can require a reply from the message receiver. The primary users of
this command are display station users and the system operator.
Restrictions:
You must have object operational (*OBJOPR) and add (*ADD) authorities for the
message queue.
You must have use (*USE) authority for the specified message queues and *USE
authority for the libraries in which they are located.
The SNDMSG command only allows a message of up to 512 characters of first-level
message text to be sent.
This command can only send inquiry messages (specified by MSGTYPE(*INQ)) to one
message queue or to two message queues if one of the queues is *HSTLOG.

7-11
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Option 2: Send Message: SNDBRKMSG

IBM i
Figure 7-6. Option 2: Send Message: SNDBRKMSG
AS248.1
Notes:
The Send Break Message (SNDBRKMSG) command is used to send an immediate
message to one or more work station message queues. An immediate message is a
message that is not predefined and is not stored in a message file. The command causes
the message to be delivered always in break mode. The DSPMSG display is shown for the
message when it is received, regardless of the setting of the message queue's delivery
mode, severity, and break handling program; however, the message might not be displayed
in some cases, depending on the Break Message job attribute. This command is primarily
intended for the system operator's use.
Restrictions:
This command can be used to send break messages to work station message queues
only.
This command cannot send inquiry messages (specified by MSGTYPE(INQ)) to
multiple workstations.

7-13
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Inform students that break messages can only be sent to a workstation
message queue. This means that break messages can only be sent to users who are
signed on to a 5250 green screen or emulation session.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Option 3: Display Message: DSPMSG

IBM i
Figure 7-7. Option 3: Display Message: DSPMSG
AS248.1
Notes:
The Display Messages (DSPMSG) command is used by the display station user to show
the messages received at the specified message queue.
If the message queue is not allocated to the job in which this command is entered or to any
other job, it is implicitly allocated by this command for the duration of the command.
When the messages are shown, options are also shown that allow the user to either
remove one or more messages from the queue or to enter a reply to each inquiry message.

7-15
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Display your messages

IBM i
Figure 7-8. Display your messages
AS248.1
Notes:
The following function keys allow you to manipulate messages:
F10=Display messages: This includes those that have been excluded from other
displays due to the parameters of the Display Message (DSPMSG) command.
F11=Remove a message: Position the cursor over a message and press this key. The
message will be removed from the message queue.
F13=Remove all: Press this key to remove all messages from the message queue. The
default reply is sent for any unanswered inquiry messages.
F14=Work with problem: Position the cursor over a message that is preceded with an
asterisk (*) and press this key to work with the problem. The key is operational and
shown on the display only when a message has an asterisk.
F16=Remove all except unanswered: All messages except the unanswered inquiry
messages and sender copy messages will be removed.

7-17
Instructor Guide
F21=Select assistance level: This function allows you to change the Power interface
you are using. You can choose the:
- Operational Assistant interface
- Current Power interface
F22=Display list details: This function displays additional information about the
message queue in which the messages are contained.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

7-19
Instructor Guide
Display inquiry messages

IBM i
Figure 7-9. Display inquiry messages
AS248.1
Notes:
An inquiry message is a message that is asking a question or expecting a reply. Inquiry
messages can be sent by a user or a program. A user could be asking a question of
another user or a program could be asking for input in order to continue processing.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

7-21
Instructor Guide
Option 4: Display QSYSOPR messages

IBM i
Figure 7-10. Option 4: Display QSYSOPR messages
AS248.1
Notes:
When you place the cursor on a specific message on this panel and press the F1 key, it will
take you to the display shown on the next visual.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details A user will only be allowed to display the QSYSOPR message queue if they
have been authorized to work with this message queue.

7-23
Instructor Guide
Display message details

IBM i
Figure 7-11. Display message details
AS248.1
Notes:
The Additional Messages Information screen is displayed when you place the cursor on a
specific message on the Display Messages screen (see the previous page in the student
guide) and press the F1 - help key.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

7-25
Instructor Guide
Option 6: Work with Message Queues: WRKMSGQ

IBM i
Figure 7-12. Option 6: Work with Message Queues: WRKMSGQ
AS248.1
Notes:
The Work with Message Queues (WRKMSGQ) display shows a list of message queues
you have authority to use. You can use this list to do some common tasks related to
messages.
The list of message queues shown is based on the value you enter for the message queue
(MSGQ) parameter. For example, if you type T* in the library QGPL, a list of all the
message queues starting with T in library QGPL is displayed.
If you know the name of the object, you can fill in the top blank fields with the option
number, object name, and library name, and then press the Enter key.
You can also type the option number next to a specific object and press the Enter key. You
can type option numbers next to more than one object at a time to do more than one task,
one after the other.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

7-27
Instructor Guide
How messages are displayed

IBM i
Display Messages
Queue.... : QSYSOPR
Library.... : QSYS
Severity.. : 70
Program...: *DSPMSG
Library....:
Delivery....: *HOLD
Type reply (if required), press Enter.

Device COOKPCF no longer communicating.
Device COOKPCI no longer communicating.
Display
Controller COOKPC
hasMessages
disconnected.
Controller COOKPC contacted on line ITSCTRN.
Messages
Queue....
: QPADEV0001
*DSPMSG
Device
QPADEV0007
no longerProgram...:
communicating.
Library.... : QSYS
Library....:
Select one
Severity..
: 00of the following: Delivery....: *NOTIFY
Type
reply a(ifmessage
required), press Enter.
1.Send
From...
:
AS2401
04/02/08
09:02:14
2.Send a break message
A break message interrupts your current job
and displays the message on your screen.
===>
DSPMSG command
Receive a break message
Receive on the message line
Function key not allowed

Figure 7-13. How messages are displayed
AS248.1
Notes:
The system displays messages:
On the display messages display (DSPMSG command).
As a break message. The current job is interrupted and the message is shown on the
display.
On the message line.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

7-29
Instructor Guide
Work with Object Locks

IBM i
Figure 7-14. Work with Object Locks
AS248.1
Notes:
The Work with Object Locks (WRKOBJLCK) command allows you to work with the object
lock requests in the system for a specified object. You can work with both held locks and
locks waiting to be applied.
This command can be used by a user to determine who has allocated a message queue for
their use. For example, you are not allowed to set a message queue in break mode if
somebody else has already allocated that same queue for their use. This command will
show you who has already locked, or allocated, this message queue.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details This command could be used by an operator to find out who is using a specific
object and thus has it locked. In the example, you can use this command to find out has
allocated the QSYSOPR message queue to themselves.

7-31
Instructor Guide
Grant Object Authority

IBM i
Figure 7-15. Grant Object Authority
AS248.1
Notes:
The Grant Object Authority (GRTOBJAUT) command grants specific authority for the
objects named in the command to another user or group of users.
Authority can be given to:
Named users
Users (*PUBLIC) who do not have specific authority to the object or the authorization
list
Users of the object referred to by the reference object (REFOBJ), reference object type
(REFOBJTYPE), and parameters
Authorization lists
Before a user can work with a message queue, that user must be authorized to work with
that message queue. This is the command that a security officer or a security administrator
would use to grant that authority.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Typically, system operators would not be granting authority to objects on the
system. This display is provided to teach this specific security concept to an operator, that
is, how to grant a user-specific authority to an object.

7-33
Instructor Guide
Exercise
IBM i
Refer to Appendix A Use the information listed to perform the exercises.

Exercise: Messages using 5250 Emulation
Inform instructor when you have

completed your exercise.
AS248.1
Notes:
Please refer to the Student Exercise Guide and perform the Messages exercise.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.

7-35
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or False: You can allocate an application message

queue when you sign on.
2. Which of the following delivery value will direct the system to
take the default reply to a message?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Hold
Break
Notify
Default
3. When the system creates a workstation device description,

which of the following is automatically created?
a.
b.
c.
d.
User message queue

AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i
1. True or False: You can allocate an application message queue when

you sign on.
The answer is True.
2. Which of the following delivery value will direct the system to take the
default reply to a message?
a. Hold
b. Break
c. Notify
d. Default
The answer is Default.
3. When the system creates a work station device description, which of

the following is automatically created?
a.
b.
c.
d.
User message queue



7-37
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. True or False: You can send a message to any user on the

system.
5. Which message type will interrupt a user who is signed on to
a 5250 emulation session?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Informational
Inquiry
Workstation
Break
6. True or False: The default mode for a message queue is

*Notify.
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

system.
The answer is True.

a.
b.
c.
d.
Informational
Inquiry
Workstation
Break
e. The answer is Break.

*Notify.
The answer is True.

7-39
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

Describe the difference between a message and break
message
message
Explain the different ways that messages are displayed on
your screen
Explain how to determine who has allocated a message queue
to themselves
AS248.1
Notes:
send, receive, and remove messages, but you are also asked to help others with their

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose

7-41
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 8. Messaging using System i Navigator

Estimated time
00:15

This unit describes how messaging works when using the System i
Navigator GUI.

Explain how to access and use the messaging function using
System i Navigator
Explain how to send messages using this interface
Explain how to send informational versus inquiry messages
Explain how to display your messages
Explain how to customize the messaging function

Accountability:
Exercise

8-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

System i Navigator
AS248.1
Notes:
8-2

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Starting with the next visual you should
perform an application share to perform a live demo where possible.
1. Open System i Navigator and logon with your instructor ID.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Starting with the next visual you should perform a live
demo where possible.
Open System i Navigator and logon with your instructor ID.

8-3
Instructor Guide
Basic Operations > Messages

IBM i
Figure 8-2. Basic Operations > Messages
AS248.1
Notes:
Expand Basic Operations and click Messages to see the messages for the user signed
on using this GUI. Notice that the status bar, in this example, shows the following
information:
10.31.83.12 shows the name of the system to which you connected.
Message shows the name of the user whose messages are being displayed.
User shows whose messages are being displayed.
From System i Navigator, you can display a list of messages. You can customize the list to
specify which messages you want to include. You can also specify which columns of
information you want to display in the list and in what order you want the columns to be
displayed.
From the message list, you can reply to a message, send a new message, delete one or
more messages, and display the properties of a message. By default, this function shows
the messages for the user who is signed on to this GUI.
8-4

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

8-5
Instructor Guide
Messages context menu: Send Message

IBM i
Figure 8-3. Messages context menu: Send Message
AS248.1
Notes:
The options available to send messages using this interface are:
Expand Basic Operations, right-click Messages, click Send Message from the pop-up
menu.
Click Basic Operations to populate the task area; then you can select Send a
Message from the taskpad area.
8-6

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

8-7
Instructor Guide
Inquiry versus informational message

IBM i
Figure 8-4. Inquiry versus informational message
AS248.1
Notes:
Request a reply specifies to send an inquiry message, which always requires a reply. The
inquiry message is placed on a message queue, and the name of the person that the
inquiry is sent to is added to the beginning of the message text. This allows the person
receiving the reply to determine which user or workstation the reply is from.
If this check box is not selected, the message is an informational message.
8-8

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

8-9
Instructor Guide
Request a reply: Send reply to

IBM i
Figure 8-5. Request a reply: Send reply to
AS248.1
Notes:
For an inquiry message, clicking the Request a reply check box allows you to stipulate
that the reply go to a message queue other than the message queue of the sender.
Click Advanced to specify where to send the reply if you are sending an inquiry message.
Send reply to specifies, only if an inquiry message is sent, the name of the message
queue that the reply is sent to. You can choose to have the reply sent to the sender's
message queue, or you can specify the name of another message queue to receive the
reply.
Coded Character Set ID (CCSID) of message text specifies the CCSID that is used
for the message text supplied on the Send Message dialog. CCSID is a 16-bit number
identifying a specific set of encoding scheme identifiers, character set identifiers, code
page identifiers, and other relevant information that uniquely identifies the coded
graphic representation used.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

8-11
Instructor Guide
Send Message: Send to users

IBM i
Figure 8-6. Send Message: Send to users
AS248.1
Notes:
You can click the Users check box to send your message to a user. To fill in this parameter,
you can click Browse to see the pop-up windows that shows a list of users on your system.
One or more user message queues (separated by commas) can be typed in, and one or
more users can be selected from the pop-up window that appears when you click Browse.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Be sure to add several users from the system
to the message so that the students can see how it appears in the window.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Be sure to add several users from the system to the
message so that the students can see how it appears in the window.

8-13
Instructor Guide
Send Message: Send to workstations

IBM i
Figure 8-7. Send Message: Send to workstations
AS248.1
Notes:
The alternative is to send your message to a workstation. Check the Workstation check
box; then click Browse to see a list of the workstations on the system.
You can either broadcast a message to all workstation message queues or type in a
specific workstation message queue.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Be sure to add several workstations from the
list to the message so that the students can see how it appears in the window.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Be sure to add several workstations from the list to the
message so that the students can see how it appears in the window.

8-15
Instructor Guide
Send Message: Interrupt user

IBM i
Figure 8-8. Send Message: Interrupt user
AS248.1
Notes:
Interrupt user specifies to send a break message.
When a break message is sent to a user, the message goes to the workstation
message queue that the user is signed on to. If the user is in an emulation session, the
message temporarily interrupts the work that the user is doing.
When a break message is sent to a user who is not signed on, the message goes to the
user's message queue.
When a break message is sent to one or more workstations, the message goes to
the message queues for the specified workstations.
Note
Break messages do not interrupt System i Navigator users.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Do not send the message when doing an application share or live demo. Click
Cancel and continue on with the next visual/topic.

8-17
Instructor Guide
Display message properties

IBM i
Figure 8-9. Display message properties
AS248.1
Notes:
Click Messages to see a list of messages that are in your message queue.
To view the details of a specific message, either double-click Messages in the From User
column or right-click the icon and select Properties.
To delete a specific message, select Delete.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

8-19
Instructor Guide
Customize messages: Include (F11)

IBM i
Figure 8-10. Customize messages: Include (F11)
AS248.1
Notes:
To customize what information is displayed when you click the Messages branch, you can:
Right-click Messages, and select Include.
Or
Highlight the Messages branch, and press F11.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

8-21
Instructor Guide
Include (F11): System operator

IBM i
Figure 8-11. Include (F11): System operator
AS248.1
Notes:
To customize what information is displayed when you click the Messages branch, you can:
Right-click Messages, and select Include.
Or
Highlight the Messages branch, and press F11.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

8-23
Instructor Guide
Customize messages: Columns (F12)

IBM i
Figure 8-12. Customize messages: Columns (F12)
AS248.1
Notes:
By default, every function includes the set of default columns that are displayed. Those are
the columns listed in the right pane. Usually, there are additional columns of information
that can be selected from the list on the left.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

8-25
Instructor Guide
Exercise
IBM i
Refer to Appendix A:
Use the information listed to perform the exercises.
Exercise: Messages using System i Navigator

AS248.1
Notes:
Please refer to the Student Exercise Guide and perform the Messages exercise.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.

8-27
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or False: System i Navigator only allows you to see your

messages.
2. Which of the following message types can be sent with this
GUI?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Informational
Inquiry
User
All of the above
3. Which customize option allows you to specify whose

messages to view?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Sort
Include
Columns
Auto refresh
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

messages.

GUI?
a. Informational
b. Inquiry
c. User
d. All of the above
3. Which customize option allows you to specify that you want

to view messages for a different user?
a. Sort
b. Include
c. Columns
d. Auto refresh
The answer is Include.

8-29
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. True or False: A break message will interrupt a user who is

only signed on using System i Navigator.
5. The message function is found under which of the following?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Basic operations
Work management
Network
6. True or False: You are only allowed to delete a message

from your message queue.
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i
4. True or False. A break message will interrupt a user who is


a.
b.
c.
d.
Basic operations
Work management
Network
The answer is Basic operations.


8-31
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

System i Navigator
AS248.1
Notes:
send, receive, and remove messages, you are also asked to help others with their

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose

8-33
Instructor Guide

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 9. Messaging using Systems Director

Navigator for IBM i
Estimated time
00:10

This unit describes how messaging works when using the Systems
Director Navigator for IBM i GUI.

Systems Director Navigator for IBM i

Exercise
Unit 9. Messaging using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i

9-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

AS248.1
Notes:
9-2

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

9-3
Instructor Guide
Basic Operations > Send a Message

IBM i
Figure 9-2. Basic Operations > Send a Message
AS248.1
Notes:
Click Basic operations, and then click Send Messages to send a message.
9-4

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

9-5
Instructor Guide
Inquiry versus informational message

IBM i
Figure 9-3. Inquiry versus informational message
AS248.1
Notes:
Request a reply specifies to send an inquiry message, which always requires a reply. The
inquiry message is placed on a message queue, and the name of the person that the
inquiry is sent to is added to the beginning of the message text. This allows the person
receiving the reply to determine which user or workstation the reply is from.
If this check box is not selected, the message is an informational message.
If the check box Interrupt user is selected, the message is an inquiry message.
9-6

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

9-7
Instructor Guide
Request a reply: Send reply to

IBM i
Figure 9-4. Request a reply: Send reply to
AS248.1
Notes:
For an inquiry message, clicking the Request a reply check box allows you to stipulate
that the reply go to a message queue other than the message queue of the sender.
Click Advanced to specify where to send the reply if you are sending an inquiry message.
Send reply to specifies, only if an inquiry message is sent, the name of the message
queue that the reply is sent to. You can choose to have the reply sent to the sender's
message queue, or you can specify the name of another message queue to receive the
reply.
Coded Character Set ID (CCSID) of message text specifies the CCSID that is used for
the message text supplied on the Send Message dialog. CCSID is a 16-bit number
identifying a specific set of encoding scheme identifiers, character set identifiers, code
page identifiers, and other relevant information that uniquely identifies the coded graphic
representation used.
9-8

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

9-9
Instructor Guide
Send Message: Send to users

IBM i
Figure 9-5. Send Message: Send to users
AS248.1
Notes:
You can click the Users check box to send your message to a user. Click Browse to see
this tab, which shows a list of users on your system.
One or more user message queues can be selected. Click OK.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

9-11
Instructor Guide
Send Message: Send to users (1 of 2)

IBM i
Figure 9-6. Send Message: Send to users (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
You can click the field next to Users and manually type the user who sent a message.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

9-13
Instructor Guide
Send Message: Send to users (2 of 2)

IBM i
Figure 9-7. Send Message: Send to users (2 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
For the Send to parameter, click the down arrow which will show:
All users
All signed-on users
System operator
Users to whom send messages were sent previously

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

9-15
Instructor Guide
Send Message: Send to workstations

IBM i
Figure 9-8. Send Message: Send to workstations
AS248.1
Notes:
The alternative is to send a message to a workstation.
Check the Workstation check box; then click Browse to see this tab.
You can click the Select All icon to broadcast a message to all workstation message
queues,
or you can select a specific workstation message queue.
Click OK.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

9-17
Instructor Guide
Send Message: Interrupt user

IBM i
Figure 9-9. Send Message: Interrupt user
AS248.1
Notes:
The Interrupt user parameter is used to specify to send a break message.
When a break message is sent to a user, the message goes to the workstation
message queue that the user is signed on to. If the user is in an emulation session, the
message temporarily interrupts the work that the user is doing.
When a break message is sent to a user who is not signed on to an emulation session,
the message goes to the user's message queue.
When a break message is sent to one or more workstations, the message goes to the
message queues for the specified workstations.
Note
Break messages do not interrupt Systems Director Navigator for IBM i users.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

9-19
Instructor Guide
Display Messages: Properties

IBM i
Figure 9-10. Display Messages: Properties
AS248.1
Notes:
Click Messages to see a list of your messages.
You can customize the list to specify which messages you want to include in the list.
You can also specify which columns of information you want to display in the list and in
what order you want the columns to be displayed.
From the message list, you can reply to a message, send a new message, delete one or
more messages, and display the properties of a message. By default, this function shows
the messages for the user who signed on to this GUI.
To view the details of a specific message, click the arrow for the message and select
Properties.
To delete a specific message, select Delete. The recommendation is to delete messages
once you have read them. Clean up the message queue as you go.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

9-21
Instructor Guide
Properties: General and Detail tabs

IBM i
Figure 9-11. Properties: General and Detail tabs
AS248.1
Notes:
This is the tab that is displayed when you select Properties. Notice there are two tabs you
can click to display the details for the message.
It is recommended that you delete messages that have been viewed and handled. Clean
up your message queue as you go!

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

9-23
Instructor Guide
Customize: View
IBM i
Figure 9-12. Customize: View
AS248.1
Notes:
You can use Select Action for make some action with messages and customize view
messages list.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

9-25
Instructor Guide
Customize: Include
IBM i
Figure 9-13. Customize: Include
AS248.1
Notes:
To customize which message queue information is displayed when you click Messages,
click Select Action > Include > Go to see the tab in the lower right of this visual.
From this tab, you can choose a specific user or a specific message queue.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

9-27
Instructor Guide
Customize: Columns
IBM i
Figure 9-14. Customize: Columns
AS248.1
Notes:
To customize which columns are displayed when you click Messages, click the down
arrow for Select Action. Then click Columns > Go to see the tab in the lower right of this
visual.
Notice that the columns in the right pane will display automatically.
The columns in the left pane will show additional columns of information that you can
choose to display when you click this function.
In addition, you can also move columns up or down to organize them to your liking.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

9-29
Instructor Guide
Exercise
IBM i
Exercise: Messages using

AS248.1
Notes:

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248-U09- checkpoint and ask the students to

9-31
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or False: Any type of message can be sent using

Systems Director Navigator.
2. When using Systems Director Navigator, you can send a
message to which of the following?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Users
Workstations
System operator
All of the above

signed on using Systems Director Navigator.
AS248.1
Notes:

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

The answer is True.

a.
b.
c.
d.
Users
Workstations
System operator
All of the above


9-33
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

AS248.1
Notes:

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose

9-35
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 10. CL command concepts

Estimated time
00:10

This unit briefly explains what a control language (CL) command is
and where commands can be entered. We will also discuss assistance
provided by IBM i to help you find a command.

Describe how CL commands are entered

Describe the types of CL commands that are available
Describe the structure of a CL command
Explain how command parameters and user values are used to
customize the function performed by a command

Accountability:

10-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Explain how command parameters and user values are used
to customize the function performed by a command
AS248.1
Notes:
Commands have a special structure and consist of parameters that give the system
specific instructions on how to execute the requested function.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

10-3
Instructor Guide
Control language
IBM i
All system functions are controlled through the use

of a single language:
By the user
In a program
Interactively or in batch
Figure 10-2. Control language
AS248.1
Notes:
One way in which you communicate with IBM i is through a special language called control
language (CL). CL consists of commands. Every command instructs the system to perform
a specific action.
A CL command can be run by a user or be included in a program.
A command can be processed interactively where there is two-way communication
between a user and the system.
A program can also be processed in batch mode; after a user submits a command, the
system uses the command with no further information needed from the user.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Normally, in order to use a command, a user must have access to a command
line.

10-5
Instructor Guide
CL commands
IBM i
DLTAUTL
DLTDEVD
DLTLIB
CRTLIB
CRTMNU
CRTPF
HLDWTR
PWRDWNSYS
DSPJOBLOG
WRKMNU
WRKJOBD
WRKMSGQ
Plus many more

Figure 10-3. CL commands
AS248.1
Notes:
This visual shows just a few of the more commonly used commands. There are a large
number of commands available on the system. Even the most experienced users are
seldom familiar with more than a few hundred of these.
Each command name is abbreviated and has been standardized so that you can tell what
action is being performed on which object.
Following, in alphabetical order, is a description of the action abbreviations shown on the
visual:
Abbreviation
CRT...
DLT...
DSP...
HLD...
PWRDWN...
WRK...
Action performed
Create
Delete
Display
Hold
Power down
Work

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Following, in alphabetical order, is a description of the object abbreviations shown on the
visual:
Abbreviation
...AUTL
...DEVD
...JOBD
...JOBLOG
...LIB
...MNU
...MSGQ
...PF
...SYS
...WTR
Item on which action is performed

Authorization list
Device description
Job description
Job log
Library
Menu
Message queue
Physical file
System
Writer

10-7
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Careful examination of the commands on the visual illustrates several things
that are common to all commands.
Most commands are abbreviated with vowels omitted.
To make the abbreviations easier to understand, they have been standardized so that a
user can tell what major function (action) each command performs and what item (or
object) the function is performed on.
The commands shown on the visual are incomplete. The CRTLIB command shown in the
top left on the visual creates a library. But what library? The system needs further
information, such as the name of the library to be created, and some characteristics of the
library. Providing information to the system about a CL command is done with parameters.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
CL command structure
IBM i
Command name
CRTLIB
Action
Item
abbreviation
Parameter
LIB(PAYLIB)
Keyword
Value
Figure 10-4. CL command structure
AS248.1
Notes:
Each command consists of a command name followed by parameters. Some commands
will use zero parameters (this command does one thing in one way) while other commands
use up to the maximum of 75 parameters.
The format for a command is:
command-name parameter parameter parameter...
A command name consists of two abbreviated parts for easy identification: an action and
an object on which the action is performed. Even though there are a very large number of
commands, there are a fairly limited number of action and object pairs. To execute a
command, you need only put the right action and object pair together.
A parameter also has two parts: a keyword followed, in parentheses, by one or more
values. A parameter is used either to provide information to the command to control what it
does.
The CRTLIB LIB(PAYLIB) command shown on the visual instructs the system to create a
library named PAYLIB.

10-9
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Usually only a few parameters are specified for a CL command, each separated
from the preceding one by one or more spaces.
The first parameter is separated from the command name by one or more spaces.
Each parameter consists of a keyword followed by one or more values enclosed in
parentheses. It is the parameters and their values that give real meaning to a command.
A keyword identifies a single parameter from among the 75 parameters possible for each
command. The information enclosed in parentheses are the values assigned to the
parameter and used by the command.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Some other CL command facts

IBM i
Conditional parameters:
Some of the additional parameters will display based on what is
selected
Some parameters are mutually exclusive
Each of the supported interfaces provides prompting to assist

when entering a command
Each of the supported interfaces provides help:
To explain what a command is used for
To explain the purpose served of each parameter
CL commands can be created by an administrator or a

programmer
Figure 10-5. Some other CL command facts
AS248.1
Notes:

10-11
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Now that you know where to enter a command, let's look at how you can enter a
command.
Play.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248U10-checkpoint and ask the students to

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or False: A user must memorize the format of a

command since the system does not provide any help.
2. True or False: CL commands can be specified within a
program.
3. True or False: Parameters are used to customize a CL
command.
AS248.1
Notes:

10-13
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i


program.
The answer is True.

command.
The answer is True.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

Explain how command parameters and user values are used
to customize the function performed by a command
AS248.1
Notes:
Menus and CL commands can take you almost anywhere you want to go and allow you to
do what you want to do on the Power if you have the proper authority.
Prompting helps you enter commands by reducing your dependency on memorization and
reference manuals.
When in doubt, use the GO CMDxxx or GO MAJOR commands.

10-15
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The combination of menus and CL commands makes the system very flexible
and user-oriented. In summary, assure the students that they will use menus heavily only
while still learning their way around the system. As time goes on, they will find themselves
using the appropriate commands more and more. It is always natural to use prompting.
Why memorize? The online help is always there to give them more information as they
work with areas that are less familiar.
Learning the item (LIB, OBJ, FLR, DIR, and so forth) and the action (WRK, DSP, CRT,
RMV, and so forth) abbreviations offer rewards as they will find they can use GO CMDxxx
to find new commands that help them accomplish new tasks. They can also use the GO
MAJOR command to bring up the appropriate menu listing all the related commands.
Additional information Before continuing to the next unit, stop and ask the students if
there are any additional questions before continuing.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 11. CL commands using 5250 emulation

Estimated time
00:10

This unit describes the different menus available to assist users with
finding and using commands. We will also discuss the assistance
provided by IBM i to help you find a command.

Explain where to enter a CL command

Describe what command prompting is and how to use it
Explain the use of command parameters and user values
Explain what conditional parameters are and how these are used
to customize a command
List the different menus used to find commands

Accountability:

11-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Explain what conditional parameters are and how these are
used to customize a command
AS248.1
Notes:
Commands have a special structure and consist of parameters that give the system
specific instructions on how to execute the requested function.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

11-3
Instructor Guide
Where to enter a command

IBM i
Command line
Command Entry display
- or Copyright IBM Corporation 2011
Figure 11-2. Where to enter a command
AS248.1
Notes:
If you have the proper authority, you can enter a command either on a command line or on
the Command Entry screen.
The command line is easy to use and readily accessible.
The Command Entry screen is specially designed to allow you to efficiently enter
commands, view previously entered commands, duplicate commands for reuse, and
receive additional assistance on error messages.
From the Operational Assistant menus, pressing the F9 key brings up the command line
near the bottom of the display.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Now that you know where to enter a command, let's look at how you can enter a
command.

11-5
Instructor Guide
Command prompting
IBM i
DSPOBJD + F4 or ?DSPOBJD
1
2
Figure 11-3. Command prompting
AS248.1
Notes:
If you need help entering parameters for a command, you can request a display tailored to
the command name. This display shows (or prompts you for) the command parameters.
This request is called command prompting.
You can request command prompting in one of the following ways:
Press F4 after typing the command name on a command line or after using the F9 key
to recall the last command (in the latter case, command prompting is very useful
because most of the parameters were previously entered).
Type a question mark (?) immediately preceding the command name on a command
line, and press the Enter key.
Each command entry display has certain characteristics, which are shown on the visual.
1. The descriptive and abbreviated command name is shown at the top of the display.
2. Choices are shown in the box on the right side of the display. These are some valid
values for each parameter. If an ellipsis (...) follows the last choice entered, more
choices are available and can be seen by positioning the cursor in the entry field for that

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
parameter and pressing F4 or by entering a question mark (?) and at least one space
and pressing Enter.
3. + for more values shown in the box in the middle of the display indicates that this
is a parameter list (which means that you can enter more than one value for this
parameter). To enter a list, type the first value, type a plus sign (+) on the next line, and
press Enter. A second display is shown, containing multiple value lines. When you have
entered all values, press Enter again to return to the command entry display.
Once this list has been entered, it can be changed.
4. There are some parameters for which you must enter a value. These are called
required parameters. You do not have to enter a value for other parameters, called
optional parameters; the system can use a default value instead. In this visual, Object
and Object type are required parameters. The other parameters, Detail and Output,
are optional parameters (that is, the system will use the default values shown on the
visual).
5. Function keys
Not all of the available function keys are shown on each command entry display. (In
fact, not all of the function keys shown on the visual are available on the DSPOBJD
Command Entry display.) You might have to press F24 (Shift + F12) several times to
view some of these functions keys. Even if the keys are not visible, they are active.

11-7
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Present as much or as little of the following information as you feel is needed to
explain the features of a Command Entry display. The students will use some of these
features in the accompanying exercise.
There are a couple of ways to enter a command. Use command prompting to assist when
entering commands.
This visual shows the DSPOBJD command entry display. Using this display, point out the
following characteristics of a command entry display:
A descriptive name (Display Object Description) and a command name (DSPOBJD) are
shown at the top of the display.
The box on the right side of the display shows the valid parameter values for an entry
field. The availability of further choices for a parameter is indicated by an ellipsis (...). To
view more choices, you need to position the cursor on that parameter and press F4 or
type a question mark (?) and at least one space and press Enter.
Some parameters can be lists. If a parameter can be a list, + for more values is
shown on the command entry display (see the box in the middle of the display). To enter
a list, type the first value, type a plus sign (+) on the next line, and press Enter. A
second display is shown containing several value lines. When you have entered all
values, press Enter again to return to the command entry display.
The system cannot assign a system-defined value to some parameters. You must
specify a value before the system can act on the command. Such parameters are called
required parameters. They are highlighted and are always listed first in the command.
Other parameters, called optional parameters, do not require you to specify a value; the
system can use a default value instead.
There are a number of function keys available with a command entry display.
- F3 = Exit exits the entry display and associated displays without running the
command. F12 = Return returns you to the previous display without running the
command.
- F4 = Prompt displays all of the permissible values for a given parameter.
- F5 = Refresh causes all parameters to be reset to their original system default value.
Any values that have already been typed are lost.
- F9 = All parameters during prompting, pressing F9 causes all parameters for a
command, whether additional or conditional ones, to be displayed.
- F10 = Additional parameters displays entry fields for the parameters that are not
commonly used.
- F16 = Command complete indicates that all values have been entered and requests
that the command run without showing additional displays.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
F11: Keywords or choices

IBM i
F11
Figure 11-4. F11: Keywords or choices
AS248.1
Notes:
You can display either keywords (shown in the box in the top left-hand corner of the visual)
or choices (shown in the box in the bottom right-hand corner of the visual) on a command
entry display. Your user profile controls the format, either choices or keywords, that is used
when you initially prompt for any command. After you have prompted for a command, F11
serves as a toggle from one format to the other.
In the example on the visual, the choice format was specified in the user profile prior to the
user signing on. When the user signed on and pressed F11 the first time, the keywords
were displayed. When the user pressed F11 again, the choices were displayed.
The commands used in the student exercises for this course are generally specified in
choice format. If you would like to use the keyword format while performing your exercises,
remember to use F11 after prompting for a command.
You can also use the CHGPRF command to change your user profile's USROPT
parameter and specify *CLKWD in addition to any user options you might already have or
now want.

11-9
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details There is another important function key: F11. It allows you to display either the
keywords or choices on a command entry display.
F11 is used as a toggle switch when a command prompt is displayed and controls which
view is shown. If choices are displayed, pressing F11 displays keywords. If keywords are
displayed, pressing F11 displays choices.
To have all command entry displays appear initially in keyword format, you can change
your user profile to include USROPT(*CLKWD). Point out that instructions for performing
this task are included in the students' notes for this visual, since exercise instructions are
presented in choice format.
Additional information Discontinue application share or live demo on this visual.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Conditional parameters
IBM i
Enter
Figure 11-5. Conditional parameters
AS248.1
Notes:
Some commands have conditional parameters. These parameters are conditioned by the
entry of certain predefined values for specific standard or additional parameters. The
prompts for conditional parameters are displayed automatically but only after you type the
conditioning parameter and press Enter.
In this example, the file to receive output, member to receive output, and replace or add
records parameters are displayed only after the output command is directed to a file when
you specify *OUTFILE for the output parameter.

11-11
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Some commands have conditional parameters which are displayed during
prompting only if needed because a value has been entered in another parameter.
This visual shows the DSPOBJD command as an example of a command with conditional
parameters. If you type *OUTFILE as the value for the OUTPUT parameter on the
DSPOBJD command and press Enter, IBM i automatically prompts for the parameters
OUTFILE and OUTMBR. The output file and member name are conditional parameters for
the DSPOBJD command. These two parameters are needed to run the command only if
the value of OUTPUT is *OUTFILE.
At the beginning of this unit, we said there were two ways to enter commands. Command
prompting, which we have just discussed, is one method. We will now discuss the second.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Free format method

IBM i
Keyword form
Command Entry
Previous commands and messages:
(No previous commands or messages)
===> DSPOBJD OBJ(account) objtype(*file) detail(*full) output(*print)
Positional form
Command Entry
Previous commands and messages:
(No previous commands or messages)
===> dspobjd account *file *full *print
Figure 11-6. Free format method
AS248.1
Notes:
There is another way to enter commands called the free format method. In this method, the
command and its parameters are entered on a command line as a string of characters. If
you use this method, you must be familiar with the commands and its parameters.
There are two ways to use the free format method to enter a command.
You can enter the command on the command line, which is the first example in this
visual.
Or
You can call up the Command Entry display (call qcmd) and enter the command
using that interface, which is the second example in this visual.
You can enter the command with its keywords followed by the appropriate values. This is
called the keyword format. If you use the keyword format, you can enter the keywords in
any order. If you do not enter keywords, the parameters must be in the exact order that i
expects. This is called positional form.
Another option available to enter a command is covered on the next page.

11-13
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details You might not need to use a command entry display for help with entering
commands. If you use the same commands often, you can probably remember the
commands and their parameters.
Therefore, the system offers another method of entering commands called the free format
method. In the free format method, the command and its parameters are entered on a
command line as a string of characters.
This visual shows two ways of entering a CL command by using the free format method.
You can either enter the command name and the associated parameter and values or enter
the command name and the correct value. When you use the first method, the keywords
and accompanying parameters can be in any order. With the second method, the values
must be in the right order.
What do you do if you do not know how to spell all or part of a command? IBM i provides
assistance to help you find the command.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Finding a command: Major Command Groups

menu
IBM i
Figure 11-7. Finding a command: Major Command Groups menu
AS248.1
Notes:
If you do not know how to spell a command, you can use the Major Command Groups
menu to search for it. To display this menu, do one of the following:
Position the cursor on a blank command line, and press F4.
Type only a question mark (?) on a command line, and press Enter.
Enter the command go major.
Selecting any option on this menu brings up another, more specific menu. Options on the
secondary grouping menus allow you to continually narrow your search until you find the
command you need.

11-15
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Finding a command by category

IBM i
Figure 11-8. Finding a command by category
AS248.1
Notes:
You can also find a command by either verb or noun category, such as DSP or LIB. Enter
the command GO CMDxxx, where xxx is the category of commands you want to be
displayed. When the commands in the specified category are displayed, enter the option
for the one you want to run.
In this example, entering GO CMDLIB caused the Library Commands display to be shown.
With this method, you are automatically prompted for the parameters of the command you
select.
Another way to find commands is to enter the command verb followed by an asterisk (*).
For example, entering DSP* displays all commands beginning with DSP, entering DLT*
displays all commands beginning with DLT, and so on.

11-17
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or False: On this system a user must memorize the

format of a command since the system does not provide any
help.
2. Which function key is used to provide prompt assistance with
a command?
a.
b.
c.
d.
F1
F3
F4
F9
3. Which function key is used to retrieve a command?

a.
b.
c.
d.
F1
F3
F4
F9
AS248.1
Notes:

11-19
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

help.

a command?
a. F1
b. F3
c. F4
d. F9
The answer is F4.

a. F1
b. F3
c. F4
d. F9
The answer is F9.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. True or False: The F9 and F10 keys show the same

additional parameters.
5. Which menu provides assistance when looking for a
command?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Main
User
Major
Command
6. True or False: The F11 function key is used to switch

between command keywords or Value choices.
AS248.1
Notes:

11-21
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i


command?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Main
User
Major
Command
The answer is Major.

The answer is True.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

Explain what conditional parameters are and how these are
used to customize a command
AS248.1
Notes:
Menus and CL commands can take you almost anywhere you want to go and allow you to
do what you want to do on the Power if you have the proper authority.
Prompting helps you enter commands by reducing your dependency on memorization and
reference manuals.
When in doubt, use the GO CMDxxx or GO MAJOR commands.

11-23
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The combination of menus and CL commands makes the system very flexible
and user-oriented. In summary, assure the students that they will use menus heavily only
while still learning their way around the system. As time goes on, they will find themselves
using the appropriate commands more and more. It is always natural to use prompting.
Why memorize? The online help is always there to give them more information as they
work with areas that are less familiar.
Learning the item (LIB, OBJ, FLR, DIR, and so forth) and the action (WRK, DSP, CRT,
RMV, and so forth) abbreviations offer rewards as they will find they can use GO CMDxxx
to find new commands that help them accomplish new tasks. They can also use the GO
MAJOR command to bring up the appropriate menu listing all the related commands.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 12. Concepts: Object, library, and the IFS

Estimated time
00:25

This unit describes the concepts of objects, libraries, library lists, and
the integrated file system (IFS).

Explain what an object is on the Power i
Explain the difference between an object's simple and fully
qualified name
Explain what a library is
Explain what a library list is and what purpose it serves
Explain how to display and change your library list
Explain what the integrated file system (IFS) is
List the different types of data supported by the IFS

Accountability:

12-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

qualified name
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details You have learned about things that the Power i system makes available to help
you do your job as a system operator: special keys and displays, help, and messages. In
this unit, you will be introduced to terminology and concepts relating to IBM i objects. These
objects have been mentioned in previous units, but you must understand them fully before
continuing with the course.
Transition statement What is an object? An object has a name, occupies storage, and
is a member of a library. (Each object has a name and can be created and deleted with CL
commands.) Files, programs, user profiles, and queues are just a few of the many types of
objects.

12-3
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
12.1. Object concepts

In this topic, students learn what an object is and the difference between an unqualified
(simple) and a qualified object name. They learn how to identify IBM-supplied objects and
how to search for objects which begin with the same letters (a generic search).

12-5
Instructor Guide
Object-based architecture
IBM i
IBM i defined object types:

Each object type supports specific methods.
Specific commands are used for each type of object.
Programs (*PGM) executed

Files (*FILE) processed
Library
Program
Job queue
File
Command
Data area
Figure 12-2. Object-based architecture
AS248.1
Notes:
IBM i supports specifically defined object types:
There are specific operations that can be performed against each object type:
- They are encapsulated with pre-defined interfaces
- Only valid functions are allowed for each object
This improves data integrity
Specific commands are used to work with specific objects
There are specific actions you can perform on different types of objects. For example:
Programs are type *PGM; these are executed on the system
Files are type *FILE:
- Data on the system resides inside of a file
- Files are processed by programs

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details On this page, you see some of the object types that can be found on your
system.
Remember that on the Power i, scatter loading of all objects is in effect, therefore these
objects would be scatter loaded across multiple disk drives.
This is a concept picture to show you some of the different types of objects that can be
found on the system.

12-7
Instructor Guide
Object: A definition
IBM i
Library
*LIB
File
*FILE
User profile
*USRPRF
Program
*PGM
Output queue
*OUTQ
Message queue
*MSGQ
Command
*CMD
Job description
*JOBD
Job queue
*JOBQ
Subsystem description
*SBSD
Figure 12-3. Object: A definition
AS248.1
Notes:
An object is anything that exists in storage and on which operations can be performed. On
the Power i, an object is a named storage space consisting of a set of characteristics that
describes itself and, in some cases, data. Some examples of objects are listed on the
visual.
Characteristics of an object are that it has a name and occupies space in storage on the
system. Each object type has a corresponding predefined value.
The values for the object types, as well as the object types themselves, are shown on the
visual; for example, the object type for file is *FILE, and for program it is *PGM.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Files, programs, user profiles, and queues are just a few of the many types of
objects.
Students are already familiar with some objects on the system: file, program, menu,
message queue, and command. As we continue with the course, they will be introduced to
other objects, such as library, output queue, job queue, user profile, and subsystem
description.

12-9
Instructor Guide
IBM: Supplied objects start with Q

IBM i
QGPL
QSYS
QBATCH
QSYSOPR
QHLPSYS
QPRINT
Figure 12-4. IBM: Supplied objects start with Q
AS248.1
Notes:
Some objects are provided by IBM as part of the operating system known as IBM i at
V7R1. In previous version the OS was known as i5/OS and OS/400.
Other objects are provided by IBM as part of the IBM licensed program products (LPPs).
Still other objects are created by system users.
For easy identification, most of the IBM-supplied objects begin with the letter Q. It is
suggested, but not required, that user-created objects begin with a letter other than Q.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Most objects provided by IBM as part of i or the IBM LPPs begin with the letter
Q. It is recommended, but not mandatory, that user objects begin with a letter other than Q.

12-11
Instructor Guide
Working with an object

IBM i
Simple name:
CALL EX1
versus
Qualified name:
CALL AS24xx/EX1
Library Object
name name
Figure 12-5. Working with an object
AS248.1
Notes:
Each object has a name. The name is usually made of up two parts: library name and
object name. The object type sometimes makes up the third part of the name.
When you are working with an object name you can either specify the object name (called
a simple name) or a library name and object name (called a qualified name).
Below is a description of the IBM-supplied objects shown on the visual. Note that the same
object can have multiple identifiers.
QGPL (*LIB)
General purpose library
QSYS (*LIB)
System library
QBATCH
- (*CLS)
Batch subsystem class
- (*JOBQ)
Batch subsystem queue
- (*JOBD)
Batch subsystem job description

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
QSYSOPR
- (*USRPRF) System operator user profile
- (*MSGQ)
QPRINT
- (*OUTQ)
Default printer output queue
- (*FILE)
Default spool output print file for OUTQ (*JOB)
QHLPSYS (*LIB)
System help library
The combination of name, type, and library must be unique.

12-13
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details An object can be referred to by its own name, such as EX1, a simple name, or
an object can be referred to by both its name and the name of the library with which it is
associated, a qualified name.
When a qualified name is used, the library name is specified before the object name and
the two parts are separated by a forward slash (/), such as MYLIB/MYFILE.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
12.2. Library and library list concepts

In this topic, the students learn what a library and a library list are and how the system uses
a library list to find objects.
The concept of a library list has little relevance to work being done on a workstation that
uses System i Navigator as its interface; however, it is relevant to all the batch jobs and to
workstations attached to the system through 5250 emulation.

12-15
Instructor Guide
What is a library?
IBM i
MYLIB
Obj
COURSE
CUSTMNU
CUSTPRT
PROG3
PRTCHECKS
SETUP
Type
*MSGF
*MENU
*CMD
*PGM
*FILE
*PGM
PRTCHECKS
CUSTPRT
PROG3
SETUP
COURSE
CUSTMNU
Figure 12-6. What is a library?
AS248.1
Notes:
A library is a system object that serves as a directory to other objects.
A library groups related objects and allows the user to find objects by name.
To identify a specific object to the system, a user needs to provide the object name, the
object type, and the name of the library containing the object.
You can create, delete, save, or restore a library.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details A library is a directory to other objects.
Each library contains, among other things, the name, type, and location of every object
associated with it. As shown on the visual, the MYLIB library contains the object name,
type, and location of six objects. Each object is stored in a different location on disk.
An object can be associated with only one library. Thus, while it is possible to have two
different objects with the same name and of the same type, they must be associated with
different libraries. Also, two objects with the same name can be associated with the same
library as long as they are of different types.
Please refer to the information center (CL command finder) to find details on the CL
commands that can be used to work with the libraries listed in the student notes.

12-17
Instructor Guide
Purpose of libraries
IBM i
Libraries are used to organize objects.

For security reasons
For backup reasons
APPLICATION
By application
By owner
BACKUP
By object type: Program versus files

By use: Production versus test
OWNER
SECURITY
Figure 12-7. Purpose of libraries
AS248.1
Notes:
Libraries are used by IBM and Power implementers to organize objects. The idea is to
group objects for easy access by those who should access them or by the manner in which
they are accessed.
Libraries can be set up based on:
Security
You can ensure security by specifying which users have authority to use the library and
what they are allowed to do with it. You can also simplify security by having an
automatic authorization list and a public authority assignment for newly created objects
based on the CRTAUT parameter value of the library. Auditing attributes for newly
created objects can be set based on the create object audit (CRTOBJAUD) parameter
value.
User
You can group certain objects for individual users. For example, you might group all
files used by a particular user in a particular library. This makes it easy for the users to

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
work with the files. When they work with the files, they have to add only one library to
the library list.
Application
You can group all objects used for an individual application. For example, you might
associate all your order entry files and programs with an order entry library called
OELIB. You have to add only one library to the library list to ensure that all your order
entry files and programs are in the list. This is advantageous if you do not want to
specify a library name every time you use an order entry file or program.
Save/restore
You can simplify save and restore operations by associating objects that are saved and
restored at the same time with the same library. You can then use the save library
(SAVLIB) command instead of saving objects individually using the save object
(SAVOBJ) command. This saves you a lot of time.
Object type
You can group objects by type. For example, you might associate all programs with one
library and all files with another.
Use
You can group objects by how they are used. For example, you can associate all
objects used for production with one library and those used for testing with another.

12-19
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details To get the students thinking and talking about libraries, ask them if they can
think of other ways to set up libraries.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
IBM: Supplied libraries

IBM i
Library
Description
QSYS
System library
QSYS2
System library for CPIs
QUSRSYS
System library for users
QHLPSYS
Online documentation for some system functions
QGPL
User's general purpose library
QTEMP
User's temporary library
QSPL
Spooling library
QDOC
Documents and folders filed by office users
Figure 12-8. IBM: Supplied libraries
AS248.1
Notes:
There are a number of IBM-supplied libraries which are shipped either with IBM i or the IBM
LPPs. This visual shows just a few of the more commonly used of these libraries. (Notice
they all begin with Q.)
You should not delete these libraries or the objects in them.
QSYS is the library file system. This file system supports the library structure of your
server. This file system provides access to database files and all of the other Power i server
object types that the library support manages in the system and to basic user auxiliary
storage pools (ASPs).
QSYS2 library is a supplemental library for objects which do not begin with the letter Q. For
example, objects for call program interfaces (CPIs) are included in QSYS2.

12-21
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details These are only a few of the many libraries supplied by IBM. Some are included
as part of IBM i; others are present only if certain IBM LPPs are installed.
Neither the IBM-supplied libraries nor the objects in these libraries should be deleted. If
they are, IBM i and the IBM LPPs might not work as intended.
Transition statement You now know what an object and a library are. Now let us look at
how you can use a list of library names to locate an object.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Native library structure

IBM i
System
library
QSYS
File
System
objects
Program
Job
Queues
Data
Areas
User
libraries
LIBA
User
objects
LIBB
Data
Areas
LIBC
Program
COMMAND
QTEMP
QTEMP
QTEMP
File
File
File
Job
Queues
command
Program
Job
Queues
Data
Areas
command
Job
Queues
Data
Areas
Program
command
Compare
Hierarchical
structure
Figure 12-9. Native library structure
AS248.1
Notes:
This visual is used as a graphical representation of the hierarchical differences between
IBM i versus windows.
The top half of this visual shows how the operating system, IBM i or i5/OS or OS/400, is
stored in the library named QSYS. From a windows perspective this is the root. All user and
IBM LPP (licensed program product) libraries are stored as a first level off of QSYS. In this
environment you do not create a library inside another library.
The bottom half of this visual shows a graphical representation of how directories are
stored in windows. In this environment a user can create a directory inside of another
directory, etc. In this environment you can go 256 levels deep, completely opposite of what
is supported by the System i operating system.

12-23
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details On this page, you see some of the object types that can be located on your
system. Remember that on the Power i, scatter loading of all objects is in effect; therefore
these objects would be scatter loaded across multiple disk drives. This is a concept picture
to show you some of the different types of objects that can be found on the system.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Library list
IBM i
DSPLIB
System libraries
(15 maximum)
QSYS
QSYS2
QHLPSYS
QUSRSYS
Product libraries
QRPG
QCBL
Current library
PAYLIB
User libraries
QGPL
QTEMP
PAYTSTLIB
*LIBL
*CURLIB *USRLIBL
(250 maximum)
One associated with every job

Figure 12-10. Library list
AS248.1
Notes:
A library list is a list that indicates which libraries are to be searched for an object and the
order in which they are to be searched. Sometimes a library list is referred to as a library
search list.
Every job on the system has its own library list. While the library lists for multiple jobs can
be identical, each is used only by the job to which it belongs. Library lists are not objects
and cannot be created or deleted. A library list for a job is automatically set up when the job
begins and is deleted when the job ends.
There are a number of ways to reference an object in a library list. You can use the simple
name of the object, in which case the system searches each library named in the library list
for a job until it finds the object. You can instruct the system to look only in a specific library,
or you can use all or just a portion of the library list for the job to search for the object.
The first part of a library list is the system part. This part can contain the names of up to 15
libraries. When the Power is shipped, the system value QSYSLIBL contains the names of
the libraries that are to become the system part of the library list. The libraries named in this
part of the library list for each job are normally specified by the programmer and are used

12-25
Instructor Guide
by all jobs on the system. Thus, while each job has its own separate library list, this part of
each library list is usually identical for almost all jobs on a system.
The second part of each library list, called product libraries, contains the names of up to
two libraries associated with the use of particular program products. These library names
are automatically added to and removed from a job's library list as the products are used
within a job. A product library can be a duplicate of the current library or of a library in the
user part of the library list.
The next part of a library list is the current library of the job. This library should be the one
containing the objects most frequently used by the job. This library name usually comes
either from the user profile associated with the job or from a command run within the job.
The last part of the library list for a job is called the user portion of the list. Up to 250 library
names (this is the default from V5R2 on) can be contained in this part of the library list. The
library names found in this part of a library list can come from:
The system value (QUSRLIBL)
The job description associated with the job (we will discuss this later)
Commands run from a command line
Commands run in a user's initial program

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Explain this visual in detail. The concept of a library search list is a difficult one
to grasp and is more relevant to emulation jobs than it is to using GUI. While it might not be
necessary to explain all of the following information to the students, they must understand
that:
Each job has its own library list.
A library list for a job is used only when an object is referred to by its simple name.
A library list is not an object. It is automatically set up when a job begins and is deleted
when the job ends.
When a library list is used, the libraries are searched in the order in which their names
are specified in the list.
It might be helpful to point out that i keeps a scratch pad of information about each job on
the system and that the library list exists in this scratch pad along with other information
that i needs to run and manage the job.
The system needs to know which library (or libraries) it must search to locate an object. It
would be very cumbersome if it were necessary to specify a library name on every
reference to an object.
To make referencing objects easier, each job has its own list of libraries that can be
searched to find an object. When a simple name is used to reference an object, the library
list associated with the job is used to search for the object.

12-27
Instructor Guide
Finding an object
IBM i
Simple name:
Qualified name:
QSYS
INQLIB
QCWW
QCXXX
PAY77
AP60
QCZZZ
QCYYY
PAY1010
AP55
PAYTSTLIB
CALL PAY02
CALL PAYTSTLIB/PAY02
Job's library list

QSYS
QSYS2
QHLPSYS
QUSRSYS
System libraries
QRPG
QCBL
Product libraries
PAYLIB
Current library
PAYLIB
AP55
PAY02
PAY01
PAY04
PAY01
AP05
PAY02
PAY05
QGPL
QTEMP
PAYTSTLIB
INQLIB
User libraries
Figure 12-11. Finding an object
AS248.1
Notes:
If you include a library name when referencing an object, only that one library is searched
for the object. The library named in the qualified reference to the object does not have to be
in the library list for the job; however, if you do not specify a library name when searching
for an object, the library list is used to search for the object.
Look at the library list on the visual. Note which objects are associated with each library.
Now answer the following questions about this library list.
Which libraries are searched to find the program PAY02?
First QSYS and then QSYS2, QHLPSYS, QUSRSYS, QRPG, and QCBL. Finally, the
program is found in PAYLIB.
If you use the simple name PAY02, will the object named PAY02 in PAYTSTLIB be
found?
No.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
There are a number of CL commands you can use to work with library lists. These
commands do not affect libraries or the objects to which they point. They affect only the
library list for the job.
The following commands can be used from within a job to modify the library list for that job:
CHGLIBL LIBL(name name) CURLIB(name) completely replaces the library names
currently specified in the user part of the library list for the job with the library names
specified in the command. This command can also be used to change the current
library of the job to one specified in the command.
EDTLIBL displays the user part of the current library list for the job and allows one or
more library names to be added to or removed from the list. It also allows the sequence
of library names to be changed.
ADDLIBLE LIB(name) POSITION(*FIRST/*LAST) adds the specified library name to
the beginning or the end of the user part of the library list for the job.
ADDLIBLE LIB(name) POSITION(*AFTER/*BEFORE name) adds the specified
library name immediately after or before a library name already on the user part of the
ADDLIBLE LIB(name) POSITION(*REPLACE name) places the specified library
name on the user part of the library list for the job in place of a library name already on
the list. The replaced library name is removed from the list.
RMVLIBLE LIB(name) removes the specified library name from the user part of the
CHGCURLIB CURLIB(name) changes the current library of the job to the one specified
in the command.
DSPLIBL displays the names of all libraries in all parts of the library list for the job and
identifies which part of the library list each library is in.
Note
The above commands simply allow the user to see and change a library list for a job. They
have no effect on the libraries themselves.

12-29
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details In the example on this visual, both PAYTSTLIB and PAYLIB point to programs
named PAY02. It is important for the student to remember that these programs are two
separate and distinct objects.
Qualified references using each of the three user library names would result in the
following:
CALL PAYLIB/PAY02 : The PAY02 program associated with PAYLIB is run.
CALL PAYTSTLIB/PAY02 : PAY02 program associated with PAYTSTLIB is run.
CALL INQLIB/PAY02 : An error occurs because there is no PAY02 program associated
with INQLIB.
If the library list for the job is set up as indicated on the visual, an unqualified reference
to PAY02 (CALL PAY02) would be handled by the system as follows:
a. QSYS library would be searched, but no program named PAY02 would be found.
b. QSYS2 library would be searched, but no program named PAY02 would be found.
c. QHLPSYS library would be searched, but no program named PAY02 would be
found.
d. QUSRSYS, QRPG, and QCBL libraries would be searched in turn, but no program
named PAY02 would be found.
e. PAYLIB library would be searched, and when the program named PAY02 was found,
it would be run.
What if the user wanted to run the program PAY02 associated with library PAYTSTLIB?
Could the system ever find it? The answer is: only if the program name were qualified or if
the order of the library names in the library list for the job was changed so that PAYTSTLIB
preceded PAYLIB.
Transition statement Remind the students that each library list is associated with a
single job and that any changes they make to a job's library list are lost when the job ends.
If they need a library list set up in the same way in a subsequent job, they must make the
same changes to the library list for that job.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Quiz
IBM i
Which library does each of the following commands use?
DSPOBJD PAYTSTLIB/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM)

DSPOBJD PAY02 TYPE(*PGM)
DSPOBJD *USRLIBL/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM)
DSPOBJD *CURLIB/PAY02 TYPE (*PGM)
DSPOBJD *ALLUSR/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM)
DSPOBJD *ALL/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM)
Figure 12-12. Quiz
AS248.1
Notes:
Answer these questions.

12-31
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Answers
IBM i
DSPOBJD PAYTSTLIB/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM) PAYTSTLIB
Qualified name
PAYLIB
Library list for a job

DSPOBJD *USRLIBL/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM) PAYLIB
User portion of library list,

including current library
PAYLIB
Current library
PAYLIB
Searches all non-system

libraries
PAYLIB
Search all libraries

Figure 12-13. Answers
AS248.1
Notes:
Note
If you specify an object name and *ALL or *ALLUSR for the library name, the system
searches for multiple objects, and the search returns objects of the indicated name and
type to which you have authorized access.

12-33
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Review the solutions with the students. Have them explain why the system
searches the libraries in the order it does.
DSPOBJD PAYTSTLIB/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM)
- Command specifies which library is to be used.
- This command is a simple name, the library list will be used.
DSPOBJD *USRLIBL/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM)
- this command specified that the user portion of the library list is to be searched
- this command specified to search only in the current library
- This command specifies all user libraries are to be searched. When you specify all
libraries then they will be searched in alphabetical order.
- This command specifies all libraries are to be searched. When you specify all
libraries then they will be searched in alphabetical order.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
12.3. Integrated file system concepts

In this topic, the students learn what the IFS is and how it is structured, what a file Power is,
the difference between database and stream files, and how to locate objects in the IFS.

12-35
Instructor Guide
What is the integrated file system?

IBM i
Integrated file system

Directories
Folders
Libraries
Database
files
Stream
files
Documents
Objects
Figure 12-14. What is the integrated file system?
AS248.1
Notes:
The key features of the integrated file system (IFS) are as follows:
Support for storing information in stream files that can contain long, continuous strings
of data, for example, the text of a document or the pixels in a picture. The stream file
support is designed for efficient use in client/server applications.
A hierarchical directory structure that allows objects to be organized in a branch-like
structure. Specifying the path through the directories to an object accesses the object.
A common interface that allows users and applications to access not only the stream
files but also database files, documents, and other objects that are stored in your
server.
A common view of stream files that are stored locally on your server, an Integrated
xSeries Server for Power i, or a remote Windows NT server. Stream files can also be
stored remotely on a local area network (LAN) server, a Novell NetWare server, another
remote Power i server, or a network file system server.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

12-37
Instructor Guide
File system concept

IBM i
UNIX, Power i,
or PC clients
PC
clients
Power i Users
Applications
IFS
menus/commands
APIs
NFS
server
IBM i
file server
OS/2 Warp
server
Novell
NetWare
server
IFS interface
Root
file
system
QOpenSys
file
system
QSYS.LIB
file
system
QDLS
file
system
QOPT
file
system
QFileSvr.400
file
system
UDFS
file
system
NFS
file
system
QNetWare
file
system
Integrated
xServer
Series for
Power i
QNTC
file
system
Figure 12-15. File system concept
AS248.1
Notes:
A file system provides you with the support to access specific segments of storage that are
organized as logical units. On your server, these logical units are files, directories, libraries,
and objects.
Each file system has a set of logical structures and rules for interacting with information in
storage. These structures and rules can be different from one file system to another.
In fact, from the perspective of structures and rules, IBM i support for accessing database
files and various other object types through libraries can be thought of as a file system.
Similarly, IBM i support for accessing documents (which are really stream files) through the
folder structure can be thought of as a separate file system.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

12-39
Instructor Guide
Overview of the IFS

IBM i
Support for storing unstructured data (stream files):

Files that contain long, continuous strings of data
Designed for efficient use in client/server applications
Hierarchical directory structure:

Allows tree-like organization of objects
Allows access of objects through directory path
Common Access Interface for all objects stored on Power i:

Stream files
Library objects
Figure 12-16. Overview of the IFS
AS248.1
Notes:
Support for storing unstructured data (stream files).
Files that contain long, continuous strings of data:
- Text documents
- Picture elements
- PC file systems
- Other platform file systems:
Linux
AIX
Windows
Designed for efficient use in client/server applications
Hierarchical directory structure.
Allows tree-like organization of objects
Allows access of objects through directory path

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Common Access Interface.

All objects stored on Power i
- Stream files
Unstructured data
- Library objects:
Programs
Database table
Data areas
Message queues
And so forth

12-41
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
File systems supported by the IFS

IBM i
root (/)
QOpenSys
UDFS
QSYS.LIB
Independent ASP QSYS.LIB
QDLS
QOPT
QNetWare
QNTC
QFileSvr.400
NFS
Figure 12-17. File systems supported by the IFS
AS248.1
Notes:
root (/): The root (/) file system, which takes full advantage of the stream file support
and hierarchical directory structure of the IFS. The root file system has the
characteristics of the disk operating system (DOS) and OS/2 file systems.
QOpenSys: The open systems file system, such as POSIX and XPG. Like the root file
system, this file system takes advantage of the stream file and directory support that is
provided by the IFS. In addition, it supports case-sensitive object names.
UDFS: The user-defined file system, which resides on the auxiliary storage pool (ASP)
or independent ASP of your choice. You create and manage this file system.
QSYS.LIB: The library file system, which supports the library structure on your server.
This file system provides access to database files and all of the other Power i server
object types that the library support manages in the system as well as basic user ASPs.
Independent ASP QSYS.LIB: The independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system, which
supports your server library structure in any independent ASPs you create and define.

12-43
Instructor Guide
This file system provides access to database files and all of the other Power i server
object types that the library support manages.
QDLS: The document library services file system. This file system provides access to
documents and folders.
QOPT: The optical file system, which provides access to stream data that is stored on
optical media.
QNetWare: The QNetWare file system, which provides access to the following:
- Local or remote data
- Objects that are stored on a server that runs Novell NetWare 4.10 or 4.11
- Stand-alone PC servers running Novell NetWare 3.12, 4.10 4.11 or 5.0
You can dynamically mount NetWare file systems on top of existing local file systems.
QNTC: The Windows NT Server file system, which provides access to data and objects
that are stored on a server running Windows NT 4.0 or higher. It allows Power i server
applications to use the same data as Windows NT clients. This includes access to the
data on a Windows NT Server that is running on an integrated PC server. See
OS/400-AS/400 Integration with Windows NT Server, SC41-5439-01 (SC41-5439) for
details.
QFileSvr.400: This file system provides access to other file systems that reside on
remote Power i servers.
NFS: Network File System (NFS), which provides you with access to data and objects
that are stored on a remote NFS server. An NFS server can export an NFS that NFS
clients then mount dynamically.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

12-45
Instructor Guide
IFS accessed with Windows browser

IBM i
Tree-like
Hierarchical organization
User view from desktop
Single drive
represents
entire Power i
PC style directories
Folders and documents
POSIX compliant name space
Native i objects
Figure 12-18. IFS accessed with Windows browser
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

12-47
Instructor Guide
Stream files versus database files

IBM i
Database files
field-a
field-b
field-c
field-d
record 1
field-a
field-b
field-c
field-d
record 2
field-a
field-b
field-c
field-d
record n
Stream files
.........................................................................
.........................................................................
.........................................................................
Figure 12-19. Stream files versus database files
AS248.1
Notes:
Database files are those that are traditionally created on the Power i. They have predefined
subdivisions that consist of records and fields. They have a specific layout that consists of
records and, within a record, a fixed number of fields.
The IFS provides support for storing and operating on information in the form of stream
files. A stream file is a file that contains a continuous stream of data.
Documents that are stored in Power i folders are stream files. Other examples of stream
files are PC files and the files in UNIX systems. An IFS stream file is a system object that
has an object type of *STMF.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details To better understand stream files, contrast them with Power i database files.
The different structure of stream files and record-based files affects how an application
uses them. It also affects where each type of file is best used in an application.
A record-based file, for example, is well suited to storing customer details, such as
name, address, and account balance. These predefined fields can be individually
accessed and manipulated through the use of the extensive programming facilities of
the system.
A stream file is better suited to storing information, such as a customer's picture, which
is composed of a continuous string of bits that represent variations in color.

12-49
Instructor Guide
IFS structure
IBM i
root
\QSYS.LIB
\QDLS
\QNTC
\DIR1
DOMAIN1
LIB1
DIR1
LIB1
FLR1
SERVERS
DIR1
FLR1
ALIAS1 ALIAS2
IPCS1
DIR3
DIR4
SERVER1
NET1
NET2
DIR5
DIR5
Figure 12-20. IFS structure
AS248.1
Notes:
A directory is a special object that uses names you specify to locate other objects within it.
Each directory contains a list of objects, including other directories, that are attached to it.
The IFS provides a hierarchical directory structure that allows you to access all objects in
your server. You might think of this directory structure as an upside-down tree with roots at
the top and branches below. The branches represent directories in the directory hierarchy
and have subordinate branches called subdirectories. Attached to the various directory and
subdirectory branches are objects, such as files. Locating an object requires specifying a
path through the directories to the subdirectory to which the object is attached. Objects that
are attached to a particular directory are sometimes described as being in that directory.
A particular directory branch, along with all of its subordinate branches (subdirectories) and
all of the objects that are attached to those branches, is referred to as a subtree. Each file
Power is a major subtree in the IFS directory structure. In the library file system (QSYS.LIB
subtree), a library is handled in the same way as a subdirectory. Objects in a library are
handled like objects in a subdirectory. Because database files contain objects (database
file members), they are handled like subdirectories rather than objects. In the document

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
library services file system (QDLS subtree), folders are handled like subdirectories, and
documents in folders are handled like objects in a subdirectory.
Because of differences between file systems, the operations you can perform in one
subtree of the directory hierarchy might not work in another subtree.
The IFS directory support is similar to the directory support that is provided by the DOS file
system. In addition, it provides features typical of UNIX systems, such as the ability to store
a file only once but to access it through multiple paths using links.

12-51
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details We must distinguish between current directory and home directory.
The current directory is similar in concept to current library.
The home directory is the current directory provided to you when you sign on.
When you request that an operation be performed on an object, such as a file, the system
looks for the object in the current directory unless you specify a different directory path. The
current directory is similar to a current library. It is also called the current working directory
or just working directory.
The home directory is used as the current directory when you sign on to the system. The
name of the home directory is specified in the user profile. When a job is started for a user,
the system looks in the user profile for the name of the user's home directory. If a directory
by that name does not exist on the system, the home directory is changed to the root (/)
directory.
Typically, the system administrator who creates the user profile for a user would also create
the user's home directory. There is a subdirectory called home under the root directory that
contains the home directory for each user. The system default is to use the user profile
name to identify the home directory for that user. Users can specify a directory other than
the home directory as their current directory at any time after they sign on.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Locating objects in the IFS

IBM i
Root
Absolute path name

/Dir1/Dir2/File
Dir 1
Dir 2
Relative path name

Dir2/File
File
Figure 12-21. Locating objects in the IFS
AS248.1
Notes:
A path name (also called a pathname on some systems) tells the system how to locate an
object. The path name is expressed as a sequence of directory names followed by the
name of the object. Individual directories and the object name are separated by a forward
slash (/), for example:
directory1/directory2/file
For the convenience of PC users, the back slash (\) can be used instead of the forward
slash in IFS commands.
There are two ways of indicating a path name.
An absolute path name begins at the highest level, or root directory, which is identified
by the forward slash (/).
/Dept2/Photo/Smith
If the path name does not begin with the forward slash (/), the system assumes that the
path begins at the user's current directory. This type of path name is called a relative

12-53
Instructor Guide
path name. For example, if a user's current directory is Dept2 and it has a subdirectory
named Photo containing the file Smith, the relative path name is:
Photo/Smith
Notice that the path name does not include the name of the current directory. The first
item in the name is the directory or object at the next level below the current directory.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Discuss directory structure concepts so that students understand how to locate
a specific object.
Play.

12-55
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or False: An object is anything that exists in storage and

on which operations can be performed.
2. A _____ is a special object that has a named set of objects
associated with it and is used to group objects. (Select all
that apply.)
a.
b.
c.
d.
Directory
Link
Library
File system
3. A PC object is stored in which of the following file systems in

the IFS?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Root
QDLS
QSYS.LIB
QOPT
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i
1. True or False: An object is anything that exists in storage and on

which operations can be performed.
The answer is True.
2. A _____ is a special object that has a named set of objects associated

with it and is used to group objects. (Select all that apply.)
a. Directory
b. Link
c. Library
d. File system
The answers are Directory and Library.
3. A PC object is stored in which of the following file systems in the IFS?

a. Root
b. QDLS
c. QSYS.LIB
d. QOPT
The answer is Root.

12-57
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. True or False: A library list is used by the system when you

use simple naming to work with an object.
5. The IBM i operating system is stored in the _______ system
library.
a.
b.
c.
d.
QUSRSYS
QGPL
QSPL
QSYS
6. True or False: All libraries on the system are in the system

library QGPL.
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

The answer is True.

library.
a.
b.
c.
d.
QUSRSYS
QGPL
QSPL
QSYS
The answer is QSYS.

library QGPL.
The answer is True.

12-59
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

qualified name
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Use this visual to summarize this unit. Ensure the students understand the
following:
An object is anything that exists in and occupies space in storage and on which
operations can be performed.
A library is a directory to other objects.
A library list (or a library search list) is a list of libraries that is used to search for an
object.
The IFS is a part of i that supports stream input/output and storage management.
Explain that either a simple name (object name) or qualified name (library name/object
name) can be used to find an object. When a simple name is referred to, the system uses
the library list for a job to find the object.

12-61
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 13. Object management using 5250 emulation

Estimated time
00:25

This unit describes how to work with objects, libraries, the library list
and the IFS when using a 5250 emulation session. Commands and
menus relating to these will also be discussed.

Use the correct commands to work with objects

Display the attributes of an object
Use the correct commands to create a duplicate object
Use the correct command to copy a file
Use the correct command to create a library
Use the correct command to display the contents of a library
Use the commands to add or remove a library to or from the library
list
Use the correct command to display the IFS

Accountability:
Exercise

13-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Use the commands to add or remove a library to or from the
library list
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

13-3
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
13.1. Objects
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Starting with the next visual you should perform
an application share of 5250 emulation for the remainder of topic 1 and topic 2 covering the
details covered in the student and instructor notes.
2. Select the share applications or desktop icon in the Elluminate toolbar which looks like a
monitor with a green arrow inside it.
demo on your instructor PC of 5250 emulation for the remainder of topic 1 and topic 2
covering the details covered in the student and instructor notes.

13-5
Instructor Guide
The DATA and FILE menus

IBM i
Figure 13-2. The DATA and FILE menus
AS248.1
Notes:
You can use the DATA menu to work with the different types of objects on the system. You
can navigate to this menu by using the GO DATA command or, from the main Help menu,
select option 4.
Use the FILE menu to work with files on the system. You can navigate to this menu by
selecting option 1 from the DATA menu or use the GO FILE command.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

13-7
Instructor Guide
Work with Objects command

IBM i
Figure 13-3. Work with Objects command
AS248.1
Notes:
The Work with Objects (WRKOBJ) command shows a list of objects from one or more
libraries. To locate an object on the system, you must specify the following:
Name of the object
Library where this object is stored
Type of object that you are searching for
Place your cursor on the Object type parameter and press F4 to see a full list of all the
different types of objects that can exist on your system.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

13-9
Instructor Guide
Work with Objects display

IBM i
Figure 13-4. Work with Objects display
AS248.1
Notes:
This is the display shown when you specify the command on the previous page and specify
*ALL for both the name and type parameter. In this case, we specified the AS2401 library.
This display will show all of the objects located in a specific library. Notice the columns and
the different types of information it shows you on this first display. You can also use the
function keys to see additional information.
Also notice the actions (using the option column) that you can perform for these objects,
assuming you have the correct authority to perform these actions.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

13-11
Instructor Guide
Display Object Description command

IBM i
Figure 13-5. Display Object Description command
AS248.1
Notes:
The Display Object Description (DSPOBJD) command shows the names and attributes of
specified objects in the specified library or libraries.
Place your cursor on the Library parameter and use the F4 prompt key to see a list of
the values you can specify for this parameter.
Use the Detail parameter to specify what level of detailed information you wish to
display for your object. Use the Help key on this parameter, and play with it to see
exactly what the system will show you depending on which value you specify.
You can display object description information for any object on which you have authority
other than *EXCLUDE authority. Libraries for which you do not have execute (*EXECUTE)
authority cannot be shown, even if they are specified in the command.
If only one object is to be shown, you can specify it by entering the object name, object
type, the name of the library where it is located, and the ASP device where the library is
located.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

13-13
Instructor Guide
Display Object Description details (1 of 2)

IBM i
Figure 13-6. Display Object Description details (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
The Display Object Description - Full display presents the names and attributes of selected
objects in a requested library or libraries.
Pressing Enter will return you to the previous display or, when more than one library is
displayed, take you forward through the libraries, for example, library one of four.
If you see More... on the lower right side of your display, there is more information to
view. Press Page Down (or Roll Up) to move toward the end of the information. Press
Page Up (or Roll Down) to move toward the beginning of the information.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

13-15
Instructor Guide
Display Object Description details (2 of 2)

IBM i
Figure 13-7. Display Object Description details (2 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
If you see Bottom instead of More..., you are at the end of the list.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

13-17
Instructor Guide
Create Duplicate Object command

IBM i
Figure 13-8. Create Duplicate Object command
AS248.1
Notes:
The Create Duplicate Object (CRTDUPOBJ) command copies a single object or a group of
objects:
The new object must be renamed if it is created in the library that contains the original
object.
The newly created object can retain the name of the original object if it is created in a
library different than the one that contains the original object.
You can copy a group of related objects by specifying a generic object name or by
specifying *ALL or more than one object type. When copying a group of related objects,
you must specify a different library in which the new objects are created.
The Duplicate data (DATA) parameter specifies whether the data records in database
physical file or save files are copied to the new object. Members of database physical
files are copied whether or not the data contained in them is copied.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

13-19
Instructor Guide
Copy File command

IBM i
Figure 13-9. Copy File command
AS248.1
Notes:
The Copy File (CPYF) command copies all or part of a file from the database or from an
external device to the database or to an external device.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

13-21
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
13.2. Libraries and library lists

In this topic, the students learn what a library and a library list are and how the system uses
a library list to find objects.
The concept of a library list has little relevance to work being done on a workstation that
uses System i Navigator as its interface; however, it is relevant to all the batch jobs and to
workstations attached to the system using 5250 emulation.

13-23
Instructor Guide
Library and Library Commands menu

IBM i
Figure 13-10. Library and Library Commands menu
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the Go Library command to see the menu displayed in the upper left on the visual on
this page. This menu will display the actions you can perform for a library.
The screen on the lower right side of this visual is the Library Commands menu. To display
the Library Commands menu you can either:
Use the GO CMDLIB command, or
Select option 70 - Related commands from the Libraries menu

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

13-25
Instructor Guide
Work with Libraries command

IBM i
Figure 13-11. Work with Libraries command
AS248.1
Notes:
The Work with Libraries (WRKLIB) display shows a list of libraries that you have authority
to use. You can use this list to do some common tasks related to libraries.
The list of libraries presented is based on the value you enter for the Library (LIB)
parameter. For example, if you type AS24*, a list of all the libraries starting with AS24 is
displayed.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

13-27
Instructor Guide
Create Library command

IBM i
Figure 13-12. Create Library command
AS248.1
Notes:
The Create Library (CRTLIB) command adds a new library to the system. Before any
objects are placed into a library, the library must be created.
When the library is created, it appears as though it exists in the QSYS (system) library
within the IFS.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details For an application share or live demo you do not need to create a library. One
for the class already exists on the system.

13-29
Instructor Guide
Display Library List command

IBM i
Figure 13-13. Display Library List command
AS248.1
Notes:
The Display Library List (DSPLIBL) command displays the library list for the current thread,
including the system portion, and, if they exist, the product libraries, the current library
entry, and the user portion.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

13-31
Instructor Guide
Library List: Add and Remove

IBM i
Figure 13-14. Library List: Add and Remove
AS248.1
Notes:
The Add Library List Entry (ADDLIBLE) command adds a library name to the user portion
of the library list for the current thread. The user portion is the last portion of the library list.
It follows the system portion and, if they exist, any product libraries and the current library
entry. You can specify where the library should be placed in the user portion of the library
list.
The Remove Library List Entry (RMVLIBLE) command removes a library from the user
portion of the library list for the current thread. The user portion is the last portion of the
library list. It follows the system portion and, if they exist, any product libraries and the
current library entry.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details You can discontinue the application share or live demo after this visual.

13-33
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
13.3. IFS concepts

In this topic, the students learn what the IFS is and how it is structured, what a file Power is,
the difference between database and stream files, and how to locate objects in the IFS.

13-35
Instructor Guide
IFS access using 5250 emulation

IBM i
Figure 13-15. IFS access using 5250 emulation
AS248.1
Notes:
From the Main menu, select option 4 to see the Data menu in the upper left. Select option 5
to see the Integrated file system menu, which is displayed in the middle screen capture.
Select Object commands to see the Object commands menu in the lower right.
Select option 1 - Work with object links to see the screen on the next page in the guide.
Specify this option to display a list of objects in directories and options to work with
them.
To perform operations on the objects, you must have *USE authority to the command
used by the operation and appropriate authority to the objects on which the command is
being performed.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

13-37
Instructor Guide
Work with Object Links display

IBM i
Figure 13-16. Work with Object Links display
AS248.1
Notes:
This display shows a list of names of objects in a directory and provides options for
performing operations on those objects.
You can type an option number next to one or more object links. When you press Enter, the
function associated with the selected number is performed for that link. For most options,
you can get assistance in using the option by typing the option number and pressing F4
(Prompt) instead of Enter.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

13-39
Instructor Guide
Exercise
IBM i
Exercise: Object management using 5250 emulation

AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.

13-41
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or False: The Create Duplicate Object command can

copy a file.
2. Which command is used to show a list of objects based on
your search criteria?
a.
b.
c.
d.
DSPOBJ
LSTOBJ
SHWOBJ
WRKOBJ
3. The command used to display an objects description is?

a.
b.
c.
d.
DSPOBJD
LSTOBJD
SHWOBJD
WRKOBJD
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

copy a file.
The answer is True.

a. DSPOBJ
b. LSTOBJ
c. SHWOBJ
d. WRKOBJ
The answer is WRKOBJ.
3. The command used to display an objects description is

______?
a. DSPOBJD
b. LSTOBJD
c. SHWOBJD
d. WRKOBJD
The answer is DSPOBJD.

13-43
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. True or False: You cannot see a list of the directories on your

system when using a 5250 emulation session.
5. The __________ command is used to copy a single object or
a group of objects.
a.
b.
c.
d.
DSPOBJD
RSTOBJ
CRTDUPOBJ
WRKOBJ
6. True or False: The WRKLIB command will show you a list of

all the libraries that you have authority to use.
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i


a group of objects.
a.
b.
c.
d.
DSPOBJD
RSTOBJ
CRTDUPOBJ
WRKOBJ
The answer is CRTDUPOBJ.

The answer is True.

13-45
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

Use the commands to add or remove a library to or from the
library list
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Use this visual to summarize this unit. Ensure the students understand the
following:
An object is anything that exists in and occupies space in storage and on which
operations can be performed.
A library is a directory to other objects.
A library list (or a library search list) is a list of libraries that is used to search for an
object.
The IFS is a part of i that supports stream input/output and storage management.
Explain that either a simple name (object name) or qualified name (library name/object
name) can be used to find an object. When a simple name is referred to, the system uses
the library list for a job to find the object.

13-47
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 14. Object management using System i

Navigator
Estimated time
00:25

This unit describes how to work with and administer objects, libraries,
and user profiles, run commands, and duplicate objects when working
with System i Navigator.

Use System i Navigator to work with objects

Use System i Navigator to create a duplicate object
Use System i Navigator to copy a file
Use System i Navigator to create a library
Use System i Navigator to display the contents of a library

Accountability:
Exercise
Unit 14. Object management using System i Navigator

14-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose You have learned about things that the Power i makes available to help you do
your job as a system operator, including special keys and displays, help, and messages. In
this unit, you will be introduced to terminology and concepts relating to IBM i objects. These
objects have been mentioned in previous units, but you must understand them fully before
continuing with the course.
Details
objects.

14-3
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
14.1. User profiles

14-5
Instructor Guide
User Profile: Properties

IBM i
Figure 14-2. User Profile: Properties
AS248.1
Notes:
Assuming your user profile has been granted the correct authority, you can create, change,
or delete user profiles using System i Navigator. In this class, your user profile AS24xx has
been granted security administrator (*SECADM) authority. This authority allows you to
create user profiles or make changes to those profiles that you are authorized to
administer.
Expand Users and Groups, and click All Users.
This will update the pane in the right with a listing of the user profiles that you have
authority to change or delete. Right-click your profile to see the actions you are allowed
to perform.
Click Properties to see the visual on the next page.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

14-7
Instructor Guide
User Profile: Jobs > Session startup

IBM i
Figure 14-3. User Profile: Jobs > Session startup
AS248.1
Notes:
Click Jobs to see the window on the right. There are different parameters available on the
different tabs. Click OK then OK again to implement any changes.
Security will be covered in a unit later in class. Right now, we just want to show how to work
with objects; in this case, user profiles when using System i Navigator.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

14-9
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
14.2. Running commands

14-11
Instructor Guide
Run a command
IBM i
Figure 14-4. Run a command
AS248.1
Notes:
There are some functions that do not have a graphical equivalent, thus they can not be
done from System i Navigator. For those functions that are not supported, it is possible to
run a command from System i Navigator. This is equivalent to submitting a command to run
in batch mode.
Even for those functions that are supported with a GUI equivalent, like changing a user
profile, you can submit a command or perform the function.
Running a command using System i Navigator requires that Management Central is started
and a connection is established to the central server.
Right-click your system and select Run Command. You will receive a prompt to start a
Management Central connection. You might be prompted to enter your user ID and
password. Once that connection is started, you will see the window on the next page.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

14-13
Instructor Guide
Run a command using prompting

IBM i
Figure 14-5. Run a command using prompting
AS248.1
Notes:
If you know the format for the command, you can enter the command in the window
presented. If you are not sure of the format, or if you require assistance, you can use the
Prompt button to view the window on the right.
Once on the prompt window, you can press the Help key for additional assistance for any
of the parameters.
When you are on this window, click the Options tab to review the other functions that can
be set for commands that will be submitted through this interface.
Click OK to submit the command. Security will be covered in greater deal in an upcoming
unit later in this class.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Once again, we are using this interface to show how to run a command when
using this interface. Security will be covered later in this class, do not explain any specific
parameters for this command.

14-15
Instructor Guide
Management Central
IBM i
Figure 14-6. Management Central
AS248.1
Notes:
Management Central is a powerful suite of systems management functions that make
managing multiple systems as easy as managing a single system.
When you run a command using System i Navigator, it will be run using the Management
Central server. The status for this job will show under the Task Activity task under
Commands. The commands that you have run using this interface will be listed. You can
right-click a command to perform the actions listed on the pop-up in the visual.
If you select Status, it will show the window captured in the lower right part of the visual.
To learn more about the capabilities of Management Central:
Click Help > Help topics > Navigator > Management Central.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

14-17
Instructor Guide
System groups: Run Command

IBM i
Figure 14-7. System groups: Run Command
AS248.1
Notes:
Management Central can be used to manage a network of TCP/IP connected Power i
servers.
Under Management Central, you can define a logical grouping of your systems. You decide
on a name for your grouping, and then you identify which of your systems will be member
of which group. An individual system can be a member of multiple groups.
As depicted in the visual, you then turn around and define a command to be run; then you
choose the system group where this command will run. In this way, you can greatly
improve your productivity when managing more than one system.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

14-19
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
14.3. Creating a library

14-21
Instructor Guide
Database: New library

IBM i
Figure 14-8. Database: New library
AS248.1
Notes:
One way to create a library is by using the Database branch.
Expand Database, and then expand the next branch. Right-click Schemas, and select
New > Schema to see the New Schema window.
Fill in the parameters as follows:
Name: Specify a unique name for the new schema (library).
Add to displayed list of schemas: Click this option to add the schema to your list of
displayed schemas. The default is to display the new schema in your list of schemas.
Create as a standard library: Check this option if you want to create a standard library.
Create in: Specifies where the schema will be created. It can be created in the system
disk pool, in disk pools (2-32), or in an independent disk pool group.
Text: Specify a description for the schema.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details If the customer will be using SQL to create the database, they will be familiar
with creating schemas, which is equivalent to creating a library.
This function is equivalent to submitting the create schema SQL statement.

14-23
Instructor Guide
File Systems: New library

IBM i
Figure 14-9. File Systems: New library
AS248.1
Notes:
A second way to create a library is by way of the File Systems branch. To see the windows
in the visual:
Expand File Systems > IFS. Right-click QSYS.LIB, and select New Folder.
The library name must be a unique name.
The last way to create a library is by submitting a Create Library (CRTLIB) command.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

14-25
Instructor Guide
Display libraries on the system

IBM i
Figure 14-10. Display libraries on the system
AS248.1
Notes:
To display a list of the libraries on the system:
Expand File systems > IFS; then click QSYS.LIB.
By default, System i Navigator will display a list of all of the libraries on the system. To show
a more customized list, you can:
Right-click QSYS.LIB, and then click Customize > Include; then specify your choice.
- For example, you could specify AS24*.LIB, which would only display those
libraries that begin with these characters.
- Notice the naming convention used in this interface. Not only do you specify the
name (AS24), but you must also specify the type of object (LIB).

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
perform an application share of System i Navigator covering the details outlined in the
student notes for the next four visuals.
demo on your instructor PC of System i Navigator covering the details outlined in the
student notes for the next four visuals.

14-27
Instructor Guide
Display contents of your team library

IBM i
Figure 14-11. Display contents of your team library
AS248.1
Notes:
To display the contents of your library, you can:
Expand your library to see the files in your library.
Click your library to update the right pane and see a list of all the objects in your library.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

14-29
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
14.4. Object properties

14-31
Instructor Guide
Supported actions by object type

IBM i
Figure 14-12. Supported actions by object type
AS248.1
Notes:
The actions that you can perform on an object are determined by what type of object it is.
In the left window in the visual, you see the actions that are supported when you
right-click an object type of program.
In the right window in the visual, you see the actions that are supported when you
right-click an object type file.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

14-33
Instructor Guide
Object properties
IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:
This is the notebook displayed when you click Properties on the previous visual. You can
see the information displayed on the different tabs in this notebook.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose

14-35
Instructor Guide
File Systems: Copy and Paste

IBM i
Figure 14-14. File Systems: Copy and Paste
AS248.1
Notes:
System i Navigator supports the copy and paste function for the File Systems branch.
In the example in the visuals, expand File Systems > IFS > QSYS.LIB; then do the
following:
Click the AS24 library in the left window to see a list of objects; then right-click and select
Copy on the SAMPLEF file. Next, in the window on the right go to the target library
(AS2401D), right-click, and select Paste.
The system recognizes the type of object being copied and, in this case, processes the
copy file command on the system to copy the file from one library to the other.
You can also locate other types of objects, for example, a program, and do a copy and
paste, in which case the system will process the create duplicate object command.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

14-37
Instructor Guide
Database: Copy and Paste

IBM i
Figure 14-15. Database: Copy and Paste
AS248.1
Notes:
System i Navigator also supports the copy and paste function for the Database branch;
however, this case you can only copy and paste database objects, such as a file.
In the example in the visual, expand Databases and expand the next branch (your
database). Right-click Schemas, and choose the schemas (libraries) that are to be
displayed.
In the window on the left, click AS24, and then click Tables to see a list of files. Right-click
and select Copy on the SAMPLEF file. Next, in the window on the right, go to the target
library (AS2401E) and right-click and select Paste.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Through the Database branch, you can only copy and paste database objects,
such as a file.

14-39
Instructor Guide
Exercise
IBM i
Use the information listed to perform the lab exercises.
Exercise: Object Management using System i Navigator

AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.

14-41
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or False: System i Navigator allows you to duplicate an

object.
2. Assuming you have the correct authority, which option allows
you to create, change or delete user profiles?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Basic operations
Work management
Users and groups
3. Which of the following does not provide an option to create a

library?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Right-click your system

Work management
Integrated file systems
Database
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i
1. True or False: System i Navigator GUI allows you to

duplicate an object.
The answer is True.

a. Basic operations
b. Work management
d. Users and groups
The answer is Users and groups.

library?
a. Right-click your system
b. Work management
c. Integrated file systems
d. Database
The answer is Work management.

14-43
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. True or False: Management Central allows you to issue a

command once, and it can be run on multiple systems.
5. True or False: System i Navigator allows you to run the
equivalent of the WRKLIB command to see a list of libraries
on the system.
6. True or False: System i Navigator does not allow you to
prompt a command.
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

command once, and it can be run on multiple systems
The answer is True.

on the system.
The answer is True.

prompt a command.

14-45
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose

14-47
Instructor Guide

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 15. Object management using Systems

Director Navigator for IBM i
Estimated time
00:15

This unit describes how to work with and administer objects, libraries,
and user profiles, run commands, and duplicate objects when working
with Systems Director Navigator for IBM i.

Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to work with objects
Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to create a duplicate
object
Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to copy a file
Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to create a library
Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to display the contents of
a library

Exercise
Unit 15. Object management using Systems Director Navigator for

15-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

object
Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to display the
contents of a library
AS248.1
Notes:

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose You have learned about things that the System i system makes available to
help you do your job as a system operator: special keys and displays, help, and messages.
In this unit, you will be introduced to terminology and concepts relating to IBM i objects.
These objects have been mentioned in previous units, but you must understand them fully
before continuing with the course.
Details
objects.

15-3
Instructor Guide

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
15.1. User profiles


15-5
Instructor Guide
Users and Groups task: Users

IBM i
Figure 15-2. Users and Groups task: Users
AS248.1
Notes:
Click the Users and Groups task, and then click Users to see the visual on the next page.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

15-7
Instructor Guide
Users: Click arrow for a User

IBM i
Figure 15-3. Users: Click arrow for a User
AS248.1
Notes:
From this view, you can click the arrow for a specific user to see the options on the first
drop-down menu:
User object - which will show a second drop down menu

Delete...
Send message...
Application administration...
Properties...
If you click or select the User objects, it will show a second drop-down menu with options to
work with that users:
printer output
jobs
server jobs
messages
owned objects

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

15-9
Instructor Guide
Users: Create a new user based on

IBM i
Figure 15-4. Users: Create a new user based on
AS248.1
Notes:
When you click the arrow for a user, one of the options on the drop-down menu is New
which then allows you to create a new user based on an existing user profile.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

15-11
Instructor Guide
Users: Other profile data displayed

IBM i
Important
Figure 15-5. Users: Other profile data displayed
AS248.1
Notes:
Notice the other data that is displayed on the web page:
Description
Privilege class
Previous sign on
Storage used

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

15-13
Instructor Guide
Users: Properties
IBM i
Figure 15-6. Users: Properties
AS248.1
Notes:
Assuming your user profile has been granted the correct authority, you can create, change,
or delete user profiles using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i. In this class, your user
profile (AS24xx) has been granted security administrator (*SECADM) authority. This
authority allows you to create user profiles or make changes to those profiles that you are
authorized to administer.
Click the Users task on the previous page; then click Users, and click the arrow for
AS24xx > Properties
This will show the window on the next page.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

15-15
Instructor Guide
Jobs: Session startup

IBM i
Figure 15-7. Jobs: Session startup
AS248.1
Notes:
The actions on the previous page shows the User properties tab for the specific user
profile.
Click the Jobs link to see the window on the lower right.
There are parameters associate with user profile (this same parameters like you can
see with WRKUSRPRF command) available on the different tabs.
Explore the options, but do not make any changes.
Click OK then OK again to implement your changes.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

15-17
Instructor Guide

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
15.2. Running commands


15-19
Instructor Guide
System: Run a command

IBM i
Figure 15-8. System: Run a command
AS248.1
Notes:
There are some functions that do not have a graphical equivalent, thus they cannot be
done from Systems Director Navigator for IBM i.
For those functions that are not supported, it is possible to run a command from
Systems Director Navigator for IBM i. This is equivalent to submitting a command to run
in batch mode.
Even for those functions that are supported with a GUI equivalent, like changing a user
profile, you can submit a command or perform the function.
Click the System task, and then select Run a Command to see the window on the next
page.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

15-21
Instructor Guide
Run a command
IBM i
Figure 15-9. Run a command
AS248.1
Notes:
The usage buttons on this Web page are:
IBM i Option
Allows to set job log parameters or inquiry messages.
Prompt
Provides the same functionality as the F4 function key in a 5250

screen.
Previous Command
Provides the same functionality as the function F9 key in a 5250

screen.
Run Command
Equal to the Enter key.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

15-23
Instructor Guide
Run a command using prompting

IBM i
Figure 15-10. Run a command using prompting
AS248.1
Notes:
If you know the format for the command, you can enter the command in the window
presented in the upper right on this visual. If you are not sure of the format, or if you require
assistance, you can use the Prompt link to view the window on the right.
Once on the prompt window, you can press Help for additional assistance for any of the
parameters.
Click OK to submit the command.
Note
Security will be covered in greater deal in an upcoming unit later in this class. On this
visual, we are only showing this Web page to show how prompting works when using this
GUI.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

15-25
Instructor Guide

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
15.3. Creating a library


15-27
Instructor Guide
Databases: Your database (i520BL2)

IBM i
Figure 15-11. Databases: Your database (i520BL2)
AS248.1
Notes:
One way to create a library is by using the Databases task.
Click Databases link then click Databases.
This will show you the page on the right.
Click your database (in this example, it is the value that is circled - i520bL2; normally,
the name of database is this same as name of IBM i server/partition) to see the Web
page on the next page in the guide.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details If the customer will be using SQL to create the database, they will be familiar
with creating schemas, which is equivalent to creating a library.
This function is equivalent to submitting the create schema SQL statement.
There are some more terms equivalent non-SQL versus SQL. Note that sometimes is not
only difference in name but in functionality.
Schema
Library
Table
Physical File
View
Logical File Not Keyed
Row
Record
Column
Field
Index
Logical File Keyed

15-29
Instructor Guide
Schemas: New Schema

IBM i
Figure 15-12. Schemas: New Schema
AS248.1
Notes:
Click the arrow for Schemas, and then click New > Schema to see the tab on the right.
Fill in the parameters as follows:
Name: Specify unique name for the new schema (library).
Add to displayed list of schemas: Click this option to add the schema to your list of
displayed schemas. The default is to display the new schema in your list of schemas.
Create as a standard library: Check this option if you want to create a standard library.
Create in: Specifies where the schema will be created. It can be created in the system
disk pool, in disk pools (2-32), or in an independent disk pool group. Click the down
arrow to make your selection.
Text: Specify a description for the schema.
Click OK to create your new schema (library).

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

15-31
Instructor Guide
File systems: New Folder (library)

IBM i
Figure 15-13. File systems: New Folder (library)
AS248.1
Notes:
A second way to create a library is by way of the File Systems task. To see the windows in
the visual:
Click the File Systems task; then click IFS, and click the arrow for QSYS.LIB > New
folder.
The library name must be a unique name.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The last way to create a library is by submitting a create library (CRTLIB)
command.

15-33
Instructor Guide
IFS: Display list of libraries (1 of 2)

IBM i
Figure 15-14. IFS: Display list of libraries (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
To display a list of the libraries on the system:
Click the File systems task
Click Integrated file system
Click the arrow for QSYS.LIB. and click Open to see the Web page on the next page in
the guide

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

15-35
Instructor Guide
IFS: Display list of libraries (2 of 2)

IBM i
Figure 15-15. IFS: Display list of libraries (2 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
Performing the action on the previous page will display a list of libraries in the QSYS.LIB
file system.
To narrow down this list, you can click the down arrow for Select action, then select
Include from the drop-down menu to specify the list of libraries being displayed. For
example, to see your libraries, you could request all of the libraries named AS24xx* be
displayed.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

15-37
Instructor Guide
Databases: Display list of libraries (1 of 2)

IBM i
Figure 15-16. Databases: Display list of libraries (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
Another way to display a list of libraries is:
Click DATABASE link
Next click the arrow for SCHEMAS
Then select Schemas to Display

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

15-39
Instructor Guide
Databases: Display list of libraries (2 of 2)

IBM i
Figure 15-17. Databases: Display list of libraries (2 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
This page allow you to specify and add library to which will be displayed. You can also
search library looking at list of all libraries or specify name or part of name with wild cards *
or %.
Note asterisk * sign in library name is allowed both Systems Director Navigator and
emulator 5250% is not allowed in emulator 5250.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

15-41
Instructor Guide
Display contents of your team library

IBM i
Figure 15-18. Display contents of your team library
AS248.1
Notes:
To display the contents of your library:
Right-click the arrow for your library, and click Open to see the page in the lower right.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

15-43
Instructor Guide

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
15.4. Object properties


15-45
Instructor Guide
Supported actions by object type

IBM i
Figure 15-19. Supported actions by object type
AS248.1
Notes:
The actions that you can perform on an object are determined by what type of object it is.
In the left page in the visual, you see the actions that are supported when you click the
arrow on an object type of program.
In the right page in the visual, you see the actions that are supported when you click the
arrow on an object type file.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

15-47
Instructor Guide
Object properties
IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:
This is the notebook displayed for an object that is type file when you click Properties on
the previous visual. You can see the information displayed on the different tabs on this
page.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

15-49
Instructor Guide
File systems: Copy

IBM i
Figure 15-21. File systems: Copy
AS248.1
Notes:
Systems Director Navigator for IBM i supports the copy function for the File Systems task.
In the example in the visuals:
Click File Systems link then click IFS link, next click the arrow for QSYS.LIB; then click
Open.
Click the arrow for AS24, and then click Open (to see a list of objects in this library).
Locate and click the arrow for SAMPLEF file, and then click Copy.
In the window presented, specify the target library, AS2401J (you must specify the fully
qualified path; in the example we used /QSYS.LIB/AS2401J.LIB). Click Copy.
You can also locate other types of objects, for example, a program, and do a copy and
paste, in which case the system will process the create duplicate object command.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

15-51
Instructor Guide
Database: Copy File

IBM i
Figure 15-22. Database: Copy File
AS248.1
Notes:
Systems Director Navigator for IBM i also supports the copy function for the Database task;
however, you can only copy and paste database objects, such as a file.
Stepping through the graphical interface will present the graphical view of the copy file
(CPYF) command. To get to the panel in this visual, perform the following:
Click the Databases link, and then click Databases and click the arrow for your
database (in this example, i520bL2), and then click Open.
Click the arrow for Schemas, and then click Open. Click the arrow for your schema
(library), and then click Open.
Click the arrow for Tables, and then click Open. Click the arrow for your file, and then
click Data > Copy.
These steps will present the copy file (CPYF) command screen. Fill in your parameters,
and then click OK to process your command.

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

15-53
Instructor Guide
Exercise
IBM i
Use the information listed to perform the lab exercises.
Exercise: Object management using

AS248.1
Notes:

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate.
Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U15-checkpoint and click
Play.
call out answers to the questions on the board.

15-55
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or False: Systems Director Navigator does not provide

an option to manage users.
2. Which task in Systems Director Navigator provides the link to
run a command?
a.
b.
c.
d.
System
Work management
Security
3. True or False: Prompting a command is not available with

AS248.1
Notes:

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i


run a command?
a.
b.
c.
d.
System
Work management
Security
The answer is System.


15-57
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. Which of the following does not provide an option to

create a library?
a.
b.
c.
d.
System
Database
File system
Network
5. True or False: Systems Director Navigator provides a

graphical version of the copy file command.
6. True or False: Systems Director Navigator does not display a
list of libraries.
AS248.1
Notes:

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

library?
a.
b.
c.
d.
System
Database
File system
Network
The answer is Network.

The answer is True.
6. True or False: Using Systems Director Navigator does not

display a list of libraries.

15-59
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

object
Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to display the
contents of a library
AS248.1
Notes:

V5.4
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose

15-61
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 16. Introduction to work management

Estimated time
00:20

This unit provides a brief introduction to work management. We look at
the following work management terminology and concepts:
Power i job processing (interactive and batch)

Job
Types of jobs (including interactive, batch, and spooling jobs)
subsystem

Explain the difference between interactive and batch processing

State the definition of a job
List the different types of jobs that can be run on the system
Explain what a job queue is and how it is used
Describe what a job description does and how it controls work on
the system
Explain what a subsystem is and how these are used on the
system
Explain what a memory pool is

Accountability:

16-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Explain the difference between interactive and batch
processing
Describe what a job description does and how it controls work
on the system
system
AS248.1
Notes:
In this unit, you become familiar with work management concepts and terminology. We
discuss the types of work (or processing) the Power i does (mainly interactive and batch),
what a job is and some of its characteristics, the types of jobs that can run on the Power i
and their characteristics, and what a subsystem is and the relationship between a job and
subsystem.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Upon successful completion of this unit, the student should be able to explain:
The two types of work (or processing) done by the system (interactive and batch)
Note
Throughout the remainder of this unit, the term processing will be used when referring
to work.
What a job is and some of its characteristics

The different types of jobs that run on a Power i system (including interactive, batch,
and spooling) and some of their characteristics
What a subsystem is and the relationship between a job and a subsystem
To begin, let us look at the types of processing carried out by the Power i system.
This unit lecture only covers the green screen emulator interface, while the exercise will
cover both green screen and Navigator. There is no interface available using the Access for
Web for this function.

16-3
Instructor Guide
Methods of processing
IBM i
Interactive processing
Sign on
1
Menu displayed
2
Enter menu option

3
Menu displayed
Batch processing
Submit job
1
System
runs
program
User free to do
other work on system
Figure 16-2. Methods of processing
AS248.1
Notes:
The system performs two types of processing: interactive and batch.
Interactive processing requires continual two-way communication between a display
station user and the system. It is similar to a conversation. First the user says (types)
something to the system, and then the system replies.
Batch processing requires only that the user send information to the system for processing.
After that, the system can usually complete the processing on its own. This leaves both the
user and the display station free to do other work.
The Power i system is designed to handle both interactive and batch processing
simultaneously.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Interactive processing is conversational in nature. There is a need for an
ongoing operator action/system response type of communication. System response time to
an operator's requests is very important.
Batch processing needs no ongoing communication between an operator and the system.
Response time is not critical; the system performs the required tasks when time is
available.
Running a monthly payroll program is an example of batch processing. Normally, an
operator puts the pre-printed checks in the printer and runs the payroll command (for
example, by entering a menu option or calling a program (CALL PAYROLL)). The system
runs the payroll job and prints the checks without any further interaction between it and the
user at the display station. The user is free to do other work on the system while it runs the
payroll program.
Work management handles both interactive and batch processing simultaneously. For
example, let us assume five users are signed on to the system. Work management
performs interactive processing for each while also carrying out batch processing to run a
monthly accounts receivable program and a weekly update program requested by two
display station users.

16-5
Instructor Guide
What is a job?
IBM i
A job is an environment that enables work to be performed on the system.

COMMAND
Display Library List
===>
DSPLIBL
Process
request
Opt
__
__
__
Library
QSYS
QSYS2
QHLPSYS
Type Text
SYS System library
SYS System library for CPI's
SYS
Menu option
===>
User Tasks
Process
request

1. Display or change your job
2. Display messages
3. Send a message
4. Submit a job
RUN PROGRAM
CALL PROG1
===>
Customer Inquiry
Process
request
Enter customer no. _______
Figure 16-3. What is a job?
AS248.1
Notes:
All work done on a Power i is performed through a job. Each active job contains at least
one thread (the initial thread) and can contain additional secondary threads. Threads are
independent units of work. Job properties are shared among threads of the job, but threads
also have some of their own properties, such as a call stack.
The job serves as the owner for properties that are shared among threads within the same
job. Work management provides a way for you to control the work done on your system
through the properties of a job.
The general properties of a job determine how the system runs each job. Some of the
properties are grouped together in the job description for easier multiple job management.
Based on how the job properties are specified, the system knows what properties to get
and when. The system runs different types of jobs to serve various needs.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details A job is an environment that enables work to be done on a Power i system.
From within a job, you can:
Type a command
Enter a menu option
Run a program
This visual shows a job. From within this job, you:
1. Enter the Display Library List (DSPLIBL) command on a command line or on the
Command Entry display. This causes the system to process a request to show the
Display Library List display.
2. Enter 1 on the command line, which corresponds to menu option 1 on the IBM i Main
Menu. This causes the system to process a request which displays the User Tasks
menu. CALL is a common command that can be used to process a program.
3. Enter the CALL PROG1 command on either a command line or the Command Entry
display. This runs a customer inquiry program.
When a user enters a command, selects a menu option, or runs a program, the system
processes one instruction or a series. Compare this with the work done in a typical
business. A piece of work in a business might involve answering the phone, typing a letter,
or attending a meeting. Each of these could be a single step, also called an instruction, but
could also consist of several steps. For example, if, after answering the phone, a financial
officer determines that a customer has a concern with a bill. The financial officer might have
to search for the customer's bill, talk with someone in accounts receivable, and fax the
customer a revised bill. In this case, the job contains several instructions.

16-7
Instructor Guide
Types of jobs
IBM i
System jobs
Q...
User jobs
Spooling
Interactive
Autostart
Batch
Communication
Figure 16-4. Types of jobs
AS248.1
Notes:
All jobs on the system fall into one of two very broad categories: system jobs and user jobs.
System jobs are created by the IBM i operating system. User jobs are created by users.
Most jobs that a system operator works with fall into the user job category.
Interactive jobs are workstation or 5250 emulation jobs. All work performed between sign
on and the corresponding sign off, regardless of what type of work, is part of one interactive
job. Interactive jobs are sometimes incorrectly called sessions. A session refers to
everything that transpires at the workstation.
Traditionally, batch jobs are run by submitting requests for data processing by programs
that do not need to interact with the user. These requests are placed on a job queue and
run when system resources become available.
A communication job is an interactive or batch job that is started by a program request from
a remote system over tele-communications.
An autostart job is similar to a batch job. It does repetitive work or one-time initialization
work that is associated with a particular subsystem.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details There are also a couple of other system job types which are not shown on the
visual because the students will probably not work with them. They are:
A group job, which allows a user to start up to 16 jobs for each sign-on at a workstation
(32 total when there is a secondary interactive job). At any one time, only one group job
can be active; the others are suspended.
A prestart job, which is a batch job that starts running before a program on a remote
system sends a program start request.
For further information on group and prestart jobs, refer to the Work Management manual.
Every job has certain characteristics. For example:
It has certain steps it must go through, and it has a unique name.
It must be associated with two objects: a job description and a user profile.
The job description tells the system, among other things, how to run the job and what
resources to use.
The user profile contains information on how the user can run jobs.
In addition, every job starts and ends.
In the next few visuals, we will look at the steps a job goes through, the structure of a job
name, the information contained in a job description and a user profile, and how this
information relates to work management. Finally, we will look at how various jobs are
started and ended.

16-9
Instructor Guide
The life cycle of a job

IBM i
Batch job
Submit
Job queue
Subsystem
Memory pool
Output
Memory pool
Output
Interactive job
User starts interactive job
Subsystem
Figure 16-5. The life cycle of a job
AS248.1
Notes:
To understand the basics of Power i work management, follow a simple batch job as it
moves through the system. The life of a simple batch job begins when you submit it to the
system. The job is then sent to a job queue where it waits to enter a subsystem where it
can run. Once the job moves to the subsystem, it is allocated memory in which to run. The
printer output file (also called the spooled file) is then sent to the output queue to await
further instruction on what to do (for example, printing).
Not every job follows this exact path; however, you can better understand how other work
is completed on the system by learning about the following steps.
1. When a job is submitted to Power i, it is created and enters the system. At this time, the
properties are given to the job. Once the job receives its job description (explained later
in this unit) and determines its properties, it moves to the job queue, where it waits to
enter the subsystem.
2. Job queues are work entry points through which batch jobs enter the system. They can
be thought of as waiting rooms for a subsystem. A number of factors affect when the job
is pulled off the job queue into the subsystem, such as the job priority on the job queue,

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
the sequence number of the job queue, and the maximum number of active jobs. When
all of these factors work together, the job will be pulled off the job queue to start running
in the subsystem.
3. When the job enters the subsystem, it becomes active. Until a job gets its activity level
and memory from a memory pool, it cannot run. The job uses several pieces of
information before it can receive memory to run. The subsystem description (explained
later in this unit), like the job description, carries information, such as which memory
pool to use, the routing entry, the maximum number of active jobs, and the number of
active jobs currently in the subsystem.
4. Memory is a resource from the memory pool that the subsystem uses to run the job.
The amount of memory from a memory pool, as well as how many other jobs are
competing for memory, affects how efficiently a job runs. subsystems use different
memory pools to support different types of jobs that run within them. The subsystem
gives the memory pool the information it needs to process the order in which jobs are
allocated memory, and the memory pool allocates memory for the job to run to
completion.
5. Printer output for a job (spooled files) is sent to an output queue where it waits to be
sent to a printer or file. The output queue is similar to the job queue in that it controls
how the output is made available to the printer. The output queue allows the user to
control what files are printed first.
An interactive job is active from the time a user signs on to a display station until they sign
off. While they are signed on, an interactive job typically goes through the following steps:
1. A user signs on to a display station.
2. IBM i runs this job and might generate printed output, which is placed in a spooled file
and put on an output queue.
3. This spooled file waits on the output queue to be sent to a printer file.
4. The user either signs off, at which point the system ends the interactive job, or stays
signed on, in which case the job keeps running.

16-11
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Discuss the different steps that interactive and batch jobs go through. Point out
to the students that these are typical steps. Not all interactive and batch jobs will go through
all of these steps.
For a new system user, the concept of a batch job (something that runs in the background)
is new. Often a user will ask the system operator about the status of a job because the user
chose an option on an application menu. The job appears to have run (no error messages),
yet the user still does not have his or her printout. The user is not aware that the batch job
must wait its turn on the job queue to process, and then the output must wait its turn on the
print queue to print. Thus, it is very important that the system operator know how to find
and monitor batch jobs.
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of the next visual, play file
AS248-U16-F06 in the multimedia library of Elluminate to provide the students a video
demonstration of how the job queue functions.
1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button in the toolbar in Elluminate.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: In place of the next visual, play file AS248-U16-F06 on
your PC to provide the students with a video demonstration of how the job queue functions.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
What is a job queue?

IBM i
Job queue
JOB1
JOB2
JOB3
JOB4
JOB5
JOB6
(2)
(1)
(4)
(2)
(1)
(4)
Subsystem (2)
1 JOB2
JOB5
2
HIGH
JOB1
JOB4
4
.
.
.
JOB3
JOB6
LOW
Figure 16-6. What is a job queue?
AS248.1
Notes:
A user profile identifies a user on the system and sets up the characteristics for all of the
work that will performed by the user. One of the values assigned via the user profile is a job
description. The job description specifies the job queue that will be used by a user when
they submit jobs to run in batch, and the processing priority that will be assigned to those
jobs.
When a batch job is submitted, the job is placed on a job queue. A job queue is an object
that contains a list of batch jobs waiting to be processed. Each job has a job queue priority
(one through nine) assigned to it; where one is the highest and nine is the lowest priority.
Work management will process jobs in a first-in first-out order according to their priority.
The jobs will be sent to a subsystem when it is their turn to process. Each subsystem is set
up to run a certain number of jobs concurrently, in this example two jobs are allowed to run.

16-13
Instructor Guide
There are six job queue commands. We will focus on one of the job queue commands,
Work with Job Queue (WRKJOBQ), in this unit. The other commands can be run as
options from the Work with Job Queue display or from a command line.
Clear Job Queue (CLRJOBQ)

Create Job Queue (CRTJOBQ)
Delete Job Queue (DLTJOBQ)
Hold Job Queue (HLDJOBQ)
Release Job Queue (RLSJOBQ)
Work with Job Queue (RKJOBQ)

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details There is another job queue priority, zero, which is reserved for changing a job to
move it to the top of the queue.
This visual shows six jobs (JOB1 through JOB6) that have been submitted to a job queue.
They were placed on the job queue in the order in which they were received. The jobs were
submitted with different priorities (one through nine).
A job queue priority determines the priority that work management will use to process the
jobs.
In this example:
JOB2 and JOB5 have a priority of one, therefore work management processes them in
first-in first-out order. JOB2 was placed on the job queue first, therefore it is processed
first, immediately before JOB5.
Next, work management processes JOB1 and JOB4, which have a priority of two, in
first-in first-out order.
Finally, it processes JOB3 and JOB6, which have a priority of four, in first-in first-out
order.

16-15
Instructor Guide
Job name
IBM i
Qualified job name
000578 AS24xx DSP01

Job number
User name
Job name
Figure 16-7. Job name
AS248.1
Notes:
Each job has a unique name called a qualified job name, which consists of three parts (or
qualifiers): a job number, which is a unique number assigned by the system that allows you
to identify jobs; a user name, which is the name of the user profile under which the job was
started; and a job name, which is the name of the workstation the user signed on to.
When you search for a job, you can search for the entire qualified name if you know all of
the qualifiers. For example:
WRKJOB JOB(000578/AS24xx/DSP01)
You can also search for the job using only some of the qualifiers. For example, you can
search by user name and job name or by job name only:
WRKJOB JOB(AS24xx/DSP01)
WRKJOB JOB(DSP01)

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
There are several commonly used commands for finding jobs on the Power i:
Work with Active Job (WRKACTJOB)
Work with User Jobs (WRKUSRJOB)
Work with Submitted Job (WRKSBMJOB)
After entering one of these commands, one of the Work with... displays appears, showing
you a list of jobs.

16-17
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Just as each object has a qualified name, each job has a qualified name called
a qualified job name. Object and job names are similar in that their syntax is similar. A job
name consists of three parts (or qualifiers).
Job number
Unique number which is assigned by the system so that you can

identify jobs. Each job number contains six numeric digits.
User name
Name of the user profile under which the job is started. For interactive
jobs, the user name is the name entered in the User field on the
sign-on display. For batch jobs, the user profile can be specified under
which the batch job is to run. The user name can be up to 10
characters long.
Job name
For interactive jobs, the job name is the same as the name of the
workstation you are signed on to. For batch jobs, you can specify your
own job name. This name can be up to 10 characters long.
Another similarity between job and object names is that when searching for a job name,
like when searching for an object name, not all of the qualifiers have to be specified. For
example, the job number for the job on the visual is 000578, the user name is AS24xx and
the job name is DSP01.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Job/thread
IBM i
Thread
A unit of work managed by IBM i:
Job-1
Job-2
Allocates system resource (processor cycles)

Execution priority
Job-3
Job:
Single threaded job
Job-4
Multithreaded job
Each thread is an independent task-stream
Job#
User request (left-click or Enter):

Interacts with application thread
Thread#1
Thread#n
Dispatched and managed separately

Assigned processor cycles
Figure 16-8. Job/thread
AS248.1
Notes:
Although an operating system gives the impression that it is concurrently executing a large
number of tasks, each processor in a symmetric multiprocessor (SMP) traditionally
executes the instruction stream of a single task at any moment.
The QPRCMLTTSK system value controls whether to enable the individual SMP
processors to concurrently execute multiple instruction streams. Each instruction stream
belongs to separate tasks or threads. When enabled, each individual processor
concurrently executes multiple tasks at the same time. The effect of its use will likely
increase the performance capacity of a system or improve the responsiveness of a
multithreaded application.
Running multiple instruction streams at the same time does not improve the performance
of any given task. Since this is the case with any performance recommendations, results
vary in different environments.
The way that multithreading is done depends on the hardware model, and therefore the
performance capacity gains vary. Some of the models support this approach through a
concept called simultaneous multithreading (SMT).

16-19
Instructor Guide
Older Power i processors use an approach called hardware multithreading (HMT). In the
HMT approach, the hardware automatically switches between the tasks on any long
processing delay event, for example, a cache miss.
Some models do not support any form of multithreading, which means the QPRCMLTTSK
system value has no effect on performance.
Because the QPRCMLTTSK system value enables the parallel use of shared processor
resources, the performance gains depend highly on the application and the model.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

16-21
Instructor Guide
What is a job description?

IBM i
It is used to set specific job-related attributes, such as:

Which job queue to use for your jobs
What scheduling priority is assigned to your jobs
Which output queue is used for your output
What priority is assigned to your output jobs
Specific routing data for your jobs
The library list used for your jobs
What level of error logging to do for your jobs
It basically determines how and where
a users job is run on the system.
Figure 16-9. What is a job description?
AS248.1
Notes:
A job description is an object that contains a set of information, also called attributes, that
specifies how a job should be run. There are many job descriptions on every Power i.
Each job must be associated with a job description. Each job description can have multiple
jobs associated with it. The IBM-supplied default job description is QDFTJOBD, and it is
located in the QGPL library.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Each job must be associated with a job description. A job description is an
object that contains a great deal of information on how a job should be run on the system.
Each job description can have many jobs associated with it. Several job descriptions are
available as a part of IBM i. By default, all user jobs use an IBM-supplied job description
named QDFTJOBD, which contains a generic set of job attributes.
The job queue and output queue that will be used for jobs and the priority of the printed
output are specified in the job description.
The priority of the job (job priority) and printed output (output priority) on the queues are
specified here.
The printer that will handle printed output (printer device) is specified in the job
description.
Message logging is discussed in the problem determination unit; however, point out that
the amount of information available for problem determination is controlled by this
parameter in the job description.
Every job, in addition to being associated with a job description, must also be associated
with a user profile.

16-23
Instructor Guide
How a user profile relates to a job description

IBM i
A user profile will specify:

The users password and when it will expire
The classification (*USER, *SYSOPR, and so on)
The job description assigned to this user
Which output queue is used for this users jobs
The name of the current library for this user
And so forth
Figure 16-10. How a user profile relates to a job description
AS248.1
Notes:
Some of the attributes for a user are set in the user profile. Others are set in the job
description that will be used for the users jobs. There are some attributes, like output
queue, that are specified in both places.
The system will first check in the job description, and, if it does not find a value there, it will
look for that value in the users profile. Therefore, the values in the job description take
precedent and override the user profile.
Security will be covered in greater detail later in this class.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

16-25
Instructor Guide
What is a subsystem?
IBM i
SUBSYSTEM QBATCH
SUBSYSTEM QINTER
Interactive
processing
Power i
Batch
processing
Spooling
SUBSYSTEM QSPL
Figure 16-11. What is a subsystem?
AS248.1
Notes:
From the earlier discussion about different types of jobs (interactive, batch, and spooling),
you might correctly assume that any particular job would run most efficiently on a system
designed to run only that specific type of job.
The system can contain one or more operating environments called subsystems. A
subsystem is a single, predefined operating environment through which the system
coordinates the work flow and system resources. Each job, as it starts, is assigned to a
subsystem.
By using different subsystems, each with its own unique operating characteristics, IBM i
work management makes it appear to the jobs running in each subsystem that the entire
system was designed to run only that type of job.
Like jobs, subsystems have descriptions that carry important information needed to
complete the work; this is the purpose of the subsystem description.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details A subsystem is a single, predefined operating environment through which the
system coordinates the work flow and resource use. The system can contain several
subsystems, all operating independently of each other. subsystems manage resources.
The runtime characteristics of a subsystem are defined in an object called a subsystem
description.
Each subsystem can run unique operations. For instance, you can set up one subsystem to
handle only interactive jobs while another subsystem handles only batch jobs. subsystems
can also be designed to handle many types of work. The system allows you to decide the
number of subsystems and what types of work each subsystem handles.
The system relies on subsystem descriptions when starting subsystems. Therefore, if you
want to change the amount of work (number of jobs) coming from a job queue, for example,
you only need to change the job queue entry in the subsystem description.

16-27
Instructor Guide
Subsystem description
IBM i
The subsystem description defines:

The characteristics of a subsystem
How much work can be initiated and where that work will be
performed, including:
Maximum number of concurrent jobs
Memory pools used
The sources of work for a subsystem, such as:

Autostart jobs
Communication
Job queues
Prestart jobs
Workstations
Figure 16-12. Subsystem description
AS248.1
Notes:
The subsystem description is an object that defines the environment that the jobs that run
in the subsystem need in order to run most efficiently.
There are a number of commands used with the subsystem descriptions.
Change subsystem Description (CHGSBSD)
Create subsystem Description (CRTSBSD)
Delete subsystem Description (DLTSBSD)
Display subsystem Description (DSPSBSD)
Print subsystem Description (PRTSBSDAUT)
Work with subsystem Description (WRKSBSD)
The most useful is the WRKSBSD command because from this display you can create,
change, delete, display, or work with subsystem jobs, or you can start or stop a subsystem.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details All work within a subsystem is controlled by an IBM i program known as a
subsystem monitor. All subsystem monitors are identical, regardless of the subsystem they
control or the type of jobs run in that subsystem. What makes one subsystem any different
from another?
Each subsystem monitor uses a different subsystem description in performing its control
functions. A subsystem description is an object that contains information defining the
characteristics of an operating environment which can handle a specific type of processing,
such as interactive, batch, spooling, or communications. It defines how many jobs the
subsystem runs at one time, where and how those jobs run, where the subsystem looks for
jobs to run, and which resources the subsystem uses to perform the work.
A subsystem description can contain work entries or sources of work for one or more of the
following:
Autostart jobs
Workstations (individually or by type)
Prestart jobs
Job queues
Communications
A subsystem description also defines the amount of main storage that is available for jobs
that run in the subsystem. The subsystem description is used by the subsystem monitor to
establish the environment for the jobs that run in that subsystem.
When a subsystem is started, it is known by the name of the subsystem description it uses.
*SBSD is the object identifier for subsystems.
Explain the commands used with the subsystem descriptions. The most useful is the
WRKSBSD command because from this display you can create, change, delete, and
display subsystem descriptions, work with subsystem jobs, and start or stop a subsystem.
You can demonstrate this command with WRKSBSD *ALL. This shows the students the
SBSDs on your system. Inform them that their systems might be different. We discuss why
next.

16-29
Instructor Guide
Subsystem configurations shipped by IBM

IBM i
IPL starts only the subsystem named in QCTLSBSD system value

Environment as shipped (default) - QCTLSBSD = QBASE
Autostart job
QBASE
QSPL
Spooling
Console, interactive, batch, communications
QSYSWRK
System initiated functions
QUSRWRK
User initiated functions
QSERVER
File server
Complex environment - QCTLSBSD = QCTL

Autostart job
QCTL
Console
QSYSWRK
QINTER
Interactive
QBATCH
Batch
QSPL
Spooling
QCMN
Communication
QSERVER
File server
System functions
QUSRWRK
System functions
Figure 16-13. Subsystem configurations shipped by IBM
AS248.1
Notes:
The default subsystem configuration consists of a controlling subsystem called QBASE, a
system function subsystem called QSYSWRK, and a spooling subsystem called QSPL. All
jobs on the system run in this environment except for some system jobs and spooling jobs
that are run under the control of the QBASE subsystem. Certain system jobs run under the
control of QSYSWRK. Spooling jobs run under the control of the QSPL subsystem.
A more complex subsystem configuration is also provided and can be used instead of the
default QBASE/QSPL configuration. It consists of:
QCTL
Controlling subsystem
QSYSWRK
Runs certain system jobs initiated by the OS
QUSRWRK
Instituted in V5.1. subsystem used by the system for system jobs

that are user-oriented
QINTER
Subsystem for interactive jobs
QBATCH
Subsystem for batch jobs

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
QSPL
Subsystem for spooling
CMN
Subsystem used for communicating jobs
QSERVER
Subsystem used for file serving jobs
QHTTPSVR
Subsystem used for Web server jobs and programs

16-31
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details IBM ships several predefined subsystem descriptions. A system can be
implemented through the use of these shipped subsystems. It is also possible for a Power
implementer to implement a system by creating brand new subsystem descriptions.
When it is shipped, every system has QBASE as its controlling subsystem; the controlling
subsystem is the only one started by IBM i during IPL. QBASE is set up to handle all types
of work on the system (which includes the console, interactive jobs, batch jobs, and
communication jobs) except some system functions and spooling. In this environment, the
QSYSWRK subsystem is responsible for some system functions, and the QSPL
subsystem is responsible for all spooling jobs (output to printers).
A more complex environment is also shipped and can be used instead of the default
QBASE/QSPL environment described above. This environment is used if there are a lot of
different types of jobs running on a Power i system.
The system value QCTLSBSD (controlling subsystem) controls which subsystem
configuration is used.
IBM provides other subsystems, such as QSNADS, which supports jobs controlling the
functions of the System Network Architecture distribution services (SNADS) network and
IBM-supplied transaction programs, such as document interchange and object distribution.
These subsystems are started and ended when the functions they support are started and
ended.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Memory pools
IBM i
Logical subdivisions of main storage:

Machine Pool
Shared pools:
Shared by multiple subsystems
User-Defined Pools
Used for system activity
Private pools:
Assigned to a specific subsystem
*BASE
Not shared across subsystems
Up to 64 memory pools
Different from disk pools:

Auxiliary storage pools (ASP)
Independent auxiliary storage pools (IASP)
Figure 16-14. Memory pools
AS248.1
Notes:
Logical subdivisions of main storage:
Shared pools:
- Shared by multiple subsystems:
*Base
*INTERACT
*SPOOL
*SHRPOOL1-n
- Used for system activity
*Machine
Private pools:
- Assigned to a specific subsystem
- Not shared across subsystems
Up to 64 memory pools.

16-33
Instructor Guide
Different from disk pools:

Subdivision of disk space
- Auxiliary storage pools (ASP)
- Different from independent auxiliary storage pools (IASP)
Grouped by disk drives
Optional

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

16-35
Instructor Guide
Work management overview

IBM i
SBMJOB
Job
queue
Subsystem
pool
Output
queue
Writer
Batch
Printer
Sign-on
Interactive
Figure 16-15. Work management overview
AS248.1
Notes:
There are many different types of jobs, and most move through many stages. A working
knowledge of work management is absolutely necessary to effectively control jobs on the
system.
The flow for an interactive job is:
1. An interactive job does not place jobs in a job queue. This step is null in this
environment.
2. An interactive job is started when a user signs on to the system.
3. The interactive job is assigned to a subsystem designated to run interactive jobs.
- The QINTER subsystem is the default system for interactive jobs.
- An administrator can create additional subsystems where interactive jobs will be
run.
4. Work management determines how much memory is assigned to each subsystem.
- This will determine how much memory gets assigned to run these types of jobs.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
- The system administrator defines how the memory is allocated (into shared memory
pools or private memory pools).
5. Output queue details will be covered later in the course.
6. Writer details will be covered later in the course.
The flow for a batch job is:
A batch job includes one additional step in the beginning. Once the job flows out of the
subsystem, the steps are the same for both types of jobs.
1. A user will either choose a menu option that issues the command to submit a job or the
user will manually issue the submit job command on the command line.
2. A batch job is placed in a job queue and awaits its turn to be processed.
- Job queues are created by programmers or by administrators.
- The job description in your user profile is used by work management to determine to
which job queue your job will be sent.
- Your job description defines what priority is assigned to your batch jobs.
- Jobs are processed in a FIFO (first-in first-out) order based on priority.
3. The batch job is assigned to a subsystem designated to run batch jobs.
- The QBATCH subsystem is the default system for batch jobs.
- An administrator can create additional subsystems where batch jobs will be run.
- The system administrator defines how the memory is allocated (into shared memory
pools or private memory pools).
5. Output queue details will be covered later in the course.
6. Writer details will be covered later in the course.

16-37
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or False: A job is an environment that enables work to

be performed on the system.
2. Which of the following is not considered a user job?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Interactive
Batch
Autostart
Spooling
3. When a batch job is submitted, it is placed in a __________.

a.
b.
c.
d.
System memory
Subsystem
Job queue
Output queue
AS248.1
Notes:

16-39
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

The answer is True.

a.
b.
c.
d.
Interactive
Batch
Autostart
Spooling
The answer is Spooling.

a.
b.
c.
d.
System memory
Subsystem
Job queue
Output queue
The answer is Job queue.


V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. True or False: The highest priority in a job queue is priority

nine.
5. The system job that generates a print report runs in which of
the following subsystems?
a.
b.
c.
d.
QHTTP
QINTER
QBATCH
QSPL
6. True or False: An interactive job is placed in a job queue

when it is submitted.
AS248.1
Notes:

16-41
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

nine.

a.
b.
c.
d.
QHTTP
QINTER
QBATCH
QSPL
The answer is QSPL.


V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

Explain the difference between interactive and batch
processing
Describe what a job description does and how it controls work
on the system
system
AS248.1
Notes:

16-43
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 17. Work management using 5250 emulation

Estimated time
00:15

This unit provides a brief introduction to work management. We look at
the commands and screens, windows, and panes to display related
information on the system.

Use the command to display a job description

Identify which job description is used by a user profile
List the subsystems that are active
Use the command to display system status information

Accountability:
Exercise

17-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

17-3
Instructor Guide
Job description: What is it?

IBM i
Figure 17-2. Job description: What is it?
AS248.1
Notes:
The command used to display the screen capture on this visual is:
DSPJOBD JOBD(QGPL/QDFTJOBD)
Press the Page down or Page up keys to move through the initial three pages displayed
when you run this command. Press the Enter key to move to the next screen, which is the
visual on the next page.
A job description is an object that contains a set of information, also called attributes, that
specify how a job should be run. There are many job descriptions on your system. The
IBM-supplied default job description is QDFTJOBD (in the QGPL library).
Notice the information that can be specified in a job description on these initial three pages.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details This visual highlights some of the job description parameters that are used by
work management.
Job date specifies the date the jobs associated with this job description are run.
The Job queue and Output queue that will be used for jobs and the priority of the printed
output are specified in the job description.
In addition, the priority of the job (Job priority) and printed output (Output priority) on the
queues are specified here.
Message logging is discussed in the problem determination unit; however, point out that
the amount of information available for problem determination is controlled by this
parameter in the job description.
Every job, in addition to being associated with a job description, is also associated with a
user profile.

17-5
Instructor Guide
Job description: Library list

IBM i
Figure 17-3. Job description: Library list
AS248.1
Notes:
Press the Enter key on the previous page to see the screen capture on this page.
On this screen, you can see the parameter that can specify either the list of libraries in the
system library list or that can specify a system value that contains this information.
The default library list is used for jobs that use this job description. The default library list
contains the library names that are specified in the system value QUSRLIBL at the time a
job using this job description is started.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

17-7
Instructor Guide
How a user profile relates to a job description

IBM i
Figure 17-4. How a user profile relates to a job description
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the work user profile (WRKUSRPRF *all) command to see a list of user profiles. From
that screen, select the profile of interest and specify option 5 to display the information
stored in that profile.
Page down to get to the page captured in the visual. Notice the type of information stored in
a user profile.
Specifically, make note of the last parameter on this page where you specify the job
description specified for this user.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The user profile is an object that contains a wealth of information about a user
and how the jobs for that user are to be run.
The highest scheduling priority parameter in the user profile determines the highest
scheduling priority that is allowed for any job submitted by the user associated with this
profile. The scheduling priority ranges from zero to nine, where zero is the highest priority.
The job description, output queue, and printer device that the jobs for this user will use can
also be specified here.
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Once you have finished this visual, you should
play file AS248-U17-F04 in the multimedia library of Elluminate to provide the students a
video demonstration of how to use the WRKUSRPRF command.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Once you have finished this visual, you should play file
AS248-U17-F04 on your PC to provide the students with a video demonstration of the
LICPGM command.

17-9
Instructor Guide
Work with Subsystems

IBM i
Figure 17-5. Work with Subsystems
AS248.1
Notes:
The Work with subsystems (WRKSBS) display shows the status of, and information about,
each subsystem in the system.
You can use this list to determine whether a specific amount of main storage has been
assigned to a subsystem and, if so, which pool IDs within the subsystem were assigned
that main storage.
You can also see how many jobs are active in each subsystem.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

17-11
Instructor Guide
Work with System Status

IBM i
Figure 17-6. Work with System Status
AS248.1
Notes:
The Work with System Status (WRSYSSTS) command will display this screen that shows a
group of statistics that depicts the current status of the system.
It displays the number of jobs currently in the system, the total capacity of the system ASP,
the percentage of the system ASP storage currently in use, the amount of auxiliary storage
for temporary objects and machine data currently in use, the maximum amount of auxiliary
storage space required for temporary objects and machine data since the last initial
program load (IPL), the percentage of machine addresses used, and statistical and
reference information related to each storage pool that currently has main storage
allocated to it.
Pressing the F24 function key will display the additional function keys displayed on the
screen in the lower right. Those will be discussed on the next page.
Remember to use the F1 - Help key to get an understanding of all of the information
displayed on this screen.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Discuss the information that is displayed when this command is processed on
the system.
Using the F24 key will show additional function keys that will be discussed on the next
page.
Before you can perform any disk management tasks with System i Navigator, you need to
install the Configuration and Service component and enable the Disk Units folder.
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Once you have finished discussing this visual,
play file AS248-U17-F06 in the multimedia library of Elluminate to provide the students a
video demonstration of how to use the function keys to call up additional information in
place of the next visual.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You can then play file AS248-U17-F06 on your PC to
provide the students with a video demonstration of how to use the function keys to call up
additional information in place of the next visual.

17-13
Instructor Guide
Using the additional function keys

IBM i
F14
F15
F16
Figure 17-7. Using the additional function keys
AS248.1
Notes:
Using the F24 - Additional function keys from the Work with System Status display will
allow you to process other commands that show the screens captured on this visual.
Using the F14 - Work with subsystems function key will process the WRKSBS
command to show the screen that was discussed earlier in this unit.
Using the F15 - Work with active jobs function key will process the WRKACTJOB
command. The Work with Active Jobs display shows the performance and status
information for jobs that are currently active on the system. More detail about jobs will be
covered later in this class.
Using the F16 - Work with disk status function key will process the WRKDSKSBS
command. The Work with Disk Status display shows performance and status information
about the disk units on the system. It displays the number of units currently on the system,
the type of each disk unit, the size of disk space, whether the disk is currently on the
system, the percentage of disk space used, and other statistics about the disk drives.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

17-15
Instructor Guide
Exercises
IBM i
Exercise: Work management using 5250 emulation

Exercise: Work management using System i Navigator
Exercise: Work management using

completed your exercises.
Figure 17-8. Exercises
AS248.1
Notes:
Please refer to your Student Exercise Guide and perform the lab Work management using
5250 emulation, and then perform the GUI exercise or exercises of your choice.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.

17-17
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or False: The name of the default job description is

QDFTJOBD.
2. The command used to display a job description is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
DSPUSRPRF
WKRJOBD
DSPJOBD
DSPOBJD
3. True or False: The library list is one of the parameters

specified in a user profile.
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

QDFTJOBD.
The answer is True.

a.
b.
c.
d.
DSPUSRPRF
WKRJOBD
DSPJOBD
DSPOBJD
The answer is DSPJOBD.


17-19
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose

17-21
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 18. Job control using 5250 emulation

Estimated time
00:20

Monitoring and controlling the jobs that run on the system and the
printed reports these jobs generate are the most important aspects of
a system operator's job.

Explain how to use Work with User Jobs command
Explain how to use the Work with Active Jobs command
Explain how to submit jobs and the commands used to display
these jobs
Explain how to use the Work with Job Queue command and the
options available for these jobs
Explain how to schedule jobs
Explain how and when to end a job abnormally
Explain how and when to disconnect a user job

Accountability:
Exercise

18-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Explain how to use the Work with User Jobs command
these jobs
Explain how to use the Work with Job Queue command and
the options available for these jobs
AS248.1
Notes:
Monitoring includes such functions as:
Locating information about a job, whether it is on a job queue, is active, or has spool
files on an output queue
Determining the status of jobs and printed output
Displaying detailed information about a job
Controlling includes such functions as:
Changing the way a job is or will be processed

Holding, ending, or releasing a job (active or on a queue)
Holding, deleting, or releasing printed output
Answering system messages sent to a job
Moving printed output from one output queue to another

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
perform an application share of 5250 emulation for the next five visuals covering the details
outlined in the student notes.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Starting with the next visual, you should perform a live
demo on your instructor PC of 5250 emulation for the next five visuals covering the details

18-3
Instructor Guide
Work with User Jobs command

IBM i
Figure 18-2. Work with User Jobs command
AS248.1
Notes:
The Work with User Jobs (WRKUSRJOB) command allows you to work with a list of
selected user jobs.
Depending on the values you specify on the STATUS, ASTLVL, and JOBTYPE parameters,
you can use this command to perform the following tasks:
From the Work with Signed-On Users display, you can select options to send messages
to or sign off users who are signed on to the system. You can also select options to
display messages or display details about signed-on users. To show the Work with
Signed-On Users display, specify STATUS(*ACTIVE), ASTLVL(*BASIC), and
JOBTYPE(*INTERACT).
From the Work with Jobs display, you can show the status of all batch jobs on the
system. You can select options to hold, end, or release the jobs shown. You can also
select options to work with printer output or display messages. To show the Work with
Jobs display, specify any value for the STATUS parameter, ASTLVL(*BASIC), and
JOBTYPE(*BATCH).

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
From the Work with User Jobs display, you can show the status of user jobs running on
the system and the status of user jobs that are on job queues or output queues. You can
select options to change, hold, end, work with, release, or disconnect the jobs shown.
You can also select options to work with spooled files and display messages.

18-5
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Work with User Jobs display

IBM i
Figure 18-3. Work with User Jobs display
AS248.1
Notes:
The Work with User Jobs display shows the names and status information of user jobs
running in the system and the status of user jobs that are on job queues or output queues.
You can type an option next to one or more jobs. When the Enter key is pressed, the
function associated with the number you typed is performed for that job.
If you press the Enter key without typing any other data, you are returned to the previous
menu or display.
You can type parameters on the command line if you want to override the defaults for the
options you typed. Typing parameters is valid only if you used one of the options. For
example, you must type 4 next to one or more jobs and, if you want to, type
OPTION(*IMMED) to change from the default, OPTION(*CNTRLD).

18-7
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Working with Signed-On Users

IBM i
Figure 18-4. Working with Signed-On Users
AS248.1
Notes:
To see the display in the visual, enter the command:
WRKUSRJOB USER(*ALL) STATUS(*ACTIVE) JOBTYPE(*INTERACT) ASTLVL(*BASIC)
An easy way to work with and control users who are signed on to the Power is by running
the WRKUSRJOB command shown on the top of this visual. This command brings up the
Work with Signed-On Users display. From this display, you can send a user a message,
sign the user off the system, display details about the user (for example, user name and
description and display station name and description), and display a message that requires
a reply from a user. This display can make working with users a lot easier.

18-9
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Work with Active Jobs

IBM i
Figure 18-5. Work with Active Jobs
AS248.1
Notes:
The Work with Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB) command allows you to work with performance
and status information for the active jobs in the system. The sequence of jobs can be
changed with the Sequence (SEQ) parameter or through operations on the display. Other
parameters allow the selection of jobs to be shown on the display. The selection
parameters can also be changed by operations on the display.
The Work with Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB) display shows the performance and status
information for jobs that are currently active on the system. All information is gathered on a
job basis.
The jobs are ordered on the basis of the subsystem in which they are running. Jobs that
run in a subsystem (autostart jobs, interactive jobs, batch jobs, readers, and writers) are
alphabetized by job name and indented under the subsystem monitor job field with which
they are associated. subsystem monitors (with the jobs in the subsystem grouped under
each monitor job) are alphabetized and presented before system (SYS) jobs. The system
jobs (SCPF, QSYSARB, QLUS) are alphabetized by job name and presented following the
subsystem monitors and jobs within the subsystems.

18-11
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Option 5: Work with Job

IBM i
Figure 18-6. Option 5: Work with Job
AS248.1
Notes:
The Work with Job and the Display Job menus allow you to select options to work with or to
change information related to a user job.
Information about the following options can be shown regardless of where the job is located
in the system (on a job queue, on an output queue, or active):
Job status attributes
Job definition attributes
Spooled file information
Information about the following options can be shown only when the job is active:
Job run attributes
Job log information
Call stack information
Job lock information

18-13
Instructor Guide
Library list information

Open file information
File override information
Commitment control status
Communications status
Activation groups
Mutexes
Threads
Media library attributes
Note
A job is not considered to be in the system until all of its input has been completely read in.
Only then is an entry placed on the job queue.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose

18-15
Instructor Guide
Question
IBM i
What are some scenarios where you might need to view active
jobs in the system or currently signed on users?
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
tool to list some scenarios where they would need to view active jobs or currently signed on
users.
three students to list some scenarios where they would need to view active jobs or
currently signed on users.
Sample Answers:
In order to perform a Power down of your system (to see who is active and to view what
work is currently being done)
To perform system maintenance
Need to place Power in dedicated state
Need to perform a Backup / Restore of your system

18-17
Instructor Guide
OL29C
Submitting a batch job

IBM i
Figure 18-8. Submitting a batch job
AS248.1
Notes:
You already know how to start an interactive job; all you do is sign on to a workstation. To
start (or submit) a batch job, you use the Submit Job (SBMJOB) command; however, batch
jobs are usually assigned to menu options for an application.
There are several ways to assign characteristics to a batch job, such as which job queue it
is submitted to, what priority it is assigned, to which output queue its associated files go to
and at what priority, and which print device should be used. If you use the SBMJOB
command, there are parameters for each of these characteristics. There is also a
parameter to specify which job description to use. Unless specified explicitly on the
command, the submitted job gets its characteristics from the job description. Which job
description you should use might depend on the user profile of the user submitting the job.
If nothing is specified, the system uses the job description specified in the user profile,
QDFTJOBD. This default job description specifies that batch jobs should be submitted to
the job queue, QBATCH in the QGPL library. This job queue runs its jobs in either the
QBATCH or the QBASE subsystem, depending on how your Power is set up.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Mention that the job queue determines how many jobs can run at the same time.

18-19
Instructor Guide
Work with Submitted Jobs

IBM i
Figure 18-9. Work with Submitted Jobs
AS248.1
Notes:
As the command name implies, the Work with Submitted Jobs (WRKSBMJOB) command
can be used only to display and work with batch jobs. It is easiest to use this command to
check on the status of your batch jobs.
The WRKSBMJOB command displays those jobs submitted from:
*USER
The user ID associated with the job running the WRKSBMJOB command
*WRKSTN
The workstation running the WRKSBMJOB command
*JOB
The job running the WRKSBMJOB command
The following information is shown for each batch job:

The job name
The user profile of the person who submitted the job
The type and status of the job
The last system function that the job used

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The Work with Submitted Jobs (WRKSBMJOB) command displays information
and permits operator control of batch jobs. While this command provides considerably
fewer selection criteria than the WRKUSRJOB command, which will be discussed later in
this unit, it does have valid uses.
Operators who merely need to work with their own batch jobs (regardless of where they
were submitted) or with jobs submitted at their current workstation (regardless of who might
have submitted those jobs) should generally use the WRKSBMJOB command with the
appropriate value specified for the Jobs submitted from parameter.

18-21
Instructor Guide
Work with Job Queue

IBM i
Figure 18-10. Work with Job Queue
AS248.1
Notes:
As a system operator, you can work with all submitted jobs. The names of all job queues on
a system are displayed when you select the menu options illustrated in this visual or use
the Work with Job Queue (WRKJOBQ) command. For each queue listed, the number of
jobs waiting in that queue, the status of the queue, and the subsystem that runs jobs
placed on that queue are listed. An entire job queue (and all jobs on it) can be controlled
from this display by entering the appropriate options.
Option 3 holds a job queue. No new jobs are started from a job queue that has been held.
Any jobs already started from the queue are not affected. Additional jobs can be submitted
to the queue, but, like the ones already there, they do not run until the queue is released.
The Hold Job Queue (HLDJOBQ) command can be used to perform the same function.
Option 4 deletes the job queue. In order for this to happen, there can be no jobs on it. This
option runs the Delete Job Queue (DLTJOBQ) command.
Option 5 allows you to see and work with the individual jobs waiting to run from a job
queue. This option runs the Work with Job Queue (WRKJOBQ) command.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Option 6 releases a held job queue and allows jobs to be restarted from that queue by the
associated subsystem. The Release Job Queue (RLSJOBQ) command can be used to
perform this same function.
Option 8:
Allows you to view job scheduled entries for a selected job queue.
Provides schedule information on future jobs that are to be submitted to this job queue.
Runs the Work with Schedule Entries (WRKJOBSCDE) command.
This option is discussed in more detail later in this unit.
Option 14 clears all jobs from the job queue. This option causes the Clear Job Queue
(CLRJOBQ) command to be run.

18-23
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details An entire job queue can be held and then released. The Hold Job Queue
(HLDJOBQ) and Release Job Queue (RLSJOBQ) commands exist to perform each
function directly and should usually be adequate. If several job queues need to be held or
released at the same time, it might be easier to issue the WRKJOBQ *ALL command. When
the Work with All Job Queues display appears, selecting option 3 or option 6 as
appropriate allows the operator to control several job queues at once.
The Work with All Job Queues display shown on this visual can also be useful if batch jobs
that the operator thinks should be running are not. Because the status (held, released, or
changed) of each queue is shown, the operator can easily determine if the reason for the
jobs not running is because one or more job queues are held.
Transition statement Choosing option 5 for an individual job queue on this display
allows the operator to see and work with the jobs on that one job queue, as shown on the
next visual.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Working with jobs on a job queue

IBM i
Work with Job Queue
Queue: QBATCH
Library: QGPL
Status: RLS/SBS
Enter

2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 5=Work with 6=Release
Change Job (CHGJOB)
Opt
Job

User
Number
Priority
Status
Job
name . . . . .020836
. . . . . . . . . >QDFTJOBD
OPR016
5
User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . >AS2401
OPR016
5
Number . . . ..0208316
. . . . . . . . .>0208316
2 QDFTJOBD
Job priority (on JOBQ) . . . . . 2
__ QDFTJOBD
OPR016
020834
Output
priority (on
OUTQ) . . 5 5
Print device . . . . . . . . . . . . .PRT02
Output queue . . . . . . . . . . . .*DEV
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _______
Bottom
Run priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . *SAME
Parameters for options 2, 3 or command
Additional Parameters
===> _______________________________________________________
Job queue job
. . . F12=Cancel
...........
*SAME
F3=Exit F4=Prompt F6=Submit
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
______
Print text
. . . . .F24=More
. . . . . . . . keys
...
*SAME
F22=Work with job schedule
entries
__ QDFTJOBD
Name,
RLS *
Name
000000-999999
RLS
0-9, *SAME
HLD*SAME
1-9,
Name, *SAME, *USRPRF...
Name, *SAME, *USRPRF, *DEV...
Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB
1-99, *SAME
Name, *SAME
Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB
More...
F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display

F24=More keys
Figure 18-11. Working with jobs on a job queue
AS248.1
Notes:
By selecting option 5 from the Work with All Job Queues display or specifying the name of
a job queue on the WRKJOBQ command, you can display the status and selection priority
of the jobs waiting from a specific job queue. Jobs are listed here in the order in which they
were placed on the queue in priority sequence. This is the order in which they are run.
Users with *JOBCTL rights in their profile can control the jobs in the queue from this
display. As a system operator, you have authority to hold, release, change, or end jobs. To
change the attributes for a job before it runs, select option 2. The CHGJOB command
prompt is displayed.
When the Change Job prompt appears, the full three-part job name is already filled in and
cannot be changed. Change the attributes of the job as required, and press Enter. Note
that F10 (Additional parameters) is available to allow access to additional attributes.
From the Work with Job Queue display, individual jobs can also be held and released or
ended. Use option 3 to indicate that a job is to be held. A job held on a job queue remains
there but will not be started by the subsystem that is processing jobs on the queue. Use
option 6 for a job that is being held to make that job once again eligible to be started.

18-25
Instructor Guide
Use option 4 to end a job on a job queue. Ending a job means removing it from the system.
Once ended, there is no way to restart the job. If you end a job by mistake, a new job with
exactly the same attributes as the one that has been ended must be submitted. For that
reason, when you end a job on a job queue, you must confirm your selection. Be aware
that if you prompt for option 4 from this display, no confirmation display appears. The job is
simply ended.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details To work with a job that has been submitted to batch but is not yet active, the
operator must first determine which job queue the job was submitted to. If the name of the
job queue is not known, you can search multiple queues (one at a time) with option 5 from
the Work with All Job Queues display to bring up the upper display on this visual.
If the name of the job queue is known, the operator can use system menu options as
shown on the prior visual or request prompting for the WRKJOBQ command to display a
list of jobs on just that one job queue. No matter how the WRKJOBQ command is
prompted, the name of the job queue and, if necessary, the name of its associated library
must be entered.
Whether option 5 is selected for a particular queue on the Work with All Job Queues
display or the WRKJOBQ command is run with a job queue name specified, the result is
the same. That job queue, its status, all jobs currently on the queue, and the selection
priority and status of each job are displayed. The jobs are listed in the order in which they
will be selected to run. To change a job, the operator locates the job, types a 2 to the left of
the job name, and presses Enter. The prompt for the CHGJOB command is displayed with
the job name already filled in. Now the operator can change the attributes of the job as
required. Point out that there are more attributes than are shown and that you should use
F10 (Additional parameters) to see and change them.
Also discuss holding, releasing, and ending jobs on a job queue.

18-27
Instructor Guide
Working with job scheduler

IBM i
Figure 18-12. Working with job scheduler
AS248.1
Notes:
A standard Job Scheduler is included as part of the operating system. It provides basic
scheduling options for your jobs.
The Add Job Schedule Entry (ADDJOBSCDE) command allows you to schedule batch jobs
by adding an entry to the job schedule. You can use this command to schedule a batch job
to be submitted once or to schedule a batch job to be submitted at regular intervals.
The job schedule entry contains all of the information needed to submit the job, including
the command the job runs, the job description and user profile under which the job is run,
the job queue to which the job is submitted, and the message queue to which messages
are sent.
At the date and time you specify on this command, the job is submitted to the specified job
queue. This command does not guarantee that the job will begin running at the scheduled
time, however. The job will not begin running if the job queue is held, not attached to an
active subsystem, or if the maximum number of active jobs allowed to run in the subsystem
or on the system at one time has been reached.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
The Work with Job Schedule Entries (WRKJOBSCDE) command allows you to work with
an entry, entries, or generic entries in the job schedule. Each job schedule entry contains
the information needed to automatically submit a batch job once or at regularly scheduled
intervals.
This command shows the Work with Job Schedule Entries display. From the display, you
can select options to add, change, remove, hold, or release entries. You can display details
of an entry or work with the last job submitted for an entry. You can also select an option to
immediately submit a job using the information contained in the job schedule entry.

18-29
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Working with advanced job scheduler

IBM i
Figure 18-13. Working with advanced job scheduler
AS248.1
Notes:
The Advanced Job Scheduler, also knows as AJS, provides many more scheduling options
than the standard Job scheduler. The AJS is a licensed program product that can be
purchased by the customer.
The Add Job using Job Scheduler (ADDJOBJS) command allows you to schedule batch
jobs by adding an entry to the job schedule. Jobs can be a single job or a member of a
group of jobs or an application. You can use this command to schedule a batch job to be
submitted once, at a regular interval, and so on, based on the schedule code you specify.
You can schedule jobs with user-defined calendars, holiday exception calendars, and fiscal
year calendars.
The Work with Jobs using Job Scheduler (WRKJOBJS) command allows you to work with
a single job, groups of jobs, or all jobs that you have set up in the advanced job scheduler.
You can sequence the display by job, by date, or by group.
When you select jobs that you want to work with, you are taken to the Work with Jobs
display. From this display, you can perform most job related functions.

18-31
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Ending a user job abnormally

IBM i
Work with User Jobs

I520DVL2
04/10/08 10:13:12
2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 5=Work with 6=Release 16=Display message
8=Work with spooled files 13=Disconnect
Opt
__
Job
DSP03
User
QSECOFR
Type
INTER
-----Status----SYSREQ END
Function
PGM-QMNSYSRQ
End Job Abnormal (ENDJOBABN)
Parameters or command
===> ENDJOBABN
F4
Job name......................................
User...........................................
Number......................................
dsp03
qsecofr
020813
Name
Name
000000-999999
Figure 18-14. Ending a user job abnormally
AS248.1
Notes:
If you have tried to end a job immediately and it is still active after 10 minutes, you might
have to use the End Job Abnormal (ENDJOBABN) command. This command is not
available as an option on a list display. It must be entered as a command. You cannot use
the ENDJOBABN command unless a user's job has been ended immediately and is still
active after 10 minutes.
In order to run the ENDJOBABN command, you must be signed on as QPGMR,
QSYSOPR, or QSRV or have *ALLOBJ authority. You must also know the full three-part job
name of the job you want to end. Use option 5 on the WRKUSRJOB display to determine
the full job name. After ending the Work with Jobs menu, prompt for the ENDJOBABN
command on any command line (on this visual, the ENDJOBABN command is in the
process of being entered on the Work with User Jobs display) and enter the recorded job
name.

18-33
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details It can happen, if rarely, that a job does not end no matter what the operator
does.
If you have tried to end a job immediately and it is still active after ten minutes, the End Job
Abnormal (ENDJOBABN) command can be used to end it. The operator needs to find the
three-part job name (job name, profile name, and six-digit sequential number) shown at the
top of the Work with Jobs display and manually record it. The operator can find the
three-part job name by entering option 5 on the Work with User Jobs display.
After recording the job name, you must return to a display that allows command entry.
Prompt for the ENDJOBABN command, type the full job name, and press Enter. It might
still take some time for the job to end, but it does end. Point out to the students that on the
next IPL, a message indicates that the last system termination was abnormal.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Disconnecting a user job

IBM i
Order entry
User job
Sign on
Disconnect
User job
User...
Password...
Reconnect
automatically
at sign-on
Order Entry
User job
Figure 18-15. Disconnecting a user job
AS248.1
Notes:
Option 13 on the Work with User Jobs display runs the Disconnect Job (DSCJOB)
command, which disconnects an interactive job that is not currently held. When you select
option 13 for one or more jobs:
The job information is saved.
The sign-on display appears on the user's workstation.
The job is resumed if the same user later signs on to the same workstation.
The DSCJOB command is not allowed for a pass-through job. In order to disconnect a
pass-through job, the user must press the System Request key and return to the source
system.
To run option 13, you must have *JOBCTL authority.

18-35
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The disconnected job is ended if the time interval in the system value
QDSCJOBITV (time interval before disconnected jobs end) is exceeded. The shipped
value for QDSCJOBITV is 240 minutes.
The following restrictions apply when you are working with the DSCJOB command:
A job being disconnected must be an interactive job.
A job which is being held cannot be disconnected.
A pass-through job cannot be disconnected unless you have used the system request
to return the source system from the pass-through target.
You must have *JOBCTL authority to disconnect a job.
A job cannot be disconnected if PC Organizer is active.
If the user of the disconnected job signs on to another workstation, a new interactive job is
started. For the disconnected job to be resumed, the same user must sign back on to the
same workstation.
It might not seem important to your students at this point in their training, but it is still worth
pointing out that if a disconnected job holds any locks when it is disconnected, those locks
remain held either until the job is resumed and the locks are released or until the job is
ended.
We have talked about how to submit a job and how to monitor and control jobs. Now let us
talk about the printed output of those jobs. Let us look at some commands to control printed
output.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Exercise
IBM i
Exercise: Job control using 5250 emulation

AS248.1
Notes:

18-37
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. The Work with User Jobs command allows you to select

which of the following types of jobs?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Active
Job queue
Output queue
All of these
2. On the Work with User Jobs display, which of the following

options will show you all of the characteristics of a job?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Option 2 - Change
Option 5 Work with
Option 7 Display messages
Option 8 Work with spool files
3. True or False: You can use option 3 Hold, on the Work with
Active Jobs display, to hold a subsystem.
AS248.1
Notes:

18-39
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i
1. The Work with User Jobs command allows you to select which of the
following types of jobs?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Active
Job queue
Output queue
All of these
The answer is All of these.
2. On the Work with User Jobs display, which of the following options will
show you all of the characteristics of a job?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Option 2 - Change
Option 5 Work with
The answer is Option 5 Work with.
3. True or False: You can use option 3 Hold, on the Work with Active
Jobs display, to hold a subsystem.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

Explain how to use the Work with User Jobs command
these jobs
Explain how to use the Work with Job Queue command and
the options available for these jobs
AS248.1
Notes:

18-41
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 19. Job control using System i Navigator

Estimated time
00:20

a system operator's job. This unit will detail the windows and
navigation used to display these types of information when working
with the System i Navigator interface.

Navigate to display your user jobs
Navigate to display all active jobs on the system
Customize the windows and data displayed as you navigate this
interface
Navigate to display the properties for a job
Navigate to display information for the active subsystems
Navigate to display information about jobs that have been put on a
scheduler

Accountability:
Exercise

19-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Customize the windows and data displayed as you navigate
this interface
Navigate to display information about jobs that have been put
on a scheduler
AS248.1
Notes:


V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
perform an application share of System i Navigator for the next seven visuals covering the
details outlined in the student notes.
demo on your instructor PC of System i Navigator for the next seven visuals covering the

19-3
Instructor Guide
Basic Operations > Jobs

IBM i
Figure 19-2. Basic Operations > Jobs
AS248.1
Notes:
In this example, Jobs under Basic Operations is selected. By default, this will show you a
list of your jobs. You can work with your jobs on a specific Power i server.
What can you do with jobs?
Tailor the Jobs display:
-
Change whose jobs are displayed (Customize > Include)

Change which columns are displayed (Customize > Columns)
Size columns
Sort a list or column
Display the job log (right-click the job, and select Job Log)
Hold a job (right-click the job, and select Hold)
Delete a job (right-click the job, and select Delete)

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

19-5
Instructor Guide
Work Management > Active Jobs

IBM i
Figure 19-3. Work Management > Active Jobs
AS248.1
Notes:
In this example, Active Jobs under Work Management, is selected.
Active jobs refer to jobs that have started running but have not yet completed running.
Active jobs do not include jobs that are on a job queue waiting to be started or jobs that
have completed processing but are waiting for a spooled file to be printed.
Following are some characteristics of an active job:
Contains running code

Has a call stack
Has objects locked
Has the status of an active job, for example, running or waiting for (x)
Controlling work in the Power is performed mainly at the job level. Most commands and
APIs operate against the entire job.
Inactive jobs are jobs on a job queue waiting to be started or jobs that have completed
processing but are waiting for a printer output file (spooled files) to be printed.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Note
The columns being displayed on this panel have been customized for active jobs using the
F12 key to customize columns function.

19-7
Instructor Guide
Active Jobs: Find

IBM i
Figure 19-4. Active Jobs: Find
AS248.1
Notes:
To search for a specific active job, click Active Jobs > Edit > Find... from the pull-down
menu.
Use the Find dialog to search a list for a string of characters. The Find dialog remains open
and stays on top of the list being searched until you click Close. This allows you to do
multiple searches.
You can press F3 to do another search using the current Find options.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

19-9
Instructor Guide
Active Jobs > Customize this View

IBM i
Figure 19-5. Active Jobs > Customize this View
AS248.1
Notes:
You can monitor jobs on the system. If you are using 5250 emulation, type the Work with
Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB) command to display the active jobs. If you are using System i
Navigator, right-click Active Jobs, and then click Customize this view > Columns.
You can view Work Management panels and lists more easily and efficiently by
customizing them. By taking advantage of these customization options, you can improve
performance. For example, by subsetting the list of objects for a particular library using the
Include dialog, you can limit the number of objects that must be retrieved from the host and
displayed in System i Navigator.
The methods for customizing Work Management panels are:
Sort: Specify how objects are sorted in the list using the Sort dialog.
Include: Limit the list of objects to those that meet the criteria you specify using the
Include dialog.
Columns: Specify the columns of information that are displayed in the list and the order
in which they are displayed using the Columns dialog.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Shortcuts: Quickly access lists you have customized using Include and Columns.
Note
The columns that you select can affect the performance of displaying the list of jobs. While
every single column displayed can have a slight performance effect, some columns have
additional performance considerations that might result in a more noticeable performance
difference, particularly when the list to be displayed contains a large number of jobs.

19-11
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Customize this View > Include (F11)

IBM i
Figure 19-6. Customize this View > Include (F11)
AS248.1
Notes:
Include specific objects in the list: For jobs and job queues, you can determine which
objects should be displayed in a list. For example, you can change the Active Jobs list to
include only the active jobs for a particular user. This action allows you to limit the list of
objects displayed in System i Navigator to those that meet the criteria you specify. Use the
Active Jobs list to find jobs and job queues more quickly and efficiently, especially for large
systems with a large number of jobs.
To customize the contents of a list:
1. Select the Work Management branch you would like to customize. In this example, it
was Active Jobs.
2. From the View menu, select Customize this View > Include and so on. (The shortcut
is to select the branch and press F11.)
3. In the Include window, specify the criteria for the objects you want to include in the list.
4. Click OK.

19-13
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Customize this View > Columns (F12)

IBM i
Figure 19-7. Customize this View > Columns (F12)
AS248.1
Notes:
Specify which columns to display: You can customize Work Management to specify
which columns of information are displayed in a list and the order in which those columns
are displayed. To customize columns:
1. Select the Work Management branch you would like to customize. In this example, we
are working with Active Jobs.
2. From the View menu, select Customize this View > Columns. (The shortcut is to
select the branch and press F12.) All of the columns that are currently displayed are
listed under Current columns. Any additional columns that can be displayed are listed
under Available columns.
3. Select the columns you want displayed, and use the Add Before and Add After
buttons to add them to the Current columns list in the order you want them displayed. To
remove or reorder a column from the Current columns list, select the column and click
Remove.
4. Click OK.

19-15
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Qualified job: Name, Current User, Number

IBM i
Figure 19-8. Qualified job: Name, Current User, Number
AS248.1
Notes:
The columns have been arranged from the default view to show the complete job
identification, that is, the qualified job name, in the System i Navigator view of active jobs.

19-17
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Transition statement You can discontinue the application share or live demo after this
visual.
multimedia library of Elluminate in place of the next two visuals.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You can then play file AS248-U19-F09 on your PC place
of the next two visuals while providing commentary for the different parts of the file.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Job Properties (1 of 2)
IBM i
Figure 19-9. Job Properties (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
Notice the actions you can take for an interactive job.
Job attributes from the job description and user profile appear in the properties of a job.
In order to display the job information in a green screen environment, type the
WRKACTJOB command, and then the option 5 (Work with) in front of the job you are
interested in.

19-19
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Job Properties (2 of 2)
IBM i
Figure 19-10. Job Properties (2 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
All of the attributes for a job can be displayed using this notebook. If you have the proper
authority, you will be allowed to change some of the job attributes.
The General tab shows the name of the job description that the job is using and the
subsystem that is controlling the job.
The Performance tab shows the memory pool that the job is using and job
performance statistics.
The Printer Output tab allows you to view and change properties that affect the printing
output for the job.
The Messages tab shows how messages that are sent to and from this job are to be
handled.
The Job Log tab describes how much detail is to be kept in the job log.
The Server tab allows you to view information about server jobs. For each server job,
you can see the type of server, the job user identity, and, if available, the client IP
address.

19-21
Instructor Guide
The Security tab identifies the user profile for the job.
The Date/Time tab allows you to view and edit settings related to system time.
The International tab allows you to view or change properties related to text and
character format and the language and country associated with the job.
The Threads tab allows you to view or change information related to threads for a job
that is currently active or on a job queue.
Use the Resources tab to view information about system resources, such as memory
pool and disk pool group for the job, as well as information on memory and processor
affinity.
The Other tab allows you to view or change the accounting code, the decision to keep
DDM connections active, the switch settings, and the device recovery action.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

19-23
Instructor Guide
Subsystems
IBM i
Figure 19-11. Subsystems
AS248.1
Notes:
The subsystem is where work is processed on the Power i server. All jobs, with the
exception of system jobs, run within subsystems. A subsystem is a single, predefined
operating environment through which the system coordinates work flow and resource use.
The system can contain several subsystems, all operating independently of each other.
One subsystem can be set up to handle only interactive jobs, while another subsystem
handles only batch jobs. subsystems can also be designed to handle many types of work.
A subsystem can be either active or inactive. An active subsystem is one that has been
started. An inactive subsystem is one that either has not yet been started or has been
stopped.
The controlling subsystem is the interactive subsystem that starts automatically when the
system starts, and it is the subsystem through which the system operator controls the
system during system startup.
A subsystem job is a job created by the operating system to manage resources and start,
control, and end jobs.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

19-25
Instructor Guide
Subsystems > Properties

IBM i
Figure 19-12. Subsystems > Properties
AS248.1
Notes:
The runtime characteristics of a subsystem are defined in an object called a subsystem
description.
A subsystem description acts as a set of instructions telling the subsystem how much work
enters a subsystem, how and where it enters, and which resources the subsystem uses to
perform the work.
A subsystem is created when a subsystem description is defined or created. An active
subsystem takes on the simple name of the subsystem description.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

19-27
Instructor Guide
Job queues
IBM i
Figure 19-13. Job queues
AS248.1
Notes:
To see the active job queues, drill down through
Work Management > Job Queues > Active Job Queues.
To see a specific job queue, such as Qbatch, right-click it and select Explore from the
Context menu that appears.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

19-29
Instructor Guide
Explore Qbatch job queue

IBM i
Figure 19-14. Explore Qbatch job queue
AS248.1
Notes:
On the visual in this screen capture, you see jobs that are on the job queue Qbatch.
There are three jobs on this queue.
Highlight and right-click a job.
This will show you what you can do to manage jobs on a job queue.
A job can be moved to another queue by selecting Move or by dragging and dropping.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

19-31
Instructor Guide
Exercise
IBM i
Exercise: Job control using System i Navigator

AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.

19-33
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. Which branch under Basic Operations will show details for

your active jobs?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Messages
Printer Output
Printers
Jobs
2. Which branch under Work Management will show details for

all of the active jobs on the system?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Active Jobs
Server Jobs
Subsystems
Memory Pools
3. True or False: The Active Jobs branch will basically show the
same information as running the Work with Active Jobs
WRKACTJOB command.
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i
1. Which branch under Basic Operations will show details for your active
jobs?
a. Messages
b. Printer Output
c. Printers
d. Jobs
The answer is Jobs.
2. Which branch under Work Management will show details for all of the
active jobs on the system?
a. Active Jobs
b. Server Jobs
c. Subsystems
d. Memory Pools
The answer is Active Jobs.
3. True or False: The Active Jobs branch will basically show the same
information as running the Work with Active Jobs WRKACTJOB
command.
The answer is True.

19-35
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

this interface
on a scheduler
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose

19-37
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 20. Job control using Systems Director

Navigator for IBM i
Estimated time
00:15

a system operator's job. This unit will detail the windows and
navigation used to display these types of information when working
with the Systems Director Navigator for IBM i interface.

Customize the windows and data displayed as you navigate this
interface
Navigate to display information about jobs that have been put on a
scheduler

Accountability:
Exercise
Unit 20. Job control using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i

20-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

this interface
on a scheduler
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
perform an application share of Systems Director Navigator for the next two visuals
covering the details outlined in the student notes.
1. Open a Web browser and enter the URL of the Systems Director Navigator logon
screen.
2. Logon with your instructor ID and password.
demo on your instructor PC of Systems Director Navigator for the next two visuals covering
the details outlined in the student notes.
1. Open a Web browser and enter the URL of the Systems Director Navigator logon
screen.
2. Logon with your instructor ID and password.

20-3
Instructor Guide
Basic Operations: User jobs

IBM i
Figure 20-2. Basic Operations: User jobs
AS248.1
Notes:
In this example, User Jobs under Basic Operations is selected. By default, this will show
you a list of your jobs. You can work with your jobs on a specific System i server.
What can you do with jobs?
Tailor the Jobs display:
- Change whose jobs are displayed (by using Select Action * > Include)
- Change which columns are displayed (by using Select Action > Table Actions >
Columns)
- Sizing columns
- Sorting a list or column
Display the job log (right-click the job, and select Job Log)
Hold a job (right-click the job, and select Hold)
Delete a job (right-click the job, and select Delete)
If you chose any action from Select Action menu like Include to execute, you have to click
the Go button.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

20-5
Instructor Guide
User jobs: Include

IBM i
Figure 20-3. User jobs: Include
AS248.1
Notes:
On the jobs -include function pane, you can specify criteria like job name , user name or job
number to specify what will be displayed.
For the user parameter, you can specify either: default Current signed-on user , a
specific user name, or use the browse button to see all users and then choose from a
list.
For the job parameter, you can include by either Active jobs or Jobs on job queues;
which is the default).
You can also include only those jobs on a particular job queue.
Note
This filter will be active until you change it. What is being displayed is described on top of
user jobs screen.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

20-7
Instructor Guide
Work Management: Active Jobs

IBM i
Figure 20-4. Work Management: Active Jobs
AS248.1
Notes:
In this example, Active Jobs under Work Management is selected.
Active jobs refer to jobs that have started running but have not yet completed running.
Active jobs do not include jobs that are on a job queue waiting to be started or jobs that
have completed processing but are waiting for a spooled file to be printed.
Following are some characteristics of an active job:
Contains running code
Has a call stack
Has objects locked
Has the status of an active job, for example, running or waiting for (x)
Controlling work in the system is performed mainly at the job level. Most commands and
APIs operate against the entire job.
Inactive jobs are jobs on a job queue waiting to be started or jobs that have completed
processing but are waiting for a printer output file (spooled files) to be printed.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

20-9
Instructor Guide
Active Jobs: Configure columns

IBM i
Figure 20-5. Active Jobs: Configure columns
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the Configure Columns from the Select Action pull-down menu to configure the
columns being displayed on Active Jobs screen.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

20-11
Instructor Guide
Active Jobs: Filter

IBM i
Figure 20-6. Active Jobs: Filter
AS248.1
Notes:
This GUI allows you to search for a specific entry. In this example you could search for a
specific active job. To invoke this function:
1. Click the Show filter row icon (it is the third icon from the left). Once this icon is
selected and active, its function changes to Hide filter row. This is a toggle icon to turn
on or off this function.
- Turning on this function changes the screen. For each column displayed, you can
now specify a filer to search the contents of that column.
2. Choose the column on which you will search, and click Filter for that column. In this
example, we are searching the Current User column.
3. This will display the window captured in the visual. Click the down arrow for Condition
and choose one of the following:
- Contains
- Starts with
- Ends with

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
4. Fill in the text designating your search value. For example, you could specify Starts
with AS24. (Notice you do not need to end with an asterisk (*).)
- That will present an updated window with entries that meet your search criteria.
5. To return to the original window, click Clear all filters. Alternatively, you can click
Close.

20-13
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Additional information Review student notes for detailed instructions on how to use
this function.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Active Jobs > Customize your window

IBM i
Figure 20-7. Active Jobs > Customize your window
AS248.1
Notes:
You can monitor jobs on the system. If you are using 5250 emulation, type the Work with
Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB) command to display the active jobs. If you are using Systems
Director Navigator for IBM i, click the down arrow for Select action, choose your criteria,
and click Go.
You can view Work Management panels and lists more easily and efficiently by
customizing them. By taking advantage of these customization options, you can improve
performance. For example, by subsetting the list of objects for a particular library using
Include, you can limit the number of objects that must be retrieved from the host and
displayed.
The methods for customizing Work Management panels are:
Columns: Specify the columns of information that are displayed in the list and the order
in which they are displayed using the Columns dialog.
Sort: Specify how objects are sorted in the list using the Sort dialog.

20-15
Instructor Guide
Include: Limit the list of objects to those that meet the criteria you specify using the
Include dialog.
Note
The columns you select can affect the performance of displaying the list of jobs. While
every single column displayed can have a slight performance effect, some columns have
additional performance considerations that might result in a more noticeable performance
difference, particularly when the list to be displayed contains a large number of jobs.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

20-17
Instructor Guide
Customize this view > Include

IBM i
Figure 20-8. Customize this view > Include
AS248.1
Notes:
Include specific objects in the list: For jobs and job queues, you can determine which
objects should be displayed in a list. For example, you can change the Active Jobs list to
include only the active jobs for a particular user. This action allows you to limit the list of
objects displayed in Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to those that meet the criteria you
specify. Use the Active Jobs list to find jobs and job queues more quickly and efficiently,
especially for large systems with a large number of jobs.
To customize the contents of Active Jobs:
1. In this example, we have selected Work Management then Active Jobs.
2. Click the down arrow for Select function, click Include, and then click Go.
3. This will display the tab in the visual.
4. Fill in your criteria for the Include tab.
5. Click OK.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

20-19
Instructor Guide
Customize this view > Columns

IBM i
Figure 20-9. Customize this view > Columns
AS248.1
Notes:
Specify which columns to display: You can customize Work Management to specify
which columns of information are displayed in a list and the order in which those columns
are displayed.
To customize columns:
1. In this example, we have selected Work Management then Active Jobs.
2. Click the down arrow for Select function, click Columns, and then click Go.
All of the columns that are currently displayed are listed under Current columns. Any
additional columns that can be displayed are listed under Available columns.
3. Select the columns you want displayed, and use the Add Before and Add After
buttons to add them to the Current columns list in the order you want them displayed.
To remove or reorder a column from the Current columns list, select the column and
click Remove.
4. Click OK.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

20-21
Instructor Guide
Customized to show qualified job name

IBM i
Figure 20-10. Customized to show qualified job name
AS248.1
Notes:
In this visual, the columns for Active Jobs have been arranged from the default view to
show the fully qualified job name.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

20-23
Instructor Guide
Job properties (1 of 2)
IBM i
Figure 20-11. Job properties (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
Notice the actions you can take for an interactive job when you click the arrow.
Job attributes from the job description and user profile appear in the properties of a job.
To display job information in a green screen environment, you would use the Work Active
Jobs (WRKACTJOB) command and then option 5 (Work with) for the job of interest.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

20-25
Instructor Guide
Job properties (2 of 2)
IBM i
Figure 20-12. Job properties (2 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
All of the attributes for a job can be displayed using this notebook. If you have the proper
authority, you will be allowed to change some of the job attributes.
The General tab shows the name of the job description that the job is using and the
subsystem that is controlling the job.
The Performance tab shows the run priority, time slice, used CPU and temporary
storage usage and job performance statistics.
The Printer Output tab allows you to view and change properties that affect the printing
output for the job.
The Messages tab shows how messages that are sent to and from this job are to be
handled.
The Job Log tab describes how much detail is to be kept in the job log.
The Server tab allows you to view information about server jobs. For each server job,
you can see the type of server, the job user identity, and, if available, the client IP
address.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
The Security tab identifies the user profile for the job.
The Date/Time tab allows you to view and edit settings related to system time.
The International tab allows you to view or change properties related to text and
character format and the language and country associated with the job.
The Threads tab allows you to view or change information related to threads for a job
that is currently active or on a job queue.
Use the Resources tab to view information about system resources, such as memory
pool and disk pool group for the job, as well as information on memory and processor
affinity.
The Other tab allows you to view or change the accounting code, the decision to keep
DDM connections active, the switch settings, and the device recovery action.

20-27
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Subsystems
IBM i
Figure 20-13. Subsystems
AS248.1
Notes:
The subsystem is where work is processed. All jobs, with the exception of system jobs, run
within subsystems. A subsystem is a single, predefined operating environment through
which the system coordinates work flow and resource use. The system can contain several
subsystems, all operating independently of each other. One subsystem can be set up to
handle only interactive jobs, while another subsystem handles only batch jobs.
Subsystems can also be designed to handle many types of work.
A subsystem can be either active or inactive. An active subsystem is one that has been
started. An inactive subsystem is one that either has not yet been started or has been
stopped.
The controlling subsystem is the interactive subsystem that starts automatically when the
system starts, and it is the subsystem through which the system operator controls the
system during system startup.
A subsystem job is a job created by the operating system to manage resources and start,
control, and end jobs.

20-29
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Subsystems > Properties

IBM i
Figure 20-14. Subsystems > Properties
AS248.1
Notes:
The run-time characteristics of a subsystem are defined in an object called a subsystem
description.
A subsystem description acts as a set of instructions telling the subsystem how much work
enters a subsystem, how and where it enters, and which resources the subsystem uses to
perform the work.
A subsystem is created when a subsystem description is defined or created. An active
subsystem takes on the simple name of the subsystem description.

20-31
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Active Job Queues

IBM i
Figure 20-15. Active Job Queues
AS248.1
Notes:
To see the window on this visual, select Active Job Queues on the Work Management
tab.
To see the jobs in a specific job queue, such as Qbatch, click the arrow and select Jobs to
see the window on the next page.

20-33
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Explore Qbatch job queue

IBM i
Figure 20-16. Explore Qbatch job queue
AS248.1
Notes:
On the visual in this screen capture, you see jobs that are on the job queue Qbatch.
In this example, there is one job on this queue.
Click the arrow for your job to see the drop-down menu. This will show you what you
can do to manage jobs on a job queue.

20-35
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Exercise
IBM i
Exercise: Job control using

Systems Director Navigator for IBM I

AS248.1
Notes:

20-37
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or False: Systems Director Navigator allows you to

display information relating to your jobs on the system.
2. The Active Jobs link is available under which of the following
tasks in Systems Director Navigator?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Basic Operations
Work Management
Configuration and Service
Users and Groups
3. Which task is used to display details about subsystems

running on your system?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Basic Operations
Work Management
Configuration and Service
Users and Groups
AS248.1
Notes:

20-39
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i
1. True or False: Systems Director Navigator allows you to display

information relating to your jobs on the system.
The answer is True.
2. The Active jobs link is available under which of the following tasks in
Systems Director Navigator?
a. Basic Operations
b. Work Management
c. Configuration and Service
d. Users and Groups
The answer is Work Management.
3. Which task is used to display details about subsystems running on your

system?
a. Basic Operations
b. Work Management
d. Users and Groups

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

this interface
on a scheduler
AS248.1
Notes:

20-41
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 21. Print concepts

Estimated time
00:15

Monitoring and controlling the printed reports known as spool files on
the Power is one of the most important aspects of a system operator's
job. In this unit, we will discuss the concepts you need to know to
understand how printing works on this system.

Describe how the printing process works

Explain what an output queue is
Explain how an output queue is created
Explain the decision process the system uses to determine where
to send your printed output
List what you can do with your output
Explain what a print writer is and the function it performs

Accountability:

21-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Explain the decision process the system uses to determine
where to send your printed output
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details You should create a printer emulation session for the students to use in the
exercise. Name the printer AS24PRT and give the printer name to the students before
starting the exercise.
Additional information Instructor should create a printer emulation session named
AS24PRT. This emulation session will be used by the students in the next exercise.
Inform the students of this name that they can use in the exercise.

21-3
Instructor Guide
IBM i printing process

IBM i
Application
program
Overrides
Printer file
Job description
User profile
Device description
System values
Output
data
Spooled
file
Output
queue
Print
writer
Data
stream
Device description
Printer
Figure 21-2. IBM i printing process
AS248.1
Notes:
The following steps offer a high-level overview of the IBM i printing process:
1. The printing process starts when:
a. An application program runs. The application program creates output data. The
output data is based on the application program and information contained in the
printer file.
b. A user runs a command that generates output data and sends it to a spooled file
instead of the display.
2. When performing work on the system, the end user can specify:
a. If print spooling is selected, the output data is placed in a spooled file, and the
spooled file is placed in an output queue.
b. If direct printing is selected, the output data is sent directly to the printer.
3. The destination of the output data is based on values stored in several printing
elements, such as overrides that may be in place, a print file, the job description, the

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
user profile, workstation description, or system values. Output queues are used to
manage spooled files.
4. The printer writer program included in IBM i supports a variety of printer data streams.
Print Services Facility for IBM i provides additional function that provides support for the
Advanced Function Presentation (AFP) Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS).
Each printer must have a printer device description. The printer device description
contains a configuration description of the printer. Printers can be attached by a variety
of attachment methods.
5. A remote writer allows you to route spooled files from an output queue on your system
to another system.

21-5
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
How are output queues created?

IBM i
Printer description
is created
PRT01
PRT01
output queue
CRTOUTQ
command
QPPRINT
QEZJOBLOG
User created
System supplied
Figure 21-3. How are output queues created?
AS248.1
Notes:
An output queue is an object. An output queue contains printer output waiting to be printed.
This printer output is also called a spooled file. There can be many output queues, each
containing spooled files from many different jobs and users.
An output queue can be created whenever:
A device description for a printer is created.
An output queue is automatically created at the same time a printer description is
created. An output queue is created for each printer configured on the system. The
output queue name is the same as the printer name.
There are several output queues supplied as part of i. When the Power is configured for
the first time, QPRINT, QEZJOBLOG, and so forth, are created.
User created output queues can be created by Power implementers with the Create
Output Queue (CRTOUTQ) command.

21-7
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Why did the output end up there?

IBM i
(2) Printer device file

SPOOL(*YES)
OUTQ(name or *JOB)
(1) Overrides
command
(3) Job description

OUTQ(*USRPRF)
(4) User profile

OUTQ(*WRKSTN)
(5) Device description

PRTDEV(*SYSVAL)
OUTQ(*DEV)
(6) System value

QPRTDEV(PRT01)
Figure 21-4. Why did the output end up there?
AS248.1
Notes:
Work management sets up and maintains information about each job. Among the many
pieces of information kept for each job is what output queue will be used for printed output.
This is the process used by the system to determine where a users output is sent.
As each job is started, work management checks in the following order to determine where
your printed output will be sent until an output queue is selected.
1. If overrides have been put in place by entering a command or through programming,
this will determine the attributes for your printed jobs. The command used to implement
overrides is the Override with Printer File (OVRPRTF) command.
2. A printer device file is an object created by the application programmer and is
incorporated into the application. A printer device file is used by a programmer to
identify the characteristics that will be used to generate a spooled file. It will define
things like the printer device used and the spooling requirements; it does not contain
data.

21-9
Instructor Guide
3. A job description is an object that specifies the attributes for a users job, such as how
and where a users work will be processed.
4. A user profile identifies a user on the system. One of the values that can be set is where
a users printed output will be sent.
5. A device description is used to identify the display device being used by the user. It can
also specify which printer is used when a user is working from this display.
6. System values are used to define how things will work on your system. The system
value QPRTDEV is used to define the system default printer.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details With so many output queues, how does the spool-intercept function determine
which output queue is to be used to point to any given report?
Each printed report must have an associated printer device file.
It is from this printer device file that IBM i determines the attributes of the printed report
(lines per inch, characters per inch, form type, number of copies, and so on). One of the
attributes that can be specified in a printer device file is the name of an output queue.
This means that all reports produced in association with that printer device file will be
routed to the same output queue.
When an interactive job submits a batch job, the interactive default output queue for the job
is used as the default queue for the batch job unless specifically overridden on the Submit
Job command.
Upon initiation of an interactive job, work management checks the printer device file, the
job description, the user profile, and the workstation device description, in that order,
looking for a named output queue. When a named output queue is found, it becomes the
default output queue for the job, and the search for an output queue name ends. Point out
to the students that the default values at each step point downward to the next step.
If either the OUTQ or PRTDEV parameters in either a job description or a user profile are
changed, the change has no effect on jobs already running that use those objects. The
default output queues for those jobs were determined when the jobs were initiated, and no
reference to the job description or the user profile is actually made (for an output queue)
when the job runs.

21-11
Instructor Guide
What can you do with a spool file?

IBM i
Print them
Keep as records
Use as input to other applications
Transfer to other output queues
Send as email
Use to create PDF files
Figure 21-5. What can you do with a spool file?
AS248.1
Notes:
Spooled files in output queues can be:
Printed
Kept as records
Used as input to other applications
Transferred to other output queues
Sent as email
Used to create PDF files
The printer writer program interacts between the output queue and the printer and can be
used to convert the printer data stream.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

21-13
Instructor Guide
Start Printer Writer command

IBM i
Spooled files
ORDREG
ORDER
APSUM
APCHECK
*OUTQ (PRT01)
PAYCHECK
ORDSUM
INVOICE
APREG
Printer
writer
PRT01
PAYREG
Printer
writer
*OUTQ (PRT02)
PRT02
EMPTY
WAITING
Printer
writer
*OUTQ (PRT03)
PRT03
Figure 21-6. Start Printer Writer command
AS248.1
Notes:
The Start Printer Writer (STRPRTWTR) command starts a spooling writer to the specified
printer. The writer is a system job that takes spooled files from an output queue and
produces (writes) the output on the printer device. This command specifies the name of the
printer, the names of the output and message queues used, and the name of the writer.
The spooled files on an output queue remain there until a printer writer is started.
Normally, you have an output queue for each printer on your system, and the printer and
output queue have the same name. For example, as shown on the visual, the PRT01
output queue is associated with the PRT01 printer, the PRT02 output queue is associated
with the PRT02 printer, and so on.
You can, however, use the printer writer to assign any output queue to any printer on the
system. (For example, the PRT01 output queue could be associated with the PRT02
printer, while the PRT02 output queue could be associated with the PRT01 printer.)
Once started, the printer writer program selects the next available entry from its associated
output queue and prints the report on the named printer.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details This topic is probably the one that is of most interest to the majority of system
operators. Controlling printing requires that the operator understand all the elements
involved, so let's review them.
This visual shows three output queues (PRT01, PRT02, and PRT03). Two of these queues
(PRT01 and PRT02) contain spooled files waiting to be printed.

21-15
Instructor Guide
Printer load balancing

IBM i
APREG
STRPRTWTR DEV(_____) OUTQ(_____)

01)
T
R
Q(P
T
U
1) O
0
T
(PR
V
E
D
ORDER
APSUM
APCHECK
DEV(PRT02) OUTQ(PRT01)
PAYCHECK
ORDSUM D
EV
(P
INVOICE
R
T0
3)
*OUTQ (PRT01)
OU
TQ
(P
RT
01
)
PRT01
PAYREG
PRT02
ORDREG
PRT03
Figure 21-7. Printer load balancing
AS248.1
Notes:
In the previous visual, we talked about starting the writer for one printer from one output
queue.
Additional writers can be started (up to a maximum of 10 per output queue). This allows
multiple printers to begin printing spooled output files from the same output queue. This
could allow you to more easily balance the printing load among multiple printers.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Ask the students to check yes or no if they
believe printer load balancing is something they would implement at their organization.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Ask the students to raise their hand if they believe printer
load balancing is something they would implement at their organization.

21-17
Instructor Guide
Question
IBM i
How would you use printer load balancing at your

organization?
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

21-19
Instructor Guide
Set an expiration date for spool file

IBM i
An expiration date can be set:

At create time
Using the Change Spooled File Attributes (CHGSPLFA) command
File will expire at midnight on the specified date.

Must run the Delete Expired Spool File (DLTEXPSPLF)
command to actually remove the spool file from the system.
Figure 21-9. Set an expiration date for spool file
AS248.1
Notes:
The Change Spooled File Attributes (CHGSPLFA) command allows you to change
attributes of a spooled file while it is on an output queue. These changes affect only the
current processing of the file. The next time the job runs and the file is produced, the file
attributes are derived from the device file description and the program.
The Delete Expired Spooled Files (DLTEXPSPLF) command removes expired spooled
files on the system or the ASP group specified by the user. A spooled file expires at
23:59:59 system local time on the date specified in the Expiration Date for File (EXPDATE)
spooled file attribute. To automate the removal of expired spooled files, you can create a
job schedule entry that runs the DLTEXPSPLF command once a day.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Note
Student profiles for this class have been created with a classification of QSYSOPR. As a
default, these types of users are not granted access to the DLTEXPSPLF command.
Therefore, students in this class do not have authority to run or even prompt this command.

21-21
Instructor Guide
Detach spooled files from jobs: QSPLFACN

IBM i
Spooled files can:

Optionally be detached from a job and
Managed independently of the job that created them.
X
Figure 21-10. Detach spooled files from jobs: QSPLFACN
AS248.1
Notes:
Prior to V5R2, spooled files were attached to a job until they were deleted either as a result
of being sent to the printer or explicitly by the user. Since V5R2, spooled files can be
detached by doing the following:
Set the system value QSPLFACN to *DETACH.
Set the job description SPLFACN attribute:
- To *DETACH to detach the spooled file
- To *SYSVAL to use the value in QSPLFACN system value
When *DETACH is used, spooled files are detached from the job when the job ends,
allowing the job to leave the system and freeing up the job structures to be used by another
job.
The shipped/default value for these parameters is *KEEP, which will keep any jobs
structures with at least one spooled file remaining when the job ends and the status of the
job is updated to indicate that the job has completed (for spooled files in SYSBASE).

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

21-23
Instructor Guide
Work management overview

IBM i
SBMJOB
Job
queue
Subsystem
pool
Output
queue
Writer
Batch
Printer
Sign-on
Interactive
WRKJOBQ
WRKACTJOB
WRKOUTQ
WRKSPLF
WRKWTR
WRKUSRJOB
WRKSBMJOB
Figure 21-11. Work management overview
AS248.1
Notes:
A working knowledge of work management is necessary to control jobs on the system.
The flow for an interactive job follows:
1. An interactive job does not place jobs in a job queue. This step is null in this
environment.
2. An interactive job is started when a user signs on to the system.
3. The interactive job is assigned to a subsystem designated to run interactive jobs.
- The QINTER subsystem is the default system for interactive jobs.
- An administrator can create additional subsystems where interactive jobs will be
run.
- The system administrator defines how the memory is allocated: into shared memory
pools or private memory pools.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
5. Most jobs will generate output, a printed report.

-
Output is placed in an output queue.

Several output queues are provided by the system, for example, QPRINT.
Output queues can be created by a programmer or by an administrator.
Work management will:
Go through the process outlined in this unit for the visual titled Why did the
output end up there.
This process is used to determine which output queue will be used.
This will determine the characteristics for the print job, such as:
- Form type
- Number of copies
- Expiration date
- Print priority
Your job description defines what priority is assigned to your batch jobs.
- Jobs are processed in a first-in first-out (FIFO) order based on priority.
6. A writer program is started to assign an output queue to a printer. At this point the report
will print and the job will end.
The flow for a batch job is:
A batch job includes one additional step in the beginning. Once the job flows out of the
subsystem the steps are the same for both types of jobs.
1. A user will either choose a menu option that issues the command to submit a job or the
user will manually issue the submit job command on the command line.
2. A batch job is placed in a job queue and awaits its turn to be processed.
- Job queues are created by programmers or by administrators.
- The job description in your user profile is used by work management to determine to
which job queue your job will be sent.
- Your job description defines what priority is assigned to your batch jobs.
- Jobs are processed in an FIFO order based on priority.
3. The batch job is assigned to a subsystem designated to run batch jobs.
- The QBATCH subsystem is the default system for batch jobs.
- An administrator can create additional subsystems where batch jobs will be run.
- The system administrator defines how the memory is allocated: into shared memory
pools or private memory pools.
5. Most jobs will generate output, a printed report. The steps are the same as above.
6. A writer program is started to assign an output queue to a printer. At this point, the
report will print and the job will end. Steps are the same as above.

21-25
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
play file AS248-U21-checkpoint:
Play.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. Which of the following are created on the system when a

printer is connected (Select all that apply)?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Device description
Message queue
Output queue
Printer profile
2. What is the first place the system looks to determine where

to send your output file?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Printer device file

Job description
User profile
System value
3. True or False: The system administrator can create an output

queue on the system with the Create Output Queue
(CRTOUTQ) command.
AS248.1
Notes:

21-27
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i
1. Which of the following are created on the system when a printer is

connected (Select all that apply)?
a. Device description
b. Message queue
c. Output queue
d. Printer profile
The answers are Device description and Output queue.
2. What is the first place the system looks to determine where to send
your output file?
a. Printer device file
b. Job description
c. User profile
d. System value
The answer is Printer device file.
3. True or False: The system administrator can create an output queue on

the system with the Create Output Queue (CRTOUTQ) command.
The answer is True.
Additional information You should create a printer emulation session for the students
to use in the exercise. Name the printer AS24PRT and give the printer name to the
students before starting the exercise.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

Explain the decision process the system uses to determine
where to send your printed output
AS248.1
Notes:

21-29
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 22. Print control using 5250 emulation

Estimated time
00:15

printed reports that these jobs generate are the most important
aspects of a system operator's job. In this unit, we will cover how to
perform these functions using a 5250 emulation session.

Use a 5250 emulation interface to monitor and control:
- Printer output
- Output queues
- Printers
- Print writers
Discuss the attributes that can be changed for a spool file
Explain how to set expiration dates for spool files

Accountability:
Exercise

22-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Printer output
Output queues
Printers
Print writers

AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
perform an application share of 5250 emulation for the next four visuals covering the details
demo on your instructor PC of 5250 emulation for the next four visuals covering the details

22-3
Instructor Guide
Printer menu
IBM i
Figure 22-2. Printer menu
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the GO PRINTER command to display the menu in the visual.
You can use this menu to monitor and control your spool files, your output queues, and any
printers on your system.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

22-5
Instructor Guide
Work with All Spooled Files (WRKSPLF)

IBM i
Figure 22-3. Work with All Spooled Files (WRKSPLF)
AS248.1
Notes:
Select option 1 from the menu on the previous page to display the screen on the upper left
in the visual. The Work with Spooled Files (WRKSPLF) command is a powerful and flexible
command that allows you to work with spooled files. By specifying selection criteria on the
prompt display, you control which spooled files are displayed.
In this example, only the spooled files produced by jobs that have been run by the current
user, AS2401, have been selected. Note that spooled files associated with multiple output
queues are shown. The status of each, the number of pages per copy, and the number of
copies to be printed are displayed.
Note that a spooled file that is currently being processed by a printer writer remains on the
output queue and can be held from this display. This is unlike job queues, where a job is
removed from the job queue as soon as it becomes active and can no longer be worked
with from the WRKJOBQ display.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The power of this command lies in its flexibility. Selection criteria can be
specified to control which spooled files are shown on the Work with display.
This command displays a list of spooled files created by:
Jobs run by the user running the command (the default)
A named user
All users
Additional selection criteria are available based on:
Print device: Only the spooled files on the output queue currently linked by a printer
writer to a named printer are shown.
If *OUTQ is specified, all spooled files on all output queues not currently linked to any
printer are shown.
Form type: Only the spooled files specified to be printed on the specified form type are
shown.
User data: Only the spooled files having the specified user data are shown. This can be
the name of the program producing a report or identifying information from the printer
device file used to create a report.
The defaults for the command are illustrated in this visual, but the selection criteria can be
changed to suit any situation.
Make sure the students understand the following point, which is in their notes. A spooled
file which is currently being processed by a printer writer remains on the output queue and
can be held from this display. This is unlike job queues; a job is removed from a job queue
as soon as it becomes active and can no longer be worked with from the WRKJOBQ
display.

22-7
Instructor Guide
Work with User Jobs: Spooled Files

IBM i
Figure 22-4. Work with User Jobs: Spooled Files
AS248.1
Notes:
If you know the user and job that produced the spooled files that need to be controlled,
consider specifying option 8, Work with spooled files, on the Work with User Jobs display.
The Work with Job Spooled Files display will appear, showing a list of all spooled files
produced by a users job.
From this list display, you can easily change the attributes of one or more spooled files of a
job. You can also hold, end (delete), display, or release one or more of these files by using
the same options for each as on the Work with Spool File command just discussed.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details This approach should be used when there is a need to check on the printed
output for one or more specific users but the operator is not sure that the job which
produces the output has even started yet. It could still be waiting on a job queue. This
approach could also be used if the operator were already using the Work with User Jobs
display for some other reason.
The Work with Job Spooled Files display can be displayed by selecting option 8 for a
specific job on the Work with User Jobs display.
From this list display, the operator can easily change the attributes of hold, end (delete),
display, or release one or more of a job's spooled files. To do this, the operator will use the
same options that were discussed on the Work with All Spooled Files display on the
previous visual.

22-9
Instructor Guide
Change Spooled File Attributes

IBM i
Figure 22-5. Change Spooled File Attributes
AS248.1
Notes:
Selecting option 2, Change, from the screens displayed on either of the two previous pages
in this guide will call the Change Spool File Attributes (CHGSPLFA) command, which is the
command being displayed on this page.
Notice all of the attributes that can be changed for your spooled file: printer, forms type,
number of copies, output queue, expiration date, and so forth.
An expiration date is a value that can be specified at creation time by the application that
generates the output or by processing this command for a specific spool file.
The parameter Expiration date for file (EXPDATE) specifies the expiration date for the
spooled file. The spooled file will expire at 23:59:59 system local time on the date specified.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose

22-11
Instructor Guide
Delete Expired Spooled files

IBM i
Figure 22-6. Delete Expired Spooled files
AS248.1
Notes:
The Delete Expired Spooled Files (DLTEXPSPLF) command removes expired spooled
files on the system or the ASP group specified by the user.
To automate the removal of expired spooled files, you can create a job schedule entry that
runs the DLTEXPSPLF command once a day. See the examples below for an example
using the Add Job Schedule Entry (ADDJOBSCDE) command.
Restriction: You need spool control (*SPLCTL) special authority to use this command.
Note
Setting the expiration of spooled files by way of the printer file and spooled file attributes
will not cause the system to remove expired spooled files. Files will not be removed until
the DLTEXPSPLF command is used to remove expired spooled files.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
The Operational Assistant provides automatic cleanup of spooled files (job logs) only in
output queues QEZJOBLOG and QEZDEBUG. The DLTEXPSPLF command deletes
spooled files (if expired) located in any output queue on system or in ASPs.
Examples for DLTEXPSPLF
Example 1: Deleting all expired spooled files
DLTEXPSPLF
ASPGRP(*ALL)
This command deletes all expired spooled files on the system.

Example 2: Deleting all expired spooled files in the system ASP (ASP 1) and all defined
basic user ASPs (ASPs 2-32)
DLTEXPSPLF
ASPGRP(*SYSBAS)
This command deletes all expired spooled files in the system ASP (ASP 1) and all
defined basic user ASPs (ASPs 2-32).
Example 3: Creating a job schedule entry to remove expired spooled files
ADDJOBSCDE JOB(DLTEXPSPLF) CMD(DLTEXPSPLF ASPGRP(*ALL))
FRQ(*WEEKLY) SCDDATE(*NONE) SCDDAY(*ALL) SCDTIME(010000)
JOBQ(QSYS/QSYSNOMAX) TEXT('DELETE EXPIRED SPOOLED FILES
SCHEDULE ENTRY')
This command creates a job schedule entry which causes the DLTEXPSPLF command
to run daily at the time specified in the SCDTIME parameter in the job queue specified
in the JOBQ parameter. Using the FRQ(*WEEKLY) and SCDDAY(*ALL) parameters will
schedule the job to run every day of the week.

22-13
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Note
Student profiles for this class have been created with a classification of QSYSOPR. As a
default, these types of users are not granted access to the DLTEXPSPLF command.
Therefore, students in this class do not have authority to run or even prompt this command.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Work with Output Queue

IBM i
Figure 22-7. Work with Output Queue
AS248.1
Notes:
From the Printer menu, use option 5, Work with output queues, or enter the WRKOUTQ
command directly to see the screen captured in the upper left on the visual. Use this
method to work with spooled files if you know that all the spool files you want to work with
are in the same output queue.
The type of information displayed and the options available should look quite familiar by
now. Whereas we viewed spooled files for only one user and only one job in prior
examples, here we see all spooled files on a specific output queue, regardless of which
user or job produced the output.
In addition to the options available through the two prior methods, option 7 on this display
shows messages relating to the printing status of a spooled file.

22-15
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Work with Writers

IBM i
Figure 22-8. Work with Writers
AS248.1
Notes:
From the Printer menu, select option 2, Work with printer, or enter the Work with Writers
(WRKWTR) command to determine whether a writer has been started for a particular
printer.
The status of each writer is shown. The status can be END (ended), STR (started), HLD
(held), MSG (message waiting), or JOBQ (job queue).
Most of the options available on this display allow you to perform familiar functions but with
a printer writer instead of a user job or queue.

22-17
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Restarting a printer
IBM i
Work with All Printers
F21

1=Start 2=Change
Basic
assistance
level
3=Hold 4=End 5=Work with 6=Release
7=Display messages 8=Work with output queue

Opt
Device
Sts
PRT01
END
PRT02
STR
Sep
Form Type
File
User
Work with Printers
User Data
System: I520DVL2
*FILE
*ALL
Type options below, then press Enter.

1=Start 4=Stop 7=Message 8=Display output for printer 11=Restart
Opt Printer
__ PRT00
11 PRT01
Enter
Form Type Status

Stopped (use Opt 1)
Stopped (use Opt 1)
Restart Printer
Printer...........................: PRT01
Output........................: QBASE
User..............................: QSYS
Formtype.......................: *STD
Date.............................: 04/14/08
Time.............................: 11:29:06
Pages...........................: 37
Type choices below, then press Enter.

Restart on page....................................: 1
Save printer output...............................: N
Number
Y=Yes, N=No
Figure 22-9. Restarting a printer
AS248.1
Notes:
The basic assistance level version of the Work with Printers list display looks quite similar
to the intermediate assistance level display. But the options, status, and function keys are
slightly different. Notice that you cannot change, hold, release, or work with a writer at the
basic assistance level.
One feature that you can perform more easily from the basic assistance level display is the
restart function, option 11.
If you need to stop printing a report and restart on another page or if you have had a printer
device error (such as a paper jam) and need to reprint a portion of a report, option 11 from
the basic assistance level display simplifies the task for you. This option combines the
functions of hold and release, which are available when you are using the intermediate
assistance level.

22-19
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Start Printer Writer command

IBM i
Figure 22-10. Start Printer Writer command
AS248.1
Notes:
The Start Printer Writer (STRPRTWTR) command starts a spooling writer to the specified
printer.
The writer is a system job that takes spooled files from an output queue and produces
(writes) the output on the printer device. This command specifies the name of the printer,
the names of the output and message queues used, and the name of the writer.

22-21
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Exercise
IBM i
Exercise: Print control using 5250 emulation

AS248.1
Notes:
Please refer to the Student Exercise Guide and perform the job and print control exercise.

22-23
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information Instructor should create a printer emulation session named
AS240PRT. This emulation session will be used by the students in the next exercise.
Inform the students of this name that they can use in the exercise.
multimedia library of Elluminate in place of the next visual. You can still add your
commentary while the students are playing the file.
of the next visual, while providing commentary for the different parts of the file.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
The flow of a job

IBM i
SBMJOB
Job
queue
Subsystem
pool
Output
queue
Writer
Batch
Printer
Sign-on
Interactive
WRKJOBQ
WRKACTJOB
WRKOUTQ
WRKSPLF
WRKWTR
WRKUSRJOB
WRKSBMJOB
Figure 22-12. The flow of a job
AS248.1
Notes:
There are many different types of jobs, and most move through many stages. A working
knowledge of work management is absolutely necessary to effectively control the jobs on
your system.
The commands listed at the bottom of this visual are positioned relative to the stage of a
job, where each command will be used.

22-25
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details This illustration should help you tie together the following work management
functions that have been discussed:
Submitting a batch job to a job queue
Starting an interactive job by signing on to a workstation
Running those jobs in a subsystem
Producing printed output that is tracked on an output queue until it is actually printed by
a printer writer
Play.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. Which command is used to work with your spool files?

a.
b.
c.
d.
WRKPRTF
WRKSPLF
WRKJOBF
WRKPRT
2. Which option is used to delete an individual report (a spooled

file) on the Work with Output Queues screen?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Option 2 - Change
Option 4 - Delete
Option 5 Display
Option 8 Attributes
3. True or False: Changing the spool file attributes is all you

have to do for an expired file to be deleted on the
system.
AS248.1
Notes:

22-27
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

a. WRKPRTF
b. WRKSPLF
c. WRKJOBF
d. WRKPRT
The answer is WRKSPLF.

a. Option 2 - Change
b. Option 4 - Delete
c. Option 5 Display
d. Option 8 Attributes
The answer is Option 5 Display.

have to do for an expired file to be deleted on the system.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

Printer output
Output queues
Printers
Print writers

AS248.1
Notes:

22-29
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 23. Print control using System i Navigator

Estimated time
00:15

aspects of a system operator's job. In this unit, we will cover how to
perform these functions using System i Navigator.

Use System i Navigator to monitor and control:
- Printer output
- Output queues
- Printers
- Print writers

Accountability:
Exercise

23-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Printer output
Output queues
Printers
Print writers

AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

23-3
Instructor Guide
Basic Operations: Printer Output

IBM i
Figure 23-2. Basic Operations: Printer Output
AS248.1
Notes:
System i Navigator allows you to find and manage printer output. Perform the following
steps to display all spooled files associated with the current user:
1. Expand your system.
2. Expand Basic Operations.
3. Click Printer Output.
This will show all of your output. This is the equivalent of running the Work with Spool
(WRKSPLF) command on a 5250 emulation session.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

23-5
Instructor Guide
Customize: Include (F11)

IBM i
Figure 23-3. Customize: Include (F11)
AS248.1
Notes:
You can customize the Printer Output folder to display printer output files according to user,
location, form type, status, and the date and time they were created. If you have a large
number of printer output files on your system, this can help you more quickly locate the files
you need to see.
To customize what is included in the printer output folder, follow these steps:
2. To customize what is going to be displayed, you can either:
a. Press the F11 key.
b. From the View menu, select Customize this View, and then select Include.
3. Use the Include dialog to specify settings for the folder.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

23-7
Instructor Guide
Customize: Columns (F12)

IBM i
Figure 23-4. Customize: Columns (F12)
AS248.1
Notes:
You can also determine which columns are displayed and the sequence they appear in by:
3. From the View menu, select Customize this View, and then select Columns.
4. Use the Columns dialog to specify settings for the folder.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

23-9
Instructor Guide
Printer Output: Individual report

IBM i
Figure 23-5. Printer Output: Individual report
AS248.1
Notes:
Expand Basic Operations > Printers, and then click your printer to see the spool files for
that printer. Right-click a spooled file to see the context menu displayed.
Notice the different actions that you can perform on the selected spooled file.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

23-11
Instructor Guide
Printer Output: Open

IBM i
Figure 23-6. Printer Output: Open
AS248.1
Notes:
If you open a spooled file, its content is displayed.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
multimedia library of Elluminate in place of the nest two visuals.
To access the multimedia library, click the CD button in the toolbar in Elluminate.

23-13
Instructor Guide
Properties: General and Printer/queue

IBM i
Figure 23-7. Properties: General and Printer/queue
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the General tab of the Properties window for the spooled file to view the basic
properties of the printer output, which include information that identifies the printer output.
Under the General tab of the Properties window, you can change only the user-specified
data which describes the printer output.
Use the Printer/Queue tab to view information about the printer device and the output
queue associated with the printer output.
You can click Move to move the printer output to a different printer device or output queue.
You can click Manage Output Queue to work with the current output queue for the printer
output.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

23-15
Instructor Guide
Properties: Copies/Pages and Forms

IBM i
Figure 23-8. Properties: Copies/Pages and Forms
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the Copies/Pages tab to display or to change the copy and page properties for the
printer output.
Use the Forms tab to display or change the properties that control the type of forms and
how the printer output should print.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

23-17
Instructor Guide
Properties: Layout and Staples

IBM i
Figure 23-9. Properties: Layout and Staples
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the Layout tab to display or to change the properties that control the layout of the
printer output.
For example, you can specify whether to print on both sides of the paper or whether to
rotate the text on the paper.
Use the Staples tab to display or to change the properties that control stapling of the
printer output.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

23-19
Instructor Guide
Properties: Overlay and Font

IBM i
Figure 23-10. Properties: Overlay and Font
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the Overlay tab to display or to change the properties that control the overlay
information for the printer output.
An overlay is a collection of predefined data, such as lines, shading, text, boxes, or logos,
that can be merged with variable data on a page while printing.
Use the Font tab to display the font information used for the printer output.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

23-21
Instructor Guide
Properties: Origin/Expiration and User-defined

IBM i
Figure 23-11. Properties: Origin/Expiration and User-defined
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the Origin/Expiration tab to display information about how and when the printer
output originated.
The expiration parameter displays information about the expiration date for the printer
output file. The expiration date is the date that the printer output file is eligible to be
removed from the system.
Expired printer output files can be removed by running the Delete Expired Spooled Files
(DLTEXPSPLF) command interactively from a command line or from System i Navigator or
by running a control language (CL) program that contains that command.
Use the User-defined tab to display information about user-defined objects, user-defined
data, and user-defined options related to the printer output.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

23-23
Instructor Guide
Properties: Other 1 and Other 2

IBM i
Figure 23-12. Properties: Other 1 and Other 2
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the Other 1 tab to display or change additional information used for printing.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

23-25
Instructor Guide
Drag and drop output to Windows desktop

IBM i
Figure 23-13. Drag and drop output to Windows desktop
AS248.1
Notes:
System i Navigator allows you to transfer or download printer output directly to your
Desktop as a text file. Perform the following steps:
4. Click the output file you want to save.
5. Drag the output file to your Desktop.
The output file will be transferred to your Desktop and appear as a text file.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

23-27
Instructor Guide
Active Jobs: Right-click job> Printer Output

IBM i
Figure 23-14. Active Jobs: Right-click job> Printer Output
AS248.1
Notes:
This multipane dialog window is displayed if you select Properties for a specific job.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

23-29
Instructor Guide
Work Management: Output Queues

IBM i
Figure 23-15. Work Management: Output Queues
AS248.1
Notes:
You can display all of the output queues on the system by:
Expanding Work Management, and then clicking Output Queues.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

23-31
Instructor Guide
Printers: Customize > Columns (F12)

IBM i
Figure 23-16. Printers: Customize > Columns (F12)
AS248.1
Notes:
System i Navigator allows you to find and manage printers.
To see a list of printers:
Expand Basic Operations, and then click Printers.
You can determine which columns are displayed and the sequence they appear in by
clicking:
View > Customize this View > Columns (or by pressing F12) as shown in this visual.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

23-33
Instructor Guide
Printer Output: Convert to PDF

IBM i
Figure 23-17. Printer Output: Convert to PDF
AS248.1
Notes:
Right-click the printer name.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

23-35
Instructor Guide
Printers: Printer output

IBM i
Figure 23-18. Printers: Printer output
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the Convert to PDF dialog to convert printer output files to PDF and send them as
email, save them as stream files in the integrated file system (IFS), or save them as printer
output files.
The following licensed program products (LPPs) are required to use this output method:
Infoprint Server for Power i (5770-IP1)

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

23-37
Instructor Guide
System Values: Detach printer output

IBM i
Figure 23-19. System Values: Detach printer output
AS248.1
Notes:
The Detach printer output after jobs have ended check box specifies whether or not
printer output is kept with a job or detached from the job.
Keeping printer output with jobs allows you to display printer output when you select
Printer Output on jobs that have ended. The ended jobs will still count toward the limit of
jobs defined by the maximum jobs system value. The job status becomes Completed
(OUTQ) when the job ends.
Detaching printer output from a job means that the job is removed from the system when
the job ends. This reduces the use of system resources by allowing job structures to be
recycled when the job ends.
Because the job is removed from the system, the job interfaces can no longer be used to
work with the printer output for the job; however, this option does not delete the printer
output. To view the printer output for a job that is removed from the system, open System
Navigator and select Basic Operations; then select Printer Output.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

23-39
Instructor Guide
Exercise
IBM i
Exercise: Print control using System i Navigator

AS248.1
Notes:
Please refer to the Student Exercise Guide and perform the job and print control exercise.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Upon successful completion of the exercise, the student should be able to start
a batch job and monitor and control interactive, batch, and spooled jobs.
Play.

23-41
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or False: System i Navigator provides an option that

allows you to see the output generated by another user.
2. Under which of the following is the Printer Output branch
found?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Basic Operations
Work Management
Users and Groups
File Systems
3. Which of the following actions cannot be performed for a

printer from the Printers branch?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Start
Stop
Create
Change which output queue is assigned
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

The answer is True.

found?
a. Basic Operations
b. Work Management
c. Users and Groups
d. File Systems
The answer is Basic Operations.

a. Start
b. Stop
c. Create
d. Change which output queue is assigned
The answer is Create. Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

23-43
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

Printer output
Output queues
Printers
Print writers

AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose

23-45
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 24. Print control using Systems Director

Navigator for IBM i
Estimated time
00:15

aspects of a system operator's job. In this unit we will cover how to
perform these functions using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i.

Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to monitor and control:
- Printer output
- Output queues
- Printers
- Print writers

Accountability:
Exercise
Unit 24. Print control using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i

24-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to monitor and
control:
Printer output
Output queues
Printers
Print writers
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-3
Instructor Guide
Basic Operations: Printer Output

IBM i
Figure 24-2. Basic Operations: Printer Output
AS248.1
Notes:
Systems Director Navigator for IBM i allows you to find and manage printer output. Perform
the following steps to display all spooled files associated with the current user.
2. Click the Basic Operations task.
This will show all of your output. This is the equivalent of running the Work with Spool
(WRKSPLF) command on a 5250 emulation session.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-5
Instructor Guide
Printer Output: Include

IBM i
Figure 24-3. Printer Output: Include
AS248.1
Notes:
You can customize the Printer Output tab to display printer output files according to user,
location, form type, status, and the date and time they were created. If you have a large
number of printer output files on your system, this can help you more quickly locate the files
you need to see.
To customize what is included in the Printer Output tab, follow these steps:
1. Once you are on the Printer Output tab, click the down arrow for Select Action.
2. On the pull-down menu, select Include, and then click Go.
3. This will display the Include tab. Review the options available to specify your preferred
settings.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-7
Instructor Guide
Printer Output: Columns

IBM i
Figure 24-4. Printer Output: Columns
AS248.1
Notes:
You can also determine which columns are displayed and the sequence they appear in by:
1. Once you are on the Printer Output tab, click the down arrow for Select Action.
2. On the pull-down menu, select Columns, then click Go.
3. This will display the Columns tab. Review the columns available to display and specify
your preferred settings.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-9
Instructor Guide
Printer Output: Individual report

IBM i
Figure 24-5. Printer Output: Individual report
AS248.1
Notes:
Click the arrow for a spooled file to see the context menu displayed.
Notice the different actions that you can perform on the selected spooled file.
Use the Export as > PDF options to convert printer output files to PDF and send them as
email, save them as stream files in the IFS, or save them as printer output files.
The following LPP are required to use this output method:
Infoprint Server for System i (5770-IP1)

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-11
Instructor Guide
Printer Output: Open

IBM i
Figure 24-6. Printer Output: Open
AS248.1
Notes:
If you open a spooled file, its content is displayed.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-13
Instructor Guide
Options for a spool file

IBM i
Figure 24-7. Options for a spool file
AS248.1
Notes:
For a spooled file, you can click the arrow to see the drop-down menu displayed in the
visual. Choosing advanced will show a secondary drop-down menu to navigate to Manage
Output Queue or Printers.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-15
Instructor Guide
Spoolfile Properties
IBM i
Selected spoolfile
properties
Figure 24-8. Spoolfile Properties
AS248.1
Notes:
From Content menu, you can also chose Properties for selected spoolfile to see the Web
pages on the next page in the guide.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-17
Instructor Guide
Properties: General
IBM i
Figure 24-9. Properties: General
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the General tab of the Properties window for the spooled file to view the basic
properties of the printer output, which include information that identifies the printer output.
Under the General tab of the Properties window, you can change only the user-specified
data which describes the printer output.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-19
Instructor Guide
Properties: Printer/Queue
IBM i
Figure 24-10. Properties: Printer/Queue
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the Printer/Queue tab to view information about the printer device and the output
queue associated with the printer output.
You can click Move to move the printer output to a different printer device or output queue.
You can click Manage Output Queue to work with the current output queue for the printer
output.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-21
Instructor Guide
Properties: Copies/Pages
IBM i
Figure 24-11. Properties: Copies/Pages
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the Copies/Pages tab to display or to change the copy and page properties for the
printer output.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-23
Instructor Guide
Properties: Forms
IBM i
Figure 24-12. Properties: Forms
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the Forms tab to display or change the properties that control the type of forms and
how the printer output should print.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-25
Instructor Guide
Properties: Layout
IBM i
Figure 24-13. Properties: Layout
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the Layout tab to display or to change the properties that control the layout of the
printer output.
For example, you can specify whether to print on both sides of the paper or whether to
rotate the text on the paper.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-27
Instructor Guide
Properties: Staples
IBM i
Figure 24-14. Properties: Staples
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the Staples tab to display or to change the properties that control stapling of the
printer output.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-29
Instructor Guide
Properties: Overlay
IBM i
Figure 24-15. Properties: Overlay
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the Overlay tab to display or to change the properties that control the overlay
information for the printer output.
An overlay is a collection of predefined data, such as lines, shading, text, boxes, or logos,
that can be merged with variable data on a page while printing.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-31
Instructor Guide
Properties: Font
IBM i
Figure 24-16. Properties: Font
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the Font tab to display the font information used for the printer output.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-33
Instructor Guide
Properties: Origin/Expiration
IBM i
Figure 24-17. Properties: Origin/Expiration
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the Origin/Expiration tab to display information about how and when the printer
output originated.
The Expiration parameter displays information about the expiration date for the printer
output file. The expiration date is the date that the printer output file is eligible to be
removed from the system.
Expired printer output files can be removed by running the Delete Expired Spooled Files
(DLTEXPSPLF) command interactively from a command line or from Systems Director
Navigator for IBM i or by running a CL program that contains that command.
Note that here you can set expiration for the spooled file by specify date or by set how
many days to expiration.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-35
Instructor Guide
Properties: User-defined
IBM i
Figure 24-18. Properties: User-defined
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the User-defined tab to display information about user-defined objects, user-defined
data, and user-defined options related to the printer output.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-37
Instructor Guide
Properties: Other 1
IBM i
Figure 24-19. Properties: Other 1
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-39
Instructor Guide
Properties: Other 2
IBM i
Figure 24-20. Properties: Other 2
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-41
Instructor Guide
Printer Output: Export as ASCII Text

IBM i
Figure 24-21. Printer Output: Export as ASCII Text
AS248.1
Notes:
Systems Director Navigator for IBM i allows you to export printer output as ASCII text files
to your Desktop. Perform the following steps to export printer output as ASCII text.
2. Click the Basic Operations task.
4. Click the arrow of the printer output file.
5. Select Export as and then ASCII Text.
As you see on the screen, you can also transform printer output to PDF or RAW format:
For PDF format you can chose destinations:
-
To client file system

To output queue
To IFS
To e-mail

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-43
Instructor Guide
Active Jobs: Printer Output

IBM i
Figure 24-22. Active Jobs: Printer Output
AS248.1
Notes:
A user can also display the output for a specific job by doing the following:
Click the Work Management task, and then click Active Jobs.
Page down to find your job, click the arrow, and select Printer Output on the
drop-down menu.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-45
Instructor Guide
Work Management: Output Queues

IBM i
Figure 24-23. Work Management: Output Queues
AS248.1
Notes:
You can display all of the output queues on the system by:
Clicking Work Management, and then click Output Queue.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-47
Instructor Guide
Add a Printer wizard

IBM i
Figure 24-24. Add a Printer wizard
AS248.1
Notes:
Systems Director Navigator for IBM i allows you to create a printer device. After pressing
the Add Printer link, you will see the first window of the Add a Printer wizard.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-49
Instructor Guide
Printers: Columns
IBM i
Figure 24-25. Printers: Columns
AS248.1
Notes:
Systems Director Navigator for IBM i allows you to find and manage printers.
To see a list of printers:
Click the Basic Operations task, and then click Printers.
You can determine which columns are displayed and the sequence they appear in by
clicking:
The down arrow for Select Action.
Columns > Go (as shown in this visual).
Customize the columns, and specify the order for them to be displayed.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-51
Instructor Guide
Printers: Printer Output

IBM i
Figure 24-26. Printers: Printer Output
AS248.1
Notes:
Click the arrow for your printer, and observe the options on the drop-down menu.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-53
Instructor Guide
System Values: Detach printer output

IBM i
Figure 24-27. System Values: Detach printer output
AS248.1
Notes:
The Detach printer output after jobs have ended check box specifies whether printer
output is kept with a job or detached from the job.
Keeping printer output with jobs allows you to display printer output when you select
Printer Output on jobs that have ended. The ended jobs will still count toward the limit of
jobs defined by the maximum jobs system value. The job status becomes Completed
(OUTQ) when the job ends.
Detaching printer output from a job means that the job is removed from the system when
the job ends. This reduces the use of system resources by allowing job structures to be
recycled when the job ends.
Because the job is removed from the system, the job interfaces can no longer be used to
work with the printer output for the job; however, this option does not delete the printer
output. To view the printer output for a job that is removed from the system, open System
Navigator and select Basic Operations; then select Printer Output.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-55
Instructor Guide
Exercise
IBM i
Exercise: Print control using


AS248.1
Notes:
Please refer to the Student Exercise Guide and perform the print control exercise.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Upon successful completion of the exercise, the student should be able to start
a batch job and monitor and control interactive, batch, and spooled jobs.
Play.

24-57
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or False: You can export printer output as a PDF in

Systems Director Navigator for IBM i.
2. Which Properties option would display which system the
printer output came from?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Origin/Expiration
Layout
Other 1
Other 2
3. True or False: You can view the output for a specific job by
clicking Work Management and then clicking Active Jobs.
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

The answer is True.

a.
b.
c.
d.
Origin / Expiration
Layout
Other 1
Other 2
The answer is Origin / Expiration.
The answer is True.

24-59
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. True or False: You can email spool files or keep them as

records.
5. When using printer load balancing, what is the maximum
number of writers that can be attached to an output queue?
a.
b.
c.
d.
5
8
10
15
6. True or False: You can delete an expired spool file.
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

records.
The answer is True.

a. 5
b. 8
c. 10
d. 15
The answer is 10.

The answer is True.

24-61
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to monitor and
control:
Printer output
Output queues
Printers
Print writers
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

24-63
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 25. Starting and stopping the system

Estimated time
00:35

This unit describes how to start (initial program load) and stop (power
down) the Power i system.

Start the Power i:
-
Perform unattended IPL

Perform attended IPL (Change IPL options)
Enable automatic IPLs
Identify and work with system values that affect IPL
Stop the Power i:

- Use the Power Down System command
- Use the Power On and Off Tasks menu
- Use the Power push button

Accountability:
Exercise

25-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Start the Power i:
Stop the Power i:

Use the Power Down System command
Use the Power On and Off Tasks menu
Use the Power push button
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Each system eventually needs to be powered down and back on again for
normal maintenance (such as freeing up storage space, loading new software, or installing
new hardware). This unit explains the various methods an operator can use to start and
stop the system.

25-3
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
25.1. Starting the system

In this unit, the students learn various methods for starting and stopping the system.
A technique that seems to work very well from both a teaching and a scheduling standpoint
is to demonstrate powering down the system as the last activity on day one. This allows the
students to leave once the power-down sequence has started; they do not have to wait
while the unattended IPL finishes. It also makes teaching the correct power-down steps
easier the next morning. Just be sure, when you are powering down, to follow the steps
listed both in this guide and in the Student Notebook.
Make sure you point out to the students that, even though you briefly discuss how to use
the Power push button to stop the system, this method is not recommended because of the
errors that can affect data files.
Caution the students that appearances can be deceiving. In the following discussions of
the various types of IPLs, it might appear that after Enter is pressed, the next display
appears immediately. In actual practice, there can be a considerable delay between when
Enter is pressed and the appearance of the next display.
An IPL can take longer after an abnormal power down because of the time it takes to
rebuild access paths and locate damaged objects.

25-5
Instructor Guide
IPL overview
IBM i
There are several reasons to power on the Power i system:

Starting normal operation
Starting a remote system
Changing configuration options
Recovering after a power failure
IPL
Several ways exist to power on (IPL)

the Power i system:
Normal (unattended)
Manual (attended)
Automatic
Secure
Figure 25-2. IPL overview
AS248.1
Notes:
Starting a Power is referred to as initial program load (IPL). During an IPL, system
programs are loaded from the system auxiliary storage, and the system hardware is
checked. In addition, the system recognizes changes to certain system characteristics.
Use the operating mode to determine the number of options that are presented to the
operator during and after the IPL. It can also secure (lock) the control panel to prevent an
unauthorized or inadvertent IPL from the control panel.
There are four operating modes:
Normal (unattended)
After the power on, the Power in normal (unattended) mode requires no operator
intervention during the IPL.
When you turn on the Power in normal mode, it performs the IPL and presents the Sign
On display on all available display stations. The operator cannot change the system
during the IPL. Dedicated service tools (DST) and the operating system do not present
any display during this IPL.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Manual (attended)
After power on, operating the Power i on manual (attended) mode means that an
operator uses the control panel to direct the system for special needs.
During manual mode IPL, DST and the operating system present menus and prompts
that allow you to make changes to the internal system environment. This can include
entering debug mode for service representatives to diagnose difficult problems.
Auto (automatic)
Use auto mode for an automatic remote IPL, automatic IPL by date and time, and an
automatic IPL after a power failure.
Secure
Use secure mode to prevent use of the control panel to perform an IPL. This mode is a
form of IPL, but it provides a means to prevent an unauthorized or inadvertent IPL from
the control panel.

25-7
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Ask the students to check yes or no using the
polling options to indicate if they have ever powered a Power i up or down.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Ask the students to raise their hands if they have ever
powered a Power i up or down. Select two or three students to briefly summarize their
experience.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
IPL speed
IBM i
The following factors influence the IPL speed:

The number of attached disk drives and other peripheral
devices
The amount of main storage (memory)
How much cleanup is needed since the last IPL
The parameters specified on the PWRDWNSYS command
Settings for IPL attributes:
Possible values are:
Fast: Used for routine operations
Slow: Used for full diagnostics
The CHGIPLA command sets these attributes

The control panel can temporarily override these settings
Figure 25-3. IPL speed
AS248.1
Notes:
You can specify the type of IPL you need to perform from the system control panel. The
Increment / Decrement buttons are used to change the IPL type and mode on servers
without a mode button. Use Function 02 to select the IPL type (A, B, or D) and mode
(Normal or Manual). To select IPL type and mode from the control panel, perform the
following actions:
1. Use the Increment / Decrement buttons to select Function 02, and press Enter.
2. Use the Increment / Decrement buttons to select the IPL type and mode you want, and
then press Enter to save.
3. You can also specify a fast or slow IPL that can only be set one time at the console
panel when the server is turned off. Select Function 02, and press Enter twice. Use the
Increment / Decrement buttons to select F (fast), S (slow), or V (value from IPL
attributes).
The IPL speed setting is stored in a system value. Use the Change IPL Attributes
(CHGIPLA) command to set the system-defined speed.

25-9
Instructor Guide
Use F (fast) to set the IPL speed for routine work. This setting causes the system to run
only a minimum of self-diagnostic tests.
Use S (slow) to set the IPL speed for special needs. When you select the slow speed, the
system runs a full set of self-diagnostic tests. Use it when you:
Change hardware
Suspect intermittent hardware failures
First install your system
You can use the control panel to set IPL speed; however, if you change (override) the IPL
speed from the control panel, it affects only the next IPL. Subsequent IPLs use the
system-defined speed.
The Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command can also affect IPL speed.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

25-11
Instructor Guide
Change IPL Attributes

IBM i
Figure 25-4. Change IPL Attributes
AS248.1
Notes:
The Change IPL Attributes (CHGIPLA) command allows you to change the settings of
attributes that are used during the IPL.
Restrictions: To run this command, the user must have security administrator (*SECADM)
and all object (*ALLOBJ) special authorities.
Restart Type (RESTART): Specifies the point from which the IPL restarts when
RESTART(*YES) or RESTART((*YES *IPLA)) is specified on the Power Down System
(PWRDWNSYS) command. Specifying *SYS rather than *FULL can reduce the time
required to restart the system. The initial (shipped) value for this parameter is *SYS.
Keylock Position (KEYLCKPOS): Specifies the keylock position. A change to this
attribute takes effect immediately.
Hardware Diagnostics (HDWDIAG): Specifies whether certain hardware diagnostics
should be performed during the IPL. The list of diagnostics is predetermined by the system
and cannot be modified by the user.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Compress Job Tables (CPRJOBTBL): Specifies when the job tables should be
compressed to remove excess unused entries.
Check Job Tables (CHKJOBTBL): Specifies when particular damage checks on the job
tables should be performed.
Rebuild Product Directory (RBDPRDDIR): Specifies when the product directory
information should be fully rebuilt.
Mail Server Framework Recovery (MSFRCY): Specifies whether mail server framework
(MSF) recovery is done during abnormal IPLs.
Display Status (DSPSTS): Specifies whether the status of IBM i IPL steps is displayed at
the console during IPL.
Start TCP/IP (STRTCP): Specifies whether the Start TCP/IP (STRTCP) command is
automatically submitted at the completion of IPL and when the controlling subsystem is
restarted to bring the system out of the restricted state. The STRTCP command is not
submitted during install IPLs or when the Power is starting to the restricted state.
Spooled File Recovery (SPLFRCY): Specifies what should be done with all spooled files
during IPL when a job table is detected as damaged or if *YES is set for the following three
IPL attributes: Clear Job Queues (CLRJOBQ), Clear Output Queues (CLROUTQ), and
Clear Incomplete Job Logs (CLRINCJOB).
Clear Job Queues (CLRJOBQ): Specifies whether to clear the jobs from all job queues.
Clear Output Queues (CLROUTQ): Specifies whether to clear all output queues, thus
removing all spooled output from the system.
Clear Incomplete Job Logs (CLRINCJOB): Specifies whether to delete the job logs for
jobs that were active at the time of the last system power down.
Start Print Writers (STRPRTWTR): Specifies whether to print writers should be started at
IPL time.
Start to Restricted State (STRRSTD): Specifies whether the system should be started to
the restricted state, which means that only the system console will be active.

25-13
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
What can you do using the control panel?

IBM i
Specify which type of IPL to perform:

Normal
Manual
Auto
Secure
Choose the IPL source:

Disk (B or A)
Alternate device: Tape/CD (D)
System
Attention
Service (C) used by service
personnel
Display function code/data information:

Selected function (IPL Type)
System Reference Codes (SRC)
Figure 25-5. What can you do using the control panel?
AS248.1
Notes:
From the control panel, an operator or administrator can specify:
The mode or type of IPL to be performed on the system
If the system should do a normal IPL (using the disk image or off of a backup tape or a
CD)
Use the Increment / Decrement keys (the up and down arrows) to display SRC
information

25-15
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Control panel function codes

IBM i
Function code
Function description
01
02
Displays the currently selected IPL type (and logical key mode on some system
types).
Displays the currently selected IPL speed override for the next IPL.
Select the IPL type, the logical key mode, and the IPL speed.
03
Starts an IPL to load the system. The IPL uses the selected IPL options.
04
Tests all lamps on entire display; indicators will be switched on.
05
Displays an SRC on the control panel which corresponds to the system power
control network (SPCN).
Allows you to perform SPCN service functions.
07
08
Fast power off. To perform a fast power off, see Powering Down and Powering On
the Power in the problem analysis information for your system.
023 through 10
Reserved.
11 through 123
Displays an SRC on the control panel.
20
Displays the machine type, model, processor feature code, processor class
indicator, and IPL path description.
Causes the DST display to appear on the system console. To exit the DST, select
the Resume operating system display option.
21
Figure 25-6. Control panel function codes
AS248.1
Notes:
Some control panel functions might not be available on all system types.
Function code
Displays the currently selected IPL type (and
logical key mode on some system types).
01
Displays the currently selected IPL speed

override for the next IPL.
Select the IPL type, the logical key mode,
and the IPL speed.
Starts an IPL to load the system. The IPL
uses the selected IPL options.
Tests all lamps on entire display; indicators
will be switched on.
02
03
04

25-17
Instructor Guide
Function code
Displays an SRC on the control panel which
corresponds to the system power control
network (SPCN).
Allows you to perform SPCN service
functions.
Fast power off. To perform a fast power off,
see Powering Down and Powering On the
Power in the problem analysis information
for your system.
Reserved.
Displays an SRC on the control panel.
Displays the machine type, model, processor
feature code, processor class indicator, and
IPL path description.
Causes the DST display to appear on the
system console. To exit the DST, select the
Resume operating system display option.
05
07
08
023 through 10
11 through 123
20
21

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

25-19
Instructor Guide
Overview of unattended (normal) IPL steps

IBM i
System state
Running
Steps
1. Set mode to Normal.

2. ENDSYS or ENDSBS *ALL
3. PWRDWNSYS *IMMED RESTART(*YES)
Not
running
1. Set mode to Normal.

2. Turn on power for all devices.
3. Press Power push button to power on.
Note: Always set mode to Normal after IPL is finished.

Figure 25-7. Overview of unattended (normal) IPL steps
AS248.1
Notes:
The system value QIPLTYPE must be set to zero (unattended IPL).
The IPL that you perform most often is an unattended IPL.
An unattended IPL is easy; it consists of the steps shown in the visual. After the Power i
performs the IPL, the sign-on display appears on all display stations you turned on. If you
did not turn on a device, it is active once you do turn it on.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details In an unattended IPL, if the Power is running, the system operator only needs to
make sure that the mode (C) is in the Normal position and that the QIPLTYPE system value
is set to zero. The operator must then type the PWRDWNSYS command correctly on any
command line and specify RESTART (*YES) on the PWRDWNSYS command so that the
system automatically restarts after the IPL.
In an unattended IPL, if the Power is not running, the system operator needs to make sure
that the mode (C) is in the Normal position and that the QIPLTYPE system value is set to
zero. The operator must then turn the power on for all devices that will be used. Finally, the
operator presses the Power push button (B).
When the system finishes an unattended IPL, no matter whether the system was or was
not running when the IPL took place, 1) the system operator must set mode (C) to Normal
and 2) all workstations that are powered on will have the Sign On display shown. The
workstation designated as the console does not need to be powered on. If a workstation is
not powered on, the Sign On display will appear on it when it is powered on.
Transition statement What happens if you want to perform an unattended IPL in the
middle of the night or on a weekend when few people will be affected? There is a function
that allows you to plan for powering on and off the system while you are absent.

25-21
Instructor Guide
Power On and Off Tasks menu

IBM i
Figure 25-8. Power On and Off Tasks menu
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the GO POWER command to display the menu in the visual.
Enter option 2 from the Power On and Off Tasks menu to display the Change Power On/Off
Schedule display.
You can have i power your system on and off according to a schedule you set up on this
display.
You can use F10 on the Change Power On/Off Schedule display to facilitate setting up
daily defaults for on and off times.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Both options 3 and 4 assume that all activity on the system that might be
adversely affected by ending jobs immediately has been terminated. When either of these
options is selected, confirmation is required on a second display. Options 3 and 4 will be
discussed later in this unit.
To access the Power On and Off Tasks menu, type go power and press Enter.
The following tips can help you solve problems with the automatic power schedule:
Make sure that the Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) command is part of your startup
program, which is by default QSYS\QSTRUP. The automatic power scheduler uses a
job called QSYSSCD to process the requests for schedule changes. The Start Cleanup
(STRCLNUP) command must be run to start the QSYSSCD job. The IBM-supplied
startup program includes the Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) command. If you have your
own startup program from a previous release, it might not contain the Start Cleanup
(STRCLNUP) command.
Make sure that you specify Yes on the Change Cleanup (CHGCLNUP) command to
allow automatic clean-up. The QSYSSCD job does not start if you do not allow
automatic cleanup.
Make sure that the Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) command submits the QSYSSCD job
to the job queue specified in the Change Cleanup (CHGCLNUP) command.
Check to see whether the QSYSSCD job is running; it could be on a held job queue.
Make sure that the job queue to which the Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) command is
submitted has the maximum jobs parameter set to *NOMAX or to a number greater
than one. Because the QSYSSCD job always runs, the other jobs that perform
automatic cleanup and power-off functions cannot start if the maximum jobs parameter
is set to one. To change the maximum jobs parameter, use the Change subsystem
Description (CHGSBSD) command.
Make sure the mode is set to Normal or Auto.

25-23
Instructor Guide
Schedule power on/off

IBM i
Figure 25-9. Schedule power on/off
AS248.1
Notes:
The Change Power On/Off Schedule display allows you to set up a schedule that meets
your needs. It is not necessary to power on and off at the same time each day. Use the F10
function key to bring up the Change Power On/Off Defaults display.
Also, the system automatically sends users a message telling them when the Power is to
be powered off. You can indicate how many minutes before power-off you want the system
to send this message in the Minutes before power off to send message field. When the
system sends the power-off message, you can delay the scheduled time for powering off
from 30 minutes to three hours in your reply to the message. The system waits the time
specified before powering off. You do not have another chance to change this setting.
Solve problems with the automatic power schedule
If the power schedule is not working:
Make sure that the Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) command is part of your startup
program.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
The automatic power scheduler uses a job called QSYSSCD to process the requests
for schedule changes. The Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) command must be run to start
the QSYSSCD job. The IBM-supplied startup program includes the Start Cleanup
(STRCLNUP) command. If you have your own startup program from a previous release,
it might not contain the Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) command.
Make sure that you specify Yes on the Change Cleanup (CHGCLNUP) command to
allow automatic cleanup. The QSYSSCD job will not start if you do not allow automatic
cleanup.
Make sure that the Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) command submits the QSYSSCD job
to the job queue specified in the Change Cleanup (CHGCLNUP) command.
Check to see if the QSYSSCD job is running; it could be on a held job queue.
Make sure that the job queue that the Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) command is
submitted to has the maximum jobs parameter set to *NOMAX or a number greater
than one. Because the QSYSSCD job always runs, the other jobs that perform
automatic cleanup and power-off functions are not able to start if the maximum jobs
parameter is set to one. To change the maximum jobs parameter on the job queue
entry, use the Change Job Queue Entry (CHGJOBQE) command.
Make sure the mode is set to Normal or Auto.

25-25
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details You need to mention some considerations about the use of the power on/off
schedule:
No control value (system value or otherwise) exists that can be used by i to determine
whether the dates and times in the schedule should be honored. Once a power on/off
schedule has been entered, it is honored. You must have proper authority to set up the
schedule. (If anyone has to know, it takes both *SECADM and *ALLOBJ special
authority and *USE authority to the PWRDWNSYS command.)
Once i determines that it is time to power off the system, it runs a PWRDWNSYS
command with the delay parameter set to *IMMED. This means that if any jobs are
active, they are ended immediately, and data files could be partially updated.
If the scheduled power-on time is too close to the power-off time, it is possible that
power-off is not complete by the time power-on should occur. If this happens, no
automatic IPL is performed, and a manual IPL is required.
In order for a scheduled power-on to complete, the keylock switch must be in either the
Normal or Auto position.
There are times when you have to perform an attended rather than an unattended IPL. In
the following visuals, we look at when and how you should perform an IPL.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
When to perform an attended (manual) IPL

IBM i
You must perform an attended IPL when:

Installing the operating system
Using DST
Working with existing or setting up partitions
Recovering from a system failure
Changing IPL options
Upgrading to a new version of the i
Figure 25-10. When to perform an attended (manual) IPL
AS248.1
Notes:
An attended IPL brings up displays on the system console that require a response before
the IPL can continue. An attended IPL is required when you:
Change IPL options (such as date and time, whether the system will automatically
configure itself, and the environment (S/36 or none) in which the system will run)
Install a new release of the operating system
Must access DST to define or change your disk configuration (DSTs is used to service
the system when the operating Power is not running)
Recover from a system failure
In other cases, you should perform an unattended IPL.

25-27
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Note
If the Power i has a Hardware Management console (HMC), it is not required to do a
manual IPL in order to work with or set up partitions.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Attended (manual) IPL steps

IBM i
System state
Steps
Running
1. Power on devices.
2. Type ENDSYS or ENDSBS *ALL on any command
line, and press Enter.
3. Set mode to Manual.
4. Type PWRDWNSYS *IMMED RESTART(*YES)
on any command line, and press Enter.
Note: If you cannot enter commands, do the following:
a. Press the Power push button to turn the system off.
b. Press the Power push button to start an IPL.
5. Follow the displays on the console to complete the IPL.
6. Set the mode to Normal.
Not
Running
1. Power on devices.
2. Set mode to Manual.
3. Press the Power push button to power on.
4. Follow the displays on the console to complete the IPL.
5. Set the mode to Normal.
Note: Always set mode to Normal after IPL is finished.

Figure 25-11. Attended (manual) IPL steps
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the following steps to perform an attended IPL when the Power i is running:
1. Turn on the power for the display station you are using as the system console.
2. Turn on the power for all of the display stations, printers, tape devices, and controllers
you or others might need to use.
3. End any running subsystems (ENDSBS *ALL).
4. Make sure Manual mode has been selected.
5. Type PWRDWNSYS *IMMED RESTART(*YES) on any command line, and press Enter.
6. Follow the steps that appear on the displays on the system console to complete the IPL.
7. After the IPL has completed, make sure Normal mode has been selected.

25-29
Instructor Guide
Follow these steps to perform an attended IPL when the Power is not running:
1. Turn on the power for the display station you are using as the system console.
2. Turn on the power for all of the display stations, printers, tape devices, and controllers
you or others might need to use.
3. Make sure Manual mode has been selected.
4. Press the Power push button to power on.
5. Follow the steps that appear on the system console displays to complete the IPL.
6. After the IPL has completed, make sure Normal mode has been selected.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details This visual shows an overview of the attended IPL steps. If you have not already
done so, take the time now to discuss the different modes and ways of selecting them
based on system unit, version, and model, and discuss how to select functions on the
control panel. The Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command is discussed in more
detail later in this unit.
Manual: Set the mode to Manual only when the system allows you to perform all manual
IPLs, such as an operator-attended IPL from disk or tape, and manual control
functions, such as selecting an IPL or displaying the kind of IPL that the Power is
set to run; however, you cannot do a remote IPL, an IPL by date and time, or an
IPL after a power failure.
Note: You should only set the mode to Manual when necessary. This ensures
that no one accidentally presses the Power push button and causes the system
to stop.
Normal: The Normal mode allows you to manually turn the power on and to perform each
of the automatic operations. That is, you can start the system by doing a manual
or remote IPL, an IPL by date and time, or an IPL after a power failure. If you
want to stop the system when the mode is set to Normal, use the Power Down
System (PWRDWNSYS) command at any display station. You must have
QSYSOPR authority to use the Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS)
command.
Auto:
The Auto (automatic) mode allows a remote IPL, an IPL by date and time, or an
IPL after a power failure. When the mode is set to Auto, you cannot:
- Start the system by doing an IPL manually
- Stop the system by using the Power push button
- Select a different IPL type by using the Increment/Decrement buttons
Secure: The Secure mode locks the control panel on the system unit. You can stop the
system from a display station only by using the Power Down System
(PWRDWNSYS) command.
During an attended IPL, a number of displays appear (step five on the visual
when the Power is running and not running) that you must enter information on
or respond to. We will look at some of those displays now.

25-31
Instructor Guide
Attended IPL: IPL or Install the System

IBM i
IPL or Install the System

System: i520BL2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Perform an IPL
Install the operating system
Use Dedicated Services Tools (DST)
Perform automatic installation of the operating system
Save Licensed Internal Code
Selection
1
Figure 25-12. Attended IPL: IPL or Install the System
AS248.1
Notes:
The first display that appears on the system console during an attended IPL is the IPL or
Install the System menu. It might take quite a while for this display to appear depending on
the model and size of your system. When this menu appears, select option 1 (Perform an
IPL), and press Enter.
Note
If you select option 2 or 4, the system requires that you confirm your selection. If you select
option 3, additional security clearance is required before you can proceed. If you select
option 5, the Licensed Internal Code (LIC) will be saved to tape. (This save does not
include QSYS.)
When you enter option 1, the IPL Steps in Progress display shows you the various IPL
steps. This is an informational display only; you do not have to do anything.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

25-33
Instructor Guide
Attended IPL: Sign On display

IBM i
I520BL2
QCTL
DSP01
Figure 25-13. Attended IPL: Sign On display
AS248.1
Notes:
After you select option 1 (Perform an IPL) on the IPL or Install the System display, the next
display that you interact with is the Sign On display. You might have to wait a few minutes
for this display to appear. Remember, the speed of the IPL process depends on the model
and size of your processor.
Sign on as the system operator. If you have another user ID that you use to perform system
operator functions, make sure that the system operator message queue, QSYSOPR, is
allocated to your job in break mode.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

25-35
Instructor Guide
Attended IPL:
Select Products to Work with PTFs display
IBM i
Select Products to Work with PTFs

System:
Position to .
. .
i520BL2
. ________Product
Type options, press Enter. Press F21 to select All.

1=Select
Opt
__
__
__
__
__
__
Product
5770999
5770SS1
5770CM1
5770DG1
5770JV1
5770WD1
Option
*BASE
*BASE
*BASE
*BASE
*BASE
*BASE
Release
V7R1M0
V7R1M0
V7R1M0
V7R1M0
V7R1M0
V7R1M0
Figure 25-14. Attended IPL: Select Products to Work with PTFs display
AS248.1
Notes:
The Select Products to Work with PTFs display appears next. Select the product or
products (one or more) to which you want to apply PTFs, and press Enter to continue.
If you do not want to apply any PTFs, press F3 to exit from this display and continue with
the IPL.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The Select Products to Work with PTFs display appears next. This is one of the
functions that can be performed during an attended IPL. (PTFs are discussed later in this
course.) To work with the PTFs for a particular product, select option 1. If the operator does
not want to work with PTFs, the operator should press F3 to exit this display and continue
the IPL.

25-37
Instructor Guide
Attended IPL: IPL Options display

IBM i
IPL
Options
Type choices, press the Enter key.

System date .................................XX / XX / XX
System time .................................XX : XX : XX
Clear job queues.............................N
Clear output queues..........................N
Clear incomplete job logs....................N
Start print writers..........................Y
Start system to restricted state.............N
Set major system options.....................Y
Define or change system at IPL...............Y
MM / DD
HH : MM
Y=Yes,
Y=Yes,
Y=Yes,
Y=Yes,
Y=Yes,
Y=Yes,
Y=Yes,
/ YY
: SS
N=No
N=No
N=No
N=No
N=No
N=No
N=No
Figure 25-15. Attended IPL: IPL Options display
AS248.1
Notes:
The IPL Options display appears next. Make any necessary changes to it, and press Enter.
F1 (help) is available for this display.
While the date and time can be changed at IPL, there is a much easier way to do this which
we will discuss later in this unit.
If you are working in the System/36 environment, the two blank lines following Start
system to restricted state contain Run #STRTUPn procedure prompts. The default for
these two parameters is Y (yes).
When you perform an attended IPL, you almost always change one or both of the two
bottom responses to Y because this is why you would normally perform an attended IPL. If
you leave both of the bottom parameters set to N (no) and press Enter, the menu, program,
or procedure you defined on the Sign On display or in your user profile appears.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The default for each of the last two options on the IPL Options display is N. The
first time you perform an attended IPL, you want to change both to Y and review (without
changing) the information on the displays that are shown.
Unless one of the last two options on this display is changed to Y, the menu, program, or
procedure you defined in the Sign On display or in your user profile is displayed next.

25-39
Instructor Guide
Attended IPL: Set Major System Options

IBM i
Set Major System Options

Enable automatic configuration........Y
Y=Yes,
N=No
Device configuration naming...........*NORMAL
*NORMAL, *S36, *DEVADR
Default special environment............*NONE
*NONE, *S36
Figure 25-16. Attended IPL: Set Major System Options
AS248.1
Notes:
If you enter a Y (yes) in the Set major system options field on the IPL Options display, the
next display that appears is Set Major System Options. On this display, you can select
automatic configuration, the type of device configuration naming, and the special
environment in which you want to work.
Enabling automatic configuration instructs IBM i to automatically describe, and make
available for immediate use, new local workstation displays, printers, and tape drives as
soon as they are cabled and powered on. You can either specify Y (automatically configure
local devices) or N (no automatic configuration).
You can specify one of the following for the device configuration naming parameter:
*NORMAL uses a naming convention unique to the Power i, for example, DSP01 and
PRT01 for displays and printers and TAP01 and DKT01 for tape and diskette devices.
*S36 uses a naming convention similar to that for System/36, for example, W1 for
workstations, P1 for printers, and T1 and l1 for tape and diskette devices.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
*DEVADR uses a naming convention which is obtained from the device resource name,
for example, DSP010203 for a display station, PRT010203 for a printer, and TAP01 and
DKT01 for tape and diskette devices.
All system users are placed in the default special environment when they sign on unless
their user profile specifies otherwise. You can specify one of the following for this
parameter:
*NONE indicates there is no special environment.
*S36 sets up the System/36 environment that is used if you are migrating from the
System/36.
You can change any of these options without performing an IPL. We will discuss how to do
this later in this unit.

25-41
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Caution the students that any change to the Set Major System Options display
changes the contents of the corresponding system value. (System values are discussed
later in this unit.) Once changed, a system value retains the changed value until it is
specifically changed again.
Automatic configuration can be used to have IBM i automatically configure local
workstation displays, printers, tape drives, and diskette drives. The QAUTOCFG system
value controls whether automatic configuration is active.
If automatic device configuration is active, the QDEVNAMING system value controls the
naming of automatically configured devices.
You can also select a system-wide default special environment now. The system value that
controls the special environment is QSPCENV. If the System/36 environment is installed
and all users are to work in that environment by default, this value should be set to *S36;
otherwise, it should be left at *NONE.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Attended IPL:
Define or Change the System at IPL
IBM i
Define or Change the System at IPL

System: i520BL2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Configuration commands
Change user profile
System value commands
Network attribute commands
General object commands
Work with shared pools
Selection
__
F3= Exit and continue IPL
Figure 25-17. Attended IPL: Define or Change the System at IPL
AS248.1
Notes:
If you respond Y to the Define or change the system at IPL parameter on the IPL Options
display, the Define or Change the System at IPL menu appears.
From this display, you can select options that allow you to change the system configuration,
system values, network attributes, user profiles, and objects or files. While you cannot run
all commands at IPL time, many can be run by selecting the option for the category of
command you need.
When you have finished using the options on this display, press F3 (not Enter) to continue
the IPL.
Remember: When you have finished with the IPL, set mode (C) to Normal.

25-43
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Now that you know how to perform an attended and unattended IPL, let's look at
the system values regarding IPLs.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
IPL types
IBM i
There are four IPL types:

IPL type A:
When IPL type B fails
Done when procedures direct you to perform this type
When you suspect problems with temporary LIC fixes
IPL type B
Use for routine work, for normal operations
IPL type C
Reserved for hardware service representatives
IPL type D:
When directed by an install or restore procedure
When IPL type A and B have failed, for system recovery
When directed by service to perform an alternate IPL
Figure 25-18. IPL types
AS248.1
Notes:
There are four types of IPL. These are listed on this visual in the order in which they are
typically used on your system.
IPL type A
Use IPL type A when directed for special work, such as applying PTFs and doing
diagnostic work. For example, use IPL type A in the following circumstances:
- When IPL type B fails
- When the procedures direct you to use IPL type A
- When you suspect problems with temporary LIC fixes
IPL type A uses an A copy of LIC during and after the IPL. This copy of LIC is the
permanent copy. It resides in System Storage Area A. It contains no temporarily applied
fixes.

25-45
Instructor Guide
IPL type B
Use IPL type B for routine work and when directed by a PTF procedure. This type of IPL
runs the newest copy of LIC and is necessary when you permanently apply certain
fixes.
IPL type B uses the B copy of LIC during and after the IPL. This copy resides in System
Storage Area B. This copy contains temporarily applied fixes. (See the section on
keeping your software current with PTFs for more information about fixes.)
IPL type C
Rochester development support reserves this type of IPL for hardware service
representatives.
Attention: Do not use this function. Severe data loss can occur with improper use of
this function.
IPL type D
Use IPL type D when directed for special work, such as installing and reloading
programs.
IPL type D loads the system programs from an alternate IPL load source, such as a
tape drive or CD-ROM.
Typically, an IPL uses programs that are stored on the primary IPL load source (typically
a disk drive). Sometimes it is necessary to perform an IPL from another source, such as
programs that are stored on tape. To do this, you must use IPL type D to load the
system from the alternate IPL load source.
Use IPL type D only during the following situations:
- When install or restore procedures direct you to use IPL type D
- When IPL type B and IPL type A fail (when the primary IPL load source cannot load
the system properly) and only when directed by your support personnel
- When service directs you to perform an alternate installation

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

25-47
Instructor Guide
What is a system value?

IBM i
System values control or change overall system operation

A system value can be displayed and changed
System values are grouped by type for reference:
All
Allocation
Date and time
Default library list

QSYSLIBL, QUSRLIBL
Editing
Library list
Attended/unattended IPL
QIPLTYPE
Message and logging

Security
Automatic configuration
QAUTOCFG
Storage
System
control
Current date
QDATE
Figure 25-19. What is a system value?
AS248.1
Notes:
A system value is controlled information for the operation of certain parts of the system.
There are more than 130 system values provided as part of IBM i. System values are used
to control a wide variety of system wide functions, as indicated by the categories shown on
the visual.
While almost anyone who can enter a command can display most system values, very few
users have the authority required to change any of them. (To change system values, you
must be signed on as QPGMR, QSYSOPR, or QSRV or have *ALLOBJ authority.) As a
system operator, you might have this authority.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details System values are supplied as part of IBM i and are stored in the system value
object. They cannot be created or deleted by any user. They contain control information
used by IBM i to control many operations or supply system-wide default values. Even
though they cannot be created or deleted, most system values can be changed. The
students might have the opportunity to display IPL system values if there is time to perform
the optional exercises accompanying this unit. They will also see many examples of other
system values throughout the remainder of this course. Perhaps the clearest example of a
system value is QDATE, the system date.

25-49
Instructor Guide
System values and IPL

IBM i
System value
Description
Default
QIPLDATTIM
IPL automatically on this day/time
*NONE
QIPLSTS
Previous IPL
(0)
QIPLTYPE
Unattended / attended
QPWRDWN
LMT
Maximum amount of time to allow for

system to power down
(0)
QPWRRSTIPL
Automatic IPL after power is restored
(0)
QSCPFCONS
Action to take when console problem occurs continue
QSTRUPPGM
Name of program called when the

controlling subsystem is started
(0)
QSYS/
QSTRUP
Figure 25-20. System values and IPL
AS248.1
Notes:
There are many system values that affect IPL. Some cannot be changed by anyone, for
example, QIPLSTS, which indicates which one of the five possible types of IPL was last
performed. Most of the other system values can be changed to reflect your operating
environment. Changes to most system values take effect immediately. Others take effect
after the next IPL.
Following is an explanation of some of the more important system values which relate to
IPL:
QIPLDATTIM stands for date and time to automatically IPL. It specifies the date and time
at which the system should perform an automatic IPL. The default is *NONE, which means
that an automatic IPL will not be performed.
QIPLSTS stands for IPL status indicator. It displays the way the system performed the last
IPL. The default is zero, which means an IPL was performed from the control panel of the
system unit.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
QIPLTYPE defines the type of IPL the system performs from the control panel: attended
IPL, attended IPL with DST, or attended IPL in debug mode. The default is zero, which
means an unattended IPL will be done.
QPWRDWNLMT defines the maximum time for immediate shutdown. It specifies the
maximum amount of time (in seconds) to wait for the system to power down normally after
a user has requested an immediate power-down or when a user has requested a controlled
power-down and the time specified on the delay parameter has expired.
QPWRRSTIPL controls whether an automatic IPL is performed when utility power is
restored after a power failure. The default is zero, which means that the system does not
automatically perform an IPL when utility power is restored after a power failure.
QSCPFCONS specifies the action for your system to take when a console problem occurs
during an attended restart.
QSTRUPPGM specifies the name of the program called from an auto start job when the
controlling subsystem is started. This program performs setup functions, such as starting
subsystems and printers.

25-51
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Discuss the IPL-related system values that are part of the *SYSCTL (system
control) category.
Also discuss the system values QDATE and QTIME, which contain the system date and
time. When set, they are constantly maintained by IBM i and need to be changed only
when daylight saving time starts or ends.
Review student notes or demo the help capability on the system for an explanation of the
IPL system values shown on the visual and of the options that can be specified for each.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
System startup
IBM i
01 B N
Power-on
QCTL
QCTLSBSD
(system value)
Normal IPL from "B" side
QSYS/QSTRUP
QSTRUPPGM
(system value)
CRTCLPGM
QSYS/QSTRUP *PGM
editor
RTVCLSRC
*Library
9*File (QCLSRC)
Source
File Member
Figure 25-21. System startup
AS248.1
Notes:
The startup program (QSTRUPPGM) system value specifies the name of the program
called from an autostart job when the controlling subsystem is started. This program
performs setup functions, such as starting subsystems and printers. The program must
exist in the system ASP or in a basic user ASP.
A change to this system value takes effect the next time the Power is IPLed. The shipped
value is QSYS/QSTRUP. The contents of this shipped CL program can be retrieved with
the Retrieve CL Source (RTVCLSRC) command.

25-53
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Startup program
IBM i
Program QSTRUP:
Can be customized
Starts subsystems:
Starts subsystem monitor
Allocates memory
Allocates job structure space
Starts spool writers

Starts TCP/IP support:
STRTCP
(Starts TCP/IP support)
STRTCPSVR
(Starts TCP/IP application servers)
STRHOSTSVR
(Starts host server support)
Figure 25-22. Startup program
AS248.1
Notes:

25-55
Instructor Guide
The contents of this startup program QSTRUP are:

/********************************************************************/
/*
*/
/* 5770SS1 V7R1M0 060210
RTVCLSRC Output
10/05/09 16:21:39 */
*/
/*
/* Program name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :
QSTRUP
PN*/
/* Library name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :
QSYS
PL*/
/* Original source file . . . . . . . . . . :
S000040828
SN*/
/* Library name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :
$BLDSS1
SL*/
/* Original source member . . . . . . . . . :
S000040828
SM*/
/* Source file change
*/
/*
date/time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :
10/05/09 22:07:54 SC*/
/* Patch option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :
*NOPATCH
PO*/
/* User profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :
*USER
UP*/
/* Text . . . :
TX*/
/* Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :
QSYS
OW*/
/* Patch change ID . . . . . . . . . . . . :
PC*/
/* Patch APAR ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . :
PA*/
/* User mod flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . :
*NO
UM*/
/*
ED*/
/********************************************************************/
PGM
DCL VAR(&STRWTRS) TYPE(*CHAR) LEN(1)
DCL VAR(&CTLSBSD) TYPE(*CHAR) LEN(20)
DCL VAR(&CPYR) TYPE(*CHAR) LEN(90) VALUE('5770-SS1 (C) COPYRIGHTIBM CORP 1980, 2009. LICENSED MATERIAL - PROGRAM PROPERTY OF IBM')
QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QSERVER)
MONMSG MSGID(CPF0000)
QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QUSRWRK)
QSYS/RLSJOBQ JOBQ(QGPL/QS36MRT)
QSYS/RLSJOBQ JOBQ(QGPL/QS36EVOKE)
QSYS/STRCLNUP
QSYS/RTVSYSVAL SYSVAL(QCTLSBSD) RTNVAR(&CTLSBSD)
IF COND((&CTLSBSD *NE 'QCTL
QSYS
') *AND (&CTLSBSD *NE'QCTL
QGPL
')) THEN(GOTO CMDLBL(DONE))
QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QINTER)
QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QBATCH)
QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QCMN)
DONE:
QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QSPL)
QSYS/RTVSYSVAL SYSVAL(QSTRPRTWTR) RTNVAR(&STRWTRS)
IF COND(&STRWTRS = '0') THEN(GOTO CMDLBL(NOWTRS))
CALL PGM(QSYS/QWCSWTRS)
NOWTRS:
RETURN
CHGVAR VAR(&CPYR) VALUE(&CPYR)
ENDPGM

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

25-57
Instructor Guide
Automatic IPLs
IBM i
IPL after power failure:

System automatically performs an IPL when utility power is restored
after a power failure.
Set QPWRRSTIPL to one.
Remote IPL:
Remote power on and IPL can be started using a telephone line and a
modem.
Set QRMTIPL to one.
IPL by date and time:
System automatically performs an IPL on a specified day and time.
Set QIPLDATTIM to appropriate date and time.
Access to control panel
Operators can remotely access the control panel to power on a system.
Figure 25-23. Automatic IPLs
AS248.1
Notes:
There are three types of automatic IPLs, each of which is controlled by a different system
value. The automatic IPLs and their associated system values are shown on the visual.
Even if an automatic IPL is allowed, an automatic IPL of the Power is not performed unless
the power is off and the mode is set to either Normal or Auto.
Starting a remote system
To start the remote system automatically with a telephone and a modem, you need to
set the system value QRMTIPL to one.
Before you start:
1. Set the mode on the control panel to Normal or Auto, and turn the system off.
2. After the Power is turned off and is made ready for remote IPL, do not turn the modem
on or off. Otherwise, the system might start unexpectedly, although it turns itself off in a
few minutes.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
To start the remote system:

1. Dial the telephone number that is assigned to the electronic customer support modem
and line of the remote system.
If you hang up before the silence, the IPL might not complete.
2. Wait about 20 to 40 seconds while the telephone rings. You will hear a modem tone and
then silence. At this time, the communication is being established from the modem to
the control panel to start the IPL sequence.
3. Hang up the telephone. The system performs an IPL, and the Sign On display is shown.
4. Sign on to the system.

25-59
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
System value using 5250 emulation

IBM i
Figure 25-24. System value using 5250 emulation
AS248.1
Notes:
Using a 5250 emulation session, you can use the Work with System Values
(WRKSYSVAL) command to set the system values discussed in this unit.
To display the screen captured in the upper left side of this visual, we have entered the
WRKSYSVAL command, and then used F4 to prompt both the command itself and the
system value parameter. From the resulting screen you can choose one of the categories
displayed or you can page down and locate the specific system value of interest.
Another alternative is to enter the WRKSYSVAL command and press the Enter key. That
will display the screen captured in the lower right side of the display. From this screen, you
page down to locate the specific system value of interest.

25-61
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
System values using System i Navigator

IBM i
Figure 25-25. System values using System i Navigator
AS248.1
Notes:
System values can be set using System i Navigator. Once you are signed on to your
system, expand Configuration and Service, and click System Values.
This will update the right pane to show a list of the system value categories that can be set
using this interface.
In this example, we have clicked the Restart category to show the notebook displayed.
Notice that there are multiple system values that can be set using the different tabs
presented.

25-63
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
System values using Systems Director Navigator

IBM i
Figure 25-26. System values using Systems Director Navigator
AS248.1
Notes:
System values can be set using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i. Once you are signed
on to your system, click Configuration and Service > System Values.
This will show a list of the system values that can be set using this interface. Find the
system value of interest, click the arrow, and choose Properties to change the specific
system value.

25-65
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details An IPL can be performed in three other ways. All of these are automatic IPLs,
which are controlled by system values. The operator can choose to have the system
perform an automatic IPL when utility power has been restored after a power failure. An
IPL can be initiated remotely or be performed at a specified date and time.
Make sure the students understand that neither a remote nor a date/time IPL can be
initiated unless the Power is powered off and the mode is either set to Normal or Auto.
Now that you know how to start the system, let's look at ways you can stop it.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
25.2. Stopping the system

25-67
Instructor Guide
Stopping the system: Overview

IBM i
The Power i can be stopped in different ways.
ZZzzzz
The PWRDWNSYS command

The Power On and Off Tasks menu
The Power push button
Figure 25-27. Stopping the system: Overview
AS248.1
Notes:
Just as there are different ways to perform an IPL on a Power i, there are different ways to
stop it. The method you use depends on what is happening on your system when you want
to stop it.
The Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command
You can use this command to power off the Power in a controlled manner or
immediately. Using this command is the recommended way to stop the system.
The Power On and Off Tasks menu
The main purpose of the Power On and Off Tasks menu is to set up a power on and off
tasks schedule; however, it can also be used to power off the Power immediately and
then load it.
The Power push button
If you are unable to stop the system by using either the PWRDWNSYS command or the
Power On and off Tasks menu, you can use the Power push button (B) to stop it
immediately.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

25-69
Instructor Guide
Steps prior to power down

IBM i
Allocate QSYSOPR to your job in *BREAK mode: CHGMSGQ

QSYSOPR *BREAK
Make sure all users sign off of the system.
Check the status of any batch jobs.
Hold any job queues that have jobs waiting to run.
Check for removable media and remove them.
Figure 25-28. Steps prior to power down
AS248.1
Notes:
To ensure the system ends normally, you should perform the following steps before
powering it down:
1. Allocate QSYSOPR to your job in break mode.
2. Make sure all users sign off. Send a message that interrupts all users who are signed
on telling them to sign off. Include both the current date and time and the time at which
the power down occurs.
a. Type go managesys and press Enter. Select option 12 (Work with signed-on
users) on the Manage Your System, Users, and Devices (MANAGESYS) menu.
If the Work with User Jobs display is shown, you need to switch to basic assistance
level using F21 (Select assistance level).
b. Press F10 (Send message to all) on the Work with Signed-On Users display; then
type the message in the Message text field on the Send a Message display and
press F10 (Send). Wait for the users to sign off. Check to make sure all users have
signed off by pressing F5 (Refresh) on the Work with Signed-On Users display.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
When everyone is signed off of the system, the display shows only your job. To sign
someone off of the system, use option 4 (Sign off).
If you have separate interactive subsystems other than the controlling subsystem,
you might want to stop the interactive subsystems once the users have signed off.
This prevents them from signing on again before you have stopped the system.
To end your interactive subsystem, on the Work with subsystem Descriptions
(WRKSBSD) display, select your interactive subsystem and use option 10 (End
subsystem) to end it. On the End subsystem (ENDSBS) display, in the How to end
field, type either *CNTRLD to end jobs after a user-specified delay or *IMMED to end
jobs immediately.
3. Check the status of any batch jobs that might be affected if the Power is powered down.
a. Type go managesys on any command line and press Enter. Select option 11
(Work with jobs) on the Manage Your System, Users, and Devices (MANAGESYS)
menu.
If the Work with User Jobs display is shown, use F21 to switch to basic assistance
level (Select assistance level).
b. Press F14 (Select other jobs) on the Work with Jobs display. Type *ALL in the User
field and an N in every field except the Message waiting, Running, and Running
job held fields. Press Enter. The Work with Jobs display is shown again with the
batch jobs listed.
4. If any job queues have jobs waiting to run, press F22 (Work with job queues) to see the
Work with Job Queues (WRKJOBQ) display. Hold any job queues that have jobs
waiting to run on the Work with Job Queues display. Do not forget to release these job
queues when you start the system again. Press F12 (Cancel) to return to the Work with
Jobs display, then press F5 (Refresh) every few minutes until all batch jobs have
completed processing.
5. Check for removable media, and remove them from the system.

25-71
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details There are various ways to ensure that the users of a systems are signed off and
that their jobs are ended gracefully. This is just one of the recommended methods. What is
important is that the method used works successfully for your system.
The next step is to issue the PWRDWNSYS command.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Using the Power Down System command

IBM i
This command stops the system in an orderly manner. It does

not cause damage to data files.
This is the recommended way to stop the system.
Figure 25-29. Using the Power Down System command
AS248.1
Notes:
The Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command prepares the system too shut down
and then starts the power-down sequence. All active subsystems are notified that the
Power is being powered down; no new jobs or routing steps can be started by any
subsystem. For example, jobs that are on a job queue as a result of a Transfer Job
(TFRJOB) command are not allowed to complete. During the subsequent IPL, they are
removed from the job queue and their job logs are produced.
When the Power is powered down with the *CNTRLD option, a vary off of configuration
objects is initiated but might not complete before the power-down completes. When the
Power is powered down with the *IMMED option, no vary off of configuration objects is
performed.
Restrictions
To run this command, you must have job control (*JOBCTL) authority.

25-73
Instructor Guide
You must have *USE authority to the image catalog specified by the IMGCLG
parameter and *EXECUTE authority to the QUSRSYS library containing that image
catalog.
Note
Do not precede an entry with an asterisk (*) unless that entry is a special value that is
shown (on the display or in the help information) with an asterisk.
The following parameters are associated with the PWRDWNSYS command:

- OPTION (how to end): Specifies whether the system allows the active subsystem to
end processing of active jobs in a controlled manner (which lets the application
program perform end processing) or whether the system ends the jobs immediately.
In either case, the system does perform certain job cleanup functions.
- DELAY (delay time if *CNTRLD): Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that the
system allows a controlled end to be performed by the active subsystems. If the end
of job routines are not finished in the specified delay time, any remaining jobs are
ended immediately.
- RESTART (restart after power-down): Specifies whether the system ends and
powers down or whether the system ends and then starts again in unattended
mode.
- IPLSRC (IPL source): Specifies whether an IPL is started from the A source, B
source, or D source of the system. This parameter allows you to control which LIC
storage source of the system to load. Also, the source of the system determines
where LIC program temporary fixes (PTFs) are applied. This parameter also allows
the system to be upgraded to a new release from an install image on the direct
access storage device (DASD).
- ENDSBSOPT (end subsystem option): Specifies the options to take when ending
the active subsystems. In general, specifying these options will improve the
performance of the PWRDWNSYS command. Each option has certain side effects
that you need to analyze before using that option. This parameter has no effect on
jobs that are already in the ending status.
- TIMOUTOPT (timeout option): Specifies the option to take when the system does
not end within the time limit specified by the QPWRDWNLMT system value. If this
time limit is exceeded, the subsequent IPL will be abnormal regardless of the value
specified for this parameter.
- CONFIRM (confirm): Specifies whether the request should be confirmed before the
Power is powered down.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

25-75
Instructor Guide
Controlled power-down with time limit

IBM i
The PWRDWNSYS command with time delay

can be issued from a CL jobstream, from a CL
program, or by the system operator.
PWRDWNSYS
OPTION (*CNTRLD)
DELAY(120)
No
If no jobs are active or if all are completed before

the delay time expires, the power-down sequence
begins as soon as the last job of any still running
has finished.
ANY
JOB STILL
ACTIVE?
Yes
No
120
SECOND
TIME-OUT?
The DELAY parameter allows you to enter how

long, in seconds, you want processing to continue
before canceling active jobs.
Yes
SYSTEM CANCELS ALL
ACTIVE JOBS
SYSTEM INITIATES
POWER -DOWN SEQUENCE
If jobs are canceled because the time has expired,

the job files might be partially updated.
The system initiates the power-down sequence
after all jobs have been completed or canceled.
END
Figure 25-30. Controlled power-down with time limit
AS248.1
Notes:
If you follow the steps shown on the Steps prior to power down visual you saw a few
moments ago, using the PWRDWNSYS command is the preferred way to power down
your system.
When you run the PWRDWNSYS command, specify a controlled end and a delay of at
least 30 seconds (this gives you time to sign off).
After you issue the PWRDWNSYS command, you should immediately sign off from your
workstation. The power-down sequence will begin.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Of all the options available, the one shown in this visual is the preferred method
of powering down the system. Even with this method, the operator should take the steps
shown on the Steps prior to power down visual before issuing the PWRDWNSYS
command.
When the PWRDWNSYS command has been started, no new jobs can be started by any
user on the system. You cannot cancel the PWRDWNSYS command. You must be
absolutely sure that you want to power the system down before entering this command!
If the PWRDWNSYS command is run with the OPTION parameter set to *CNTRLD, the
DELAY parameter controls how long active jobs are given to end on their own. IBM i waits
up to the delay time specified for all active jobs on the system to end. If all active jobs end
within the delay period, the system begins the power-down process immediately. If the
delay time expires before all active jobs have ended, an immediate power-down sequence
begins.
There is another way to stop your Power i system: from the Power On and Off Tasks menu
discussed previously in this unit. While you discuss this menu, you can use the Power On
and Off Tasks menu visual in this unit, have the students turn to that visual, or both. You
can use option 3 on this menu to power off the Power immediately and option 4 to power off
the Power immediately and then power it on. Both of these options assume you have
terminated all activity on the system that might be adversely affected by ending jobs
immediately. When you select either of these options, you must confirm your choice on a
second display.
If you cannot use the PWRDWNSYS command or Power On and Off Tasks menu to stop
the Power i system, you can still power down the system with the Power push button.

25-77
Instructor Guide
Using the Power push button

IBM i
Unpredictable results can occur in data files.

Next IPL might take longer to complete.
WARNING
Use the Power push button only if you cannot use the
PWRDWNSYS command or the Power On and Off Tasks menu.
Make sure there is no tape in any tape device.
Make sure mode is set to Manual.
Press the Power push button.
To confirm, press the Power push button again.

Figure 25-31. Using the Power push button
AS248.1
Notes:
When you press the Power push button twice in a row, the system turns the power off
almost immediately. When the power off is complete, the Power on light goes on.
To turn the power off using the Power push button, do the following:
1. Press the Power push button (or option 8 on the control panel for fast power off). The
Function/Data display blinks O? (the international power off symbol).
2. Press the Power push button again. The light continues to blink as the Power is being
powered off. When power off is complete, the light goes off.
You can cancel the power-off operation after you press the Power push button the first
time. To do this, simply press any other push button on the control panel.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Unpredictable results can occur in data files using this method, and the next IPL
might take longer to complete.
If the system does not turn the power off within 30 minutes after you press the Power push
button twice, wait for the System Attention light to come on. When this light comes on, this
means there is a system problem. Refer to system problem documentation.

25-79
Instructor Guide
Exercises
IBM i
Exercise: System values using 5250 emulation

Exercise: System values using System i Navigator
Exercise: System values using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i
Basically, use the same values using
a different interface.

AS248.1
Notes:
If your instructor tells you to, please refer to the Student Exercise Guide and perform the
System values and IPL exercise. This is an optional exercise.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details If you have enough classroom time to do it, refer the students to the Student
Exercise Guide and have them perform the System values and IPL exercise. This is an
optional exercise.
Play.

25-81
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or False: You can use the Change IPL Attributes

command to control the time it takes for your system to
perform an IPL.
2. Which type of IPL requires an operator to complete the
power on process?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Attended
Unattended
Automatic
Restart
3. Which type of IPL is used to reload your system from tape

after a disk failure?
a.
b.
c.
d.
A
B
C
D
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i
1. True or False: You can use the Change IPL Attributes command to
control the time it takes for your system to perform an IPL.
The answer is True.
2. Which type of IPL requires an operator to complete the power on

process?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Attended
Unattended
Automatic
Restart
The answer is Attended.
3. Which type of IPL is used to reload your system from tape after a disk
failure?
a.
b.
c.
d.
A
B
C
D
The answer is D.

25-83
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

Start the Power i:
Stop the Power i:

Use the Power Down System command
Use the Power On and Off Tasks menu
Use the Power push button
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Summarize by comparing a typical day (IPL and power off the system) with the
exception situations (a required change to the system, such as PTF installation, new
version of the operating system, or an emergency shutdown).
Before continuing to the next unit, stop and ask the students if there are any additional
questions before continuing.

25-85
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 26. System security concepts

Estimated time
00:15

This unit discusses the concepts of IBM i security, including user
security and user profiles, security controlled via system values, the
authorization of objects, authorization lists, and group profiles.

List the types of security you can set for your system
Explain the purpose served by a user profile
Discuss the types of information stored in a user profile
Explain the different types of users on the system
List and discuss the different system privileges that can be
assigned to a user
Explain the purpose served by group profiles
Explain the purpose served by authorization lists
Explain how authority is set for an object

Accountability:

26-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

assigned to a user
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Discuss the objectives and remind the students that the purpose of this topic is
to make them more comfortable with security, not to make them security experts.
In this unit, students learn about security concepts and terminology.

26-3
Instructor Guide
1111111111111
Types of security
IBM i
Physical
security
User
security
Resource
security
Figure 26-2. Types of security
AS248.1
Notes:
There are three types of security on the system. Each type builds on the preceding one.
Physical security is about securing physical access to the system, devices (terminals),
device output (printers), and media on which data is stored from accidental or deliberate
loss or damage.
User security limits who can sign on to the system and what they can do once they have
signed on to the system. This is accomplished through user profiles and enhanced with the
use of group profiles.
Object security is also known as resource authority. This is an additional type of security
that provides protection for system objects (for example, files, programs, and libraries) and
the data within these objects.
In this class we will discuss user and resource security concepts.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Physical security helps protect the system and other devices from accidental or
deliberate loss or damage. Most measures taken to ensure the physical security of a
system are external to the system; however, the Power is equipped with a keylock that
prevents unauthorized use of functions at the system unit.
User profiles are used to control who can sign on to the system. Menus and programs
provide a means of controlling what users have access to when they sign on.
Object (resource) security is an additional type of security that helps protect a company's
data by limiting access to objects (files, programs, libraries, and so on).
Point out to the students that each security type provides a higher level of security than the
preceding one and that it is recommended that all types of security be implemented on
each system.
In this unit, we look at the tools provided with IBM i which control sign-on security and
object authority. Physical security is not discussed in this unit since it is external to the
system.
In an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Ask the students to place a checkmark next to
any of these that they use in their company or organization.
In a FTF (Face to Face) class: Ask to the students to raise their hand for each of these
that they use their company or organization.

26-5
Instructor Guide
Types of security control

IBM i
U ser
rol
cont
Ob
co ject
ntr
ol
System
control
Figure 26-3. Types of security control
AS248.1
Notes:
Security is always active on your system. There are several tools available with IBM i that
allow you to control security. These tools are:
User control
User profiles and group profiles are used to identify who can sign on to the system and
to control what they can do once they are signed on. A user profile identifies an
individual user. A group profile is used to grant authority to a group of users.
System control
System values are provided as part of the system. They are used to control certain
operations in the operating system and to communicate the status of certain conditions.
Changes to some system values take effect immediately, some do not take effect until
new jobs are started, and others do not take effect until the next IPL.
Object control
Also known as resource security. Through the use of CL commands, menu options, and
Navigator, users can be granted or denied access to objects and the data they contain.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details There are a number of tools built into the IBM i that help you control security.
These are not separate products you have to buy; they are provided as part of IBM i.

26-7
Instructor Guide
Setting up a new user

IBM i
User information:
User profile
Password
Special authority
User class
Password expiration level
Initial menu or program
List of objects owned
Object
authorizations
Figure 26-4. Setting up a new user
AS248.1
Notes:
User profiles describe users to the system. A user profile contains general information
about a user including security information. For example, it contains:
The user ID and password

The privilege class for a user
Any special authorities assigned to this user
The limits and defaults set for a user
A list of all the objects a profile owns
A list of all the objects a profile has specifically been authorized to use (or barred from
using)

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Inform the students that although the phrase has authority to might be bad
English, it is the term used in any description in the online help on the Power i system. The
phrase clearly means has authorized access to.
Stress that the user profile is the most important type of security object.

26-9
Instructor Guide
Type of user: Privilege class

IBM i
Privilege class: A user can be defined as one of the following:

User
Programmer
System operator
Security administrator
Security officer
Figure 26-5. Type of user: Privilege class
AS248.1
Notes:
When creating a user profile, you will specify which class of user this person will be. Each
privilege class has a default set of system privileges (these are defined on the next page).
The authorities specified under system privileges override the default privileges for this
user or group. When you are working with a group, the privileges specified apply to all
users who are members of the group.
The options for the privilege class parameter and their associated privileges are:
User
On systems running at security level of 10 or 20, the users

default privileges are save/restore and all object access.
On a system running at a security level of 30, 40, or 50, the user
has no privileges.
Programmer
On systems running at security level 10 or 20, the users default

privileges are save/restore, job control, and all object access.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
On a system running at a security level of 30,40, or 50, the user

has no privileges.
Uempty
System operator
On systems running at security level 10 or 20 the users default

privileges are save/restore, job control, and all object access.
On a system running at a security level of 30, 40, or 50, the user
has save/restore and job control.
On systems running at security level 10 or 20, the users default

privileges are save/restore, job control, security administration,
and all object access.
On a system running at a security level of 30, 40, or 50 the user
has security administration.
Security officer
The users default is to include all of the privileges. These are

all object access, save/restore, auditing control, security
administration, system configuration, system service access,
job control, and spool control.
The recommendation is to set privilege class to User if the user does not need to perform
system functions.
Privileges are described in more detail on the next page.

26-11
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
System privileges
IBM i
Users can be assigned the following privileges:

All object access
Auditing control
Job control
Save/restore
Security administration
Spool control
System configuration
System services access
Figure 26-6. System privileges
AS248.1
Notes:
When creating a user profile, the system privileges parameter is used to specify the system
privileges for this user or group.
Privileges are required to perform certain functions on the system. When you are working
with a group, the privileges specified apply to all users who are members of the group.
The privileges that can be assigned to a user or group profile are:
All object access
The user can access any system resource whether the user
has private authority or not.
Auditing control
The user has authority to perform auditing functions.

This authority is granted to users who turn auditing on or off for
the system and control the level of auditing on an object or user.

26-13
Instructor Guide
Job control
The user has authority to change, display, hold, release, cancel,

and clear all jobs running on the system, job queue, or output
queue that is operator-controlled. The user also has the
authority to start writers and to stop active subsystems.
This authority is usually granted to a system operator.
Save/restore
The user has the authority to save, restore, and free storage for
all objects on the system, whether or not the user has authority
to use the object.
This authority is usually granted to a system operator.
Security administration The user can create, change, or delete user profiles if
authorized to use those commands and the user profiles.
Spool control
The user can perform all spool functions.
The user has the authority to change Power i/O configurations.
System service access
The user can perform service functions.
If no system privileges are specified, the user has no default privileges.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
To access the multimedia library, click the CD button in the toolbar in Elluminate.

26-15
Instructor Guide
Group profile
IBM i
Group profile
NAME:
DEPTA
GRPPRF: *none
OBJOWN: OBJ1, OBJ3
OBJAUT: OBJ2, OBJ4
User profile
User profile
NAME:
GRPPRF:
OBJOWN:
OBJAUT:
NAME:
GRPPRF:
OBJOWN:
OBJAUT:
ART
DEPTA
DICK
DEPTA
OBJ5
OBJ6
User profile
NAME:
PAT
GRPPRF: DEPTA
OBJOWN:
OBJAUT: *EXC OBJ1
Figure 26-7. Group profile
AS248.1
Notes:
A group profile is a special type of user profile.
When using a group profile, you can define authority for a group of users rather than
give authority to each user individually.
A group profile can own objects on the system.
A user can be a member of up to 16 group profiles.
A group profile cannot be a member of another group.
This technique:
Allows authority to be defined once at the group level rather than several times at the
individual profile level.
Gives all members of a group exactly the same authority to use a single set of objects
unless additional grants of authority are made at the member level.
Authorities that are specified at the individual user level override, for that user, those
specified at the group level.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Group profiles provide the second method of grouping authorities.
A group profile is a profile whose authority to work with objects can be used by several
individual users. All members of a group have all the authority of the group profile unless
this is overridden at the member (individual user) level.
All members of a group profile still have their own user profile. In the terminology of the
group profile function, these individual user profiles are called member profiles.
The member profiles identify each user and specify the name of the group profile to which
the user belongs.
The group profile contains most of the authorizations to objects, thereby greatly reducing
the need for specific assignments of authority to individual members of the group.
A group profile can also be used as a pattern for creating individual user profiles.

26-17
Instructor Guide
Authorization list
IBM i
NAME:
OWNER:
AUTL1
PATRICIA
List of authorized users:

FRED
WILMA
BILL
JOHN
*PUBLIC
FILE
A
FILE
B
NEW USER
*USE
*ALL
*EXCLUDE
*USE
*CHANGE
*EXCLUDE
PGM
A
NEW
OBJECT
Figure 26-8. Authorization list
AS248.1
Notes:
An authorization list references both user profiles and objects.
An authorization list is populated with a list of users who will be authorized to work with
those objects that are secured using this list. Each user has a different authority assigned.
Next, search for individual objects and secure them using this authorization list. Each of the
users named in the list will have the specified authority to that object. An object can only be
secured by one authorization list.
When a new object is created, it can be secured using this authorization list. Each user
named in the list will have the specified authority to that object.
A new user can be added to an authorization list. A specific authority will be granted to this
new user. This new user will now have the specified authority to all of the objects that are
secured using this list.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Individually controlling access to objects on an object by object or user by user
basis quickly becomes an almost completely unmanageable task. For that reason, there
are two ways to allow the grouping of authorities. The first of these is the use of
authorization lists.
An authorization list can be used to control access to one or many objects. As shown on
the visual, the AUTL1 authorization list controls access to three objects (FILE A, FILE B,
and PGM A).
An authorization list also contains a list of user profile names. Each user on an
authorization list can access all objects secured or protected by the list, but users can be
granted different levels of access to the objects controlled by the list.
In this visual:
FRED has *ALL authority to use the three objects.
WILMA and the PUBLIC have *EXCLUDE authority.
BILL has *USE authority to the objects.
JOHN has *CHANGE authority to the objects.

26-19
Instructor Guide
Public versus private authority

IBM i
LFILEB
OBJECT
OWNER - USER1
PUBLIC AUTHORITY
- *CHANGE
Example:
CRTLIB.............
CRTDTAARA..........
CRTPF..............
AUT(*USE)
AUT(*ALL)
AUT(*EXCLUDE)
Figure 26-9. Public versus private authority
AS248.1
Notes:
There are many ways to give an individual user specific authority to use a specific object.
Once a user has been given any specific authority to use an object, that user has private
authority to use that object.
The authority that the public has to an object is normally set when the object is created and
is kept only in the object. Private authority is stored both in the object and in the user
profiles of the users who have been given specific authority to use that object.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

26-21
Instructor Guide
Object authority
IBM i
User that creates an object is the object owner

Owner or security officer can grant authority to another user
Authority can be granted to an object and to the data
One of the private authorities that can be granted is
*EXCLUDE
Ownership of an object can be transferred
All users are members of *PUBLIC
Public authority to an object is set at create time
Figure 26-10. Object authority
AS248.1
Notes:
The user that creates an object is the object owner.
The owner of an object or a security officer can grant another user authority to work with
an object. This is known as private authority.
Authority can be granted to an object as well as the data within the object. For example,
you can grant authority to a file, and you can grant authority to the data within that file.
One of the private authorities that can be granted is *EXCLUDE.
Ownership of an object can be granted to another user or a group profile.
All users on a system are member of *PUBLIC.
Public authority to an object is set at create time.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

26-23
Instructor Guide
System values
IBM i
Are used to control or change overall operations to the system

Can be set by users with sufficient authority
You can search alphabetically for a system value
You can search for a system value by category
Some system value changes take effect immediately, while
others are changed at the next IPL
Figure 26-11. System values
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.

26-25
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or False: Environment variables are used to control the

operations of the system.
2. Which of the following is information that is not stored in a
users profile?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Password
User class
List of owned objects
System values
3. Which of the following user types is assigned all of the

system privileges?
a)
b)
c)
d)
Programmer
System operator
Security officer
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i


users profile?
a. Password
b. User class
c. List of owned objects
d. System values
The answer is System values.

system privileges?
a. Programmer
b. System operator
c. Security administrator
d. Security officer
The answer is Security officer.

26-27
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

assigned to a user
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose

26-29
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 27. System security using 5250 emulation

Estimated time
00:15

This unit shows you how to navigate the system using the different
commands and screens to work with security on the system.

Change your password

Use system commands to identify and display a user profile
Enable a disabled user profile
List all of the objects owned by a user
Display the authority currently in place for an object
Use the correct command to set new authority for an object
Display and work with authorization lists on the system
Work with and display system value

Accountability:
Exercise

27-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

27-3
Instructor Guide
Change Password: CHGPWD

IBM i
Figure 27-2. Change Password: CHGPWD
AS248.1
Notes:
The Change Password (CHGPWD) display allows you to change your own password. The
password that you type will not be displayed as you type it.
The system administrator for your system will set a system value (password expiration
interval QPWDEXPTIV system value) that determines at what interval the users on this
system must change their passwords.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

27-5
Instructor Guide
Display User Profile

IBM i
Figure 27-3. Display User Profile
AS248.1
Notes:
The Display User Profile (DSPUSRPRF) display shows you the current values of user
attributes for the requested user. The alternative is to use the Work with User Profiles
(WRKUSRPRF) command that will display a list of user profiles you are authorized to work
with. This command will show the screen capture in the middle of this visual.
These attributes in a user profile are used by the system to personalize the way the system
functions for each individual user.
If you see More on the lower right side of your display, there is more information to view.
Press Page Down (or Roll Up) to move toward the end of the information. Press Page Up
(or Roll Down) to display and explore the values that are set and stored in a user profile.
Remember to use the F1- Help function for a description of any parameters that might be of
interest.
If you see Bottom instead of More, you are at the end of the information.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
multimedia library of Elluminate after discussing this visual before you continue to the next
topic.
after discussing this visual before you continue to the next topic, while providing
commentary for the different parts of the file.

27-7
Instructor Guide

IBM i
Figure 27-4. Enable a disabled user profile
AS248.1
Notes:
One of the most common duties that a system operator will be called on to perform is to
enable a users profile. Use the Change User Profile (CHGUSRPRF) command to make
this change.
The system will disable a user profile when:
The user profile reaches the maximum number of password verifications.
The user profile expiration date is reached.
The STATUS parameter is set to *DISABLED for the profile.
The status (STATUS) parameter specifies the status of the user profile. The values that you
can specify for this parameter are:
*SAME: The value does not change.
*ENABLED: The user profile is valid for sign-on.
*DISABLED: The user profile is not valid for sign-on until an authorized user enables it
again. Batch jobs can be submitted under a disabled user profile.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

27-9
Instructor Guide
Work with Objects by Owner

IBM i
Figure 27-5. Work with Objects by Owner
AS248.1
Notes:
From the Work with User Profiles screen, you can use option 12 (Work with objects by
owner) to display the Work with Objects by Owner (WRKOBJOWN) display for the user
profile selected.
From this display, you can display or change authorizations, display the description, delete,
rename, or change the ownership for any object to which you are authorized.
The Work with Objects by Owner (WRKOBJOWN) display shows a list of all objects owned
by a user profile. It also lists the library in which the object resides, the type of the object,
the attributes of the object, and associated text.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details A user must have authority to a user profile and to a specific object before that
person would have authority to display a profile or change the authorization for an object.
A user with SECOFR or SECADM authority is required before you can display or work with
user profiles.

27-11
Instructor Guide
Display Object Authority

IBM i
Figure 27-6. Display Object Authority
AS248.1
Notes:
The Display Object Authority (DSPOBJAUT) command displays:
The list of authorized users of an object and their assigned authority.
If the object is secured by an authorization list, the name of the authorization list is also
displayed.
The public authority and primary group authority are also shown.
Use the F11 key to scroll through three different versions of the object authority displays.
The Non display detail display shows system-defined authority subsets and USER DEF.
The Object authority display.
The Data authority display.
If the user entering the command does not have object management (*OBJMGT) authority
to the object, only that user's name and authorities are shown.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The following are shown for the specified object when you run the DSPOBJAUT
command:
The object name
The name of the library containing the object
The name of the object owner
The object type
A list of all the users who are authorized to use the object
The authority that each user has for the object
The authorization list name (if the object is secured by an authorization list)
Restrictions: You must have use (*USE) authority to the ASP device if one is specified.

27-13
Instructor Guide
Grant Object Authority

IBM i
Figure 27-7. Grant Object Authority
AS248.1
Notes:
The Grant Object Authority (GRTOBJAUT) command grants specific authority for the
objects named in the command to another user or group of users.
Authority can be given to:
Named users
Users (*PUBLIC) who do not have specific authority to the object or the authorization
list
Authorization lists
This command can be used by an object's owner or by a user with object management
authority for the specified object. A user with object management authority can grant to
other users any authority that the user has except object management authority. Only the
owner of the object or someone with all object special authority (*ALLOBJ), can grant
object management authority to a user.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Some restrictions to be aware with the GRTOBJAUT command are:
1. The command must get an exclusive lock on a database file before read or object
operational authority can be given to a user.
2. If a user requests authority for another specified user to a device currently in use by
another authorized user, authority to the device is not given.
3. Object type *AUTL cannot be specified.
4. AUT(*AUTL) is valid only with USER(*PUBLIC).
5. A user must either be the owner of the object or have *ALL authority to use the AUTL
parameter.
6. The user must have object management authority to use the object.
7. If the object is a file, the user must have object operational and object management
authorities.
8. For display stations or for workstation message queues associated with the display
station, if this command is not entered at the device for which authorities are to be
granted, it should be preceded by the Allocate Object (ALCOBJ) command and
followed by the Deallocate Object (DLCOBJ) command.
9. You must have *USE authority to the ASP device if one is specified.
Note
For more information, refer to the Power i Security Reference SC41-5302 book.

27-15
Instructor Guide
Work with Authorization Lists

IBM i
Figure 27-8. Work with Authorization Lists
AS248.1
Notes:
The Work with Authorization Lists (WRKAUTL) command shows a list of authorization lists
from which you can display and change authorization lists.
Restrictions
Only the authorization lists to which you have some authority will be shown on the
display.
To perform operations on the authorization lists, you must have use (*USE) authority to
use the command invoked by the operation and the appropriate authority to the
authorization list on which the operation is to be performed.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Demo this command to the students in a class. Ask them to follow along on their
screen.
Place the cursor on the authority parameter and press the F1=Help key. Ask the
students to review the different values that can be set for this parameter.

27-17
Instructor Guide
Display Authorization List

IBM i
F15
Figure 27-9. Display Authorization List
AS248.1
Notes:
The Display Authorization List display shows a list of users that have authority to objects
secured by this authorization list and the users' authorities. The public authority is also
shown.
Note
If a user in the authorization list is also specifically authorized to use an object that this list
secures, the specific authority is used to determine the user's authorities.
You can use the F11 key to scroll through three different versions of the object authority
displays.
The Non display detail display, which shows system-defined authority subsets and
USER DEF.
The Object authority display.
The Data authority display.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

27-19
Instructor Guide
Security system values

IBM i
Figure 27-10. Security system values
AS248.1
Notes:
The Work with System Value (WRKSYSVAL) command allows you to work with a specified
system value or a category of system values. The system values are provided as part of
the system. They are used by the system to control certain operations in the operating
system and to communicate the status of certain conditions.
Changes to some system values take effect immediately; however, some do not take effect
until new jobs are started, and others do not take effect until the next IPL.
In this example, we have selected the Security category. Notice the system values that can
be set that affect properties related to security. More system values can be displayed when
you page up or page down to see all of the system values that fall into this category.
More information about system values is available in the Work Management section of the
Power i and IBM i Information Center located at:
http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/infocenter

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

27-21
Instructor Guide
Exercise
IBM i
Exercise: System security using 5250 emulation

AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.

27-23
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. Which of the following options do you need to take on the

Work with User Profiles display to enable a users profile?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Option 1 - Create
Option 2 - Change
Option 5 - Display
Option 12 Work with owned objects
2. When working with user profiles, which option will show all of
the objects to which a user is authorized?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Option 1 - Create
Option 2 - Change
Option 5 - Display
Option 12 Work with owned objects
3. True or False: The user who creates an object is

automatically designated as the owner of an object.
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

a. Option 1 - Create
b. Option 2 - Change
c. Option 5 - Display
d. Option 12 Work with owned objects
The answer is Option 2 Change.

The answer is True.

27-25
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose

27-27
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 28. System security using System i Navigator

Estimated time
00:20

This unit shows you how to navigate the system using System i
Navigator to work with security on the system.


Identify and display a user profile
Display and work with system values

Accountability:
Exercise

28-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
In this unit, students learn about security concepts and terminology; then, in the lab, they
see how security is implemented on the system.
perform an application share of System i Navigator for the next ten visuals covering the
demo on your instructor PC of System i Navigator for the next ten visuals covering the

28-3
Instructor Guide
Change Password
IBM i
Figure 28-2. Change Password
AS248.1
Notes:
To change your password with System i Navigator perform the following steps:
1. Right click on your system.
2. Click Connection to System on the drop down menu.
3. Click Change password on the second drop down menu.
4. These actions will display the Change IBM i Password panel.
5. Specify your current and the new password then click OK to perform this command.
This is equivalent to running the change password (CHGPWD) command on a 5250
emulation green screen.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

28-5
Instructor Guide
User profile > Properties (1 of 2)

IBM i
Figure 28-3. User profile > Properties (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
In System i Navigator, you can manage users and groups by expanding the Users and
Groups branch.
New users can be created in different ways.
Click New User on the toolbar.
Expand the File menu, and select New User.
Right-click Users and Groups or All Users, and select New User.
New users can be created based on existing users.
Drag and drop a profile name to Users and Groups or to All Users.
Right-click a user and select New Based On.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

28-7
Instructor Guide

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:
Clicking Capabilities on the Properties panel for the selected user opens a Capabilities
window for that user.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

28-9
Instructor Guide
Capabilities: Privilege class

IBM i
Figure 28-5. Capabilities: Privilege class
AS248.1
Notes:
Under the Privileges tab on the Capabilities window, one of the Privilege classes can be
selected from a drop-down list.
Each privilege class has a default set of system privileges. The authorities specified under
System privileges override the default privileges for this user or group. When you are
working with a group, the privileges specified apply to all users who are members of the
group.
Options for the Privilege class field and their associated privileges are:
User
The user has no privileges on systems at security level 30 and

above.
Programmer

above.
System operator
The user has save/restore and job control on systems at

security level 30 and above.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
The user has security administration on systems at security

level 30 and above.
Security officer
The users default privileges are all object access, save/restore,

auditing control, security administration, system configuration,
system service access, job control, and spool control.
System privileges are described in more detail on the next page.

28-11
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Capabilities: System privileges

IBM i
Figure 28-6. Capabilities: System privileges
AS248.1
Notes:
Privileges are required to perform certain functions on the system. The privileges are:
All object access
Auditing control
The user has authority to perform auditing functions. The

authority is granted to users who turn auditing on or off for the
system and control the level of auditing on an object or user.
Job control

authority to start writers and to stop active subsystems. This
authority is usually granted to users who operate the system.
Save/restore
all objects on the system, whether the user has authority to use

28-13
Instructor Guide
the object. This authority is usually granted to users who

operate the system.
Spool control
The user has the authority to change Power i/O configurations.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

28-15
Instructor Guide
Capabilities: Applications
IBM i
Figure 28-7. Capabilities: Applications
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the Applications tab to identify which functions a user or group can access. You can
limit access for a user or a group to specific functions.
For more information, refer to Application Administration in the Power i Information Center.
Access for allows you to select one of the following categories of applications:
System i Navigator
Includes System i Navigator and any plug-in extensions.
Client Applications
Includes all client applications providing functions on clients that

can be administered through application administration.
Host Applications
Includes all applications that reside entirely on the Power i and

provide functions that can be administered through application
administration.
Function list displays a list of defined functions and the access settings for the user or
group. For System i Navigator, plug-in applications must be administered from their
respective first-level folders in the function tree. Management central functions, such as

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
fixes and inventory and collection services, must be administered on the central server.
The values displayed in the function list are:
Function: Displays the products and functions defined on the Power i.
Access: Indicates the access setting the user or group has to the corresponding
function. If Access is selected, the user or group is granted access to the
corresponding function. If Access is not selected, the user or group is denied access to
the corresponding function. If the box is grayed and selected, the user or group has
access to at least one, but not all, of the contained functions. A user with security
administration system privilege can change the access setting for users or groups.
Access derived from: Specifies the source of the users or groups access setting.
This column is empty for functions that contain other functions.
All object system privilege: The user or group obtains its access setting from the all
object system privilege. A user or group with all object system privilege has access to
the corresponding function.
Default access: The user or group obtains its access setting from the default access
setting of the corresponding function.
User name: The user or group is explicitly granted or denied access to the
corresponding function.
Group access: The user obtains the access setting from one of its groups.

28-17
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
User profile: Owned Objects (1 of 2)

IBM i
Figure 28-8. User profile: Owned Objects (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
When you are working with the System i Navigator GUI, perform the following steps to
display the objects that are owned by a user:
1. Click and expand Users and Groups.
2. Click on All users. This will display the list of users that your user id is allowed to
manage. These users are displayed on the pane in the right half of the window.
3. Locate and right click on the user whose owned objects you wish to list.
4. Click User objects on the drop down menu.
5. Click Scan for owned objects on the secondary drop down menu.
6. This will display the Scan for owned objects window.
- In the Profiles field you can specify a user profile.
- In the Maximum number of objects field you can set a maximum number of
objects to be displayed.

28-19
Instructor Guide
- Click OK to see the results window displayed on the next page of the student guide.
Note
1. These steps can only be performed by a user who has the correct authority to perform
these actions.
2. You can perform these steps for an individual system which will show the objects that
are owned by a user on this individual system. Optionally, using Management Central,
you can click on a system group which will show the objects that are owned by a user
on all of the systems in this System group.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

28-21
Instructor Guide

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:
The Scan for owned objects window is displayed as a result of performing the steps
detailed on the previous page in the student guide.
The top half of this window will allow you to choose the system on which the user's objects
are stored. If you specify a system group on the previous page you will see a list of the
systems in the System group.
The bottom half of the window shows the objects owned by the user. You may need to
scroll down or page down to see the complete list.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

28-23
Instructor Guide
Password System Values (1 of 2)

IBM i
Figure 28-10. Password System Values (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
In Navigator:
1. Select your server.
2. Expand Configuration and Service.
3. Click System Values to display the system values categories.
4. Right-click Password.
5. Select Properties to see the window on the next page in the student guide.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

28-25
Instructor Guide
Password System Values (2 of 2)

IBM i
Figure 28-11. Password System Values (2 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
In Navigator:
1. Select your server.
3. Click System Values to display the system values categories.
4. Right-click Password.
5. Select Properties. In the example, in the visual, we are displaying:
The Validation 2 tab in the upper right capture.
Then in the capture in the middle, scroll down to see the remaining system values
specified on the Validation 2 tab.
And the Expiration tab in the lower right capture.
Notice the different system values that can be set using these two tabs that control
password properties on your system.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

28-27
Instructor Guide
Authorizing objects: Permissions

IBM i
Figure 28-12. Authorizing objects: Permissions
AS248.1
Notes:
Authorizing objects is a third way to control security. Since all IBM i data structures (system
and user) are objects, the security Power is primarily concerned with protecting objects. All
objects have some invisible common structures in their control blocks. This allows a unified
approach to security since all objects interface the same way to the security routines.
You can use System i Navigator to manage authorization on objects. Expand the File
Systems branch of your server, click Integrated File System, right-click any object, and
select Permissions.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

28-29
Instructor Guide
Permissions: Basic
IBM i
Figure 28-13. Permissions: Basic
AS248.1
Notes:
The columns visible under the Authorities view selection of Basic are:
Use: Allows access to the object attributes and use of the object. The public can view,
but not change, the objects.
Change: Allows the contents of the object (with some exceptions) to be changed.
All: Allows all operations on the object except those that are limited to the owner. The
user or group can control the existence of the object, specify the security for the object,
change the object, and perform basic functions on the object. The user or group can
also change ownership of the object.
Exclude: All operations on the object are prohibited. Users and groups with this
permission setting to an object are not allowed to access or perform any operation on it.
The public is not allowed to use the object.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details An authority is the permission to access an object. The object owner and the
security officer (or other *ALLOBJ users) can grant or revoke authority to an object with the
Grant Object Authority (GRTOBJAUT) and Revoke Object Authority (RVKOBJAUT)
commands. It is important to understand the difference between the authority to work with
an object and the authority to access the data in the object. A user can be granted the
authority to move, rename, save, or delete the object without having access to the data
stored in the object. Similarly, a user can have full access (read, write, update, delete, and
execute) to the data in the object without having the authority to manipulate the entire
object.

28-31
Instructor Guide
Permissions: Details (1 of 2)
IBM i
Figure 28-14. Permissions: Details (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
Permissions include all types of access a user has to an object.
The system uses the following order to check for a users authorization to an object:
The authority of an individual profile to access the object.
The authority of an individual profile to access an objects authorization list.
The authority of a group profile to access the object.
Public authority to access either the object or the authorization list of the object.
The system stops checking once proper authority is found.
The users who make up the public depends on the object in question. For a given object,
the public consists of all users who have no private authority to that object.
Object permissions (from column Operational to column Reference, as listed below) define
what operations can be performed on the object as a whole. Your choices of which object
permissions to select vary, depending on whether you are defining authority for Qsys.lib,
Qdls object, or a different type of object.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Operational: Provides the permission to look at the description of an object and use the
object as determined by the data permission that the user or group has to use the
object.
Management: Provides the permission to specify the security for an object, to move or
rename the object, and add members to database files.
Existence: Provides the permission to control the existence of the object and
ownership. The user or group can delete the object, free storage of the object, perform
save and restore operations for the object, and transfer ownership of the object. If a
user or group has special save system permission, the user or group does not need
object existence permission.
Alter (used only for database files and SQL packages): Provides the permission
needed to alter the attributes of an object. With this permission on a database file, the
user or group is allowed to add and remove triggers, to add and remove referential and
unique constraints, and to change the attributes of the database file. With this
permission on an SQL package, the user or group is allowed to change the attributes of
that SQL package.
Reference (used only for database files): Provides the permission needed to reference
an object from another object such that operations on that object can be restricted by
the other object. If the user or group has this permission on a physical file, the user or
group can add referential constraints in which the physical file is the parent.

28-33
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Permissions: Details (2 of 2)
IBM i
Figure 28-15. Permissions: Details (2 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
Data permissions (from the Read to the Execute column, as listed below) define what
operations can be performed on the contents of the object. Your choices of which object
permissions to select vary, depending on whether you are defining authority for Qsys.lib,
Qdls object, or a different type of object.
Read: Provides the authority needed to get the contents of an entry in an object and
display the contents of the object, such as viewing records in a file.
Add: Provides the permission to add entries to an object, such as adding messages to
a message queue or adding records to a file.
Update: Provides the permission to change the entries in an object, such as changing
records in a file.
Delete: Provides the permission to remove entries form an object, such as removing
messages from a message queue or deleting records from a file.
Execute: Allows the user or group to run a program or procedure or to search a library
or directory.

28-35
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Permissions: Columns
IBM i
Figure 28-16. Permissions: Columns
AS248.1
Notes:
The Columns selection under the Authorities view drop-down list displays checkboxes
for permission values on columns within an SQL table or view. Each permission value is
checked based on the user's or group's permission. This option is only available for SQL
table and view objects that reside on a server running OS/400 Version 4 Release 2 or later.
Making changes to Columns permissions can cause related changes to appear in the
Basic and Details views. For example, granting a permission to a column for which the user
does not have permission at the object level will cause the object level permission to be
granted. The change is immediately reflected in the Basic and Details views. Likewise,
changes made in the Basic and Details views can cause changes in the Columns
permissions that are displayed.
Current permissions are indicated by a check mark in the checkboxes. The Name column
displays a list of authorized users and groups.

28-37
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
New Authorization List

IBM i
Figure 28-17. New Authorization List
AS248.1
Notes:
You can use the System i Navigator to create a new authorization list. Expand the Security
branch of your server, right-click Authorization Lists, and select New Authorization List.

28-39
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
New Group profile

IBM i
Figure 28-18. New Group profile
AS248.1
Notes:
A user can be a member of a group. A group gives the same authority to all its members. A
group usually consists of people who work in the same department, have similar jobs, and
who need to use the same applications in the same way.
To create a new group profile, right-click Groups under the Users and Groups branch of
your server, and select New Group.
You can specify the groups name, description, and the users included in the group. From
this dialog, you can continue specifying information about the groups security and network
options.

28-41
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Exercise
IBM i
Exercise - System security using System i Navigator

AS248.1
Notes:

28-43
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or False: A user can change their password using

System i Navigator.
2. Which of the following system privileges are automatically
assigned to a system operator?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Auditing and Job control

Job control and Save/Restore
Save / restore and Security administration
Security administration and Auditing

display who is authorized to work with an object.
AS248.1
Notes:

28-45
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

System i Navigator.
The answer is True.

a.
b.
c.
d.

Job control and Save / restore
The answer is Job control and Save / restore.

3. True or False: System i Navigator does not allow you to display who
is authorized to work with an object.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

AS248.1
Notes:

28-47
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 29. System security using Systems Director

Navigator for IBM i
Estimated time
00:20

This unit shows you how to navigate the system using Systems
Director Navigator for IBM i to work with security on the system.



Accountability:
Exercise
Unit 29. System security using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i

29-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
In this unit, students learn about security concepts and terminology; then, in the exercise,
they see how security is implemented on the system.

29-3
Instructor Guide
Change Password
IBM i
Figure 29-2. Change Password
AS248.1
Notes:
To change your password when using Systems Director Navigator for IBM, i perform the
following:
1. Open a browser tab, and start a connection to your system.
2. Expand IBM i Management.
3. Click the System task.
4. Click the Change Password link.
This will present the tab captured in the lower left corner of this visual. Fill in the parameters
as needed, scroll down, and click OK.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

29-5
Instructor Guide

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:
To display the properties for a users profile when using Systems Director Navigator for IBM
i, perform the following:
3. Click the Users and Groups task.
4. Click the Users link. This will present the tab captured in the lower left on this visual.
5. Locate the user profile you want to display, and click the arrow.
6. Click Properties to see the screen capture on the next page.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

29-7
Instructor Guide

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:
Click Capabilities on the Properties tab for the selected user to open the Capabilities tab
for that user (screen capture seen on the next page).

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

29-9
Instructor Guide
Capabilities: Privilege class

IBM i
Figure 29-5. Capabilities: Privilege class
AS248.1
Notes:
Under the Privileges tab on the Capabilities window, one of the privilege classes can be
selected from a drop-down list.
Each privilege class has a default set of system privileges. The authorities specified under
System privileges override the default privileges for this user or group. When you are
working with a group, the privileges specified apply to all users who are members of the
group.
Options for the Privilege class field and their associated privileges are:
User

above.
Programmer

above.
System operator
The user has save/restore and job control on systems at

security level 30 and above.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
The user has security administration on systems at security

level 30 and above.
Security officer
The users default privileges are all object access, save/restore,

auditing control, security administration, system configuration,
system service access, job control, and spool control.
System privileges are described in more detail on the next page.

29-11
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Capabilities: System privileges

IBM i
Figure 29-6. Capabilities: System privileges
AS248.1
Notes:
Privileges are required to perform certain functions on the system. The privileges are:
All object access
Auditing control
The user has authority to perform auditing functions. This

authority is granted to users who turn auditing on or off for the
system and control the level of auditing on an object or user.
Job control

authority to start writers and to stop active subsystems. This
authority is usually granted to users who operate the system.
Save/restore
all objects on the system, whether the user has authority to use

29-13
Instructor Guide
the object. This authority is usually granted to users who

operate the system.
Spool control
The user has the authority to change system I/O configurations.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

29-15
Instructor Guide
Capabilities: Password
IBM i
Figure 29-7. Capabilities: Password
AS248.1
Notes:
The second tab for Capabilities shows the parameters in the user profile that relate to
Password. Notice the values that can be set for a user.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

29-17
Instructor Guide

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:
To display the objects that are owned by a user, perform the following:
1. Click the arrow for the user.
2. Select User Objects.
3. Select Owned Objects.
4. Choose which types of objects you want to display.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

29-19
Instructor Guide

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:
The Users tab is displayed as a result of performing the steps detailed on the previous
page in the student guide.
This tab displays the objects that are owned by a user.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

29-21
Instructor Guide
System Values
IBM i
Figure 29-10. System Values
AS248.1
Notes:
To work with system values, perform the following:
1. Click the Configuration and Service task.
2. Click System Values task to display the System Values categories.
3. Click the arrow for Password category and select Properties to see the tabs displayed
on the next page in the guide.
Note that System Director Navigator for IBM i will show the system values the same as on
the green screen.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

29-23
Instructor Guide
Password System Values

IBM i
Figure 29-11. Password System Values
AS248.1
Notes:
Notice all the system values that can be set.
In this example, we can see the system values that can be set using the Validation 2 and
the Expiration tabs that affect password properties.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

29-25
Instructor Guide
Authorizing objects: Permissions

IBM i
Figure 29-12. Authorizing objects: Permissions
AS248.1
Notes:
Authorizing objects is a third way to control security. Since all IBM i data structures (system
and user) are objects, the security system is primarily concerned with protecting objects. All
objects have some invisible common structures in their control blocks. This allows a unified
approach to security since all objects interface the same way to the security routines.
You can use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to manage authorization on objects.
To see the windows captured in the visual, perform the following:
1. Click the File Systems task.
2. Click Integrated File Systems.
3. Click the arrow for QSYS.LIB, and then click Open.
4. Locate the library where your object is stored, click the arrow, and select Open.
5. Locate the object of interest, and select Permissions.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

29-27
Instructor Guide
Permissions: Basic
IBM i
Figure 29-13. Permissions: Basic
AS248.1
Notes:
The column visible under the Authorities view selection of Basic are:
Use: Allows access to the object attributes and use of the object. The public can view,
but not change, the objects.
Change: Allows the contents of the object (with some exceptions) to be changed.
All: Allows all operations on the object except those that are limited to the owner. The
user or group can control the existence of the object, specify the security for the object,
change the object, and perform basic functions on the object. The user or group can
also change ownership of the object.
Exclude: All operations on the object are prohibited. Users and groups with this
permission setting to an object are not allowed to access or perform any operation on it.
The public is not allowed to use the objects.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details An authority is the permission to access an object.
The object owner and the security officer (or other *ALLOBJ users) can grant or revoke
authority to an object with the Grant Object Authority (GRTOBJAUT) and Revoke Object
Authority (RVKOBJAUT) commands.
It is important to understand the difference between the authority to work with an object and
the authority to access the data in the object.
A user can be granted the authority to move, rename, save, or delete the object without
having access to the data stored in the object.
Similarly, a user can have full access (read, write, update, delete, and execute) to the
data in the object without having the authority to manipulate the entire object.

29-29
Instructor Guide
Permissions: Details
IBM i
Figure 29-14. Permissions: Details
AS248.1
Notes:
Permissions include all types of access a user has to an object.
The system uses the following order to check for a users authorization to an object:
The authority of an individual profile to access the object.
The authority of an individual profile to access an objects authorization list.
The authority of a group profile to access the object.
Public authority to access either the object or the authorization list of the object.
The system stops checking once proper authority is found.
The users who make up the public depends on the object in question. For a given object,
the public consists of all users who have no private authority to that object.
Object permissions (as listed below) define what operations can be performed on the
object as a whole. Your choices of which object permissions to select vary, depending on
whether you are defining authority for Qsys.lib, Qdls object, or a different type of object.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Operational: Provides the permission to look at the description of an object and use the
object as determined by the data permission that the user or group has to use the
object.
Management: Provides the permission to specify the security for an object, to move or
rename the object, and add members to database files.
Existence: Provides the permission to control the existence of the object and
ownership. The user or group can delete the object, free storage of the object, perform
save and restore operations for the object, and transfer ownership of the object. If a
user or group has special save system permission, the user or group does not need
object existence permission.
Alter (used only for database files and SQL packages): Provides the permission
needed to alter the attributes of an object. With this permission on a database file, the
user or group is allowed to add and remove triggers, to add and remove referential and
unique constraints, and to change the attributes of the database file. With this
permission on an SQL package, the user or group is allowed to change the attributes of
that SQL package.
Reference (used only for database files): Provides the permission needed to
reference an object from another object such that operations on that object can be
restricted by the other object. If the user or group has this permission on a physical file,
the user or group can add referential constraints in which the physical file is the parent.
Read: Provides the authority needed to get the contents of an entry in an object and
display the contents of the object, such as viewing records in a file.
Add: Provides the permission to add entries to an object, such as adding messages to
a message queue or adding records to a file.
Update: Provides the permission to change the entries in an object, such as changing
records in a file.
Delete: Provides the permission to remove entries form an object, such as removing
messages from a message queue or deleting records from a file.
Execute: Allows the user or group to run a program or procedure or to search a library
or directory.

29-31
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Permissions: Columns
IBM i
Figure 29-15. Permissions: Columns
AS248.1
Notes:
The Columns selection under the Authorities view drop-down list displays checkboxes
for permission values on columns within an SQL table or view. Each permission value is
checked based on the user's or group's permission. This option is only available for SQL
table and view objects that reside on a System i server.
Making changes to Columns permissions can cause related changes to appear in the
Basic and Details views. For example, granting a permission to a column for which the user
does not have permission at the object level will cause the object level permission to be
granted. The change is immediately reflected in the Basic and Details views. Likewise,
changes made in the Basic and Details views can cause changes in the Columns
permissions that are displayed.
Current permissions are indicated by a check mark in the checkboxes. The Name column
displays a list of authorized users and groups.

29-33
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Permissions
IBM i
Figure 29-16. Permissions
AS248.1
Notes:
Change Object Permissions can be reached from Security menu.

29-35
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
New Authorization List

IBM i
Figure 29-17. New Authorization List
AS248.1
Notes:
You can use the Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to work with existing or create a new
authorization list.
To create a new authorization list, perform the following:
1. Click the Security task.
2. Click Authorization Lists.
3. Click the down arrow for Select Action, select New, and then select Authorization
List.
4. Click Go to see the tab in the lower left.

29-37
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Authorization List
IBM i
Figure 29-18. Authorization List
AS248.1
Notes:
After you create an authorization list:
You can change or see permissions
You can see secured which objects are secured, by type of object:
- Objects in libraries
- Objects in folders
- Objects in directories

29-39
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
New Group profile (1 of 2)

IBM i
Figure 29-19. New Group profile (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
A user can be a member of a group. A group gives the same authority to all its members. A
group usually consists of people who work in the same department, have similar jobs, and
who need to use the same applications in the same way.
To create a new group profile, perform the following:
1. Click User and Groups task.
2. Click Groups link.
3. Click the down arrow for Select Action, select New Group, and then click Go.
You can specify the groups name, description, and the users included in the group. From
this dialog, you can continue specifying information about the groups security and network
options.

29-41
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
New Group profile (2 of 2)

IBM i
Figure 29-20. New Group profile (2 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
Notes:
On the Group Properties page, you will see:
The user profiles that belongs to the group.
Click Capabilities to see the Privileges screen which will show privileges for the group.

29-43
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Exercise
IBM i
Exercise: System security using

AS248.1
Notes:

29-45
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i

display all of the objects owned by a user.
2. Under which of the following tasks do you find the link to
change your password in Systems Director Navigator?
a.
b.
c.
d.
System
Work Management
Security
Users and Groups
3. Which of the following is not one of the authority views you

can display for an object?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Basic
Details
Columns
Location
AS248.1
Notes:

29-47
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

The answer is True.

a. System
b. Work Management
c. Security
d. Users and Groups

a. Basic
b. Details
c. Columns
d. Location
The answer is Location.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

AS248.1
Notes:

29-49
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 30. System configuration overview

Estimated time
00:10

Many different devices can be attached to the Power i, and you, the
system operator, must manage them. You need to be able to
determine when and if there is a problem and how to manage the
devices should a problem arise. In this unit, we will discuss concepts
of connecting different devices to the system.

At the end of this topic, you should be able to:
Discuss what a typical configuration might look like

Discuss the concepts of how twinax devices are connected
Discuss how PCs can be connected
Discuss the different types of consoles that are supported

Accountability:

30-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

AS248.1
Notes:
How does the system know when you have attached another device?
To what degree can the system sense problems with devices?
To answer these questions, we look at device monitoring and discuss what you should do
to understand and print your hardware configuration.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Discuss the objectives and explain to the students that this topic should make
them more comfortable with device menus and commands.
Remind the students what a configuration is: the physical and logical arrangement of
devices and programs that make up a data processing system. In this unit, we focus on the
hardware configuration.

30-3
Instructor Guide
Sample configuration
IBM i
SDLC
communication
line
Power i
(Montreal)
Workstation
controller
Console
LAN adapter
Order entry
Token ring
Tape unit
CD-ROM unit
Shipping and
receiving
Modem
Display
Controller
(Paris)
Display
Display
Display
Display
Accounting
Display
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Figure 30-2. Sample configuration
AS248.1
Notes:
There are several ways to attach devices.
Locally attached devices: CD-ROM, tape drives, workstation controllers
Local area network (LAN) attached devices: Token ring and Ethernet adapters
Remotely attached devices: Remote workstation controllers
A description of each local and remote workstation (a display or a printer) must be given to
the system.
Tape drives, CD-ROM drives, and controllers (local and remote) must also be described to
the system.
Local workstations are attached by a cable, while remote workstations are attached by a
communication line.
Communication lines must also be described to the system.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Each communications line, local and remote controller, and device on the
system must be identified to IBM i. This is done by creating a description for each line,
controller, and device that is attached.
The difference between local and remote devices is that a local device is attached directly
by a cable. A remote device is attached by a communications (telephone) line. In the
illustration of a sample configuration on this visual, both local and remote devices are
attached to the system.

30-5
Instructor Guide
Question
IBM i
What types of devices are connected to your Power i?
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
tool to list what types of devices are connected to their Power i.
three students to list what types of devices are connected to their Power i.
Possible Answers:
HVAC Equipment
ATM Machines
Point of Sale Equipment
Storage Solutions

30-7
Instructor Guide
Locally attached:
CD-ROM, tape drives, and controllers
IBM i
Locally attached devices are usually auto-configured, but

manual configuration is possible.
When the system takes care of the configuration, a default
naming convention is applied.
Figure 30-4. Locally attached: CD-ROM, tape drives, and controllers
AS248.1
Notes:
The Power i ships with automatic configuration enabled. This means that your system
recognizes and automatically creates the device descriptions for your CD-ROM and tape
controllers or drives using default values.
The naming convention for these devices depends upon your system's default naming
convention. The IBM-shipped default naming convention for these devices would be
OPT01, TAP01, and TAPCTL01, respectively.
These devices can be manually configured (although this is not recommended).
To monitor and manage these devices:
1. From the main menu, select option 3 (General System Tasks).
2. Select option 8 (Device Operations).
3. Choose the type of device you want to work with: Tape (option 4) or optical (option 7).

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

30-9
Instructor Guide
Locally attached: Workstation controller

(twinaxial)
IBM i
Local workstations and printers

Twinax
workstation
controller
DSP01 Switch
setting = 0
Twinax cable
attached
workstations
and printers
DSP02
Switch
setting = 1
PRT01
Switch
setting = 2
Figure 30-5. Locally attached: Workstation controller (twinaxial)
AS248.1
Notes:
One way to attach local workstations (both display stations and printers) is by a twinaxial
cable. A twinaxial cable consists of two twisted wires inside a shield that is used in the 5250
device family. This cable connects each device to a twinaxial workstation controller, an I/O
controller card in the Power i, or on expansion unit that directly connects local workstations
to the system.
A twinaxial cable can be attached directly to a twinaxial workstation controller. A display
station function called cable through can also be used. With cable through, multiple
workstations can be attached to one cable path. Workstation devices can be cabled
through with up to seven devices on one line (or port) on a controller. Each device on a port
must have a unique switch setting (address) to identify its location.
The twinaxial workstation controller can, depending on the system model, be two ports on
the back of the system unit, a two-port cable that attaches to the back of the system unit, or
an eight-port attachment that attaches to the back of the system unit (as shown on this
visual).

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

30-11
Instructor Guide
LAN attached
IBM i
Local workstations and printers

Power i
Communication controller
Ethernet adapter
or
Token ring adapter
LAN
Ethernet adapter
or
Token ring adapter
Printer
Personal computer
Figure 30-6. LAN attached
AS248.1
Notes:
Personal computers can be attached by an LAN.
This LAN attachment can consist either of stand-alone token ring/Ethernet adapters or of
an Integrated PC Server (IPCS).

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Personal computers can be attached to the system through an LAN connection.
An LAN connection allows information to be transferred among devices located on the
same premises.
The physical connections can be:
IBM Cabling System
Shielded twisted-pair
Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI)
Wireless

30-13
Instructor Guide
Remotely attached: Remote workstation

controllers
IBM i
Remote workstations and printers

Power i
SDLC communication line

RMTLIN01
Controller
RMTCTL01
0
Terminal multiconnector,
midrange hub, or
express hub
RMTDSP01
Display or printer
Figure 30-7. Remotely attached: Remote workstation controllers
AS248.1
Notes:
A communications line connects the Power i to the remote controller in another location.
From that controller, cables are used to attach the workstation displays and printers.
The number of workstations that can be attached to a remote controller depends on the
type of controller used.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

30-15
Instructor Guide
Personal systems attachment summary

IBM i
Remote
Remote
Remote
controller
LAN
Local
Ethernet
Figure 30-8. Personal systems attachment summary
AS248.1
Notes:
Personal systems can connect locally through twinaxial cable with a twinax adapter card
installed. They can also be a part of an Ethernet LAN with an appropriate LAN adapter card
installed.
Personal systems can be connected remotely through a remote workstation controller.
Single systems can connect with a Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) adapter card
and can coexist on the same line with other devices that use the SDLC protocol. Personal
systems can also communicate with the Power i system by means of an asynchronous
communication.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details A summary of personal systems connectivity is appropriate.

30-17
Instructor Guide
Power i consoles
IBM i
The different console connections are:

Twinaxial console
Operations console
Hardware Management Console (HMC)
Systems Director Management Console (SDMC)
Figure 30-9. Power i consoles
AS248.1
Notes:
Use either an operations console, a twinaxial console, or a Hardware Management
Console (HMC) as system consoles to access and administer your server. An operations
console is available with the Windows client, Power i Access for Windows.
Twinaxial console
The twinaxial console uses a basic command-line interface to access and manage your
server, and it does not require the use of a personal computer to act as a console. You
access the server through a console screen, keyboard, and twinaxial cables.
Operations console
An operations console allows you to use your PC to access and control the console and
control panel locally and remotely. To access the server, a PC or local console must be
configured. A local console configuration can be any of the following: a local console
directly attached to the server, a local console directly attached to the server with
remote access allowed, a local console on a network, or a local console through dial-up
support. Once you configure a local console directly attached to the server with remote

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
access allowed, you can establish connections from remote PCs or a remote console
through the local console.
HMC
HMC supports configuration and management of Power i servers. You can manage
logical partitions, manage capacity on demand, power systems on and off, delete and
report changes in hardware, and more.
The HMC is used to manage Power5 systems and below.
SDMC
SDMC supports configuration and management of Power i servers. You can manage
logical partitions, manage capacity on demand, power systems on and off, delete and
report changes in hardware, and more.
The HMC is used to manage Power6 and Power7 systems. It will not manage that are
below this level.

30-19
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or False: The system ships with automatic configuration

turned off.
2. Which of the following is not considered locally attached
hardware?
a.
b.
c.
d.
CD-ROM
Tape systems
Controllers
LAN adapters
3. Which of the following is not a supported console type?

a.
b.
c.
d.
Twinax console
Operations console
HMC
Wireless console
AS248.1
Notes:

30-21
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

turned off.

hardware?
a. CD-ROM
b. Tape systems
c. Controllers
d. LAN adapters
The answer is LAN adapters.

a. Twinax console
b. Operations console
c. HMC
d. Wireless console
The answer is Wireless console.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

AS248.1
Notes:

30-23
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 31. Configuration using 5250 emulation

Estimated time
00:20

Many different devices can be attached to the Power i, and you, the
system operator, must manage them. This unit will discuss the
commands and menus used to manage the devices connected to your
system.

Use the appropriate command to work with system control system
values
Use the appropriate command to display the default system printer
Discuss how devices are named on your system and which system
value controls this function
Use the appropriate command to work with hardware resources
Describe the options available to mange devices connected to your
system
Discuss what service tools are and how these are accessed

Accountability:

31-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Use the appropriate command to work with system control
system values
Use the appropriate command to display the default system
printer
Discuss how devices are named on your system and which
system value controls this function
Use the appropriate command to work with hardware
resources
Describe the options available to mange devices connected to
your system
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

31-3
Instructor Guide
System control system values

IBM i
Figure 31-2. System control system values
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the Work with System Values command, and specify the System control category.
Specifically, the command to use is:
WRKSYSVAL *SYSCTL
Entering this command will show the system control system values that are shown in the
screen captured in the lower right of this visual.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

31-5
Instructor Guide
Printer device system value

IBM i
Figure 31-3. Printer device system value
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the Work with System Values command and specify the printer device system value to
see the screen captured in the lower right of this visual. Specifically, the command to enter
is:
WRKSYSVAL QPRTDEV
This system value specifies the default printer for the system. If the specified device
description exists, it must be a printer device description.
Note
You must have *ALLOBJ and *SECADM special authorities to change this system value.
A change to this system value takes effect for new jobs started in the system. The shipped
value is PRT01.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

31-7
Instructor Guide
Creating device description automatically

IBM i
Enable
System value - QAUTOCFG
0=OFF
1=ON
Device name
System value - QDEVNAMING
*NORMAL
*S36
*DEVADR
Default printer
System value - QPRTDEV
PRT01 or printer name
Figure 31-4. Creating device description automatically
AS248.1
Notes:
Each device attached to the Power is described to the system through a device description.
These descriptions contain a name that you can use to refer to each device and a
description of the device for the system. Device descriptions for locally attached devices
(displays, printers, workstation controllers, tapes, and optical drives) can be created
automatically by IBM i or manually by using IBM i commands. Device descriptions for
remote devices must be created manually by using IBM i commands. If you have PC
devices (display stations and printers) using the workstation function attached to your
system, some of the device descriptions are automatically created, and some must be
created manually. Therefore, IBM i commands are available.
There are several system values that affect the creation of device descriptions. Your Power
i is shipped with the system value QAUTOCFG set to one. The system automatically
creates and names local controller and device descriptions using generic settings. You can
display or change this system value with the WRKSYSVAL command or through the
interface of System i Navigator. You can also make changes to this setting during an
attended IPL. The Set Major System Options display allows you to enable or disable
automatic configuration.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
When a local controller or device is automatically configured, IBM i determines the format
of the name based on the contents of the QDEVNAMING system value. The following is an
explanation of the possible values for this system value:
*NORMAL (default)
Uses a naming convention unique to the Power i, for example, DSP01 for a display,
PRT01 for a printer, CTL01 for a controller, TAP01 for a tape drive, OPT1 for a
CD-ROM, and TAPCTL01 for a tape controller.
*S36
Uses a naming convention similar to that in System/36, for example, W1 for a display,
P1 for a printer, CTL01 for a controller, T1 for a tape drive, OPT01 for a CD-ROM, and
TAPCTL01 for a tape controller.
*DEVADR
Uses a naming convention based on the device address. It uses the same name as the
*NORMAL setting but appends the device address to the name. The address reflects
the controller the device is attached to, the port on that controller, and the address of
the device. For example, DSP010203 is a display on CTL01, using port 02, with device
address 03.

31-9
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Creating device description manually

IBM i
To manually create device descriptions, the following

commands are the most important:
CRTDEVDSP
CRTDEVPRT
CRTDEVTAP
CRTDEVOPT
Figure 31-5. Creating device description manually
AS248.1
Notes:
Following are some of the more frequently used commands used to configure devices
manually:
Create Device Description (Display): CRTDEVDSP
Create Device Description (Printer): CRTDEVPRT
Create Device Description (Tape): CRTDEVTAP
Create Device Description (CD-ROM): CRTDEVOPT
There are other commands you can use to configure devices. These are not covered in this
course.

31-11
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details If the students want (or need, as is the case for remote devices) to create their
own device descriptions, some of the more frequently used commands are listed on this
visual.
Following are other Create Device Description commands that are less frequently used:
Create Device Desc (Advanced Program-to-Program Communication - APPC):
CRTDEVAPPC
Create Device Desc (Asynchronous - ASYNC): CRTDEVASC
Create Device Desc (Binary Synchronous Communication - BSC): CRTDEVBSC
Create Device Desc (Finance): CRTDEVFNC
Create Device Desc (SNA Host): CRTDEVHOST
Create Device Desc (Intra): CRTDEVINTR
Create Device Desc (Media Lib): CRTDEVMLB
Create Device Desc (Network): CRTDEVNET
Create Device Desc (Retail): CRTDEVRTL
Create Device Desc (SNPT): CRTDEVSNPT
Create Device Desc (SNA Upline Facility - SNUF): CRTDEVSNUF
Now that you know some of the devices that can be attached to the system, let us see how
you can determine whether there is a problem with a device.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Work with messages

IBM i
Figure 31-6. Work with messages
AS248.1
Notes:
The system operator message queue QSYSOPR alerts you to situations that need your
attention in relation to devices. The command to display the screen in the visual is:
DSPMSG QSYSOPR
When you receive a message in this message queue about a device, you can view the
appropriate status displays and take action.

31-13
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Display Messages: Assistance level

IBM i
Basic Assistance
Level
Intermediate Assistance
Level
Figure 31-7. Display Messages: Assistance level
AS248.1
Notes:
When you are on the Display Messages screen, you can use the F21 function key to toggle
between the basic and the intermediate assistance levels.
*BASIC - The Operational Assistant user interface is used.
This user interface separates messages into two categories: (1) messages needing a
reply and (2) messages not needing a reply. New messages are shown at the top of
each list.
*INTERMED - The system user interface is used.
The DSPMSG command online help information assumes the *INTERMED user
interface is shown. If the *BASIC user interface is shown, see the online help
information for the Work with Messages (WRKMSG) command.

31-15
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
perform an application share of 5250 emulation for the next four visuals covering the details
demo on your instructor PC of 5250 emulation for the next four visuals covering the details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Work with Hardware Resources

IBM i
Figure 31-8. Work with Hardware Resources
AS248.1
Notes:
The Work with Hardware Resources (WRKHDWRSC) command allows you to specify the
type of hardware resource with which you want to work.
The possible values for the required parameter are:
*CMN: The Work with Communication Resources display is shown.
*CRP: The Work with Cryptographic Resources display is shown.
*CSA: The Work with Coupled Adapter Resources display is shown.
*LAN: The Work with LAN Adapter Information display is shown.
*LWS: The Work with Local Work Station display is shown.
*STG: The Work with Storage Resources display is shown.
*PRC: The Work with Processor Resources display is shown.

31-17
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Work with Hardware Resources: Processors

IBM i
Figure 31-9. Work with Hardware Resources: Processors
AS248.1
Notes:
The Work with Hardware Resources (WRKHDWRSC) command allows you to add,
change, remove, or show information about resources on the system. Specifically, the
command used to display the screen capture in the lower right is:
WRKHDWRSC *PRC
The Work with Processor Resources display shows all processor and main storage cards
installed in the system as well as an entry for the processing unit itself and the main card
enclosure or system unit housing these cards.

31-19
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Managing devices
IBM i
Figure 31-10. Managing devices
AS248.1
Notes:
You can manage the devices on your system either from menus or the command line. The
easiest method is using the option off of the Device Operations menu.
From the Device Operations menu, you can manage all devices on your system. To access
the Device Operations menu, you can either select option 8 (Device operations) on the
General System Tasks menu or enter go device on a command line and press Enter.
From the Device Operations menu, you can manage:
Devices (option 1)
Displays only (option 2)
Printers only (option 3)
Tape units only (option 4)
Optical volumes, files, libraries, and devices only (option 7)

31-21
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
The command used to manage devices

IBM i
Figure 31-11. The command used to manage devices
AS248.1
Notes:
Selecting option 1 (Work with device status) on the Device Operations menu brings up the
Work with Configuration Status prompt display. If you leave *DEV in the Type field and the
defaults for the remaining parameters and press Enter, all system devices are displayed.
The Work with Configuration Status display shows the name of each device, its status
(ACTIVE, VARIED ON, VARIED OFF, and so forth) and the job (if there is one) associated
with the device.
There are a number of options available that work with devices from this display:
Make a device available (or vary it on) (option 1)
Make the device unavailable (or vary it off) (option 2)
Display the Work with Job menu, which allows you to perform job control functions,
such as canceling a job (option 5)
Work with the device description (option 8)
Show the mode status for the APPC device or mode (option 9)

31-23
Instructor Guide
Pressing F23 (More options) allows you to do the following:
Hold the communications device from transmitting or receiving data (option 3)

End the automatic error recovery feature for the device (option 4)
Release the communication device for transmitting and receiving data (option 6)
Resume automatic error recovery for a device (option 7)
Display the connection status of the network device (option 11)
Work with the active adapters on a token ring or distributed data interface (DDI) line
(option 12)
The Work with Configuration Status display can also be accessed with the Work with
Configuration Status (WRKCFGSTS) command. When you use this command, you need to
prompt for the type of device you want to work with. The type of devices you can work with
are:
*NWS
*NWI
*LIN
*CTL
*DEV
Network server description

Network interface description
Line description
Controller description
Device description

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Explain the values the students will see most often, which are:
ACTIVE
The device is in use.
ACTIVE/WRITER
The device is in use by a spool writer.
HELD
The device is being held.
SIGNON DISPLAY
The Power is performing sign-on processing or is displaying a

sign-on prompt on the display.
VARY OFF PENDING
The device is in the process of being varied off.
VARIED OFF
The device is varied off (not available for use).
VARY ON PENDING
The device is in the process of being varied on.
VARIED ON
The device is varied on (available for use).
The job field is blank for network interfaces, lines, controllers, and modes or if no job is
using the device.
You should also point out that there is a function key on the display (F14 - Display device
descriptions), which allows the device descriptions for all devices to be displayed. Even
though F14 does not appear on the function key line, it can be pressed at any time. To
display F14, press F24 (More keys).
Additional information You can discontinue the application share or live demo after
this visual.

31-25
Instructor Guide
Menu to manage communications

IBM i
- or 9. Communications
===> 9
GO CMNSTS
Communications
1. Communication status
===> 1
CMNSTS
Communications Status
System: I520DVL2

1. Work with line status
2. Work with controller status
3. Work with device status
4. Work with network interface status
70. Related commands
Figure 31-12. Menu to manage communications
AS248.1
Notes:
If your system communicates with remote systems or workstations, you can use the
Communications Status menu to monitor and manage communication lines, remote
controllers, and remote devices.
To display the Communications Status menu, you can enter either option 9 on the General
System Tasks menu and then option 1 on the Communications menu, or enter go
cmnsts on a command line.
From the Communications Status menu, you can monitor the following:
Communication lines (option 1)
Remote controllers (option 2)
Remote devices (option 3)

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

31-27
Instructor Guide
Command used to manage communications

IBM i
Figure 31-13. Command used to manage communications
AS248.1
Notes:
Using option 1 on the Communications Status menu displays an interim Work with
Configuration Status (WRKCFGSTS) prompt display. By pressing Enter on this display,
you can view the status of all communications lines on your system as well as the network
servers, network interfaces, controllers, and devices attached to those lines.
In order for you to vary a line off manually using the Vary Configuration (VRYCFG)
command, the vary off sequence must be:
1. Devices attached to each controller on the line
2. Each controller on the line
3. Finally, the line
To manually vary a line on, the reverse sequence must be followed.
If you use options 1 and 2 on the above display, all of these steps are automatically carried
out for you.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
The options on this display allow you to perform the same functions as discussed
previously with local devices.
From the Communications Status menu, you can choose to work with controller or device
status. The management options on those Work with Configuration Status displays are the
same as those on the one on this visual.

31-29
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Printing device addresses

IBM i
Device addresses for CTL01

Switch
setting
Port 0
Port 1
0
DSP01
*DSP
3487 HC
DSP03
*DSP
3476 EA
1
DSP02
*DSP
3487 HC
DSP04
*DSP
3487 HC
6
PRT01
*PRT
*IPDS 0
PRT02
*PRT
4234 2
DSP05
*DSP
3487 HC
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
DSP06
*DSP
3487 HC
DSP07
*DSP
3487 HC
PRT03
*PRT
4234 2
DSP08
*DSP
3487 HC
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
PRTDEVADR
Figure 31-14. Printing device addresses
AS248.1
Notes:
As your system usage grows, you might have to add devices. To determine which controller
has ports with available addresses, use the Print Device Addresses (PRTDEVADR)
command.
This command must be run once for each local and remote controller on your system. This
command prints a chart like the one shown on the visual. (The chart shown on the visual is
for a local controller.) For each device attached to the workstation controller, named in the
CTLD parameter of the PRTDEVADR command, the chart shows the device name, its port
and switch setting, its type and model number, its shared session number (valid only if the
device type is 3486 or 3487), and whether the device is a display station or a printer.
It is a good idea to keep a current copy of this chart for each of your system's local and
remote controllers in a control book.
IBM i also provides a way to print the workstation addresses for all local controllers at one
time. Here are the steps to follow.
1. Enter go assist. The Operational Assistant menu appears.

31-31
Instructor Guide
2. Enter option 10 - Manage your system, users, and devices. The Manage Your System,
Users and Devices menu appears.
3. Enter option 20 - Device status tasks. The Device Status Tasks menu appears.
4. Enter option 10 - Print local device addresses. The device addresses are printed, and a
message appears on the message line indicating that the device addresses have been
printed.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

31-33
Instructor Guide
Start System Service Tools

IBM i
STRSST
System Service Tools (SST)
1 . Start a service tool

Start a Service Tool
Selection
1
7. Hardware service manager

Hardware Service Manager
Selection
7
2 . Logical hardware resources (buses, IOPs, controllers, ...)

Selection
Logical Hardware Resources
2
1. System bus resources
2. Processor resources
3. Main storage resources
4. High-speed link resources
Figure 31-15. Start System Service Tools
AS248.1
Notes:
Service tools are used to configure, manage, and service models 5xx, models 8xx, and
earlier, or the 8xx logical partitions (LPAR). To manage LPARs on models other than 8xx,
you must use the HMC.
Service tools can be accessed from dedicated service tools (DST) or system service tools
(SST). Service tools user IDs are required if you want to access DST, SST, and use the
System i Navigator functions for LPAR management and disk unit management.
Service tools user IDs have been referred to as DST user profiles, DST user IDs, service
tools user profiles, or a variation of these names.
Warning
Service tools should be used only under the direction of a service representative. Incorrect
use of this service tool can damage both the configuration of your system and the user data
in the system.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
The Start System Service Tools (STRSST) command can be used to determine all of the
hardware that exists on the system. This command allows you to display the hardware
located in the system bus, in the processor, or in main storage.

31-35
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The Start System Services Tools topic is included because students should be
familiar with it if an IBM service representative asks them to use it. This topic might be
difficult for beginning system operators to understand. Depending on your students
background, you might want to briefly cover this topic.
Information about all hardware installed on the system can be displayed by using the Start
System Service Tools (STRSST) command. Take the students through the steps on the
visual to display the Logical Hardware Resources menu.
Depending on how security is implemented on your system, you might not be able to see
the STRSST command because it allows hardware information to be added, changed, and
deleted.
Play.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. Which system value is used to turn on the auto configuration of local

hardware?
a.
b.
c.
d.
QSECURITY
QPRTDEV
QAUTOCFG
*SYSCTL
2. Which system value is used to display the name of the system printer?
a.
b.
c.
d.
QSECURITY
QPRTDEV
QAUTOCFG
*SYSCTL
3. Which command is used to display the status of your configuration?

a.
b.
c.
d.
WRKSYSSTS
WRKDSKSTS
WRKCFGSTS
WRKHDWSTS
AS248.1
Notes:

31-37
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

hardware?
a. QSECURITY
b. QPRTDEV
c. QAUTOCFG
d. *SYSCTL
The answer is QAUTOCFG.
a. QSECURITY
b. QPRTDEV
c. QAUTOCFG
d. *SYSCTL
The answer is QPRTDEV.

a. WRKSYSSTS
b. WRKDSKSTS
c. WRKCFGSTS
d. WRKHDWSTS
The answer is WRKCFGSTS.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

Use the appropriate command to work with system control
system values
Use the appropriate command to display the default system
printer
Discuss how devices are named on your system and which
system value controls this function
Use the appropriate command to work with hardware
resources
Describe the options available to mange devices connected to
your system
AS248.1
Notes:

31-39
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 32. Configuration using System i Navigator

Estimated time
00:15

This unit will discuss how to use this interface to manage and monitor
the system and attached devices.

Display system values when using this interface
Display the system operator messages
Monitor and display details about the hardware connected to this
system
Discuss some of the capabilities available when you start SST from
this interface

Accountability:
Exercise

32-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Monitor and display details about the hardware connected to
this system
Discuss some of the capabilities available when you start SST
from this interface
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
perform an application share of System i Navigator for the next nine visuals covering the
demo on your instructor PC of System i Navigator for the next nine visuals covering the

32-3
Instructor Guide
System Values: Devices

IBM i
Figure 32-2. System Values: Devices
AS248.1
Notes:
To work with system values using System i Navigator, perform the following:
Expand Configuration and Service, click System Values, right-click a category, and
select Properties.
In the Devices System Values dialog, specify the following options related to automatic
configuration:
Local controllers and devices specifies whether devices and controllers added to the
system are configured automatically.
Device naming convention specifies the naming convention that is used when the
system automatically creates device descriptions.
Remote controllers and devices specifies whether remote controllers and devices
connected to the system are configured automatically.
Pass-through devices and TELNET specifies the number of virtual devices to
automatically configure.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

32-5
Instructor Guide
System Values: Printing

IBM i
Figure 32-3. System Values: Printing
AS248.1
Notes:
To display what printer is set as the system default printer, perform the following:
Expand Configuration and Service, click System Values, right-click the Printing
category, and select Properties.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

32-7
Instructor Guide
System operator message queue (1 of 4)

IBM i
Figure 32-4. System operator message queue (1 of 4)
AS248.1
Notes:
To see system operator messages while using System i Navigator, perform the following:
Expand Basic Operations, right-click Messages, and then click Customize this View
> Include.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

32-9
Instructor Guide

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:
Select System operator in the Messages for drop-down menu on the Messages-Include
dialog.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

32-11
Instructor Guide

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:
The heading in the right pane now indicates that these are messages for the system
operator.
To view the details of a message, right-click the message and select Properties.
This displays the message details. On this page we see the information on the General
tab. The next page will display the Details tab.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

32-13
Instructor Guide

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:
On this page, we see the Details tab selected.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

32-15
Instructor Guide
Monitoring hardware status (1 of 2)

IBM i
Figure 32-8. Monitoring hardware status (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
To monitor the status of your system hardware, select Configuration and Service >
Hardware.
Hardware can be viewed by category, such as All Hardware or Workstation Resources.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

32-17
Instructor Guide
Monitoring hardware status (2 of 2)

IBM i
Figure 32-9. Monitoring hardware status (2 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
Selecting All Hardware displays the list of all system hardware resources in the right pane.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

32-19
Instructor Guide
Hardware resource properties

IBM i
Figure 32-10. Hardware resource properties
AS248.1
Notes:
Right-click the hardware resource name you want, and select Properties.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose

32-21
Instructor Guide
Start SST
IBM i
Figure 32-11. Start SST
AS248.1
Notes:
When you click or select Disk Units, you are prompted with the sign on screen for service
tools. You must enter a service tools (DST or SST) user ID to see the information on the
next page.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

32-23
Instructor Guide
SST: Display disk and graphical view

IBM i
Figure 32-12. SST: Display disk and graphical view
AS248.1
Notes:
The graphical view window allows you to see where all the disk units on your system are
located. You can use the graphical view to perform any function that you can perform
through System i Navigator Disk Units list view with the added benefit of being able to see
a visual representation. You can right-click any object in the table, such as disk units, disk
pools, parity sets, or frames, and receive the same options that you would get in the main
window.
You can choose how to view the hardware in the graphical view window. For example:
You can select to view by disk pools, and then select a disk pool in the list to display
only those frames that contain the disk units that make up the selected disk pool.
You can select Show all frames to see all frames and whether or not they contain disk
units in the selected disk pool.
You can also select Show device locations to associate disk unit names with the
device position where they are inserted.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
When you have selected the view you desire, you can also print it for your reference by
selecting File > Print.
You can right-click any highlighted blue disk unit in the graphical view and select from a list
of actions to perform on the disk unit just as you would through System i Navigator Disk
Units list view. For example:
You can select to start or stop compression on a disk unit, include the disk unit in a
parity set (or exclude it), or rename the disk unit.
If the disk unit has mirrored protection (that is, it is one of a mirrored pair), you can
suspend or resume mirroring on the disk unit.

32-25
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Exercise
IBM i
Use the information listed to perform the exercises
Exercise: Managing your system configuration

AS248.1
Notes:
Please refer to the Student Exercise Guide and perform the monitoring devices exercise.

32-27
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Introduce the exercise as one that familiarizes the students with some of the
menu options and displays used to monitor and control devices, controllers, and
communication lines.
Play.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. Which of the following is not one of the options available

when you click the All hardware branch in System i
Navigator?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Communication
LAN resources
Processor information
OS information
2. True or False: With System i Navigator you can access DST.

3. True or False: System i Navigator allows you to display the
type, model and serial number of the hardware resources
installed.
AS248.1
Notes:

32-29
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

Navigator?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Communication
LAN resources
OS information
The answer is OS information.

The answer is True.

installed.
The answer is True.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

Monitor and display details about the hardware connected to
this system
Discuss some of the capabilities available when you start SST
from this interface
AS248.1
Notes:

32-31
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 33. Configuration using Systems Director

Navigator for IBM i
Estimated time
00:10

This unit will discuss how to use this interface to manage and monitor
the system and attached devices.

Display the system operator messages using this interface
Discuss some of the capabilities available for disk configuration

Accountability:
Exercise
Unit 33. Configuration using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i

33-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Discuss some of the capabilities available for disk
configuration
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

33-3
Instructor Guide
System Values: Power control

IBM i
Figure 33-2. System Values: Power control
AS248.1
Notes:
To work with system values perform the following steps:
3. Click Configuration and Service task.
4. Click System Values link.
5. This will present the list of system value categories in the upper left window. This is not
the same list of system values you see on a 5250 emulation screen when using the
WRKSYSVAL command. This interface will show you categories of system values. For
example, the Power Control category contains all the system values for power control.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

33-5
Instructor Guide
System Values: Devices

IBM i
Figure 33-3. System Values: Devices
AS248.1
Notes:
From the System Values tab, right-click arrow for Devices, then click Properties.
This will show the Devices system values page. On first tab, you see Automatic
Configuration values, where you can specify the following:
Local controllers and devices specifies whether devices and controllers added to the
system are configured automatically.
Device naming convention specifies the naming convention used when the system
automatically creates device descriptions.
Remote controllers and devices specifies whether remote controllers and devices
connected to the system are configured automatically.
Pass-through devices and TELNET specifies the number of virtual devices to
automatically configure.
Maximum number of devices allows you set a limit for these type of devices.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
On the Recovery tab, you can specify parameters for action to taken when an error occurs
on these devices.

33-7
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
System Values: Printing

IBM i
Figure 33-4. System Values: Printing
AS248.1
Notes:
The Printing system values category allows you to set which printer device will be used as
the default printer.

33-9
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:
To see system operator messages, perform the following:
1. Click Basic Operations task.
2. Click Messages link.
3. Click the down arrow for Select Action and choose Include from the drop-down menu,
then click Go.
4. This will display the Messages -include window pictured in the lower right in the visual.
5. To define whos messages are to be viewed; click the Users button and click the down
arrow and choose System operator, then click OK to see the visual on the next page.

33-11
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:
Performing the action on the previous page will display the System Operator messages
tab.
To view the details for a specific message, right-click the message and select
Properties.
This displays the message details.
On the first page, you see the information on the General tab.
The next page will display the Details tab.

33-13
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Using SST functions

IBM i
Figure 33-7. Using SST functions
AS248.1
Notes:
IBM System Director Navigator does not have a link to manage hardware resources, but
some System Service Tools (SST) functions can be performed with this GUI.
1. Click Configuration and Services task.
2. Click Disk Units link.
Note
This will display options that are equivalent to performing the SST disk function from a
5250 emulation session. This option allows you to configure your disk units.
For this option to be active, the same user ID and password used to sign on to SST must
be used to sign on to Systems Director Navigator for IBM i.

33-15
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Exercise
IBM i
Exercise: System values using


AS248.1
Notes:

33-17
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Transition statement For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this
checkpoint visual, you should play file AS248-U33-checkpoint:
Play.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or False: The Local controller and devices system value

is used to specify whether devices and controllers are
configured automatically.
2. Which of the following can be configured with Systems
a.
b.
c.
d.
Processor
Memory
Disks units
LPAR
3. True or False: With IBM System Director Navigator for IBM i

you can manage all hardware resources in one place.
AS248.1
Notes:

33-19
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

The answer is True.

a.
b.
c.
d.
Processor
Memory
Disk units
LPAR
The answer is Disk units.


V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

Discuss some of the capabilities available for disk
configuration
AS248.1
Notes:

33-21
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 34. Save concepts

Estimated time
00:25

Offline storage of data is extremely important as a means of recovery
after a failure. There are several methods and commands you can use
to save the data so that you can restore it to your Power if the need
arises.
Tape is the primary medium used on the Power i to store your
company's information offline. For your backup process to be effective,
you need to understand how to prepare and use this medium.
In IBM i terminology, to save something means to make a copy of it
somewhere else, usually on tape. The original remains unchanged,
except that it now holds information that has been saved. The copy of
the object is in a format that is unique to the Power i and cannot be
directly restored to any other type of system.

Identify the different options available for save operations
List reasons for saving to tape
Explain the difference between labeled versus unlabeled tape and
the uses for these
Explain the purpose served by a save file
Explain the purpose served by virtual tape
List some of the advantages for using virtual tape

Accountability:

34-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Explain the difference between labeled versus unlabeled tape
and the uses for these
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details All systems require some means of saving data offline. Let us examine the IBM
i process of accomplishing this task and the different options available to save the data on
the system.

34-3
Instructor Guide
The save/restore facility

IBM i
This facility offers three major functions:
Save
Saving data
Restoring data
Keeping data history
Restore
Figure 34-2. The save/restore facility
AS248.1
Notes:
The functions of saving information to, and restoring it from, offline media are an integral
part of IBM i.
All save/restore commands and facilities are available on each Power i running IBM i.
When an object is saved, save information is updated in the object itself and saved with the
offline copy.
When an object is restored, restore information is updated in the object on the Power i.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

34-5
Instructor Guide
Information that can be saved and restored

IBM i
The following information can be saved and restored:

A single object in a library
A group of objects identified by a generic name
A group of objects identified by a generic name and an object type
One or more entire libraries
Office data (document library objects, documents, folders, mail,
calendars)
Objects in directories
Changed objects
System information (QSYS, configuration objects, security data, and
LIC)
All libraries other than the system library
All user data
Security data
Figure 34-3. Information that can be saved and restored
AS248.1
Notes:
Everything on a Power i system running IBM i can be saved.
This visual shows some of the information that can be saved.
IBM i provides a number of save commands that can be used to save the information.
Many of these commands are discussed in this topic.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

34-7
Instructor Guide
What you cannot save

IBM i
The following information cannot be saved:

The contents of queues (messages, jobs, and so forth)
Damaged objects
Objects in use for updates unless the SAVACT function is used
Figure 34-4. What you cannot save
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

34-9
Instructor Guide
What happens when an object is saved?

IBM i
Object name
Date and time of save
A9LAB *LIB
Owner name
Any public authority
The object itself
Sys i5 FORUM
Object type
Storage required
in the system
Text Description
Figure 34-5. What happens when an object is saved?
AS248.1
Notes:
When an object is saved, its entire description is saved:
The object name and type

The save date and time
The owner name
The storage required in the system
The security information
The description of the object

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

34-11
Instructor Guide
Save considerations
IBM i
A couple of issues need to be considered when saving.

The save information is maintained by the system:
This helps in locating the backup media that were used.
The system warns when restoring an older version.
*EXCLRD
This lock is appropriate when you

want to prevent any other job from
doing any operation other than read.
SAVACT
This parameter allows an object to

be changed while it is being saved.
There is no limit on the number of tapes used for a

save/restore operation.
Figure 34-6. Save considerations
AS248.1
Notes:
The description on the system for each object is updated with:
The date and time of the save operation
The tape volume identifier and file name
The date and time of the save; which is also saved in the copy of the object on the
offline media
An attempt to restore anything other than the most recently saved copy of an object results
in the sending of an informational message.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The description on the system for each object is updated with the date and time
of the save operation. The date and time of saves are also saved in the copy of the object
on the offline medium.
Multiple concurrent SAVOBJ/RSTOBJ commands against a single library and
SAVDLO/RSTDLO commands against a single ASP are possible.

34-13
Instructor Guide
Free storage function

IBM i
SAVOBJ STG(*FREE)
Before
After
Object header
Object header
Contents
Figure 34-7. Free storage function
AS248.1
Notes:
Normally, saving an object does not remove it from the system; however, you can use the
storage (STG) parameter on some save commands to free some of the storage that is
used by saved objects.
If you specify STG(*FREE), the object description and search values remain on the
system. The contents of the object are deleted.
You can perform operations, such as moving and renaming an object whose storage has
been freed; however, the object must be restored in order to be used.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details When an object is saved, the disk space occupied by the data portion of the
object can be freed (released for use by other objects). The description of the object
remains on the system. To use the object, the data portion must be restored to the system.
When disk utilization is extremely high, this function is handy for seldom-used objects, such
as year-end files.

34-15
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
34.1. Save to tape media

34-17
Instructor Guide
Option 1: Save to tape media

IBM i
SAV... command
disk
DEV(tape names)
Figure 34-8. Option 1: Save to tape media
AS248.1
Notes:
IBM i supports saving to tape.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The visual on this page is used to show the concepts of the save-to-tape
function.

34-19
Instructor Guide
Purposes of tape on Power i

IBM i
The reasons to use tape media

on the Power i are:
To copy objects
To migrate data between systems

To distribute software
To save / restore objects
To provide input / output to programs
Figure 34-9. Purposes of tape on Power i
AS248.1
Notes:
Tape media can be used for a variety of reasons on the Power i.
Its primary use is to provide a means to save your company's data offline.
If it is ever needed, it can be restored to the Power i system.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Tape can be used to copy or save the information on a Power i to an offline
backup medium.
All system software is distributed on CD-ROM.
Tape is the most universal means of exchanging data between systems that have different
architectures.

34-21
Instructor Guide
Using tape labels

IBM i
External tape label:

Gummed label that appears
on the outside of a tape box
or container.
Standard label
Unlabeled
Internal tape label:

Identification recorded on tape. The
internal tape label is used by
Power i to get information
about data on the tape.
Figure 34-10. Using tape labels
AS248.1
Notes:
The following are the characteristics of an unlabeled tape:
Two tape marks to indicate the beginning and end of the tape
Tape marks to indicate the beginning and end of each data file
No volume label information and no data file label information
When you display an unlabeled tape, no information about it appears. Unlabeled tape is
used to exchange information with another system that does not support standard-label
tapes; unless you need them for this purpose, you should never use unlabeled tapes.
The following are the characteristics of a standard-label tape:
Tape labels provide information that identifies both the tape volume and the files that
are written on it. It is a Power i requirement that tapes used for save or restore
operations must have standard labels.
Standard labels are recommended when you are using tape for program input or output
and for the other uses of tape (copy, migration, and journaling). Standard-label tapes
are always used to distribute software on tape.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Make sure the students understand that the term tape label refers to the internal
tape label, not the external one.
The internal label deserves a closer look because the system can use it to identify both the
tape itself and the information written on it.
A tape can be initialized as either a standard-label tape or as an unlabeled tape.
A tape initialized as an unlabeled tape would most likely be used to exchange data with a
system that is not another Power i (a system that does not support standard-labeled tapes).
A tape mark is a unique pattern of information written on a tape and used to determine tape
positioning when the tape is read.
Unless an unlabeled tape is required, as it can be for data exchange, standard-label tapes
should always be used. This is because the label provides information that identifies both
the tape volume and the files that are written on the tape.
IBM i requires that save/restore tapes be initialized as standard-label tapes. Save and
restore operations are discussed in the following topics of this unit.

34-23
Instructor Guide
Question
IBM i
Which type of tape (standard/unlabeled) should you use to:

Standard Tape
Unlabeled Tape
Migrate data between different

systems (Sys i to Sys z )
Distribute software
Save / restore objects

Provide input / output to
programs
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Ask the students to place a checkmark or X on
the slide using the whiteboard tools to indicate which type of tape would be used for each
situation.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Ask the students to raise their hands to indicate which
type of tape would be used for each situation.
Answers:
Migrate data between different platform of systems (Power i to System z)- Unlabeled
Tape
Distribute software (Sys i to Sys i) - Standard Tape
Save / restore objects on the same platform (sys i to sys i)- Standard Tape
Provide input / output to programs (on the Power i) - Standard Tape

34-25
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
34.2. Save to save file

34-27
Instructor Guide
Option 2: Save to save file

IBM i
SAV... command
Disk
DEV(*SAVF)
SAVF(name)
SAVLIB SAVFDTA(*YES)
Disk
SAVSAVFDTA
SNDNETF
Tape
Figure 34-12. Option 2: Save to save file
AS248.1
Notes:
A save file is a special type of file that can be created on a disk which IBM i treats
essentially, as a tape.
Almost anything that can be saved to tape media can be saved to a save file.
Objects and libraries saved to a save file can be restored to disk just as they can from
offline media.
The whole idea of saving system data offline is to make sure you have a copy of the
data offline in case of machine failure. For this reason, for a save to a save file to be
complete, the data in the save file must be saved offline later.
Exercise Appendix B: Save and restore from a save file is an optional exercise for anyone
who is interested in using save files.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details If the contents of a save file must be saved offline in a separate step, why bother
with a save file at all? There are two very good reasons.
If you are not using the Save-while-active facility, the system does not allow an object
that is being saved to be changed in any way. This means that a company's
applications cannot run while the objects used by those applications are being saved.
This is because most applications update objects as they run. Saving to a save file
copies from disk to disk at much higher speeds than copying from disk to even the
fastest tape drive. Saving the data in the save file to offline media has no impact on the
running of a company's applications at all.
In short, using a save file can reduce the time that an application is unavailable because
it is being saved.
Unless a company runs all applications 24 hours a day, saves to tape can be scheduled
during non-prime hours to avoid the application impact just discussed; however, an
operator must be present to change the tapes during the save process.
Again, save files might be the answer. Saves, like most other functions on a Power i
system, can be set up to occur automatically at a certain time. Using a save file, saves
can be done at the time of lowest application impact without requiring that an operator
be present. Operators can save the data in the save file at their convenience.
Here are the steps to follow to use a save file:
1. If a save file does not already exist, create one using the Create Save File (CRTSAVF)
command.
If one does exist, it cannot contain any data. Use the Clear Save File (CLRSAVF)
command to remove all data from a save file.
2. Save the required objects or libraries to the save file just as they would be saved to
offline media using the appropriate SAVxxx command.
3. The data in the save file is saved to offline media using the SAVLIB SAVFDTA(*YES)
command or the Save File Data (SAVSAVFDTA) command. In addition, the data can be
sent to another user on the local Power i system or on a remote system through the
SNADS network using the Send Network File (SNDNETF) command.
The system operator is generally responsible for all activities relating to tape drives. Before
we go into the save operation in more detail, let's look at tape operations.
Additional information Recommend Exercise Appendix B - Save and restore from a
save file for anyone who is interested.

34-29
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
34.3. Save to virtual tape

34-31
Instructor Guide
Option 3: Save to virtual tape

IBM i
SAV... command
Disk
DEV(Virtual Tape Drive)
DUPTAP
Disk
FROMDEV(VirTape)
TODEV(Tape)
Tape
Figure 34-13. Option 3: Save to virtual tape
AS248.1
Notes:
Virtual tape is included in Base i operating system. Virtual tape is configured as a Random
Access Cartridge Loader (RACL) tape device:
I/O to disk instead of tape media
Virtual tape behaves as tape library mounting specified volumes
You can specify up to 35 virtual tape devices
Virtual tape volumes support multiple optimum block sizes to be compatible with tape
devices
Tape volume management interface is supported through System i Navigator.
User interface is supported through green screen emulator or System i Navigator.
Virtual volumes are stored as IFS stream files:
These can be copied to other servers or partitions using FTP
Some considerations of FTP are:
- Bandwidth
- Management of transmitted files
- Disaster recovery

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
of the next visual while providing commentary for the different parts of the file.

34-33
Instructor Guide
Overview and implementation

IBM i
Up to 256
virtual tape
volumes
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CRTIMGCLG
(2)
ADDIMGCLGE
(3)
10
LODIMGCLG
Any ASP or iASP
(4)
CRTDEVTAP
(1)
Virtual
tape
device
Save
Restore
Disk
Disk
Duplicate to media, switch or

FTP to another system
Figure 34-14. Overview and implementation
AS248.1
Notes:
The steps to implement virtual tape are:
1. Create virtual tape device description then vary on the device.
2. Create virtual tape image catalog.
3. Create virtual volumes.
4. Load image catalog.
5. Save to a virtual volume.
6. Duplicate virtual volume to physical tape.
These steps are detailed in the following unit.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Image catalog:
Image catalog commands have been modified to support virtual optical and virtual tape
volume.
Image catalog stores up to 256 1,000,000 MB virtual tape volumes.
*ALLOBJ authority no longer required.
Load of image catalog on virtual device makes virtual volume accessible.
Virtual media:
Can be write protected.
Virtual volume can be opened by multiple virtual tape devices.

34-35
Instructor Guide
Virtual tape support advantages

IBM i
Supported on all save/restore commands

Can be faster than saving directly to tape
Eliminates save file limitations
Eliminates media error limitations
Duplicate saves to physical media:
Duplicate tape (DUPTAP) command
If you have BRMS, use Duplicate Media (DUPMEDBRM) command
Onsite and offsite storage
Figure 34-15. Virtual tape support advantages
AS248.1
Notes:
Some of the advantages of working with virtual tape devices are:
Supported on all save/restore commands
Can be faster than saving directly to tape:
- Similar performance as save files
- Best performance in separate ASP
Eliminates save file limitations:
- One library per save file
- Parallel saves not supported on save file
- 1 TB size limitation on save file
Eliminates media error limitations:
- Saves ending due to tape device or media errors
- Save-while-active checkpoint restriction
- Once checkpoint reached, saves cannot be restarted

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Duplicate virtual saves to physical media:

- Perform the duplication when a physical tape device is available
- At your convenience
- Use the Duplicate Tape (DUPTAP) command or, if Backup, Recover, and Media
Services (BRMS) is installed, use the Duplicate Media (DUPMEDBRM) command
Onsite and offsite storage:
- Keep virtual volumes on systems as needed
- Keep duplicated volumes offsite

34-37
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Virtual tape support considerations

IBM i
Additional DASD requirements

No install from SAVSYS virtual volume
Might not be faster
Data compaction not supported
Data compression support
Figure 34-16. Virtual tape support considerations
AS248.1
Notes:
Some considerations when working with virtual tape are:
Additional DASD might be required since you are saving to disk.
You cannot install SAVSYS from a virtual volume.
- D IPL is only supported from physical media.
Saving to a virtual tape might not necessarily be faster:
- Speed and time of save will depend on the tape technology currently installed.
- Speed depends on the system configuration in place.
Data compaction is not supported when saving to a virtual tape. Data compaction is
supported by hardware.
Data compression is supported. Compression is supported by software:
- To implement, specify DTACPR(*YES) parameter on Save Commands
Default is *NO
- SNA low data compression
- Significant performance impact

34-39
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
34.4. The tools

34-41
Instructor Guide
Tools used to save

IBM i
Save menu
Save commands
Operational Assistant menu interface
System i Navigator support
Backup, Recovery, and Media Services (BRMS):
5250 menu and command support
System i Navigator by way of a plug-in
Figure 34-17. Tools used to save
AS248.1
Notes:
The tools that are available on the system to save user and system data are:
Save menu: Use the options on this menu to save the data on your system.
Save commands: Use the appropriate command to save the specific data.
Operational Assistant menu interface: Use this easy-to-use interface to save your
data.
System i Navigator supports using the standard default or using BRMS if this licensed
program product is installed on your system.
BRMS: This is an IBM licensed program product used to automate the backup and
recovery of your system. It will mange your backup media and provide support for
archive and retrieval of your data. It is supported on:
- 5250 emulation
- System i Navigator by way of a plug-in
- Systems Director Navigator for IBM i
These tools will be covered in the next two units.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

34-43
Instructor Guide
Question
IBM i
Which of the save facilities are used in your company or organization?

Physical
Virtual
tape
tape
Save file
BRMS
Other tape
mgmt
AS248.1
Notes:
The following courses provide more information about backup services available for the
Power i.
AS28: Backup and Recovery Media Services (BRMS) for Power i
This course covers the features and functions supported by the Backup and Recovery
Media Services (BRMS). BRMS is an integrated and comprehensive tool for managing
backup and recovery operations on the Power i.
OV28: Introduction to Backup Recovery Media Services (BRMS) for i
This course covers the features and functions supported by the *BASE portion of the
Backup and Recovery Media Services software. BRMS is an integrated and
comprehensive tool for managing backup and recovery operations on the Power i.
OV29: BRMS Update
This course enables you to acquire the skills necessary to work with new and additional
BRMS functions. It will also teach additional problem data collection methods and
capabilities beyond what can be found in by reviewing history and job logs to collect
data to figure out problems that might occur during daily operations. It updates

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
knowledge not included in the entry BRMS Workshop course and topics that have been
added with new releases.

34-45
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Ask the students to place a checkmark or X on
the slide using the whiteboard tools to indicate which supported save facilities they use at
their organization.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Ask the students to raise their hands for each type of
save facility that is in use at their organization.
Instructors do not forget to sell the following courses. Course descriptions are under the
student notes.
AS28: Backup and Recovery Media Services (BRMS) for Power i
OV28: Introduction to Backup Recovery Media Services (BRMS) for i - ILO
OV29: BRMS Update - ILO
Play.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or False: Objects that are considered temporary do not

get saved on the system.
2. When you save an object, which of the following is not
saved?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Object name
Object type
Name of the object owner
Address of this data on disk
3. Which of the following is not one of the supported media for a

save operation?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Physical tape
Save file
Virtual tape
Memory stick
AS248.1
Notes:

34-47
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i
1. True or False: Objects that are considered temporary do not get saved
on the system.
The answer is True.
2. When you save an object, which of the following is not saved?

a.
b.
c.
d.
Object name
Object type
The answer is Address of this data on disk.
3. Which of the following is not one of the supported media for a save
operation?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Physical tape
Save file
Virtual tape
Memory stick
The answer is Memory stick.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i
Having completing this unit, you should be able to:

Explain the difference between labeled versus unlabeled tape
and the uses for these
AS248.1
Notes:

34-49
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details End this unit by stressing the following points:
An offline, off-site copy of the backup is essential for disaster recovery. Objects that
change frequently must be backed up each day.
Develop a plan for saving and for restoring, then document that plan.
Let the System i Navigator, the Save menu, or Operational Assistant backup menus
help you to ensure complete and frequent backups.
Additional information Before continuing to the next unit stop and ask the students if

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 35. Save using 5250 emulation

Estimated time
00:45

In this unit, we will review the menu options and commands used to
perform save operations on your Power i. We will review the steps and
commands used to save to tape and to save to a save file.
We will then review the steps to set up virtual tape support followed by
the steps to save to a virtual tape. We will review the menus available
to perform save operations. Lastly, we will review what each of the
individual commands saves.

Use the menus and commands available to work with tape media
Use the menus and commands available to work with save files
Perform the steps required to set up virtual tape support
List what data is saved with menu options 21, 22, and 23
Explain what is saved by each of the save commands

Accountability:
Exercise

35-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Use the menus and commands available to work with tape
media
Use the menus and commands available to work with save
files
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details After having successfully completed this unit, the student should be able to use
tape and save files to save objects or the entire system, and they should be able to use
tape or save files to restore objects or the entire system.
This unit starts with tape fundamentals and continues with save and restore menus and
commands.
All systems require some means of saving data offline. Let's examine the IBM i process of
accomplishing this task.
In this unit, there is no access for Web topic since this function is not supported through
that interface.

35-3
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
35.1. Tape operations

In this topic, the students learn:
About the fundamentals of tape on the Power i.
How to prepare a tape to receive data, and how to display the contents of a tape.
After completing this topic, the student should be able to list the commands used for tape
operations.

35-5
Instructor Guide
Tape menu
IBM i
Figure 35-2. Tape menu
AS248.1
Notes:
The go tape command displays the Tape menu. This menu can also be displayed by
selecting:
Option 3 (General system tasks) from the Power i Main menu
Option 8 (Device operations) from the General System Tasks menu
Option 4 (Tape) from the Device Operations menu
From the Tape menu, you can run all tape functions. The following explains the options on
the Tape menu and, where appropriate, the individual commands that the options prompt
for or run:
1. Display tape information
This option displays the information on a tape. It prompts for the Display Tape
(DSPTAP) command.
2. Initialize a tape

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Each tape must be initialized before data can be recorded on it. This option initializes
(or prepares) a tape so that data can be recorded on it and prompts for the Initialize
Tape (INZTAP) command.
3. Print contents of a tape
This option prints the contents of a tape. It prompts for the Dump Tape (DMPTAP)
command.
4. Save
This option displays the Save menu, from which you can save data to tape, optical
drive, save file, or tape media library device.
5. Restore
This option displays the Restore menu, from which you can restore data from tape,
optical drive, save file, or tape media library device.
6. Work with tape device status
This option displays the Work with Configuration Status display, which shows the status
information for tape devices. This option runs the Work with Configuration Status for
Tape (WRKCFGSTS) command.
7. Verify tape
This option allows the tape unit operations for all tape units to be verified. It prompts for
the Verify Tape (VFYTAP) command.

35-7
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details From the Tape menu, you can find and run all commands to work with tape.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Display Tape: DSPTAP

IBM i
Figure 35-3. Display Tape: DSPTAP
AS248.1
Notes:
To find out what data is stored on a tape, you can either select option 1 on the Tape menu
or prompt for the Display Tape (DSPTAP) command.
Note the possible values for the Data type parameter - either *LABELS or *SAVRST.
If you specify *LABELS, the volume label and data file labels for the tape are displayed.
If the information on the tape was written by an IBM i save operation, the operator might
want to see the names of the system objects in each tape file. To see this information,
*SAVRST must be specified for the data type parameter.

35-9
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details To display data stored on a tape, you can either select option 1 on the Tape
menu or prompt for the Display Tape (DSPTAP) command.
This visual shows the Display Tape (DSPTAP) prompt display.
An illustration of each type of display is shown in the next two visuals.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Contents of a tape: *LABELS format

IBM i
Figure 35-4. Contents of a tape: *LABELS format
AS248.1
Notes:
To display only the names of the files on a tape, use the default value of *LABELS for the
data type parameter on the DSPTAP command.
Information about the tape volume appears at the top of the display.
Information about the first file on the tape appears in the body of the display.
Additional information about this file can be seen by using the Page Down/Up (Roll
Up/Down) keys.
If several files exist on the tape, the Power i system waits for you to press Enter before it
searches for and displays information about the next file.

35-11
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details If the operator only wants to see the names of files on a tape, he or she can use
the default value of *LABELS for the Data type parameter on the DSPTAP command.
Sample output of the DSPTAP command is shown in this visual.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Contents of a tape: *SAVRST format

IBM i
Figure 35-5. Contents of a tape: *SAVRST format
AS248.1
Notes:
If the information stored on a tape was written during an IBM i save operation, you might
want to see the names of the actual system objects stored in each tape file. To see this type
of information, specify *SAVRST for the Data type parameter on the Display Tape
(DSPTAP) command.
In this format, information is displayed not only about the tape volume and tape file label,
but also about the system objects contained in the file.
A plus sign (+) in the bottom right-hand corner of the display indicates that there are more
objects to be displayed. Use the Page Down/Up (Roll Up/Down) keys to display them.

35-13
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Initialize Tape: INZTAP

IBM i
Figure 35-6. Initialize Tape: INZTAP
AS248.1
Notes:
Either use option 2 on the Tape menu or prompt for the Initialize Tape (INZTAP) command
to prepare a tape for the offline storage of information. Each tape must be initialized before
data can be recorded on it. When a tape is initialized, any information on it is overwritten.
The three most frequently used parameters on this display are:
New volume identifier: If you accept the default of *NONE for this parameter, the tape
you initialize is an unlabeled tape. If you specify a volume for the new volume identifier
parameter, the tape is initialized as a standard-label tape, which is required for most
operations.
Check for active files: You can check for active files (*YES), choose not to check for
active files (*NO), or check for the first active file on the tape (*FIRST). If you specify
*YES or *FIRST and an active file is found, the tape is not initialized. If you specify *NO,
the tape will be initialized immediately, even if there are active files on it.
Tape density: The tape density parameter determines the amount of data recorded per
inch of tape.

35-15
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Before a tape can be used, it must be initialized (or prepared to receive data).

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
35.2. Save file operations

35-17
Instructor Guide
Save File Commands menu

IBM i
Figure 35-7. Save File Commands menu
AS248.1
Notes:
The Save File Commands (CMDSAVF) menu allows you to select commands to work with
save files.
A save file is a file allocated in auxiliary storage that can be used to store saved data on
disk without requiring tape or optical media.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

35-19
Instructor Guide
Create Save File

IBM i
Figure 35-8. Create Save File
AS248.1
Notes:
The Create Save File (CRTSAVF) command creates a save file.
A save file can be used with save and restore commands to contain data that would
otherwise be written to tape or optical media. A save file can also be used like a database
file to read or write records that contain save or restore information. A save file can also be
used to send objects to another user on the SNADS network.
You must have object operational (*OBJOPR) authority to the CRTSAVF command in order
to create a duplicate save file object or to restore a save file object.
You must have add (*ADD) and read (*READ) authority to the library in which the save file
is to be created.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

35-21
Instructor Guide
Save library to a save file

IBM i
Figure 35-9. Save library to a save file
AS248.1
Notes:
The Device (DEV) parameter specifies the name of the device used for the save operation.
The device name must already be known on the system by a device description. When you
specify *SAVF, the save operation is done using the save file specified for the Save File
(SAVF) parameter.
The SAVF parameter specifies the save file that is used to contain the saved data. The
save file must be empty unless *ALL is specified for the Clear (CLEAR) parameter.
Note
A value must be specified for this parameter if *SAVF is specified for the DEV parameter.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

35-23
Instructor Guide
Other save file commands

IBM i
DSPSAVF (Display a Save File)

SAVSAVFDTA (Save a Save File)
CLRSAVF (Clear a Save File)
WRKSAVFBRM (Work with Save Files)
DLTF (Delete a Save File)
Figure 35-10. Other save file commands
AS248.1
Notes:
The Display Save File (DSPSAVF) command displays the save information in a save file.
This includes summary information about the save operation and a description of each
object saved to the save file.
The Save File Data (SAVSAVFDTA) command saves the contents of a save file to tape or
optical media. This command saves the save data in the save file to the device in a way
that allows you to restore objects directly from the device.
The Clear Save File (CLRSAVF) command clears the contents of a save file. This
command clears all existing records from the save file and reduces the amount of storage
used by this file. A save file must be cleared before it can be used again.
The Work with Save Files using BRM (WRKSAVFBRM) command displays or prints a
report of all save files that are on the BRMS media content information. To use this
command, you must have the BRMS licensed program installed (5761-BR1).
The Delete File (DLTF) command deletes one or more files from the system.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

35-25
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
35.3. Virtual tape operations

35-27
Instructor Guide

IBM i
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CRTIMGCLG
(2)
Up to 256
virtual tape
volumes
ADDIMGCLGE
(3)
10
LODIMGCLG
Any ASP or iASP
(4)
CRTDEVTAP
(1)
Virtual
tape
device
Save
Restore
Disk
Disk

AS248.1
Notes:
These steps are detailed on the following pages. Refer to this visual to keep track of where
you are in the set up process.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Image catalog:
Image catalog commands have been modified to support virtual optical and virtual tape
volume
Image catalog stores up to 256 1,000,000 MB virtual tape volumes
*ALLOBJ authority is no longer required
Load of image catalog on virtual device makes virtual volume accessible
Virtual media:
Can be write protected
Virtual volume can be opened by multiple virtual tape devices

35-29
Instructor Guide
Image Commands menu

IBM i
Figure 35-12. Image Commands menu
AS248.1
Notes:
The Image Commands menu includes several of the commands that will be used when
setting up support for virtual tape operations. It also includes commands that will be used in
day-to-day operations when working with virtual tape.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

35-31
Instructor Guide
Create Device Desc and vary on

IBM i
Figure 35-13. Create Device Desc and vary on
AS248.1
Notes:
The Create Device Description (Tape) (CRTDEVTAP) command creates a device
description for a tape device.
Resource name (RSRCNAME) parameter - *VRT
The operating system will generate a virtual hardware resource name to use for the newly
created device description. Once the maximum number of virtual hardware resource
names have been generated, any additional device descriptions that are created will be
assigned the virtual hardware resource name that was last generated.
Note
The resource name will not be removed if a device description is deleted. You can create a
new device description for existing resources by specifying the resource by name.
Once the device description is created, use the work with configuration status
(WRKCFGSTS) command to vary on your device description.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

35-33
Instructor Guide
Create virtual tape image catalog

IBM i
Figure 35-14. Create virtual tape image catalog
AS248.1
Notes:
The Create Image Catalog (CRTIMGCLG) command is used to create an image catalog
object (*IMGCLG) in library QUSRSYS and associate the image catalog with a target
directory. An image catalog can be associated with a virtual optical or virtual tape device.
An image catalog contains information about images that have been added to the image
catalog using the Add Image Catalog Entry (ADDIMGCLGE) command. This command is
described on the next page in the guide.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

35-35
Instructor Guide
Create virtual volumes

IBM i
Figure 35-15. Create virtual volumes
AS248.1
Notes:
The Add Image Catalog Entry (ADDIMGCLGE) command is used to create a virtual
image in the image catalog directory (as specified by the Directory (DIR) parameter on the
CRTIMGCLG command). If the image is added successfully, the image will be loaded and
the image catalog (*IMGCLG) in library QUSRSYS will be updated. Images can be added
from the following sources:
CD or DVD media (by specifying an optical device containing the CD or DVD image to
be added). This source is only allowed for optical type image catalogs.
An image file located in a directory. The image file can exist in any directory that is
accessible through the Copy Object (CPY) command.
A new image file by specifying the FROMFILE(*NEW) parameter.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

35-37
Instructor Guide
Load Image Catalog

IBM i
Figure 35-16. Load Image Catalog
AS248.1
Notes:
The Load or Unload Image Catalog (LODIMGCLG) command is used to associate an
image catalog and its images to a virtual device. The status of the image catalog will be
changed based on the value specified for the Option (OPTION) parameter as follows:
*LOAD
This will cause the status of the image catalog to change to Ready. All image
catalog entries that are in mounted or loaded status will be loaded in the
specified virtual device. The allow save attribute will be set to not allow
save for all image catalog files.
*UNLOAD
This will cause the status of the image catalog to change to Not ready. All
image catalog entries are removed from the specified virtual device. The
allow save attribute will be set to allow save for all image catalog entries.
Only one image catalog can be associated with a virtual device.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

35-39
Instructor Guide
Work with Image Catalog

IBM i
Figure 35-17. Work with Image Catalog
AS248.1
Notes:
Some restrictions to be aware of are:
This command is shipped with public *EXCLUDE authority.
The following authorities are required to view entries for the image catalog specified:
- *EXECUTE authority to access library QUSRSYS.
- *USE authority to access the image catalog.
1=Create
Creates a new image catalog object in library QUSRSYS.
2=Change
Changes attributes of an image catalog.
4=Delete
Deletes the image catalog and image files from the system.
8=Load
Makes the image files associated with the image catalog entries
available to the virtual device.
9=Unload
Makes the image files associated with the image catalog entries
unavailable to the virtual device.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
10=Verify
Prompts for the Verify Image Catalog (VFYIMGCLG) command.

This command allows you to verify that the required images exist in
the optical image catalog.
12=Work with entries Brings up the Work with Image Catalog Entries display. From this
panel, you can work with the image catalog entries for the selected
image catalog.

35-41
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Saving to a virtual volume

IBM i
Figure 35-18. Saving to a virtual volume
AS248.1
Notes:
For the Device parameter, specify the names of one or more tape devices used for the
save operation.
If a virtual tape device is used, it must be the only device specified. If multiple tape devices
are used, they must have compatible media formats, and their names must be specified in
the order in which they are used.
Using more than one tape device permits one tape volume to be rewound and unloaded
while another tape device processes the next tape volume. To use more than one device in
parallel, a media definition must be specified.

35-43
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Duplicating virtual volume to physical tape

IBM i
Figure 35-19. Duplicating virtual volume to physical tape
AS248.1
Notes:
The Duplicate Tape (DUPTAP) command can be used to copy from a virtual tape to a
physical tape.
Once the duplicate is complete, you store the physical tape offsite. You can leave the
virtual tape on the system to use for recovery purposes as needed.
Initialize your virtual tape before it is reused for another save operation.

35-45
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
35.4. Save menus and commands

In this topic, the students learn about several methods and commands available on a
Power i system to save data.

35-47
Instructor Guide
Save menu
IBM i
SAVE
Save
System: i520DV2

Save Data
1. Files
2. Libraries
3. Documents and folders
4. Programs
5. Other objects
6. Changed objects only
7. Licensed programs
8. Security data
++ 9. Storage
10. Configuration
11. Objects in directories
SAVE
Save
System: i520DVL2

Save System and User Data
20. Define save system and user data defaultsSAVE
++ 21. Entire system
++ 22. System data only
+ 23. All user data
Save
Save Libraries
Save Document Library Objects More...
++ 40. All libraries other than system library
30. All documents, folders, and mail
41. All IBM libraries other than system library
===> _________________________________________________________
31. New and changed documents, new folders, 42.
all mail
All user libraries
_______________________________________________________________
32. Documents and folders
43. All changed objects in user libraries
F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve 33.
F12=Cancel
F13=Information
Assistant
Mail only
34. Calendars
Save for Different Systems
50. Save in System/36 format
Related Commands More...
70. Related commands
===> _________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant
+ Restricted state
++ Restricted state recommended
Bottom
===> ____________________________________
__________________________________________
F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel
Figure 35-20. Save menu
AS248.1
Notes:
To find and use save commands, enter go save on the command line. You can also enter
option 3 (General system tasks) on the Main menu and then option 6 (Save) on the
General System Tasks menu.
The Save menu, which consists of three displays, provides options that allow you to save
anything on the system.
The option marked with a single plus sign (+) places your Power in a restricted state. (A
Power is in a restricted state when no subsystems, except the controlling subsystem, are
active on the system.) It is strongly recommended that, prior to running the options marked
with a double plus sign (++), you place the Power in a restricted state.
Option 20 from the Save menu allows you to define your save system and user data
defaults. We review this display next.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The Save menu, which is shown on this visual, can be used to find and use save
commands. There are three Save menu displays from which you can save all objects. For
example, you can select any of these options:
Option 1 (Save one or more files)

Option 4 (One or more programs)
Option 6 (Changed objects only)
Option 10 (Configuration objects)
Option 21 (The entire system)

35-49
Instructor Guide
Define Save System and User Data Defaults

IBM i
Save Menu - Option 20
Figure 35-21. Define Save System and User Data Defaults
AS248.1
Notes:
The Define Save System and User Data Defaults display allows you to specify values to be
used during the selected backup or restore option.
Remember that you can use the F1- Help option to help you understand what defaults will
be set with each of the parameters on this display.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Reinforce the importance of the Vary off network servers parameter. If the
students have IPCSs installed on their home systems, this parameter should ensure that
the servers are properly shut down.

35-51
Instructor Guide
Operational Assistant backup

IBM i
GO ASSIST
or
GO BACKUP
=> 11. Customize your system, users, and devices

=> 5. Backup tasks
Figure 35-22. Operational Assistant backup
AS248.1
Notes:
Operational Assistant (GO ASSIST) provides options to assist in managing and
customizing the system. One of those options is to set up and run a scheduled backup.
The Backup Tasks menu allows predefined options for daily, weekly, and monthly backups
to be set. Default options are provided, which you can change to meet your needs.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Discuss how to use Operational Assistant to manage and customize options.
Setting up a backup schedule for daily, weekly, and monthly backups is easy with
Operational Assistant, which then provides options to run the backup.

35-53
Instructor Guide
Automatic default backups

IBM i
Daily
Weekly
Monthly
Back up changes to
user libraries selected
on backup list.
Back up all user

Libraries.
Back up all user libraries.
Back up folders
selected on backup list.
Back up all folders.
Back up all folders

Back up security data
Back up configuration
data.
Back up all user

directories.
Back up all user

directories.
Back up all user

directories.
Figure 35-23. Automatic default backups
AS248.1
Notes:
This visual shows the Operational Assistant backup schedule defaults:
Note that the monthly and weekly backups save all user libraries, all folders, and all
directories.
The daily option backs up only those changes to the libraries and folders specified on a
list.
All three of the options back up all user directories.
These settings can be modified to suit your requirements using the Change Backup
(CHGBCKUP) command or options from the Set Up Backup menu.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Point out the differences between the daily, weekly, and monthly backups, and
discuss the library list and folder list functions.

35-55
Instructor Guide
Save commands
IBM i
What is saved?
SAVOBJ
SAVLIB
SAVDLO
SAV
SAVCHGOBJ
SAVSYS
SAVSAVFDTA
SAVSECDTA
SAVCFG
SAVSTG
Figure 35-24. Save commands
AS248.1
Notes:
When you select an option on the Save menu, you are prompted for various save
commands, all of which exist on the system. Why are there so many commands? So that
you can save only what you need, when you need it. As you become more comfortable
working with the Power i, you might prefer to use these commands rather than the Save
menu.
Following is a brief explanation of what is saved with each command:
SAVOBJ: Saves one or more objects or a group of objects by generic name and type
from one or more libraries. When *ALL is specified on the Objects prompt, objects can
be saved from up to 300 libraries. When saving to a save file, only one file can be
specified.
SAVLIB: Saves one or more libraries (up to 300 named libraries) and all the objects
associated with them. When saving to a save file or an optical volume, only one library

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
can be specified. This command can also be used to save, in one operation, one of the
following:
- All libraries on the system other than QSYS
- All libraries that normally contain user data
- All IBM-supplied libraries other than QSYS (and six others that cannot be saved
except by SAVSTG - see online help)
The SAVLIB command saves the entire library, which includes the library description,
the object descriptions, and the contents of the objects in the library. For job queues,
message queues, output queues, data queues, and logical files, only the object
definitions are saved, not the contents.
SAVDLO: Saves documents, folders, and distribution objects (mail).
SAV: Saves one or more directories or objects within directories. This command must
be used to save the IFS.
SAVCHGOBJ: Saves only those named objects (specific or generic, combinable with
object types) that have changed since the last complete save of a library.
SAVSYS: Saves the system library (QSYS), all security information, all system
configuration objects, and the LIC. This saved data can be used during an install
process. Individual objects cannot be restored from these tapes.
SAVSAVFDTA: Saves objects which have been saved to a save file to offline media.
SAVSECDTA: Saves one or more named user profiles or all security information,
including profiles, authorization lists, and authority holders.
SAVCFG: Saves all configuration and system resource management information
without requiring that the system be in a restricted system.
SAVSTG: Saves a copy of the LIC and the contents in auxiliary storage (except unused
space and temporary objects) to tape. This is essentially a dump from disk to tape and
is generally used as a means of providing recovery from a disaster, such as a fire or a
flood. The tapes produced by this command can be used only to install the entire
system. Individual libraries and objects cannot be restored from these tapes. Also, the
restore disk configuration must match the save disk configuration.
Some limitations exist as to the number of related objects that can be saved in a single
save operation. Because of the complex nature of these limitations, there is only the
slightest of possibilities that any save operation is impacted.

35-57
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Many different save commands exist on each Power i. Why so many? They
exist so that only what needs to be saved is saved, and it is only saved when needed.
Discuss only the highlights of each command.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Menu options
IBM i
Save menu
option 21
Save
menu
option 22
LIC
The system library (QSYS)
Security objects, including user profiles
Device configuration objects

All IBM-supplied libraries including those
containing user data
All user libraries
All mail
All folders
All documents
All objects in directories
All IBM-supplied libraries that do not contain
user data
All IBM-supplied directories that do not
contain user data
All IBM-supplied libraries and directories
that contain user data
Save
menu option
23
Y
N/A
N/A
N/A
Figure 35-25. Menu options
AS248.1
Notes:
Each of these menu options ends all subsystems.
Each of the options in this table are discussed on the next three pages.
For further information, including a detailed checklist procedure, please consult the Power i
Information Center.

35-59
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Save menu option 21: Entire system

IBM i
Option 21 runs the following commands:
ENDSBS
SBS(*ALL)
OPTION(*IMMED)
SAVSYS
SAVLIB
LIB(*NONSYS)
SAVDLO
DLO(*ALL)
SAV
OBJ(('/*')
ACCPTH(*YES)
FLR(*ANY)
('/QSYS.LIB' *OMIT)
('/QDLS' *OMIT))
STRSBS
UPDHST(*YES)
SBSD(controlling-subsystem)
Figure 35-26. Save menu option 21: Entire system
AS248.1
Notes:
Select this option to save the entire system (except the contents of a message, a job, an
output, or a data queue).
This option performs the following operations:
Starts the save immediately or at a specified time
Changes the system operator (QSYSOPR) message queue to *BREAK or *NOTIFY
delivery mode
Ends all subsystems

35-61
Instructor Guide
Backs up:
-
The LIC
All IBM-supplied libraries, including those containing user data
All user libraries
All mail
All folders
All documents
Starts the controlling subsystem

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

35-63
Instructor Guide
Save menu option 22: System data

IBM i
ENDSBS
SBS(*ALL)
OPTION(*IMMED)
SAVLIB
LIB(*IBM)
ACCPTH(*YES)
SAV
OBJ(('/QIBM/ProdData')
SAVSYS
('/QOpenSys/QIBM/ProdData'))
STRSBS
UPDHST(*YES)
Figure 35-27. Save menu option 22: System data
AS248.1
Notes:
Select this option to save all of the system data. This option performs the following
operations:
delivery mode
Ends all subsystems
Backs up:
-
The LIC
All IBM-supplied libraries that do not contain user data
All IBM-supplied directories that do not contain user data


V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

35-65
Instructor Guide
Save menu option 23: All user data

IBM i
ENDSBS
SBS(*ALL)
OPTION(*IMMED)
SAVSECDTA
SAVCFG
SAVLIB
LIB(*ALLUSR)
ACCPTH(*YES)
SAVDLO
DLO(*ALL)
SAV
OBJ(('/*') ('/QSYS.LIB' *OMIT)

('/QDLS' *OMIT)
('/QIBM/ProdData' *OMIT)
('/QOpenSys/QIBM/ProdData' *OMIT))
FLR(*ANY)
UPDHST(*YES)
STRSBS
Figure 35-28. Save menu option 23: All user data
AS248.1
Notes:
Select this option to save all user data. User data is data created by the user. User data
includes IBM-supplied libraries and directories that contain user data. This option performs
the following operations:
delivery mode
Ends all subsystems
Backs up:
- Security objects, including user profiles
- Device configuration objects
- All user libraries
- All IBM-supplied libraries and directories that contain user data
- All mail
- All folders
- All documents

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

35-67
Instructor Guide
Exercise
IBM i
Exercise: Save using 5250 emulation

AS248.1
Notes:
Please refer to the Student Exercise Guide and perform the Save and Restore exercise.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details After completing this exercise, the students should be able to successfully use
system commands to save an object, a library, and restore an object.
Play.

35-69
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i
1. True or False: Running the display tape command, with the

*LABELS format, will show a listing by name of all of the
objects that are saved on this tape.
2. Which of the following is not supported by the Duplicate
Tape (DUPTAP) command?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Duplicate virtual tape to physical tape

Duplicate physical tape to virtual tape
Duplicate virtual tape to save file
Duplicate only specific sequence items
3. On the Save menu, which option is used to save the entire

system?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Option 20
Option 21
Option 22
Option 23
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i
1. True or False: Running the display tape command, with the *LABELS
format, will show a listing by name of all of the objects that are saved
on this tape.
2. Which of the following is not supported by the Duplicate Tape

(DUPTAP) command?
a. Duplicate virtual tape to physical tape
b. Duplicate physical tape to virtual tape
c. Duplicate virtual tape to save file
d. Duplicate only specific sequence items
The answer is Duplicate virtual tape to save file.
3. On the Save menu, which option is used to save the entire system?
a. Option 20
b. Option 21
c. Option 22
d. Option 23
The answer is Option 21.

35-71
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i
4. True or False: The save changed objects command is used

to save only those objects that have changed since the last
save operation.
5. Which command is used to clear the contents of a save file ?
a.
b.
c.
d.
DSPSAVF
INZSAVF
WRKSAVF
CLRSAVF
6. True or False: Save menu option 21, Full system save, can
be performed to a virtual tape?
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

save operation.
The answer is True.
5. Which command is used to clear the contents of a save file?

a.
b.
c.
d.
DSPSAVF
INZSAVF
WRKSAVF
CLRSAVF
The answer is CLRSAVF.
The answer is True.

35-73
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

Use the menus and commands available to work with tape
media
Use the menus and commands available to work with save
files
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Develop a plan for saving and restoring, and document that plan.
Let the System i Navigator, the Save menu, or Operational Assistant backup menus
help you to ensure complete and frequent backups.

35-75
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 36. Save using System i Navigator

Estimated time
00:25

In this unit, we will review the graphical steps used to set up virtual
tape support. We will discuss the options available to perform a save
using this interface. Last, we will look at the steps to display an
objects properties and determine when the last save and restore were
performed.

Perform the steps necessary to set up virtual tape support

Describe the functions performed through the Backup branch
Describe the functions performed through the BRMS branch
Describe the steps to display an objects properties and determine
when it was last saved or restored

Accountability:
Exercise

36-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Describe the steps to display an objects properties and
determine when it was last saved or restored
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

36-3
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
36.1. Setting up virtual tape support

36-5
Instructor Guide

IBM i
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CRTIMGCLG
(2)
Up to 256
virtual tape
volumes
ADDIMGCLGE
(3)
10
Any ASP or iASP
LODIMGCLG
(4)
CRTDEVTAP
(1)
Virtual
tape
device
Save
Restore
Disk
Disk

AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

36-7
Instructor Guide
Stand-Alone Devices
IBM i
Figure 36-3. Stand-Alone Devices
AS248.1
Notes:
The first step is to create a virtual device description. To perform this step:
Expand Configuration and Service, and then click Hardware > Tape devices. Right-click
Stand-Alone Devices, and click Create Virtual Device.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

36-9
Instructor Guide
Create virtual device description

IBM i
Figure 36-4. Create virtual device description
AS248.1
Notes:
On this panel, specify the following:
Tape Device: Specify a name for your virtual device.
Description: Specify a meaningful description.
Review the other parameters that can be set.
Click OK to create the device and see the updated panel on the next page.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

36-11
Instructor Guide
Device: Make Available

IBM i
Figure 36-5. Device: Make Available
AS248.1
Notes:
Clicking OK on the panel in the previous page will:
Create the device description and update the panel on the right.
Notice your device is now listed with a status of Unavailable. Type of 63B0 indicates a
virtual tape device.
Right-click your device, and select Make Available to vary on this device and continue
the setup steps.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

36-13
Instructor Guide
Create Image Catalog

IBM i
Figure 36-6. Create Image Catalog
AS248.1
Notes:
The next step is to create the tape image catalog. To start this process, perform the
following:
Click Tape Image Catalogs to see a list of currently defined catalogs.
Right-click Tape Image Catalog.
Click Create Image Catalog to see the panel on the next page.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

36-15
Instructor Guide
Create Catalog pane

IBM i
Figure 36-7. Create Catalog pane
AS248.1
Notes:
On the Create Catalog pane, specify the following:
Catalog name: Specify a unique descriptive name.
Catalog description: Specify a meaningful description.
Directory path: This is the path where the virtual tapes will be stored in the IFS.
Note
This parameter is case sensitive.
Authority level
Click OK.
This will create the image catalog and update the panel on the right. Notice it shows a
status of Unloaded.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

36-17
Instructor Guide
Add volumes (create virtual images)

IBM i
Figure 36-8. Add volumes (create virtual images)
AS248.1
Notes:
Click Tape Image Catalogs to see a list of the currently defined catalogs.
Right-click Tape Image Catalogs, and click Add Volume to see the notebook on the next
page.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

36-19
Instructor Guide
Add volume details

IBM i
Figure 36-9. Add volume details
AS248.1
Notes:
On the Add volume details notebook, fill in the following parameters:
On the General tab, fill in the parameters as follows:
From tape image file
Select New image.
To tape image file
Specify the name of the file to contain your virtual volume.
Volume desc
Specify a meaningful descriptive name.
Volume size in MB
Specify the size for your virtual volume.
The Options tab has some very important parameters when adding a new volume. Enter
the following values on the Options tab:
Volume name
Specify the volume ID for your virtual tape.
Allocate storage
Select Volume size.

This parameter specifies, for tape image files, whether to
allocate the entire amount of storage specified on the image

V6.0
Instructor Guide
size parameter. This parameter is only allowed for tape image

catalogs; it is not allowed for reference or dependent image
catalogs.
Uempty
Tape density
Select *VRT256K.
Note
The tape density parameter should correspond to the block size of the physical tape drives
capability where you will eventually copy the virtual volumes to physical tapes. We will not
be copying to physical tape in this exercise.
Click OK.
Repeat the steps on this page to create additional virtual volumes.

36-21
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
List Volumes
IBM i
Figure 36-10. List Volumes
AS248.1
Notes:
To view the volumes in your image catalog, perform the following:
Right-click your image catalog.
Select List Volumes.
That will show the window captured in the lower right on this visual.

36-23
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Load the image catalog

IBM i
Figure 36-11. Load the image catalog
AS248.1
Notes:
The status of your catalog will show Unloaded.
To load the catalog, perform the following:
Right-click your image catalog.
Select Load Image Catalog.
Click the drop-down arrow, and specify your device.
Click the drop-down arrow, and specify your image catalog.
Click OK.
This will update the pane in the right to a status of Loaded.
At this point, you are ready to perform a save operation.

36-25
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
36.2. The backup function

36-27
Instructor Guide
Backup > Policies > Daily: General tab

IBM i
Figure 36-12. Backup > Policies > Daily: General tab
AS248.1
Notes:
By default, System i Navigator will provide the Backup branch in the function tree. Using
this function is equivalent to using the backup capabilities provided under the Operational
Assistant menu interface on 5250 emulation.
To perform a backup function:
Expand your server tree.
Click to expand Backup.
Click Policies.
In this example, we have double-clicked the Daily policy to see the notebook in the
visual.
The General tab provides a place for you to specify whether scheduled system
backups will take place and how much advance notice, if any, the system operator is to
be given of each one.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

36-29
Instructor Guide
Backup > Policies > Daily: What tab

IBM i
Figure 36-13. Backup > Policies > Daily: What tab
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the What tab to view and change:
Data to save: Provides a place for you to specify where the data you want to save is
stored. You can select the data based on user libraries, folders, or user directories. You
can also save security data and configuration data.
Print detailed reports after backup: A summary report is printed for each scheduled
backup. Click this check box to get an additional report that contains a detailed list of
saved objects.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

36-31
Instructor Guide
Backup > Policies > Daily: When tab

IBM i
Figure 36-14. Backup > Policies > Daily: When tab
AS248.1
Notes:
The When tab provides a place for you to specify:
Daily backups: Click a box in the Daily column for each day you want a backup to take
place. The information you specify on this page affects all scheduled backups. For each
day that you have checked, specify the time of day that you want the backup to take
place.
The backups you schedule in the Daily column use the information you specify on the
What and Where pages for the daily backup.
Monthly backups: Click a box in the Monthly column for each day on which you want a
monthly backup to take place. The information you specify on this page affects all
scheduled backups. For each day that you have checked, specify the time of day at
which you want the backup to take place.
The backups you schedule in the Monthly column use the information you specify on
the What and Where pages for the monthly backup policy. The title bar at the top of
each window tells you which scheduled backup you are working with.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

36-33
Instructor Guide
Backup > Policies > Daily: Where tab

IBM i
Figure 36-15. Backup > Policies > Daily: Where tab
AS248.1
Notes:
The Where tab provides a place for you to specify where the data will be backed up for
each scheduled backup. You can specify different information on this page for each backup
policy: daily, weekly, and monthly. The title bar at the top of the window tells you which
backup policy you are working with.
For example, you might want to have your daily backup saved on one set of tapes and your
weekly backup on another set. Or you might want to use a different tape drive for the
monthly backup.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

36-35
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
36.3. BRMS function

36-37
Instructor Guide
Backup, Recovery, and Media Services

IBM i
Figure 36-16. Backup, Recovery, and Media Services
AS248.1
Notes:
If you have Backup, Recovery, and Media Services (BRMS) (5770-BR1) licensed program
product installed on your system, you can install the plug-in for System i Navigator.
This will completely replace the default Backup branch and make the BRMS functions
available when using this graphical interface.
In the example in the visual, we have clicked the *Bkugrp control group to see what is
specified for this control group. Click During to see the details on the next page.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

36-39
Instructor Guide
BRMS: Backup control group policy

IBM i
Figure 36-17. BRMS: Backup control group policy
AS248.1
Notes:
The What tab is used to specify what data is to be saved. Notice the other tabs to get an
idea of what other controls you can put in place when saving this data.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

36-41
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
36.4. Saving an object

If the BRMS plug-in has been installed, you can right-click an object and select the Save
option.

36-43
Instructor Guide
Navigator: Save an object using BRMS

IBM i
Figure 36-18. Navigator: Save an object using BRMS
AS248.1
Notes:
If the BRMS plug-in has been installed, you can right-click an object and select the Save
option. This option is not available on a system that does not have BRMS installed.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

36-45
Instructor Guide
Save information for an object

IBM i
Figure 36-19. Save information for an object
AS248.1
Notes:
Select File Systems > Integrated File Systems > QSYS.LIB > your library, and then
right-click your object and select Properties.
Click the Save tab to display details about when this object was last saved and restored.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

36-47
Instructor Guide
Exercise
IBM i
Exercise: Save using System i Navigator

AS248.1
Notes:
Please refer to the Student Exercise Guide and perform the Save and Restore exercise.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details After completing this exercise, the students should be able to successfully use
system commands to save an object and a library and to restore an object.
Play.

36-49
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or False: Setting up all of the support required for virtual

tape can be performed using System i Navigator.
2. Which of the following is not one of the supported backup
options under the Backup branch?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Daily
Weekly
Monthly
Customized
3. True or False: Installing the BRMS plug-in will overwrite or

replace the Backup branch.
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

The answer is True.

a.
b.
c.
d.
Daily
Weekly
Monthly
Customized
The answer is Customized.

The answer is True.

36-51
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

Describe the steps to display an objects properties and
determine when it was last saved or restored
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose

36-53
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 37. Save using Systems Director Navigator for

IBM i
Estimated time
00:30

In this unit, we will review the graphical steps used to set up virtual
tape support. We will discuss the options available to perform a save
using this interface. Last, we will look at the steps to display the
properties of a backup control group.

Perform the steps necessary to set up virtual tape support using
Describe backup functions performed through BRMS
Describe the steps to perform backup of specific objects using IBM
Systems Director Navigator for i

Accountability:
Unit 37. Save using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i

37-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i
Describe the steps to perform backup of specific objects using
IBM Systems Director Navigator for i
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

37-3
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
37.1. Setting up virtual tape support


37-5
Instructor Guide

IBM i
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CRTIMGCLG
(2)
Up to 256
virtual tape
volumes
ADDIMGCLGE
(3)
10
Any ASP or iASP
LODIMGCLG
(4)
CRTDEVTAP
(1)
Virtual
tape
device
Save
Restore
Disk
Disk

AS248.1
Notes:
Note You can create up to 256 virtual tape volumes.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

37-7
Instructor Guide
Configuration tab
IBM i
Figure 37-3. Configuration tab
AS248.1
Notes:
The first step is to create a virtual device description.
To perform this step:
Open Configuration and Service.
Click Show All Configuration and Services Tasks button.
Right click arrow for Tape Devices.
Click Create Virtual Device to see the visual on the next page.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Note before create virtual devices check QAUTOVRT system value for
appropriate value to create virtual devices.

37-9
Instructor Guide
Create virtual tape device description

IBM i
Figure 37-4. Create virtual tape device description
AS248.1
Notes:
On the Create virtual tape device description:
Type name of tape device
You can add a Text description
You can change default values
Unmark check box
Change Authority
If you specify a Message queue, also specify the Library where the message queue
exist.
Click OK after you set all values.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

37-11
Instructor Guide
Device: Make available

IBM i
Figure 37-5. Device: Make available
AS248.1
Notes:
Clicking OK on the previous page will create the device description.
Click the arrow for Tape devices and choose Stand-Alone Devices to see tape devices.
Notice your device is now listed with a status of Unavailable. Type of 63B0 indicates a
virtual tape device.
Right-click your device and select Make Available to vary on this device and continue
the setup process.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Notice after you created device, you should always click the Refresh button (top
left location on page) to see new one.

37-13
Instructor Guide
Create Tape Image Catalog

IBM i
Figure 37-6. Create Tape Image Catalog
AS248.1
Notes:
The next step is to create the tape image catalog.
To start this process, perform the following:
Right-click Tape devices.
On the drop-down menu, click Tape Image Catalogs to see a list of currently defined
catalogs.
Click down arrow on the Select Action menu and choose Create Image Catalog, then
click Go.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

37-15
Instructor Guide
Create tape image catalog parameters

IBM i
Figure 37-7. Create tape image catalog parameters
AS248.1
Notes:
On the Create Catalog page, specify the following:
Catalog name: Specify a unique descriptive name.
Catalog description: Specify a meaningful description.
Directory path: This is the path where the virtual tapes will be stored in the IFS.
Note
This parameter is case sensitive.
Authority level: Default is Exclude but for basic usage for users Use will enough. You
can also specify name of authority list.
Click OK.
This will create the image catalog. Notice it shows a status of Unloaded.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

37-17
Instructor Guide
Add volumes (create virtual images)

IBM i
Figure 37-8. Add volumes (create virtual images)
AS248.1
Notes:
Click Tape Image Catalogs, then click Add Volume to see the notebook on the next page.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

37-19
Instructor Guide
Add volume parameters

IBM i
Figure 37-9. Add volume parameters
AS248.1
Notes:
On the Add volume details page, fill in the following parameters:
On the General tab:
From tape image file
Select New image.
To tape image file
Specify the name of the file to contain your virtual volume.
Volume desc
Specify a meaningful descriptive name.
Volume size in MB
Specify the size for your virtual volume.
The Options tab has some very important parameters when adding a new volume. Enter
the following values on the Options tab:
Volume name
Specify the volume ID for your virtual tape.
Allocate storage
Select Volume size.

This parameter specifies, for tape image files, whether to
allocate the entire amount of storage specified on the image

V6.0
Instructor Guide
size parameter. This parameter is only allowed for tape image

catalogs; it is not allowed for reference or dependent image
catalogs.
Uempty
Tape density
Select *VRT256K.
Note
The tape density parameter should correspond to the block size
of the physical tape drives capability where you will eventually
copy the virtual volumes to physical tapes.
Click OK.
Repeat the steps on this page to create additional virtual volumes.

37-21
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Volume name: Specify a Volume name of the virtual volume you are adding to
the tape image catalog. Possible values are:
Generate: (default) The volume name will be generated by the system.
character value The volume name can be 1 to 6 characters in length. The volume
name must contain only alphanumeric characters (A through Z, $, #, @, and 0 through
9), and cannot have a prefix or contain blanks. If the virtual tape volume is being
created as a standard labeled tape, the volume name will also be used as the volume
identifier in the tape volume label. Each volume name in the catalog must be unique.
Character code: Specify the character code in which the volume label is written. All
data that is not save data written after the label must be in the same code. Codes
cannot be intermixed on a tape that is not a save tape. This parameter is only used for a
volume type of Standard labeled.
EBCDIC (default): The volume label is written in EBCDIC and is an IBM standard label.
All additional data must also be written in EBCDIC.
ASCII: The volume label is written in ASCII and is an ANSI standard label. All additional
data must also be written in ASCII.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
List virtual volumes

IBM i
Figure 37-10. List virtual volumes
AS248.1
Notes:
To view the volumes in your image catalog, perform the following:
Click your image catalog.
Select List Volumes.
That will show the window captured in the bottom on this visual.

37-23
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Load the image catalog

IBM i
Figure 37-11. Load the image catalog
AS248.1
Notes:
The status of your catalog will show Unloaded.
To load the catalog, perform the following:
Click your image catalog.
Select Load Image Catalog.
Specify your device.
Click OK.
At this point, you are ready to perform a save operation.

37-25
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
37.2. BRMS function


37-27
Instructor Guide
Backup, Recovery and Media Services

IBM i
Figure 37-12. Backup, Recovery and Media Services
AS248.1
Notes:
If you have Backup, Recovery, and Media Services (BRMS) (5770-BR1) licensed program
product installed on your system, you will see the BRMS on System Director Navigator for i
link.
You can use the main buttons on the welcome screen or use the Advanced button to begin
the process to configure BRMS to perform a backup. Click Advanced to see the Web page
on the next page in your student guide.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

37-29
Instructor Guide
BRMS tasks
IBM i
Figure 37-13. BRMS tasks
AS248.1
Notes:
This screen allows you to perform the following:
Backup, Recovery, and Media Services for IBM I - Select actions such as displaying
the global policy properties, restoring data, printing reports, and managing devices.
Archive Control Groups - Create, run, display and maintain archive control groups.
Backup Control Groups - Create, run, display and maintain backup control groups.
Media Policies - Display media policies information.
Move Policies - Display move policy information.
Volumes - Display volume information.
Media Pools - Display media pool information.
Tasks - Tasks which are scheduled, executing, or have been completed.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Some basic function will be explained but more is the subject of another course.

37-31
Instructor Guide
BRMS drop-down menu: Manage Devices

IBM i
Figure 37-14. BRMS drop-down menu: Manage Devices
AS248.1
Notes:
After you add any tape or library devices, you have to perform the following:
Click Backup Recovery and Media Services for IBM i.
Click Manage devices this is this similar to running the INZBRMS OPTION(*DEVICE)
command. Otherwise, you will not see newly added devices on any of the BRMS
wizards.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

37-33
Instructor Guide
Manage devices: New Media Device

IBM i
Figure 37-15. Manage devices: New Media Device
AS248.1
Notes:
On Manage Devices window:
Use Select Action pull-down menu and select New Media Device.
On the New Device screen, click pull-down arrow and choose Available device.
Click OK.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

37-35
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
37.3. Saving an object


37-37
Instructor Guide
BRMS: Backup specific items

IBM i
Figure 37-16. BRMS: Backup specific items
AS248.1
Notes:
Click the arrow for Backup, Recovery and Media Services to see the drop-down menu.
One of the options available is Backup Specific items. Click this option to start a wizard
that will step you through the steps to identify what is to be saved. At this point, you are
now performing a save using BRMS .

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

37-39
Instructor Guide
BRMS: New Backup Control Group wizard

IBM i
Figure 37-17. BRMS: New Backup Control Group wizard
AS248.1
Notes:
BRMS will also provide an option to create a new Backup Control Group. A backup control
group is used to specify what to save, how to save it and where to save it.
Click the arrow for Backup Control Group and select New from the drop-down menu.
This will start the New Backup Control Group wizard which will step through the steps to
define what is to be saved, as well as.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

37-41
Instructor Guide
System: Run a command

IBM i
Figure 37-18. System: Run a command
AS248.1
Notes:
Systems Director Navigator allows you Run a command when using this interface.
To run a command, perform the following:
Click System task.
Click Run a command link to see the visuals on the next two pages.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

37-43
Instructor Guide
Prompting the save object command

IBM i
Figure 37-19. Prompting the save object command
AS248.1
Notes:
To save an object, you will fill in the parameters for the Save Object (SAVOBJ) command.
If you know the format for the command, you can type it into the window in the upper left. It
is recommended that you type in the command, then press the Prompt button to see the
window captured in the lower right; this way the system assists you with filling in the correct
values to the correct parameters.
Click OK to run the command.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

37-45
Instructor Guide
Prompting the save library command

IBM i
Figure 37-20. Prompting the save library command
AS248.1
Notes:
To save an object, you will fill in the parameters for the Save Library (SAVLIB) command.
If you know the format for the command, you can type it into the window in the upper left. It
is recommended that you type in the command, then press the Prompt button to see the
window captured in the lower right; this way the system assists yo with filling in the correct
values to the correct parameters.
Click OK to run the command.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.

37-47
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint
IBM i

tape can be performed using IBM System Director Navigator
for i.
2. True or False: Installing the BRMS allow you to backup
objects using IBM System Director Navigator for i.
3. How many virtual tape volumes you can create for virtual
tape?
a.
b.
c.
d.
64
126
256
*nomax
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

for i.
The answer is True.
2. True or False: Installing BRMS allow you to backup objects

using IBM System Director Navigator for i.
The answer is True.
tape?
a.
b.
c.
d.
64
128
256
*nomax
The answer is 256.


37-49
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i
Describe the steps to perform backup of specific objects using
IBM Systems Director Navigator for i
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose

37-51
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 38. Restore concepts and overview

Estimated time
00:20

In this unit, we overview the process involved in restoring data onto
your system. We will review the menu and commands available on the
system to perform restore operations. We will also discuss what is
restored when selecting specific options off of the Restore menu. We
will also overview the steps involved when performing a full system
restore.

Explain the options available to restore data

Explain the function served by each of the restore commands
List what is restored with menu options 21, 22, and 23
List and explain the steps involved when doing a full system
restore

Accountability:
Exercise

38-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

restore
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details After having successfully completed this unit, the student should be able to use
tape and save files to save objects or the entire system, and they should be able to use
tape or save files to restore objects or the entire system.
This unit starts with tape fundamentals and continue with save and restore menus and
commands.
All systems require some means of saving data offline. Let us examine the IBM i process of
accomplishing this task.
In this unit, there is no access for Web topic since this function is not supported through
that interface.

38-3
Instructor Guide
Restoring objects to disk

IBM i
Restore
command
Tape
Disk
Save file or virtual tape

Figure 38-2. Restoring objects to disk
AS248.1
Notes:
Objects are saved to be able to recover them in case of a problem or emergency.
The Restore menu and commands provide the tools used to restore objects back onto the
system.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

38-5
Instructor Guide
Restore menu
IBM i
Figure 38-3. Restore menu
AS248.1
Notes:
The Restore menu provides easy access to all restore commands.
This menu can be accessed by:
Using the GO RESTORE command
Selecting option 3 (General system tasks) on the Main menu and then option 7
(Restore) from the General System Tasks menu.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Point out to the students the similarities between this menu and the Save menu.
of the next visuals while providing commentary for the different parts of the file.

38-7
Instructor Guide
Restore commands
IBM i
What is restored?
RSTLIB
RSTDLO
RSTOBJ
RST
RSTUSRPRF
RSTAUT
RSTCFG
Figure 38-4. Restore commands
AS248.1
Notes:
There is a corresponding restore command for each save command.
What do each of these commands restore?
RSTLIB: Restores one library or all libraries saved with a SAVLIB command.
RSTDLO: Restores one or more documents, folders, and distribution objects (mail).
RSTOBJ: Restores one or more objects. Objects saved with a SAVLIB command can
be individually restored with this command.
RST: Restores a copy of one or more objects that can be used in the IFS.
RSTUSRPRF: Restores one or more named user profiles or restores all saved security
information, including all user profiles, authorization lists, and authority holders.
RSTAUT: Restores all object authority to all user profiles after the profiles and objects
have been restored to the system.
RSTCFG: Restores one or more system configuration objects.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Be brief.
There is no restore command for the tapes produced with SAVSTG. To restore these, a
D IPL must be performed and then Restore storage chosen from the DST options. The
restore disk configuration must match the save disk configuration. Everything must be
restored.
Did you notice when looking at the restore commands that there is no command to restore
the system? In order to restore the system, you need to perform an IPL from tape. This
process is discussed in the next visual.

38-9
Instructor Guide
What is restored?
IBM i
Restore
menu option
21
Restore
menu
option 22
Restore
menu
option 23
All IBM-supplied libraries, including those

containing user data
All user libraries
All mail, folders, documents
LIC
All IBM-supplied libraries that do not contain

user data
All IBM-supplied directories that do not
contain user data
All IBM-supplied libraries and directories
that contain user data
Y
Y
Y
Figure 38-5. What is restored?
AS248.1
Notes:
Where option 21 on the Save menu is used to save the entire system, notice that option 21
on the Restore menu does not restore the entire system.
The steps to restore an entire system will be overviewed later in this unit.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Note that LIC and OS are not restored using either option 21, 22 or 23.
The steps to do a complete system restore will be covered in upcoming visuals.

38-11
Instructor Guide
Restore menu option 21: System and user data

IBM i

ENDSBS SBS(*ALL) OPTION(*IMMED)
RSTUSRPRF
RSTCFG OBJ(*ALL)
RSTLIB SAVLIB(*NONSYS)
RSTDLO DLO(*ALL) SAVFLR(*ANY)
RST OBJ(('/*') ('/QSYS.LIB' *OMIT) ('/QDLS' *OMIT))
RSTAUT USRPRF(*ALL)
STRSBS SBSD(controlling-subsystem)
Figure 38-6. Restore menu option 21: System and user data
AS248.1
Notes:
Select this option to restore a system other than the i licensed program.
delivery mode
Ends all subsystems
Restores:
- User profiles
- Configuration objects
- All IBM-supplied libraries, including those containing user data
- Folders, documents, and mail
- All objects in directories
- Private authorities
Starts controlling subsystem

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

38-13
Instructor Guide
Restore menu option 22: System data

IBM i

RSTUSRPRF USRPRF(*ALL)
RSTCFG OBJ(*ALL)
RSTLIB SAVLIB(*IBM)
RST OBJ('/QIBM/ProdData')
('/QOpenSys/QIBM/ProdData'))
Figure 38-7. Restore menu option 22: System data
AS248.1
Notes:
Select this option to restore system data.
delivery mode
Ends all subsystems
Restores:
-

All IBM-supplied libraries that do not contain user data
All IBM-supplied objects in directories that do not contain user data

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

38-15
Instructor Guide
Restore menu option 23: All user data

IBM i

RSTCFG OBJ(*ALL)
RSTLIB SAVLIB(*ALLUSR)
RST
OBJ(('/*') ('/QSYS.LIB' *OMIT)

('/QDLS' *OMIT) ('/QIBM/ProdData' *OMIT)
('/QOpenSys/QIBM/ProdData' *OMIT))
RSTAUT USRPRF(*ALL)
Figure 38-8. Restore menu option 23: All user data
AS248.1
Notes:
Select this option to restore all user data, which includes IBM-supplied libraries and
directories that contain user data. This option performs the following operations:
delivery mode
Ends all subsystems
Restores:
- Security objects, including user profiles
- Device configuration objects
- All IBM-supplied libraries and directories that contain user data
- All mail
- All folders
- All documents
- Authorities

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

38-17
Instructor Guide
Complete system restore (1 of 2)

IBM i
These are the steps necessary to restore a complete system.

1
D mode IPL
Load last set of save tapes
WRKCFGSTS
If performing an attended restore, skip to step eight.

If performing an unattended restore, proceed to the next step.
WRKRPYLE
ADDRPYLE SEQNBR(xxxx) MSGID(CPA3709) RPY('G')
CHGJOB INQMSGRPY (*SYSRPYL)
Figure 38-9. Complete system restore (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
To restore your entire system, including LIC and QSYS, the illustrated steps must be
executed in the order listed.
D mode IPL is an IPL from tape instead of disk. Detailed instructions on performing a D
mode IPL can be found in the Backup and Recovery manual. If the LIC on your Power i is
intact, you might be able to perform a manual IPL and select option 2 on the IPL or Install
the System display instead of performing an alternate IPL.
The install of the operating system and of LIC must use the first volume of the IBM
distribution CD-ROM or the first volume of the most recent SAVSYS tape. It is, therefore,
very important that your SAVSYS be on a tape which is compatible with your alternate IPL
tape drive.
After you have restored the operating system and LIC, load the correct volume of your last
set of save tapes and make the tape device ready.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Use the following command to ensure that any devices not used in the restore operation
are varied off and that any devices you are using for the restore operation (workstations,
tape devices, and tape controllers) are varied on:
WRKCFGSTS
If you are doing an attended restore, skip to Step 8.
If you are doing an unattended restore, continue with the next step.
This and the next two steps prevent your save operation from stopping because of
unanswered messages.
Use the following command to display the reply list sequence numbers to find what
numbers are available for use:
WRKRPYLE
If MSGID (CPA3709) is not already in your reply list, add it. For xxxx, substitute an unused
sequence number from one through 9999.
ADDRPYLE SEQNBR(xxxx) MSGID(CPA3709) RPY('G')
Use the following command to change your job to use the reply list:
CHGJOB INQMSGRPY(*SYSRPYL)

38-19
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details To restore an entire system, including LIC and QSYS, the steps shown on this
and the next visual must be run in the order shown.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Complete system restore (2 of 2)

IBM i
GO RESTORE, Option 21
Reply to prompts on Specify Command Defaults display

and other system displays
10
Following commands are run

(load next volume when prompted):
RSTCFG OBJ(*ALL)
RSTLIB SAVLIB(*NONSYS)
RST DEV('/QSYS.LIB/TAPxx.DEVD')
OBJ(('/*')('/QSYS.LIB' *OMIT)
('/QDLS' *OMIT))
RSTAUT
STRSBS SBSD(controlling subsystem)
11 DSPJOBLOG * *PRINT
Figure 38-10. Complete system restore (2 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
Select option 21 from the Restore menu.
The Specify Command Defaults display is shown. Respond to the prompts on the display.
For example, you are prompted for the tape device you are restoring from, whether you
want to perform an unattended restore or change the defaults on the RSTxxx commands,
and whether you want to restore messages sent in *BREAK or *NOTIFY mode.
Note
Depending on your response to the prompts, you might be shown another prompt display
to which you will have to respond.
The system runs the commands shown on the display to restore the entire system. As the
system performs each major step in the save operation, you are shown the prompt display
for that step. Each step can take a long time, so be patient.

38-21
Instructor Guide
As the system restore occurs, messages are displayed asking you to load the next volume
(or tape). Load the tape and respond to the message.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

38-23
Instructor Guide
Exercises
IBM i
Exercise: Restore using 5250 emulation
Exercise: Restore using System i Navigator

AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.

38-25
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. Which command is used to restore configuration information?

a.
b.
c.
d.
RSTCFG
RSTDLO
RSTLIB
RSTOBJ
2. Which of the following is not a supported restore device?

a.
b.
c.
d.
Physical tape
Virtual tape
Save file
Memory stick
3. What type of IPL is required to restore the entire system?

a.
b.
c.
d.
A
B
C
D
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

a.
b.
c.
d.
RSTCFG
RSTDLO
RSTLIB
RSTOBJ
The answer is RSTCFG.

a. Physical tape
b. Virtual tape
c. Save file
d. Memory stick

a. A
b. B
c. C
d. D
The answer is D.

38-27
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

restore
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Develop a plan for saving and restoring, and document that plan.
Let the System i Navigator, the Save menu, or Operational Assistant backup menus help
you to ensure complete and frequent backups.

38-29
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 39. Problem determination using 5250

emulation
Estimated time
00:35

The system keeps track of all problems that occur and notifies you
through message queues and logs. You might need to analyze a
problem prior to calling IBM for service. IBM i provides many tools
(commands, menus, displays, message queues, and logs) to aid you
in identifying, analyzing, and reporting problems.

Identify a problem
Analyze a problem
Report a problem

Accountability:
Exercise
Unit 39. Problem determination using 5250 emulation

39-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Identify a problem
Analyze a problem
Report a problem
AS248.1
Notes:
This unit presents the system tools available to help you to determine whether there is a
problem with your system and, if there is a problem, to gather information about it.
Job logs and history logs are discussed, as well as how you can report a problem to IBM
through the electronic customer support (ECS) communications line.
After successfully completing this unit, you should be able to use the tools provided as part
of IBM i to identify, analyze, and report a problem to IBM or another service provider.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

39-3
Instructor Guide
Problem solving tools

IBM i
System
i
Navigat
or
ST
YS
RCP
CN
JOB
K
R
W
OG
L
B
B
JO
TJ O
C
A
WR K
WRKS
Y
HISTO SSTS
RY
QSYS LOG
O
QSYS PR
MSG
WRK
PR B
i tool box
Figure 39-2. Problem solving tools
AS248.1
Notes:
The system cannot solve all problems for you, so i helps you by providing the description of
a given problem and the tools to help solve it. The tools provided to help you manage
problems on your server are:
Messages
Error messages
System reference codes
Logs
Alerts
Problem-handling menus
ECS
Error codes
The problem analysis functions that your server provides allow you to manage both
system-detected and user-defined problems. Your server provides functions for:
Problem analysis

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Problem logging and tracking

Problem reporting
Problem correction
The structured problem management server helps you and your service provider quickly
and accurately manage problems as they occur on the server.

39-5
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The system cannot solve all system problems, but it does provide you with a
description of problems and a number of tools to help you solve these problems.
Each of these tools is discussed in this unit.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Problem determination steps

IBM i
1. Server detects hardware error

2. Error notification sent
3. Problem record is created
4. System error log
5. System operator message
6. Problem analysis starts
Figure 39-3. Problem determination steps
AS248.1
Notes:
The following is an example of the flow when you are managing a problem:
1. The server detects a hardware error.
2. An error notification is sent to the server.
3. A problem record is created with configuration information, a system reference code,
the name of the reporting device, and other information.
4. The system error log records the error.
5. A message is sent to the system operators message queue.
6. Problem analysis starts with the message.
The results of problem analysis are automatically stored, along with the collected problem
information. At this point, you can report the problem to your service provider.

39-7
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
multimedia library of Elluminate in place of the next two visuals.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Using the Work with Job command

IBM i
Figure 39-4. Using the Work with Job command
AS248.1
Notes:
The WRKJOB command offers problem determination information. It consists of two
displays that contain extensive information about a job to help you in determining what the
job is doing or has done.
The full job name appears across the top of the display (Job name, User name, and
Number). From this menu, you can access everything that the system knows about this job.
You can select one option at a time, or you can select all of the options that appear on the
two displays with option 30, which appears on the second display but is available from
either display.

39-9
Instructor Guide
You access the Work with Job menu by entering the WRKJOB command on a command
line. It can also be accessed by doing one of the following:
From Power i Main menu, select option 1 (User tasks) => option 1 (Display or change
your job).
Enter go job and select option 1 (Work with jobs) or option 2 (Work with all active job
statistics).
On either the Work with User Jobs or Work with Active Jobs display, select option 5
(Work with).

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details IBM i keeps extensive information for every job on the system. That information
is available to assist the operator in determining what a job is doing or has done.
In addition to displaying information about a job, this menu has options that allow the
operator to change the job's attributes and hold, release, or end the job.

39-11
Instructor Guide
Option 10: Job Log or DSPJOBLOG

IBM i
Figure 39-5. Option 10: Job Log or DSPJOBLOG
AS248.1
Notes:
The job log can be viewed by selecting option 10 off of the WRKJOB display. IBM i keeps a
separate, detailed record of the activity of each job that runs on the Power i. This low-level
trace of the commands run by a job and of the system messages the job receives is called
a job log. You can use it to aid in problem determination.
You can view the job log for your own interactive job by entering the Display Job Log
command (DSPJOBLOG) on a command line. You can also use this command to display
the job log of another active job, but to do so you must know the full name of that job.
Perhaps the simplest way to view your job log while your job is active is to go to the
command entry screen (F10 from most menus or call qcmd).
While a job is active in the system or on a job queue, you can view its log by selecting
option 10 (Display job log) from the Work with Job menu. Regardless of how you do it, if
insufficient detail is shown to enable you to determine precisely what the job has done, F10
will cause all available details to be displayed.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
The bottom display in the visual appears after F10 is pressed from the top display in the
visual. You need to use the Page Up and Page Down keys to view the complete job log.
Now you have enough information to determine what has happened in the job.
Here is an explanation of each of the special symbols the job log contains.
>>
The running command or the next command to be run. For example, if a CL or

high-level language program was called, the call to the program is shown.
>
The processing of the command is complete.
..
The command has not yet been processed.
Reply message. This symbol marks both those messages needing a reply and
those that have been answered.

39-13
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details A job log contains information related to requests entered for a job, such as
commands in the job, commands in a CL program, and messages. Each job has an
associated job log that can contain:
The commands in the job
The commands in a CL program if the CL program was created with the LOG(*YES) or
the LOG(*JOB) option and a Change Job (CHGJOB) command was run with the
LOGCLPGM(*YES) option
All messages (the message and help text for the message) sent to the requester and
not removed from the program message queues
Insufficient detail might be displayed to allow problem determination. Pressing F10 (Display
detailed messages) brings up all available detail.
In the sample job log shown on this visual, point out the commands that have been run and
discuss the special symbols (>>, >,..,?) that can be shown in a job log.
The bottom panel in this visual is the detail message display of the top window. Now the
operator should have enough information to determine exactly what the job has done.
The job log for a batch job is created when the job is placed on a job queue. The log
contains a trace of all the activity of that job for as long as it is active. If the job is completed
successfully, the job log is deleted from the system. If the job fails, the job log is spooled to
a printer.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Job log printing

IBM i
Interactive job
Job log
DSPJOBLOG
OUTPUT(*PRINT)
Batch job
SIGNOFF
SIGNOFF (*LIST)
Job log
Job log
Job log
DSPJOBLOG
OUTPUT(*PRINT)
X
RUNS
SUCCESSFULLY
Job log
RUNS
UNSUCCESSFULLY
Output
queue
PRINT
Job log
Figure 39-6. Job log printing
AS248.1
Notes:
As long as a job is active on the system, its job log is accessible so that it can help with
problem determination; however, when a job ends, the system uses several controls to
determine whether the job log should be spooled to an output queue or simply deleted from
the system. If a job is completed and you later determine that something went wrong while
it was active, the job log might be the only available means of performing problem
determination.
The system starts logging information in the job log for an interactive job as soon as you
sign on to a workstation and continues to log activity for that job in the same job log until
you sign off. There is a parameter on the SIGNOFF command that overrides all other
controls regarding what happens to the job log of an interactive job when the job ends. The
system default value for the LOG parameter on the SIGNOFF command is *NOLIST, which
instructs i to delete the job log for the interactive job. There is nothing that you, as system
operator, can do to change this default action or to force all users to sign off using the value
*LIST for the LOG parameter, but your Power implementer can do both.

39-15
Instructor Guide
If you know the full name of a job, and can execute the DSPJOBLOG command while it is
active, you can print its job log by specifying OUTPUT (*PRINT) on the DSPJOBLOG
command.
It is recommended that you use the Operational Assistant, presented later in this unit, to
help manage the job logs and automate their cleanup. Using the Operational Assistant, all
job logs are placed in a special output queue called QEZJOBLOG.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
perform an application share of 5250 emulation for the next five visuals covering the details
demo on your instructor PC of 5250 emulation for the next five visuals covering the details

39-17
Instructor Guide
Work with Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB)

IBM i
Figure 39-7. Work with Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB)
AS248.1
Notes:
The Work with Active Jobs display gives information similar to the Active Jobs display in
System i Navigator. If, after an elapsed time of more than one minute and with more than
just a few jobs running on your system, the CPU% column for any one job is significantly
higher than for other jobs on the system, it could mean that the job is in a loop or is logging
many errors. Keep in mind, however, that on a lightly loaded system, this might not be
abnormal. Also, some jobs normally use a great deal of processor time.
If you suspect that a job is having problems, hold that job using option 3 on this display
while you investigate the problem further. Depending on the results of your investigation,
you can then either release or end the job with options 6 or 4 on this display, respectively.
To access the Work with Active Jobs display, you can enter option 3 (General system
tasks) on the Power i Main menu, option 1 (Jobs) on the General System Tasks menu, and
then option 2 (Work with all active job statistics) on the Job menu. You can also enter
wrkactjob on a command line.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details If the operator suspects that a job is having problems, he or she can hold the job
by using option 3 on this display while he or she investigates the problem.

39-19
Instructor Guide
Work with System Status (WRKSYSSTS)

IBM i
Figure 39-8. Work with System Status (WRKSYSSTS)
AS248.1
Notes:
The Work with System Status display is another tool that helps you to check for system
performance problems.
Unless you always have batch jobs running, advise management whenever CPU utilization
is continually greater than 80%. (Your interactive users will have probably already started
complaining about response time.) Note that this percentage is meaningful only if the
elapsed time is at least five minutes.
To view information gathered over five minute or more, enter the Work with System
Status (WRKSYSSTS) command on a command line, and, as soon as the display
appears, press Enter. After at least five minutes have elapsed, enter the command again.
IBM i remembers when you entered it the first time and calculates CPU utilization over the
elapsed time.
Failure to manage spooled files (typically job logs) can cause the number of jobs in the
system to range into the thousands. The more jobs the system has to manage, the less
productive work it can do.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
The percentage of permanent and temporary addresses used should never exceed 90.
You might not be able to do anything about this other than notify management.
For optimum performance, the auxiliary storage percentage used should be kept below
70% or 80%. Again, you might be able to do little except keep management informed.
There is a lot of online help available with this display. If you are responsible for keeping the
system running smoothly (and what system operator is not?) you should take the time to
read all of it.
To access the Work with System Status display, you can enter the WRKSYSSTS command
on a command line. You can also enter:
1. Option 3 (General system tasks) on the Power i Main menu
2. Option 2 (Status) on the General System Tasks menu
3. Option 6 (Work with system status) on the Status menu

39-21
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Some guidelines for normal values and possible corrective actions follow.
Advise the students that, since every Power is different, norms for their systems might
differ from those stated here.
In the next few visuals, we look at the tools provided with i to help you analyze system
problems.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Work with Disk Status (WRKDSKSTS)

IBM i
Figure 39-9. Work with Disk Status (WRKDSKSTS)
AS248.1
Notes:
The Work with Disk Status (WRKDSKSTS) display shows performance and status
information about the disk units on the system. It displays:
Number of units currently on the system

Type of each disk unit
Size of disk space
Whether the disk is currently on the system
Percentage of disk space used
I/O requests per second
Average size of the I/O requests
Average number of read and write requests
Average amount of data read and written
Percentage of time the disk is being used
When F11 (Display storage) is pressed, additional information is displayed, such as the
ASP status and protected and unprotected storage information.

39-23
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Elapsed time: The time that has elapsed between the measurement start time and the
current system time.
Disk unit identifier: The disk unit identifier is the same number used by the display disk
configuration function of system service tools. If the disk unit identifier is zero, the disk unit
is not configured.
Type of disk unit: The type of disk unit.
Size of disk space: The total amount of storage that the unit can contain in millions of
bytes.
Disk space in use: The percentage of the disk that is currently allocated. If the unit is an
independent ASP which is currently in a varied off state, this field might be blank.
I/O requests: The average number of I/O requests for read and write operations that
occurred per second during the elapsed time.
Size of request: The average size of an I/O request in KB during the elapsed time.
Read requests: The average number of requests per second to transfer data from the disk
unit during the elapsed time.
Write requests: The average number of requests per second to transfer data to the disk
unit during the elapsed time.
Data read: The average amount of data, in KB, transferred from the disk unit, per request,
during the elapsed time.
Data written: The average amount of data, in KB, transferred to the disk unit, per request,
during the elapsed time.
Percentage of use: The estimated percentage of time the disk unit is being used during
the elapsed time. This estimate is based on the number of I/O requests, the amount of data
transferred, and the performance characteristics of the type of disk unit. This field is blank if
the performance characteristics of the disk units are not available.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
USERHELP menu
IBM i
Figure 39-10. USERHELP menu
AS248.1
Notes:
The options on this menu provide additional information about the system and are useful in
attempting to resolve problems. Use this information when you want to work with a
technical support person to resolve a problem.
Option 1. How to use help: This option explains how to display help for:
Displays and for each field in them
Power i commands
Option 2. Information Assistant options: This option displays a menu where you look at
the following types of information:
The various sources of information available
How to comment on information
The highlights of what is new in this release
You can also start online education, start using the question and answer (Q & A)
database, or work with problems.

39-25
Instructor Guide
Option 3. Display workstation user: Select this option to display information about who is
using this workstation.
Option 10. Save information to help resolve a problem: Select this option to save
sign-on session information that technical support persons will need later on in order to
perform a problem analysis.
Option 11. Technical support tasks: This menu provides information that can help
resolve problems or maintain the system. This information is normally used by a technical
support person. Options are available to:
Display system operator messages

Work with problems with the system
Work with program temporary fixes (PTFs)
Duplicate your screen on another workstation
Connect to technical support
Option 11 is not shown if you do not have the correct authority.
Option 80. Temporary sign-off: Select this option to temporarily sign off from your
workstation. When you sign back on to the same workstation, you should be returned to the
display you were viewing when you signed off.
You cannot temporarily sign off from a pass-through device. See your system operator
to find out how your Power is set up.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

39-27
Instructor Guide
TECHHELP menu
IBM i
Figure 39-11. TECHHELP menu
AS248.1
Notes:
The Technical Support Tasks menu provides options to help resolve problems on the
system.
Option 1. Display messages for the system operator: Displays all messages in the
system operator message queue (QSYSOPR) and allows you to work with them. The
system operator message queue can contain messages for system problems, such as
those affecting the printing out of forms.
Option 10. Work with problems with the system: Allows you to analyze or report
problems that were not detected by the system.
Option 11. Work with PTFs: Allows you to select commands from the Program Temporary
Fix Commands menu to bypass a defect in a current release of a licensed program.
Option 12. Copy your screen on another display station: Allows you to copy your
display station screens onto another display station so that a technical support person can
observe what is happening and diagnose problems.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Option 13. Stop copying your screen: Stops copying your display station screens onto
another display station.
Option 20. Connect to technical support: Allows a support organization to access your
system from a remote workstation. It also creates and makes available (varies on) all the
devices needed for that remote support. You must provide a telephone number, a user ID,
and a password before the support person can sign on to your system.
Option 21. Disconnect from technical support: Ends remote support and makes
unavailable (varies off) and deletes all the devices that were created when remote support
was started.
Option 80. Temporary sign-off: Select this option to temporarily sign off from your
workstation. When you sign back on to the same workstation, you should be returned to the
display you were viewing when you signed off.
You cannot temporarily sign off from a pass-through device. See your system operator
to find out how your Power is set up.

39-29
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Option 1 or DSPMSG QSYSOPR

IBM i
Display Messages
Queue . . . . . . . .
Library. . . . . .
Severity . . . . . . .
: QSYSOPR
: QSYS
: 40
System: i520DVL2
Program . . . . : *DSPMSG
Library . . . . :
Delivery . . . . : *BREAK
Type reply (if required), press Enter.

* Error with device DSP06 on work station controller CTL01.
Device DSP06 no longer communicating
F3= Exit
F11= Remove a message
F13= Remove all
F16= Remove all except unanswered
* - Work with problem allowed for message.
F10= Display all

F22= Display list details
F14= Work with Problem

F24= More keys
Bottom
F12= Cancel
F24= More keys
F21= Select assistance level
Figure 39-12. Option 1 or DSPMSG QSYSOPR
AS248.1
Notes:
To see system operator messages using a 5250 emulation session, use the command to
display the system operator messages. The command is DSPMSG QSYSOPR.
Often the only thing wrong on your Power is that there is an unanswered message in one of
the system message queues. Always check for messages when users are experiencing
problems.
An asterisk (*) to the left of a message on the QSYSOPR message queue means that
problem analysis can be run for that message. To run problem analysis, position the cursor
on the message and press F14 (Work with Problem).
The ability to run problem analysis from the Display Messages display is an added value
that comes when using a 5250 emulation session. This function is not available with the
GUI interfaces (System i Navigator or Systems Director Navigator for IBM i).

39-31
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Problem Summary Form

IBM i
Problem Summary Form

Date
Time
PMR or service request no.

Describe problem
Message
1 Record the mode.

2 Set the mode to Manual.
3 Place a check on the line below to indicate
which lights on the control panel are on.
Power on
Processor/Active/Activity
System Attention
Figure 39-13. Problem Summary Form
AS248.1
Notes:
These forms are located in the back of the Handling and Reporting System Problems
chapter in the Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling manual.
Use this form to record problems when problem analysis cannot be run. This form is called
the Problem Summary Form. The information you record on this form can then be sent to
your service provider. There are different forms for different system models.
Follow all of the instructions carefully. It is better to record too much information than not
enough.

39-33
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Problem Handling menu

IBM i
Figure 39-14. Problem Handling menu
AS248.1
Notes:
You can also use the Problem Handling menu to analyze problems. You can access this
menu by entering go problem on a command line.
Option 2. Work with problems: on this menu allows you to view problems that have been
detected on your system and to select one for analysis. These problems will have been
detected by your system, by you (the user), or by an application.
Option 4. Display system operator message: allows you to view messages in
QSYSOPR.
Option 5. Display the history log: allows you to view the history log, which offers a
high-level overview of all system activity.

39-35
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details A user-written application can look out for problems and write the information to
the problem log.
Transition statement We will now look at options 2 and 5 in detail.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Option 2 or WRKPRB
IBM i
F14=Analyze new problem
F15=Sort by Date F18=Work with alerts
F24=More keys
Figure 39-15. Option 2 or WRKPRB
AS248.1
Notes:
Selecting option 2 from the Problem Handling menu, or entering the WRKPRB command,
brings up the Work with Problems display. This display shows a list of problems called the
problem log.
As each problem is identified, the system assigns it a unique problem ID, a 10-character
identifier you can use to name a problem and its corresponding record of detailed
information.
The first five characters indicate the date on which the problem was recorded.
The next five characters indicate the sequence number of the problem record.
These characters, combined with the network ID and the control point name are used
by the system to ensure that each problem can be uniquely identified.
Normally, you would select an OPENED problem on the Work with Problems display. Once
a problem analysis has been run, the status changes to READY. If the problem needs to be
sent to IBM for assistance in solving, you must attach your name and address to it. The

39-37
Instructor Guide
status is then changed to PREPARED. Once problems have been prepared, they can be
sent to IBM, at which point the status changes to SENT.
Delete old problems on a regular basis by using option 4 (Delete) on the Work with
Problems display or the Delete Problem (DLTPRB) command. Only problems older than
the number of days set in the QPRBHLDITV system value can be deleted in this way.
Operational Assistant takes care of this cleanup task in addition to cleaning up job logs, as
mentioned earlier.
Option 5 (Display details) on the Work with Problems display allows you to display details
about a problem, while option 6 (Print details) allows you to print them.
Pressing F24 (More keys) displays F14 (Analyze new problem). You can use F14 or the
Analyze Problem (ANZPRB) command to open a new problem of your own.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The log of problems continues to expand and can take up considerable disk
space on a system. Delete old problems regularly by using either option 4 (Delete) on the
Work with Problems display or the Delete Problem (DLTPRB) command. The
QPRBHLDITV (Problem log hold interval) system value specifies the minimum number of
days for which a problem is kept in the problem log. The default for QPRBHLDITV is 30
days, whereupon the problem can be deleted.
The system automatically deletes problem logs based upon the settings used in the system
cleanup (GO CLEANUP, System journals and system logs parameter) and the
QPRBHLDITV system value. If the value in the GO CLEANUP, System journals and
system logs parameter is less than the value specified in the QPRBHLDITV system value,
the latter takes precedence.
If users wants to open a new problem of their own, they can press F24 (More keys) on the
Work with Problems display. When they do this, F14 (Analyze new problem) appears on
the function key line. They can either use F14 or the Analyze Problem (ANZPRB)
command to open a new problem.

39-39
Instructor Guide
Status for a problem

IBM i
OPENED
READY
PREPARED
SENT
ANSWERED
VERIFIED
CLOSED
Figure 39-16. Status for a problem
AS248.1
Notes:
The status of each problem is also shown. The possible status values are:
OPENED: The problem was identified and a problem record was created.
READY: Problem analysis information has been added to the problem record.
PREPARED: The problem has been prepared for reporting.
SENT: The problem record has been sent to a service provider, but the information
needed to correct the problem has not returned. The information needed is returned at
a later time, or a service representative contacts you.
ANSWERED: An answer to the service request issued with the problem record,
including the information needed to correct the problem, has been returned by the
service provider, or answer information has been added by an operator on this system.
The answer information might include PTFs or a list of the possible causes of the
problem. If the answer involves PTFs, the list of PTFs that correct the problem is
available for viewing.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
VERIFIED: The problem has been resolved by PTFs or equipment repairs, and an
operator has verified that the problem has been corrected.
CLOSED: All work on the problem record is complete. Information about the problem
can be viewed, but no update operations can be performed on this problem record.
A short message or a description of the type of problem the system has detected is also
shown.

39-41
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Analyze a problem (1 of 2)
IBM i
Work with Problem
Problem ID . . . . . .
Origin . . . . . . . . . . .
Current status. . . . .
Problem . . . . . . . . .
network
:
:
:
:
System: I520DVL2
9833826542
APPN.i520DVL3
Display Problem Analysis Results
READY
Line failed during insertion into the token-ring
System: I520DVL2
List type . . . . . . . :
Isolation
Type options, press Enter. Press F6 to report the problem.
5=Display detail
Enter
Select one of the following:.

1. Analyze problem
2. Report problem
4. Verify problem corrected
20. Close problem
30. Save APAR data to APAR library
Opt Probability Possible Cause

5
100
ADPTADR value in CRTLINTRN command
F3=Exit
F6=Report problem F12=Cancel
F=15=Save APAR data
F17=Top
Bottom
F13=Add Notes
F18=Bottom
Enter
Bottom
AJCUJE35
Selection
1
F3=Exit
Display Detail - Configuration Problem
The configuration parameter that was identified as a possible problem can

be verified by displaying the local area network line description with the
DSPLIND command.
F12=Cancel
The line description was created by the CRTLINTRN, the CRTLINETH or the
CRTLINDDI command. You may need to review the appropriate command
information to determine if the configuration parameter is wrong.
Information about commands related to communications can be found in the
following manuals:
o Programming: Control Language Reference, SC41-0030
o Communications Configurations Reference, GC41-0001
Some software problems can be temporarily solved by changing the
configuration parameter, even if the original value was correct.
Report this problem to your service representative if you use this temporary
change.
Press Enter to continue.
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Figure 39-17. Analyze a problem (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
Selecting option 8 on the Work with Problems display shows the Work with Problem
display, from which you can analyze, report, and close a problem.
The example on the visual shows an operator-assisted analysis of a system problem.
During problem analysis, the system presents many displays with questions that must be
answered or actions that must be performed. When you select option 1 from the Work with
Problem menu, the system first has you check the common causes of that particular type of
problem. If a line fails while it is being inserted into the token ring, check for the correct
value in the ADPTADR parameter on the CRTLINTRN command.
Follow the directions until the system either helps you resolve the problem or tells you that
it needs to be sent to IBM for further assistance. If the system cannot precisely identify the
cause of a problem, it will at least display a list of possible causes and the likelihood of
each.
Reporting an existing problem: Pressing F6 in the Display Problem Analysis Results
display brings up the Report Problem menu. You can now use option 1 (Prepare Service
Request) to send the problem analysis report to your service provider.

39-43
Instructor Guide
Analyze a new problem: The Analyze Problem (ANZPRB) command is used to analyze
a problem that has occurred in the past, even though it might not be occurring now, or a
problem on another system. You start with a description of the problem rather than an error
message. Again, you must answer a series of questions as the system leads you through
the problem analysis. This function is also available by pressing F14 on the Work with
Problems display.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

39-45
Instructor Guide
Analyze a problem (2 of 2)
IBM i
AJCUY1PO
Work Station Problem Analysis
Work station . . . . . .
: DSP06
Controller. . . . . . . . .
: CTL01
Port. . . . . . . . . . .
: 2
Address . . . . . . . .
: 2
What type of cable is used to connect the
failing work station to the system?
1. Twinaxial cable
2. IBM Cabling System
3. Telephone twisted-pair wiring
Selection
___
Display Problem Analysis Results
F3=Exit F12=Cancel
System: I520DVL2
List type . . . . . . . . . .: isolation
5=Display detail
Opt Probability
__
95
__
5
Possible Cause
Twinaxial work station IOP card
Twinaxial work station attachment
Bottom
F3=Exit F6=Prepare service request F12=Cancel F24=More keys
Problem analysis results recorded in the problem log.
Figure 39-18. Analyze a problem (2 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
The steps to see the screens captured on this visual are:
1. Enter the Work with problems command WRKPRB which will show a listing of problems
encountered on the system.
2. Select option 8 - Work with problem to see the Work with problems screen captured in
the upper left on this visual.
3. Select option 1 - Analyze problem to step through a series of screens (not displayed in
this visual) to perform problem analysis.
4. Once you have completed the analysis you will see the Display Problem Analysis
Results screen captured in the upper right part of this visual.
5. Specify option 5 - Display details to see the specific details for this problem. This is the
screen captured in the lower right part of this visual.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

39-47
Instructor Guide
PROBLEM2 menu
IBM i
Figure 39-19. PROBLEM2 menu
AS248.1
Notes:
The Problem Handling (PROBLEM2) menu allows you to select problem-handling tasks
associated with programming problems and system performance.
Option 1. Program temporary fix (PTF): Select this option to use PTFs to update
IBM-licensed programs and programs developed by other companies.
Option 2. Work with alerts (WRKALR): Select this option to use alerts to identify
problems at local or remote locations.
Option 3. Performance tools (STRPFRT): Select this option to work with the performance
of your system.
Option 4. Programming language debug (CMDDBG): Select this option to use
commands associated with solving your programming language errors. Option 5. Work
with support contact information (WRKCNTINF): Select this option to update your
contact information for marketing and technical support.
Option 6. Copy screen image (CMDCPYSCN): Select this option to show the information
on your display station to a specified user at another display station, in order to find and

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
solve a system problem. You can also send the information on your display station to a
database file.
Option 7. Work with alert descriptions (WRKALRD): Select this option to define alerts.
You can use this function to create, change, and delete your own alert descriptions.
Option 70. Related commands (CMDPRBMGT): Select this option to see commands
related to analyzing and solving problems.

39-49
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Analyzing problems with a system reference code

IBM i
The Attention light is on.

The system reference code is displayed in control panel.
Function/Data
11-3
0000AABB
Figure 39-20. Analyzing problems with a system reference code
AS248.1
Notes:
If you have a system failure, there might be a message code on the control panel on the
system unit, and the Attention light should also be on. Record the code.
A system reference code (SRC) is a set of eight characters that identifies the system
component that detected the error code and that describes the condition. The first four
characters of the SRC indicate the type of error, while the last four give additional
information, which can be any set of characters.
You should record the entirety of any SRC if one is displayed on the control panel when a
problem is detected. The information gained from the SRC can help the service
representative understand the problem fully and how to fix it.
The error code indicates that a hardware or software error condition has occurred in the
system.
A System Attention light is turned on when the system detects a hardware error that it
cannot correct. An error can result in the loss or corruption of data.

39-51
Instructor Guide
The error code recorded in the problem log is used to report errors and to perform problem
analysis and resolution. Some error codes have the system automatically collect
associated data that is used to diagnose the problem.
Some error codes require that you restart the system for recovery, while others might
indicate intermittent errors.
The system unit control panel shown on this visual also applies to the 940x Version 3
system.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

39-53
Instructor Guide
History log
IBM i
System history
Automatically logs system activity:
Job information (start/stop times)
Component failures
Critical system information (such as storage thresholds)
Information written to a system log

QHST
Multiple physical files QHST<yyddda>
Figure 39-21. History log
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

39-55
Instructor Guide
Problem analysis: History log

IBM i
QHST *MSGQ
DSPLOG
Collection of messages
summarizing system activity:
Subsystem information
Job information
Device status changes
System operator messages
PTF activity
QHSTyydddn
QHSTLOGSIZ
'A LOG VERSION'
Figure 39-22. Problem analysis: History log
AS248.1
Notes:
The system keeps a history log of high-level system activity. The information in this log has
to do with job start and end, device actions, all messages that are received on the
QSYSOPR message queue, and all PTF activity.
The history information is recorded in a message queue called QHST.
You can display or print this information with the Display Log (DSPLOG) command.
When the DSPLOG command is run, the message queue contents are placed in a file
named QHSTyydddn.
The name of the history log version is made up of QHST, the Julian date on which the
log version was created (yyddd), and a sequence number or letter (x).
The size of this file is determined by the system value QHSTLOGSIZ (maximum history
log records).
The DSPLOG command has parameters to allow you to view only a portion of the history
(starting and ending date and time).

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The system keeps a history log of all activity on the system. This is a high-level
trace of system activity. The type of information in this log deals with:
Job start and end times
Device actions
All messages that are received on the QSYSOPR message queue
All PTF activity

39-57
Instructor Guide
Saving and deleting history logs

IBM i
Figure 39-23. Saving and deleting history logs
AS248.1
Notes:
History files will remain on the system until they are deleted, which can be done by
executing the Work with Files (WRKF) command.
When a log version (another name for a history file) reaches the maximum size you have
specified, the system simply creates another one, leaves the old one in QSYS, and sends a
message to QSYSOPR to the effect that log version QHSTyydddn is full and should be
saved.
What the message does not say is that, after the old log version has been saved, it should
be deleted. Leaving old log versions on disk affects disk space use and causes your
system saves to take longer and longer as time goes by.
If you use the Work with Files (WRKF) command for this task, you can both save and
delete old history log versions using this display.
This is yet another task that Operational Assistant can simplify.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
perform an application share of 5250 emulation for the next visual, figure covering the
topics outlined in the student notes.
demo on your instructor PC of 5250 emulation for the next visual, figure covering the topics

39-59
Instructor Guide
Operational Assistant cleanup

IBM i
Figure 39-24. Operational Assistant cleanup
AS248.1
Notes:
You can have Operational Assistant (OA) perform many of the cleanup chores required on
your system. Enter go assist and select option 11 to get started.
One caution: OA cleans up by throwing away; it does not save anything. If you have set
everything up correctly, this should not be a problem.
Use option 1 (Change cleanup tasks) from the Cleanup menu to set up or change what you
want OA to clean up. Determine how long you want to keep the various types of objects
that OA cleans up. The values shown here are reasonable for most systems, but only you
can decide what is right on your system.
Pick a time for OA to run cleanup each day when there is the least amount of activity on
your system. If you have implemented a power on and off schedule (or plan to do so), right
before power off is a good time to clean up.
After entering this information with Allow automatic cleanup set to Y, you must still use
option 2 (Start cleanup at scheduled time) on the Cleanup Tasks menu before OA starts

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
cleaning up according your schedule. Another alternative is to choose option 3 (Start

cleanup immediately) and then option 2 to start the schedule for the next cleanup.
One thing does happen automatically as soon as you specify that you want to allow
cleanup on this display is that OA creates an output queue named QEZJOBLOG and
changes the QPJOBLOG printer file to point to that output queue. This occurs regardless of
how many days you want to keep job logs and other system output on this display for.
Chapter 8 in the System Operation Manual contains information on how to implement OA
automatic cleanup. Before you consider letting OA do its cleanup, you should read that
chapter very carefully.

39-61
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details One caution: OA cleans up by throwing away.
IT DOES NOT SAVE ANYTHING.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Functions that are automatically cleaned up

IBM i
Messages:
Other user objects:
User messages queues

Workstation messages queues
System operator messages queue
Calendar entries
Folders (reorganized)
Database files (reorganized)
Printer output:
Other system objects:
Output queue QEZJOBLOG (job logs)

Output queue QEZDEBUG (service and
program dumps)
Journals:
APD journal
DSNX journal
History log
Problem log and files
Alerts database
PTF save files
Reclaim temporary storage used by
temporarily decompressed objects
Job accounting data journal

Performance adjustment data journal
Problem databases journal
QSNADS journal
OSI Message Services/400 journal
Figure 39-25. Functions that are automatically cleaned up
AS248.1
Notes:
There are many objects that need to be cleaned up on your system. (Some of these
objects, such as the history log and problem log, were discussed in this unit.)
This visual shows those objects that the system can automatically clean up with OA. Little
help is needed from the system operator for OA to perform this cleanup.

39-63
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Automated problem management: DSPSRVA

IBM i
Page down
(Roll up)
Figure 39-26. Automated problem management: DSPSRVA
AS248.1
Notes:
Automated problem management provides automated problem analysis, as well as
automated problem reporting to the service provider for system-detected problems. All of
the analysis and reporting is done without user intervention. Automated problem
management is implemented through service attributes.
The Display Service Attributes (DSPSRVA) command brings up service attributes; the
Change Service Attributes (CHGSRVA) command allows you to change them.
Automated problem analysis applies mostly to hardware problems but also to some
software problems in LIC. To determine which problems are analyzed automatically and
which are not, use the Work with Problems (WRKPRB) command.
When *YES is specified in the Report problem automatically field, software problems are
reported automatically to the service provider. Your service provider is specified in the
Control point name field. For hardware problem reporting, contact your service provider.
To run the CHGSRVA command, you must be signed on with a user profile that includes
*ALLOBJ special authority.

39-65
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details IBM Service is the default service provider.
Service attributes are similar to network attributes but contain service information. The
default values are shown on this visual, indicating that when customers install the system,
automatic problem determination and automatic problem reporting will be carried out
unless they disable this function.
Automatic analysis, combined with automatic reporting and notification, allows
system-detected problems to be analyzed and reported to the service provider without
customer interaction or knowledge. Solving this problem gives customers fewer
perceptions of problems and can help improve customer satisfaction.
The parameters for the Change Service Attributes command are:
Analyze Problem Automatically (ANZPRBAUTO) specifies whether problem analysis
routines are run automatically at the time of failure. If problem analysis routines are run
automatically, they are run at the time of failure as a background batch job.
Report Problem Automatically (RPTPRBAUTO) specifies whether problems that
have been automatically analyzed are automatically sent to a service provider.
Critical Message to User (CRITMSGUSR) is an ordered list of user identifiers and
user classes. These values are entered sequentially from highest to lowest.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Copy screen
IBM i
I need some
assistance.
STRCPYSCN
Remote assistance
or problem determination
Let me see
what is happening
on your
workstation.
Figure 39-27. Copy screen
AS248.1
Notes:
There is a system function that allows you, while you are at your workstation, to monitor
what someone else is doing at another workstation in order to determine the cause of a
problem on that workstation.
You can start this function, called Copy Screen, by running the Start Copy Screen
(STRCPYSCN) command and specifying the name of the display device you want to copy
and the name of your own workstation. The user at the device you are copying needs to
respond to a message to allow you to view the job in question. Once they have done that,
you are able to follow along while the job proceeds. IBM i locks your keyboard, and you are
not allowed to enter anything. You remain one screen behind the copied device.
To end the copy screen function, either person can run the End Copy Screen
(ENDCPYSCN) command. If the user being copied is unable to enter commands, then, at
the requesting workstation, press System Request and enter the ENDCPYSCN command
on the line at the bottom of your display.

39-67
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details IBM i allows a system operator to provide remote assistance or problem
determination through the Copy Screen function, which allows a system operator to
monitor at one workstation what someone else is doing at another workstation. The system
operator can use this function to determine the cause of a problem that a user is having.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Network Management menu

IBM i
Figure 39-28. Network Management menu
AS248.1
Notes:
The Network Management (NETWORK) menu allows you to manage and use network
communications:
Option 1. Display network attributes (DSPNETA): Select this option to display how a
network has been set up to operate.
Option 2. Change network attributes (CHGNETA): Select this option to change network
attributes.
Option 3. Display sphere of control status (DSPSOCSTS): Select this option to display
or print the current status of the primary and default systems in the sphere of control.
Option 4. Work with sphere of control (WRKSOC): Select this option to use sphere of
control to delete systems, add systems, and display the current status of the systems
already defined.
Option 5. Network problem handling (NETPRB): Select this option to identify and solve
problems related to networks.

39-69
Instructor Guide
Option 6. Display APPN information (DSPAPPNINF): Select this option to identify and
solve problems related to Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN).
Option 7. Work with distribution queues (WRKDSTQ): Select this option to manage and
control jobs on distribution queues.
Option 8. Display distribution services (DSPDSTSRV): Select this option to display or
print the distribution queue descriptions, routing table, or secondary system name table
defined for your local system.
Option 9. Display distribution services log (DSPDSTLOG): Select this option to use the
SNADS log to determine when a network problem occurred.
Option 10. TCP/IP administration (TCPADM): Select this option to manage and control
jobs that are using the TCP/IP to communicate between systems.
Option 14. Configure SNMP agent (CFGTCPSNMP): Select this option to define or
change the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) configuration.
Option 70. Related commands (CMDNET): Select this option to see commands related
to managing and using a communication network.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

39-71
Instructor Guide
Network Problem Handling menu

IBM i
Figure 39-29. Network Problem Handling menu
AS248.1
Notes:
The Network Problem Handling (NETPRB) menu allows you to handle problems dealing
with communication:
Option 1. Work with problems (WRKPRB): Select this option to solve network problems.
Option 2. Work with alerts (WRKALR): Select this option to use alerts to identify
problems at local or remote locations. An alert is automatically sent from any Power in the
network to the system that is designated to manage problems.
Option 3. Verify communications (VFYCMN): Select this option to determine whether the
communication links can be established.
Option 4. Network management (NETWORK): Select this option to perform
communication tasks related to managing a network problem handling - help network.
Option 5. Send or receive files (FILETFR): Select this option to perform tasks related to
sending or receiving files from systems with communications.
Option 6. Access a remote system (REMOTE): Select this option to manage and control
jobs on a remote system.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Option 7. Work with alert descriptions (WRKALRD): Select this option to define alerts.
Using this function, you can create, change, and delete your own alert descriptions.
Option 8. Verify APPC connection (VFYAPPCCNN): Select this option to exchange data
packets between the local location and the specified remote location using Advanced
Program-to-Program Communication (APPC).

39-73
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
IBM Redbook SG24-8253

IBM i
Figure 39-30. IBM Redbook SG24-8253
AS248.1
Notes:
The Redbook pictured in the visual can provide assistance when performing problem
determination on the system. Even though this Redbook was written several releases ago,
the information presented is still useful.
To access this redbook, search for this publication number at the following Web site:
www.redbooks.ibm.com

39-75
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Exercise
IBM i
Exercise: Problem determination

AS248.1
Notes:
Please refer to the Student Exercise Guide and perform the problem determination
exercise.

39-77
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose This exercise gives the students an opportunity to use problem analysis and to
record information in the problem log.
Details
Play.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or False: The system can be configured to perform automatic

problem determination and reporting to your service provider.
2. Which of the following commands will display system status
information?
a. WRKSYSSTS
b. WRKACTJOB
c. WRKDSKSTS
d. WRKUSRJOB
3. Which of the following commands will display information

about your job?
a.
b.
c.
d.
WRKSYSSTS
WRKACTJOB
WRKDSKSTS
WRKUSRJOB
AS248.1
Notes:

39-79
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

The answer is True.

information?
a. WRKSYSSTS
b. WRKACTJOB
c. WRKDSKSTS
d. WRKUSRJOB
The answer is WRKSYSSTS.
3. Which of the following commands will display information about your

job?
a. WRKSYSSTS
b. WRKACTJOB
c. WRKDSKSTS
d. WRKUSRJOB
The answer is WRKACTJOB.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

Identify a problem
Analyze a problem
Report a problem
AS248.1
Notes:
It is your job as a system operator to monitor the system, reply to messages, and
investigate to solve or report problems. The system collects a lot of information for you. (So
much so, that if it is not cleaned up, it will create its own problem!)
The system problem analysis and reporting functions can help you with this job.

39-81
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Use this visual to summarize problem handling for the system operator. Discuss
the various tools that are available with i to identify, analyze, and report a problem.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 40. Problem determination using System i

Navigator
Estimated time
00:20

The system keeps track of all problems that occur and notifies you
through message queues and logs. You might need to analyze a
problem prior to calling IBM for service. System i Navigator provides
tools to aid you in identifying, analyzing, and reporting problems.

Identify a problem
Analyze a problem
Report a problem

Accountability:
Unit 40. Problem determination using System i Navigator

40-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Identify a problem
Analyze a problem
Report a problem
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The system keeps track of all problems that occur on the system and notifies the
system operator by using message queues and logs. The operator might need to analyze a
problem before calling IBM for service. IBM i provides many tools to aid the operator in
identifying, analyzing, and reporting problems.
This unit presents the IBM i tools available to help the operator determine if there is a
problem and gather information about the problem.

40-3
Instructor Guide
Active Jobs: Details

IBM i
Figure 40-2. Active Jobs: Details
AS248.1
Notes:
Right-click a job to access details and the following information about a job:
Call Stack
Library List
Locked Objects
Open Files
Threads
Transactions
Elapsed Performance Statistics

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

40-5
Instructor Guide
Active Jobs: Elapsed Performance Statistics

IBM i
Figure 40-3. Active Jobs: Elapsed Performance Statistics
AS248.1
Notes:
One of the details about the job is its performance statistics, which you can also bring up in
the right pane by selecting similar columns in the Customize this View > Columns dialog.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

40-7
Instructor Guide
Job Log: Columns

IBM i
Figure 40-4. Job Log: Columns
AS248.1
Notes:
Right-click a job name and select Job Log to display the history of the job.
You can display additional job log details by customizing your window and selecting
additional columns.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

40-9
Instructor Guide
Active Pools: Customize Columns

IBM i
Figure 40-5. Active Pools: Customize Columns
AS248.1
Notes:
Checking performance statistics for the memory pools will be help you identify system
performance problems.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
multimedia library of Elluminate to allow the students to review the System Status topic.
This flash can be played in place of the next four visuals.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You can then play file AS248-U40-F06 on your PC to
review the System Status topic or since the students cannot view this themselves directly
you can continue on to the next topic.

40-11
Instructor Guide
Work with System Status (WRKSYSSTS)

IBM i
Figure 40-6. Work with System Status (WRKSYSSTS)
AS248.1
Notes:
This interface provides the capability to display the system status. This is equivalent to
running the Work with System Status (WRKSYSSTS) command.
To start this process, right-click your system and click System Status to see the notebook
displayed on the next page.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

40-13
Instructor Guide
System Status: General / Jobs

IBM i
Figure 40-7. System Status: General / Jobs
AS248.1
Notes:
When the System Status dialog opens, it displays statistical information about your system
for that instant in time. The exception is the CPU usage field, which displays a cumulative
average during the time displayed in the Elapsed time field.
Use the General tab to view high level system status values that show the current status of
the system, such as elapsed CPU usage, total and active jobs in the system, permanent
and temporary addresses used, total disk space, and system disk pool capacity and usage.
Use the Jobs tab to view the number of total, maximum, and active jobs and threads
running on the system.
If you are monitoring a situation, you can update the values that are displayed on these
tabs by clicking one of the following buttons:
Refresh Now: Click this button to cause the following:
- The values change to reflect the current status of your system.
- The Last refresh field updates to display the exact time that you clicked Refresh
Now.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
- The Elapsed time field updates to reflect the time between this refresh action and
when the dialog was opened (or the last time you clicked Reset Statistics).
- The CPU usage (elapsed) field updates to reflect the cumulative average during the
elapsed time.
Timed Refresh: A timed refresh automatically accomplishes the same tasks at regular
intervals as when you click Refresh Now. When you click this button, a dialog is shown
that allows you to specify how often you would like the system status values to refresh.
Reset Statistics: When you click this button, the Elapsed time field is set to 00:00:00,
and the CPU usage (elapsed) field is set to 0.0.

40-15
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
System Status: Processors / Memory

IBM i
Figure 40-8. System Status: Processors / Memory
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the Processors tab to view information about the amount and type of processing
power available on the system.
Use the Memory tab to view the amount of memory on the system. This tab will also allow
you to access the Active Memory Pools window.

40-17
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
System Status: Disk Space / Addresses

IBM i
Figure 40-9. System Status: Disk Space / Addresses
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the Disk Space tab to view the amount of disk space on the system. You can also
access the Disk Pools window and the Storage System Values window from this tab.
Use the Addresses tab to view information about address use on the system. When a
permanent or temporary address is created on the Power i, it is assigned an address by
disk storage management. The system uses this address to correlate references to the
object with disk storage.
It is important to regularly monitor the percentage of addresses used on your system. If the
rate at which addresses are being used will cause you to reach 100% during the planned
lifetime of the system or if address usage reaches 90% (critical limit), you should call your
IBM software service representative.

40-19
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Disk Status and Disk Pools

IBM i
Figure 40-10. Disk Status and Disk Pools
AS248.1
Notes:
The Disk Space tab on the previous page shows two buttons, Disk Status and Disk
Pools.
Click Disk Status button to see the window in the upper left of this visual. This is equivalent
to running the Work with Disk Status (WRKDSKSTS) command. This window shows
performance and status information about the disk units on the system.
When you click Disk Pools, you are presented with the sign-on window displayed on the
left. At this point, the IBM i is prompting you to sign on to system service tools (SST) which
means you must enter your SST user ID and password. You will then be presented with the
window in the middle. This displays information about the disk pools on your system.
Optionally, you can choose to view a graphical representation of this information.

40-21
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Access to SST is available using System i Navigator and Systems Director
Navigator, but it does require setup. Before you can perform any disk management tasks
using IBM Systems Director Navigator for IBM i, you need to set up the proper
authorizations for DST:
1. Ensure that the user profile that will be used to access disk units in IBM Systems
Director Navigator for IBM i has at least these authorities:
- *ALLOBJ All object authority
- *SERVICE
2. Start DST.
3. Sign on to DST using your service tools user ID and password.
4. When the Use Dedicated Service Tools (DST) display is shown, select option 5 (Work
with DST environment), and press Enter.
5. From the Work with DST Environment menu, select option 6 (Service tools security
data).
6. From the Work with Service Tools Security Data menu, select option 6 (Change
password level). Ensure that the password level is set to SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm)
encryption or password level two, and press F12.
7. From the Work with DST Environment display, select option 3 (Service tools user IDs)
to work with service tools user IDs.
8. Create a service tools user ID that matches the IBM i user profile and that also has the
same password in uppercase. The service tools user ID and password must match the
IBM i user profile and password of the user that is using IBM Systems Director
Navigator for IBM i. For example, if the user profile and password combination is BOB
and my1pass, the DST user ID and password combination must be BOB and
MY1PASS.
9. Give this service tools user ID at least these authorities:
- Disk units operation
- Disk units administration
10. Press Enter to enable these changes.
11. Exit DST, and start IBM i.
Before you can perform any disk management tasks with System i Navigator, you need to
install the Configuration and Service component and enable the Disk Units folder.
1. Install the Configuration and Service component.
a. From the File menu of System i Navigator, select Install Options, and then click
Selective Setup.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
b. Follow the instructions on the resulting dialog box to install the Configuration and
Service component.
2. Enable the Disk Units folder.
a. In System i Navigator, right-click the system connection and select Application
Administration.
b. On the resulting window, click OK.
c. Click the Host Applications tab.
d. Expand your operating system.
e. Select Disk Units to have Default Access or All Object Access.
f. Click OK.
g. Restart System i Navigator.
3. Access the Disk Units folder to perform all disk management functions.
a. In System i Navigator, expand My Connections (or your active environment).
b. Expand the Power i you want to examine, Configuration and Service > Hardware
> Disk Units.

40-23
Instructor Guide
System operator messages

IBM i
Figure 40-11. System operator messages
AS248.1
Notes:
A variety of system messages can indicate conditions that range from simple typing errors
to problems with system devices or programs. The following types of messages can
appear:
An error message on your current display
A message that is sent to the system operator message queue, QSYSOPR, regarding a
system problem
A message that is sent to the message queue specified in a device description
regarding a device problem
A message that is sent to the QSYSMSG message queue, the system operator
message queue, and other message queues specified by the users regarding a
potential sever system condition
An unexpected error message that is not handled by a program (shown on the Display
Program Messages display)

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
The added value of this display is that you can create a message monitor to look out for
specific messages on a message queue.
For example, you might create a message monitor to monitor a message queue to
determine whether the application was completed successfully.
You might also create a message monitor to monitor the system operator message
queue for a specific message that notifies you whenever a critical storage condition
exists.
When you create this monitor, you can specify commands to run when the message is
detected. In this case, you would want to free up storage space by specifying
commands to delete unused objects or spooled files.

40-25
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty

IBM i
Key functions are:

System inventory collection and transmission
Hardware problem reporting
To access this feature, follow these steps in

System i Navigator Management Central:
1.
Expand Management Central.
2.
Select Extreme Support.
3.
Click Agent.
4.
Right-click Electronic Service Agent.
5.
Click Configure Electronic Services.
Figure 40-12. Electronic Service Agent
AS248.1
Notes:
Extreme Support Personalized (ESP) is IBMs comprehensive technical service and
support initiative exclusively for IBM Power i. ESP is total solution support, personalized for
you in the form you need. It involves support over the Internet, voice and onsite support,
and support that is integrated right into the product.
One of the offerings includes support that uses TCP/IP with Performance Management,
Service Agent, and inventory consolidation with Management Central.
Electronic Service Agent is a no-charge licensed program that resides on the system and is
designed to monitor events and to transmit Power inventory information to IBM according
to a periodic, customer-defined timetable.
For additional information, see the IBM iSeries Universal Connection for Electronic Support
and Services, SG24-6224, Redbook.
The two key functions of Electronic Service Agent are:
1. Power inventory collection and transmission collects and sends Power information
to IBM as input to problem analysis and prevention functions, and to assist IBM in

40-27
Instructor Guide
providing improved service. The Power information is gathered and stored by

Management Central and is then sent to IBM with the Universal Connection. Electronic
Service Agent can also collect and transmit information from multiple systems. This is
done by consolidating inventory from multiple systems onto one Management Central
system prior to transmission over the connection.
The Power inventory collection and transmission function of Electronic Service Agent is
available with System i Navigator. You can find this support in the Management Central
hierarchy under Extreme Support.
You can collect any of the following: hardware, software, fixes, system values, users
and groups, service attributes, contact information, network attributes, PM/400
performance data, and system registration.
You can collect inventory for users and groups; however, Electronic Service Agent does
not send this inventory to IBM.
2. Hardware problem reporting predicts and prevents hardware errors, downloads fixes,
and automatically calls IBM Service when necessary. With early knowledge about
potential problems, IBM can provide proactive service, thereby helping to maintain
higher availability and performance.
The hardware problem reporting function can be activated only if one of two conditions
applies: your Power is under warranty or you have purchased an IBM Maintenance
Services Agreement.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

40-29
Instructor Guide
Configuration of Electronic Service Agent

IBM i
Figure 40-13. Configuration of Electronic Service Agent
AS248.1
Notes:
The services that can be configured once you have signed on are listed below.
Report System-Detected Problems:
The system problem log allows you to display a list of all problems that have been
reported to the system. You can display detailed information about a specific problem
and report problems to IBM by using this facility to initiate a search of the IBM database
for known problems and their respective fixes.
Report Hardware and Software Problems:
Problems that arise on any Power i model can be analyzed using the problem analysis
component of the IBM i operating system. The mechanism for problem analysis on the
Power i is the Analyze Problem (ANZPRB) command. The operating system builds a
set of search criteria that can be submitted to the IBM electronic database by using
electronic customer support. Customers are entitled to access the IBM fix database as
part of their Power i hardware maintenance agreement.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
If, after analyzing a particular problem, the system determines that problem should be
reported to IBM, you have the option of using electronic customer support to do the
reporting. This results in an immediate search of the electronic database for a known fix
for the reported problem. The fix is automatically downloaded to the Power i, or a
request is placed for the fix to be supplied on the media you specify, depending on the
size of the transmission. If a solution is not found, your problem record is forwarded to
the IBM Power i Support Center. You can arrange for further assistance for a fee.
Request Cumulative Fix Packages:
In addition to electronically downloaded fixes, you can request cumulative fix packages
for preventative service of i operating system and other IBM-supported licensed
programs. When you submit the order electronically, electronic customer support
automatically transfers all of the necessary detail to enable IBM to ship you a
cumulative package on the media that you require.
Order Preventative Service Information:
Preventive service planning (PSP) information is a collection of information that is used
when you are installing a licensed program cumulative fix package, hardware, or
software upgrades. Periodically order PSP information and review the fixes listed. If you
need any of these, order and install them.

40-31
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
IBM Electronic Services on the Web

IBM i
Figure 40-14. IBM Electronic Services on the Web
AS248.1
Notes:
If you click the IBM Electronic Services on the Web button, you are connected to the IBM
Electronic Services home page.
The URL to get to the window captured in the upper left in this visual is:
https://www-304.ibm.com/support/electronic/portal/

40-33
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or False: Running the analyze problem function is

available using 5250 emulation and using System i
Navigator.
2. Which of the following requires signing on to system service
tools?
a.
b.
c.
d.
WRKACTJOB
WRKSYSSTS
WRKDSKSTS
WRKSSTSTS
3. Which of the following is not supported by Electronic Service

Agent?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Reporting system detected problems

Requesting cumulative fix packages
Reporting hardware and software problems
Reporting a failed system backup
AS248.1
Notes:

40-35
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i
1. True or False: Running the analyze problem function is available

using 5250 emulation and using System i Navigator.
2. Which of the following requires signing on to system service tools?

a. WRKACTJOB
b. WRKSYSSTS
c. WRKDSKSTS
d. WRKSSTSTS
The answer is WRKDSKSTS.
3. Which of the following is not supported by Electronic Service Agent?

a. Reporting system detected problems
b. Requesting cumulative fix packages
c. Reporting hardware and software problems
d. Reporting a failed system backup
The answer is Reporting a failed system backup.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit summary
IBM i

Identify a problem
Analyze a problem
Report a problem
AS248.1
Notes:
It is your job as a system operator to monitor the system, reply to messages, and
investigate to solve or report problems. The system collects a lot of information for you.
The system problem analysis and reporting functions can help you with this job.

40-37
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Use this visual to summarize problem handling for the system operator. Discuss
the various tools that are available with i to identify, analyze, and report a problem.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 41. Overview of the PTF process

Estimated time
00:15

Even though every IBM-licensed program product (LPP) undergoes
extensive testing before being made available for general customer
use, problems are still occasionally found once these LPPs are put
into widespread use.
In an ongoing effort to ensure that IBM-licensed program products are
as error-free as possible, IBM creates a program temporary fix (PTF)
to correct a problem or potential problem in one of these programs as
soon as the problem is detected and reported.
Each PTF is designed to fully replace one or more objects in the LPP.
PTFs can be distributed electronically or by CD-ROM. After a PTF is
received, it must be installed on the system to make it active.

Explain what a program temporary fix (PTF) is

Describe the PTF process
List and explain the PTF types that are available
List the commands that are used to order PTFs
Explain the different PTF strategies for PTFs

Accountability:

41-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

AS248.1
Notes:
After successfully completing this unit, you should be able to explain what a PTF is and use
information available from IBM to help you know when to order a PTF. You should also be
able to order a PTF, receive and install a PTF, display the status of a PTF, and verify that a
PTF has been successfully installed.
There are two important things to consider when working with PTFs. First, some functions
related to the installation of PTFs can only be performed while signed on to the system as
the security officer (QSECOFR). No attempt has been made in the following discussion to
identify those functions. Before attempting to perform any function related to PTFs, you
should review the appropriate documentation.
Second, it is highly recommended that you have a current backup of your system. If there is
any doubt at all about the availability of a valid backup, you should take the time to perform
a full system backup before you begin any PTF activity.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details There is no exercise provided with this unit.

41-3
Instructor Guide
What is a fix or PTF?

IBM i
A fix is a temporary solution to fix or bypass a defect

diagnosed by IBM in a current, unaltered release of a
licensed program product (LPP).
New Function
PTF
PTF
Problem
Figure 41-2. What is a fix or PTF?
AS248.1
Notes:
Periodically, bugs are discovered in Power i programs. IBM issues a fix (also called a PTF)
once corrections are made to the affected IBM programs. Multiple fixes are bundled
together to form a cumulative fix pack, which contains recommended fixes. The
recommendation is that cumulative fix packs should be installed on a quarterly basis for
dynamic environments and less frequently in stable ones. Cumulative fix packs should also
be considered prior to making major hardware or software changes to your environment.
Fixes play an important part in your systems maintenance strategy. They give you a
chance to fine-tune your systems operation, add additional functionality, or improve
performance.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

41-5
Instructor Guide
PTF process overview

IBM i
Fix needed or due for

cumulative fix pack?
Order fix
ECS
Internet: as400service.ibm.com
Install fix
Verify installation
Go LICPGM, option 50,

Display log for messages
DSPPTF
System i Navigator: Fixes inventory
FIX
Test product
Figure 41-3. PTF process overview
AS248.1
Notes:
Installed and permanently installed fixes: When a fix is installed to a system, both the
original and new objects are kept on the system. Logically, two copies of the code reside on
the machine. This allows you to restart the system using either the original objects or the
new objects. Installing a fix to your system gives you a secure backup while you test the
new code. If the system functions incorrectly using the new code, you simply restart your
system using the original code and remove the defective code.
When a fix is permanently installed on your system, only the new objects exist on the
system. A fix can be permanently installed when it has been in use for a period of time and
you feel confident that the chances of it being defective are small.
Available and delayed fixes: Once a fix is loaded on your system, you can choose to
apply it right away or wait for a period of time before applying it. A fix can be made available
if the system cannot run the old and new code at the same time. Alternatively, you can
choose to delay applying a fix. The fix is then applied the next time the Power is restarted.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The PTF process consists of five steps.
1. First, you might wonder whether you need a PTF. This might be prompted by you or
someone else in your business having a hardware or software problem or it might be
part of your monthly job to order PTFs.
2. Once you have determined you need a PTF, you must order and receive it from IBM.
You can order and receive a PTF electronically from your ECS line or the Internet, or
you can call your IBM service representative requesting that they order and ship the
PTFs to you.
If the PTF is too large to be delivered electronically, it will be shipped by way of
CD-ROM or tape. The current restrictions for PTF sizes are:
ECS line: 4 MB per file (can be modified by IBM Technical Support to allow up to 10
MB)
Internet:
10 MB per file/15 MB per order
3. Next, you need to install the PTF. If the PTF was shipped electronically, it is stored in a
save file in QGPL on the system. You need to install the PTF from the file. If the PTF
was shipped on CD-ROM or tape, you need to install it from either of these media.
4. Once the PTF is installed, you should verify that it installed correctly. This can be done
from the Display History Log Contents display.
5. Finally, and you might not have to do this for all the PTFs, you should test the LPP that
was causing a problem to ensure the product works the way it is intended to work. (IBM
does extensive testing of the PTF before they ship it, therefore it should work as
intended.)
Transition statement Let us look at each of these steps in detail.

41-7
Instructor Guide
Types of fixes
IBM i
Single or HIPER fixes

Cumulative PTF packages
Fix groups
Service packs
Figure 41-4. Types of fixes
AS248.1
Notes:
Single PTFs are applied to correct specific reported problems. A high-impact pervasive
(HIPER) PTF is an example of a single PTF which resolves a problem that might have a
high impact on the operations of your server or a low-impact pervasive problem that affects
most Power i servers.
Cumulative PTF packages contain fixes for a given release of the IBM i operating system
and associated licensed programs. You should install the entire cumulative PTF package
after you first load or reload the operating system.
A PTF group or fix group is a name that is used to order and manage a group of logically
related PTFs. The advantage of a group fix is that you can use the same PTF number
every time to order the latest and greatest fixes for a specific function.
Service packs are different from group PTFs. A service pack is a collection of code fixes
(not PTFs) for Power i Access for Windows products that is contained in a single IBM i PTF.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

41-9
Instructor Guide
How to determine available PTFs

IBM i
Cross-referenced summary list
Fixes from
earlier release
in current
release
PSP information
Information
to be reviewed
prior to installing
licensed program,
cumulative fix
package, or
hardware
Fix summary list
Fixes that
affect most
users
Figure 41-5. How to determine available PTFs
AS248.1
Notes:
The first step in the PTF process is determining whether you need a PTF. IBM provides a
lot of information to help you determine what PTFs are available. The information you
choose to use depends on what PTF information you need to know and what is going on
with your system (for example, if you just loaded a new release of IBM i operating system).
The cross-referenced summary list shows PTFs from an earlier release that are included in
the current release. This list should be used to make sure you order any PTFs for the new
release that you had at the previous release but are not included in the list.
Preventive service pack (PSP) is information you should order and review prior to installing
a PTF. PSP information is available for:
Licensed programs installation
LIC
System equipment
Cumulative PTF packages

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
PTFs in error
HIPER problems
The fix summary list contains a list of HIPER PTFs that affect most system users. You
should use this list to identify PTFs you might want to order. The fix summary list also
identifies the current cumulative fix pack and what pack each PTF was included in.

41-11
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Ordering fixes (1 of 2)
IBM i
Cover letters and individual fixes

SNDPTFORD nnnnnnn
Where nnnnnnn is the fix number
Cover letter only: Add parameter PTFPART(CVRLTR)
Cumulative fix packs

SNDPTFORD SF99vrm
Where vrm is the version, release, and modification level
Cross-reference summary lists

Refer to documentation for version and release you are moving from
Figure 41-6. Ordering fixes (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
As a system administrator, one of your responsibilities is maintaining your Power i. Part of
the maintenance procedure involves getting, installing, and managing fixes. The topics
described below assist you with these tasks.
Before you begin ordering fixes, you should order and apply the latest cumulative PTF
package. When you apply cumulative PTF packages, you reduce the number of fixes that
you need to order and distribute later.
Plan to regularly visit IBMs fix page in order to find the fixes available to you, those which
affect most users, those which you need before installing new hardware or licensed
programs, and those that come bundled together; then get the status of the fixes you have
ordered. To order fixes electronically, configure electronic customer support.
The SNDPTFORD command will be covered later in this unit.

41-13
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Ordering fixes (2 of 2)
IBM i
Preventive service packs (PSPs)

For licensed programs: SNDPTFORD SF98vrm
For LIC: SNDPTFORD MF98vrm
Fix summary lists

SNDPTFORD SF97vrm
Status of fix orders
Figure 41-7. Ordering fixes (2 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:

41-15
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
PTF maintenance strategy: Preventive service

IBM i
Cumulative fix pack:

Most PTFs available since start of last release
Order using ECS, phone, or Internet
Always shipped on CD-ROM
Install every quarter
This is the recommended maintenance strategy.
Preventive service packs (PSPs):

PTFs available between releases of cumulative PTF packages
Order using ECS, phone, or Internet
Shipped electronically or by CD-ROM
http://www-03.ibm.com/servers/eserver/support/iseries/hardware/software/index.html
Figure 41-8. PTF maintenance strategy: Preventive service
AS248.1
Notes:
The IBM i operating system program maintenance strategy consists of both preventive and
corrective service.
Preventive service helps you avoid problems that have been fixed since the start of the
current release. It is implemented through cumulative PTF packages and PSP information.
A cumulative fix pack holds PTFs that contain key changes and improvements which affect
most system users. In the case of PTFs, you should stay current by installing cumulative
PTFs frequently. Take the time now to prevent problems in the future.
PSP information is available between releases of cumulative PTF packages. It contains a
list of PTFs that are important to your system since the last cumulative PTF package was
generated (refer to the following Web site):
http://www-03.ibm.com/servers/eserver/support/iseries/hardware/software/
index.html

41-17
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The IBM i operating system program maintenance strategy consists of
preventive service and corrective service. Preventive service is shown on this visual.
Corrective service is shown on the following visual.
Preventive service helps you avoid problems that have been resolved since the start of the
current release.
Preventive service is implemented through the cumulative fix pack which contains PTFs
generated since the general availability of the last release of the licensed program. These
PTFs affect the general system population. If a PTF provides a change for a limited set of
users or requires special handling, it might not be included in the pack. Cumulative fix
packs can be ordered through ECS, Internet, or phone and are always sent by mail on a
CD-ROM. The entire cumulative fix pack should be installed after you first load or reload
the current release of your system. Cumulative fix packs should be installed every three to
four months if there is no change to the equipment or programs on your system.
Between releases of cumulative fix packs, IBM service support provides PTFs that might
be important to your system through PSP information. You should periodically order PSP
information.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
PTF maintenance strategy: Corrective service

IBM i
Corrections to problems reported to IBM service support

Reported using ECS, phone, or Internet
Received electronically or by CD-ROM
Figure 41-9. PTF maintenance strategy: Corrective service
AS248.1
Notes:
Even if you stay current with the installation of cumulative tapes, you might still have a
problem that requires immediate correction. In this situation, you can use the corrective
service program to report the problem to IBM service.

41-19
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Even if the Power is kept current with the installation of cumulative PTFs, a
problem might still arise that requires immediate correction. In this situation, a problem can
be reported to IBM service using corrective service.
Corrective service fixes problems reported to IBM service support. If you have a problem
with an IBM licensed program, you can describe the problem using the Analyze Problem
(ANZPRB) or Work with Problems (WRKPRB) commands. You can also configure your
system to analyze and report any problems automatically.
You can report problems through ECS, the Internet, or phone. Depending on the nature of
the problem, IBM might create a PTF for you, or the PTF might already exist.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
OS and LPP PTF installation

IBM i
LOAD (LODPTF)
FIX
BUG
APPLY TEMPORARILY
(APYPTF *TEMP)
FIX
BUG
APPLY PERMANENTLY
(APYPTF *PERM)
FIX
Figure 41-10. OS and LPP PTF installation
AS248.1
Notes:
After a PTF has been received, it must be loaded to the appropriate licensed program
library. Now both the old version of the objects, the ones in error, and the new, corrected
versions exist in the library.
When the PTF is applied temporarily, the new object (corrected) is flagged so that it is used
instead of the old one. At some point in time, when you apply the PTF permanently, the old
object (in error) is deleted.
Temporarily applied PTFs can be removed, but permanently applied PTFs cannot be
removed. Therefore, you want to apply a PTF temporarily first to make sure it fixes the
problem before you apply it permanently.
Using automatic installation of PTFs, you do not have to worry about loading and applying
PTFs; it is done for you as part of the install process. Manual installation of PTFs from
either the Program Temporary Fix menu or by using the Load Program Temporary Fix
(LODPTF) or Apply Program Temporary Fix (APYPTF) commands causes PTFs to be
applied temporarily. At some point, you need to apply the PTFs permanently.

41-21
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details If manual installation of a PTF is required, the steps listed in this visual must be
performed using option 1 (Load PTF) and option 2 (Apply PTF) from the Program
Temporary Fix menu or the LODPTF and APYPTF commands.
After a PTF has been received, it must be loaded to the appropriate licensed program
library. Depending on how a PTF has been received, it is loaded from CD-ROM or a save
file. Now both the old version of the objects, the ones in error, and the new, corrected
versions exist in the library.
When the PTF is applied temporarily, the new (corrected) objects are flagged so that they
are used instead of the old ones. When the PTF is applied permanently, the old
(erroneous) objects are deleted.
A temporarily applied PTF can be removed, but a permanently applied PTF cannot.
Therefore, a PTF should always be applied temporarily to be sure that it fixes the problem
before it is applied permanently.
Whether installing a PTF package or PTFs for individual products, the installation process
discussed earlier performs both the load and apply PTF functions. This includes
permanently applying any PTFs that are superseded by PTFs currently being applied.
Manual installation causes PTFs to be applied temporarily.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
LIC PTFs
IBM i
1
2
Storage area B active

LODPTF
BUG
LICPGM(5771-999)
BUG
AB
APYPTF *TEMP
PWRDWNSYS *IMMED
RESTART(*YES)
IPLSRC(B)
FIX
BUG
BUG
FIX
AB
APYPTF *PERM
FIX
FIX
AB
Figure 41-11. LIC PTFs
AS248.1
Notes:
LIC fixes are PTFs for the Licensed Internal Code (LIC). There are two types of LIC fixes:
delayed and immediate.
Delayed LIC fixes can be applied immediately while running on the A side, or they can be
applied while running on the B side.
Immediate LIC fixes can be applied immediately while running on the A or B storage area.
No IPL is required for applying immediate PTFs.
The system maintains two copies of all LIC on the system. One copy is considered the
permanent copy and is stored on the Power in storage area A. The other copy is
considered the temporary copy and is stored on system storage B. When the Power is
running, it uses the copy that was selected before the last IPL. Like all other PTFs, LIC
fixes must be loaded and applied.
The B storage area is what you normally use. Select the A storage area only if the IPL to
the B storage area fails because of a temporarily applied LIC fix.

41-23
Instructor Guide
You should always LODPTF from the B side. The B side contains both the permanent and
temporary PTFs. When you run LODPTF from the B side, any superseded PTFs are
permanently applied to the A (permanent) side.
The automatic installation of a cumulative PTF package takes care of these A and B IPLs
for you.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.

41-25
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or False: A PTF or a fix is a temporary solution or

bypass of a defect in an IBM licensed program.
2. Which of the following is not one of the fix types available
from IBM?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Single fix
Cumulative package
Temporary correctional fix
Service pack
3. True or False: The recommendation is that cumulative fix

packs should only be installed before you upgrade the
software on your system.
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

The answer is True.

from IBM?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Single fix
Cumulative package
Service pack
The answer is Temporary correctional fix.


41-27
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose

41-29
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 42. PTFs using 5250 emulation

Estimated time
00:15

In this unit, we will review the commands used to order, receive and
install a PTF. We will discuss the information contained in a PTF cover
letter. We will also look at how you display the status of a PTF. Lastly
we will look at how you verify a PTF installation.

Display the PTF menu

Explain the command that is used for ordering PTFs
Explain the contents of a PTF cover letter
Display PTF status
Verify PTF installation

Accountability:

42-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

Display the PTF menu
Explain the command that is used for ordering PTFs
Explain the contents of a PTF cover letter
Display PTF status
AS248.1
Notes:
After successfully completing this unit, you should be able to explain what a PTF is and use
information available from IBM to help you know when to order a PTF. You should also be
able to order a PTF, receive and install a PTF, display the status of a PTF, and verify that a
PTF has been successfully installed.
There are two important things to consider when working with PTFs. First, some functions
related to the installation of PTFs can only be performed while signed on to the system as
the security officer (QSECOFR). No attempt has been made in the following discussion to
identify those functions. Before attempting to perform any function related to PTFs, you
should review the appropriate documentation.
Second, it is highly recommended that you have a current backup of your system. If there is
any doubt at all about the availability of a valid backup, you should take the time to perform
a full system backup before you begin any PTF activity.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details There is no exercise provided with this unit.

42-3
Instructor Guide
Working with PTFs

IBM i
Figure 42-2. Working with PTFs
AS248.1
Notes:
The Program Temporary Fix menu provides easy access to all PTF functions. You can
access this menu by entering go ptf on a command line or by selecting option 7 from the
Power i Main menu and then option 6 from the Define or Change the System menu.
The following explains the options on the Program Temporary Fix menu and the commands
that options 1 through 6 prompt for. Options 7 and 8 do not have commands associated
with them.
1. Load a program temporary fix
This option allows you to select the PTFs to load. It prompts for the Load a Program
Temporary Fix (LODPTF) command.
2. Apply a program temporary fix
This option allows you to select the PTFs to apply to a licensed program. It prompts for
the Apply Program Temporary Fix (APYPTF) command.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
3. Copy a program temporary fix

This option allows you to select PTFs to copy from a diskette, tape, or save file to
another diskette, tape, or save file. It prompts for the Copy Program Temporary Fix
(CPYPTF) command.
4. Remove a program temporary fix
This option allows you to select PTFs to remove. It prompts for the Remove Program
Temporary Fix (RMVPTF) command.
5. Display a program temporary fix
This option allows you to select PTFs that are installed on your Power i system to
display. It prompts for the Display Program Temporary Fix (DSPPTF) command.
6. Order a program temporary fix
This option allows you to select PTFs to order. It prompts for the Send PTF Order
(SNDPTFORD) command.
7. Install a program temporary fix from a list
This option displays a list of PTFs. You can select PTFs from this list to install to
selected IBM-supplied LPPs.
8. Install a program temporary fix package (INSPTF)
This option allows you to install a PTF package.
9. Copy PTF Cover Letter (CPYPFTCVR)
10. Display PTF cover Letter (DSPPTFCVR)
11. Delete a program temporary fix (DLTPTF)
Select this option to select the PTFs to delete.
12. Work with PTF groups (WRKPTFGRP)
Select this option to select the PTF groups to display.
13. Copy PTF group (CPYPTFGRP)
Select this option to select the PTF groups to copy.
70. Related commands (CMDPRBMGT)
Select this option to manage system-related problems.

42-5
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The Program Temporary Fix menu allows most PTF functions. To access this
menu, enter go ptf command on a command line.
Make sure the students understand they can also run the commands associated with menu
options 1 through 6 from a command line. Options 7 and 8 do not have commands
associated with them.
Transition statement We can now look at the second step in the PTF process: ordering
and receiving a PTF.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Ordering a fix using ECS

IBM i
Figure 42-3. Ordering a fix using ECS
AS248.1
Notes:
If the ECS line is configured, use option 6 on the Program Temporary Fix menu or prompt
for the Send PTF Order (SNDPTFORD) command to display the Send PTF Order
(SNDPTFORD) display. If the ECS line is not configured, you can order PTFs from an IBM
service representative by way of the telephone or the Internet.
From the Program Temporary Fix menu, you can order:
A specific licensed program PTF (SFnnnnn where nnnnn is the PTF number)
PSP information for LIC and hardware devices (MF98vrm where v is the version, r is the
release, and m is the modification level of the system. For Version 5 Release 4
Modification 0, type 540.)
PSP information for Licensed programs (SF98vrm)
A cumulative fix pack, which is always sent on CD-ROM or tape (SF99vrm where vrm is
the version, release, and modification level)
PTF group (SF99nnn where nnn is the fix identifier, which can be any number)

42-7
Instructor Guide
Cross-referenced summary list (SF97nnn).

PTF summary list (SF97vrm where vrm is the version, release, and modification level).
You can order and receive up to twenty PTFs with a single execution of the SNDPTFORD
command. If your ECS line is configured and the PTFs are too large for the ECS line, they
are sent on the medium you select on this display.
There are several important additional parameters (F10) for this command that you should
be aware of.
Delivery method (DELIVERY): If this parameter is set to the default *LINKONLY and
you try to order a PTF that is too large to be delivered through ECS, the command will
fail. You should change this parameter to *ANY. This will allow the command to
complete and force an order for the file on your selected media type (CD-ROM or tape).
Order (ORDER): If this parameter is set to the default *REQUIRED, the PTF and its
requisite PTFs will be ordered. If you desire to just order the PTF without its requisite
PTFs, you should change this parameter to *PTFID.
Reorder (REORDER): This parameter specifies whether a PTF that is currently loaded,
applied, or on order should be ordered again.
Check PTF (CHKPTF): This parameter specifies whether checking is performed on the
service requester system to determine if PTFs are ordered based on whether the PTF
product is installed or supported.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details You can order a PTF using an ECS communications line or, if the ECS line is not
configured on your system, by calling an IBM service representative or through the
Internet.
To order a PTF using an ECS line, enter option 6 (order a program temporary fix) on the
Program Temporary Fix menu or prompt for the SNDPTFORD command. The Send PTF
Order (SNDPTFORD) display appears. From this display, you can order the PTFs listed in
the student notes.

42-9
Instructor Guide
Ordering a fix using the Internet

IBM i
Figure 42-4. Ordering a fix using the Internet
AS248.1
Notes:
You can also order PTFs using the internet. The URL to see the window captured in the
upper left of this visual is:
http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/i/support/

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details If you have Internet access, you might want to show this site to the students.

42-11
Instructor Guide
Receiving a fix
IBM i
QGPL
ECS/Internet
QSFnnnnn
OR
Figure 42-5. Receiving a fix
AS248.1
Notes:
Fixes can either be received through the ECS line, from the Internet, or by CD-ROM. You
specify the medium you want the PTF shipped on. If a PTF is too large to be sent through
the ECS line or Internet, it will be sent on CD-ROM or tape.
When a PTF is received by way of the ECS line or the Internet, it is stored as a save file in
the QGPL library. This library is provided with IBM i operating system. A message in the job
log of the ordering job contains the name of the member into which the PTF was placed. In
most cases, the save file name is the PTF identifier prefixed with Q. For example, the save
file for PTF identifier SFnnnnn is QSFnnnnn.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details If your ECS line is configured, you receive the fixes you ordered by way of the
ECS line into a save file in library QGPL. This library is provided with the IBM i operating
system.
A message in the job log of the ordering job contains the name of the member into which
the PTF was placed. In most cases, the save file name is the PTF identifier prefixed with a
Q. For example, the save file for PTF identifier SFnnnn is QSFnnnnn.
Reinforce to the students that they can also order PTFs through the Internet. The PTFs are
copied by FTP to the Power i and placed in the QGPL library just as they were received
from the ECS line. If the PTFs are too large, they will be shipped through the mail on tape
or CD-ROM.

42-13
Instructor Guide
Sample PTF cover letter

IBM i
Figure 42-6. Sample PTF cover letter
AS248.1
Notes:
A cover letter exists for each PTF. A cover letter contains descriptive information about the
PTF (for example, the system and models for which the PTF is valid, the version, release,
and modification number for which the PTF is valid, the library the PTF is intended for, and
any prerequisite and corequisite PTFs) and any special installation instructions. When you
order a PTF using the SNDPTFORD command, you can use the PTFPART parameter to
specify that you want both the PTF and the cover letter or just the cover letter.
You can search, display, and order PTFs or cover letters from the Internet. You can search
for PTFs by PTF number, OS release, or search word. You can also print the cover letters
from your browser.
There is a lot of information in a cover letter, not all of which you will need; however, there is
one piece of information, the licensed program number, which might be required to install
the PTF.
One more note or recommendation is - read the cover letter!

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details There is a great deal of information in a PTF cover letter, much of which might
seem unnecessary for the average system user. The students can do themselves a huge
favor if they always read the cover letter and carefully follow any instructions found there.
The licensed program number is found only in the cover letter. This number might be
required during PTF installation, depending on the method used to install the PTF.
You can search, display, and order PTFs and cover letters from the Internet. You can
search for PTFs by PTF number, OS release, or search word. You can also print the cover
letters from your browser. If you have access to the Internet, you might want to
demonstrate this to the students.
Following is a description of the information contained in a cover letter.
PTF/fix #: The alphanumeric identifier for the PTF or LIC fix.
Licensed program: The alphanumeric identifier for the licensed program.
System: The IBM system for which this PTF is valid.
Release: The version, release, and modification level of the system for which this PTF
is valid.
Prerequisite PTF/fix list: The information about the PTFs that must be applied on the
system before this PTF can be applied.
Corequisite PTF/fix list: The information about other PTFs that must be installed at
the same time as this PTF.
Description of problem fixed: A brief description of the problem this PTF fixes.
Correction: A brief description of what has been done to correct the problem.
Circumvention: A description, if applicable, of how to work around the problem and
continue your operation without applying the PTF.
Special instructions: Any special information pertaining to the PTF.
Default instructions: Tells when the PTF can be applied, either at the next IPL
(delayed) or immediately.
Supersedes PTF/fix nos: The numbers of the PTFs that this PTF replaces or
supersedes.
APAR title line: The title of the authorized program analysis report for the superseded
PTF

42-15
Instructor Guide
Copy the cover letter to IBM i

IBM i
Figure 42-7. Copy the cover letter to IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:
The Copy Program Temporary Fix Cover Letter (CPYPTFCVR) command copies PTF
cover letters from tape or optical media into file QAPZCOVER in library QGPL. Each cover
letter contains information, such as problem description, correction, and special
instructions.
Once the cover letter is in QGPL/QAPZCOVER, you can use option 10 (Display cover letter)
on the Program Temporary Fix menu to display the cover letter.
If you receive your PTFs using mail, you receive them on CD-ROM. A shipping information
letter is included with the CD-ROM which contains, among other things, the PTFs
contained on the CD-ROM. Each PTF on the CD-ROM might have a cover letter. Each
letter must be individually copied to QAPZCOVER using the Copy PTF Cover Letter
(CPYPTFCVR) command.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

42-17
Instructor Guide
Display / Print the cover letter

IBM i
Figure 42-8. Display / Print the cover letter
AS248.1
Notes:
The Display Program Temporary Fix Cover Letter (DSPPTFCVR) command shows the
PTF cover letters for a specified product.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

42-19
Instructor Guide
Option 8: Install PTF package

IBM i
Figure 42-9. Option 8: Install PTF package
AS248.1
Notes:
Use option 8 on the PTF menu to automatically install all PTFs from a cumulative CD-ROM
or tape or other package of PTFs. If the PTFs were received electronically, type *service
as the Device. If they were received on CD-ROM or tape, type the device name as the
Device.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Remind the students to read the cover letters for all PTFs before they install
them.

42-21
Instructor Guide
Option 7: Install PTF off a list

IBM i
Figure 42-10. Option 7: Install PTF off a list
AS248.1
Notes:
Use option 7 on the PTF menu to install PTFs for one or more licensed programs. When
the Install Program Temporary Fixes display appears, choose option 1 for each licensed
program for which you want PTFs installed, and then press Enter.
After you respond to a confirmation display, the Install Options for Program Temporary
Fixes display appears (the display on the previous page).

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Remind the students once again to read the cover letter for each PTF they are
applying.
PTFs for one or more licensed programs can be installed by using option 7 (Install a
program temporary fix from a list) on the Program Temporary Fix menu. When the Install
Program Temporary Fixes display is shown, the students can select option 1, Install for
each licensed program to which he or she wants PTFs to be installed.
After responding to a confirmation display, the Install Options for Program Temporary Fixes
display (see the previous visual) is shown. From this point, individual PTF installation is the
same as cumulative fix pack installation. The only difference is what is installed. With
package installation, all available PTFs are installed. With individual PTF installation, only
PTFs for the specified products are installed.

42-23
Instructor Guide
Install PTF: Similar to PTF menu option 7

IBM i
Figure 42-11. Install PTF: Similar to PTF menu option 7
AS248.1
Notes:
The Install Program Temporary Fix (INSPTF) command allows the user to load and apply
PTFs for multiple products with a single command.
The OMIT and HIPER parameters are supplied to allow the user of the INSPTF command
to be more selective. These parameters apply only to the PTF loading activity. Any PTF
already loaded on the Power is applied.
The INSTYP parameter controls the apply of the PTFs. Using the different special values
allows immediate and delayed apply combinations as well as starting an IPL.
INSPTF does not support loading PTFs from CD-ROM for products that have multiple
releases of the base option installed on the system. If PTFs for such a product exist on the
tape, INSPTF does not load those PTFs and returns an error.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

42-25
Instructor Guide
Display PTF Status

IBM i
Figure 42-12. Display PTF Status
AS248.1
Notes:
To determine the status of PTFs for a specific licensed program or for all licensed programs
installed on, or on order for, your system, you can specify option 5 (Display a program
temporary fix) on the Program Temporary Fix menu.
You can also prompt (PF4) for the Display PTF Status (DSPPTF) command. Option 5
(Display PTF details) will display all available details for a specific PTF.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Transition statement The fourth step in the PTF process is verifying that the PTF
installed correctly. Let us look at how to do this next.

42-27
Instructor Guide
Verifying PTF installation

IBM i
GO LICPGM
Display Install History
Work with Licensed Programs

50. Display log for messages

Start date . . .05/11/08 MM/DD/YY
Start time . . .18:57:24 HH:MM:SS
===> 50
Enter
Output . . . . . *
*, *PRINT
Display History Log Contents

Loading of PTFs started.
Loading of PTFs completed successfully.
Marking of PTFs for delayed application started.
Marking of PTFs for delayed application completed successfully.
PTFs installed successfully.
Apply PTF started.
Applying of PTFs for product 5761999 completed successfully.
Applying of PTFs for product 5761SS1 completed successfully.
Applying of PTFs for product 5761BR1 completed successfully.
Applying of PTFs for product 5761DE1 completed successfully.
Applying of PTFs for product 5761DG1 completed successfully.
Applying of PTFs for product 5761DP4 completed successfully.
More...
Press Enter to continue.
F3=Exit F10=Display all F12=Cancel
Figure 42-13. Verifying PTF installation
AS248.1
Notes:
You should verify that your PTFs installed correctly. To do this, type go licpgm on a
command line. On the Work with Licensed Programs menu, type 50.
On the Display Install History display, the Start date and Start time indicate the date and
time that the first message for the latest installation process was sent to the history file
(QHST). After entering the start date and time and pressing Enter, the Display History Log
Contents display appears showing both successful and unsuccessful PTF installation
messages.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details The last step in the PTF process, which is not discussed in this unit, is testing
the product to ensure it works as intended.
Play.

42-29
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or False: The GO PTFMNU command will display the

PTF menu.
2. Which of the following is the command used to order a PTF?
a.
b.
c.
d.
CPYPTFCVR
INSPTF
SNDPTFORD
DSPPTFCVR
3. True or False: PTFs can be received either electronically or

on tape.
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i

PTF menu.

a. CPYPTFCVR
b. INSPTF
c. SNDPTFORD
d. DSPPTFCVR
The answer is SNDPTFORD.

on tape.

42-31
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

Use information available from IBM to help you know when to
order PTF
Order, receive, and install a PTF
Display PTF status
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose

42-33
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 43. PTFs using System i Navigator

Estimated time
00:45

In this unit, we will review the steps used when working with System i
Navigator to work with and manage PTFs.

Explain how to copy fixes from media

Explain the steps to update fix inventory
Explain how to run the Compare and Update wizard
Explain the capabilities of the Compare and Update wizard
Explain how to install fixes
Explain how to verify the status of an installation

Accountability:

43-1
Instructor Guide
Unit objectives
IBM i

AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

43-3
Instructor Guide
Management Central: Fix wizards

IBM i
Installing fixes (from saved files):

Received using ECS or Internet
Loaded using LODPTF
Fix was sent but not installed
Sending and installing fixes to endpoint systems

Permanently installing fixes
Uninstalling fixes
Comparing and updating fixes on endpoint systems
Figure 43-2. Management Central: Fix wizards
AS248.1
Notes:
A fix (or PTF) contains new or changed objects that are used to correct current or potential
problems in your software. They can also provide new functions. Fixes replace one or more
objects in the licensed program.
One of the key benefits of Management Central is that it makes managing multiple systems
as easy as managing a single system. Management Central simplifies the process of
managing fixes with a variety of easy to use tools and descriptions for each fix status.
These tools include several wizards to guide you through the following tasks:
Installing fixes
Sending and installing fixes
Permanently installing fixes
Uninstalling fixes
Comparing and updating fixes
For example, to install multiple fixes, select the fixes you want from the Management
Central fixes inventory list, and start the Install wizard. Similarly, you will find the Compare
and Update wizard to be very helpful. The wizard compares the fix levels of a single system

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
or multiple systems to a model system. You can send the save files of the missing fixes
from a source system and then install the fixes to ensure the systems have the same level
of fixes. You can launch the Compare and Update wizard from an endpoint system, a
system group, or from a Power in your list of connections.
Use the tasks that follow to help you manage your fixes:
Obtain Fixes
Find out how to download fixes from the internet using IBM ECS or copy fixes from
media. You can download or copy your fixes onto your source system. To use the
Compare and Update wizard, you need to have on your source system the save files for
all of the systems which are installed on your model system.
Install Fixes
Install and permanently install fixes with Management Central. You can also send them
from a system that has the save files for the fixes and install the fixes on another Power
in your Management Central network. Refer to descriptions for each fix status to see a
list of the Management Central statuses.
Compare and Update Fixes
Use Management Central to compare fixes between a model system and any Power in
your Management Central network. You can find extra fixes or missing fixes when you
run the compare. You can then update the systems in your network so that they have
the same level of fixes found in your model system.
Clean Up Fixes
- Over time, save files and cover letters for fixes tend to accumulate, particularly on
your source system. Management Central provides you with a way to delete save
files and cover letters for fixes that are no longer needed.
- Display cover letters.
- Identify which problems are fixed or have special instructions for installation.

43-5
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Copy fixes from media (1 of 2)

IBM i
Figure 43-3. Copy fixes from media (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
The Copy from Media dialog allows you to copy the save file for a fix from a tape or optical
device onto the system.
After you are finished copying the save files, you should collect your fix inventory again.
You can then install the fixes if the corresponding products are installed on the system.
If the corresponding products are supported on the system, you can only send and install
them on other Power i systems.

43-7
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Copy fixes from media (2 of 2)

IBM i
Figure 43-4. Copy fixes from media (2 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
Fixes to copy allows you to select which fixes you want to copy. Values include:
All products
Fixes for all products, releases, options, and languages that are either supported or
installed on this system are copied from the media. You should use caution when
specifying this value and indicating to automatically support the product. Specifying this
value will result in all fixes from the media being copied onto your system.
All supported products
Fixes for all products and releases that are currently supported on this system are
copied from the media to the system. Fixes for products that are installed but not
supported are not copied.
Selected product
Fixes for the product and release that you specify are copied. Click Browse to see a list
of products that are contained in the central Power inventory.

43-9
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
System group: Update fix inventory (1 of 2)

IBM i
Figure 43-5. System group: Update fix inventory (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
Fixes inventory lets you periodically correct problems or potential problems found within a
particular licensed program. Fixes, also known as PTFs, can correct problems that appear
to be hardware failures or software failures, or they can provide new functions. Fixes are
designed to replace one or more objects in the licensed program.
When you select fixes inventory from the Collect Inventory dialog, software inventory will
be automatically selected as well. You cannot select fixes inventory without including
software inventory.
The fixes inventory list (Management Central > Endpoint Systems > any endpoint
system > Configuration and Service > Fixes Inventory) shows all products installed and
the fixes contained within them. For each fix, you can view the status of the fix and other
information, such as the ID, associated product, release, or type.
From the fixes inventory list, you can do any of the following:
Run the wizards to install fixes, send and install fixes, permanently install fixes, or
uninstall fixes

43-11
Instructor Guide
Clean up save files and cover letters

Perform other advanced functions, such as canceling fix actions
Schedule when to perform these actions
Copy fixes from media
Because a collected inventory is used for Management Central tasks, it is important that
you have an inventory that is current; therefore, you should collect the fixes inventory on a
regular basis. You should also be aware that any changes made from the fixes inventory
list are not automatically reflected in the inventory.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

43-13
Instructor Guide
Update fix inventory (2 of 2)

IBM i
Figure 43-6. Update fix inventory (2 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
Use the Collect Inventory dialog to collect a list of the specified resources that currently
exist on the selected systems and groups.
From the inventory lists, you can use other Management Central functions to manage
these items. For example, you can select fixes from the fixes inventory list and install them
on the systems and groups you select.
You can select one or more actions from the list of actions to be run on the central system
when the inventory has been collected. For example, if you are collecting an inventory of
your system's hardware, software, and fixes, and you want to receive this data in a series
of reports that show your system's growth and maintenance, you would select Send
collected data to IBM.
You can either collect the inventory immediately or schedule it to be collected at a later
time.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

43-15
Instructor Guide
Compare and Update fixes (1 of 14)

IBM i
Figure 43-7. Compare and Update fixes (1 of 14)
AS248.1
Notes:
The Compare and Update wizard automatically compares a group of systems to a model
system, finds the missing fixes and extra fixes, and sends the missing fixes to each system
to install them. You can launch the Compare and Update wizard from an endpoint system,
a system group, or from a Power in your list of connections. As a general reminder,
because a collected inventory is used to perform this task, it is important that you have an
inventory that is current.
To compare and update the levels of your fixes inventory, you need to define a model
system and a source system. Your source system has the save files on it. You use your
model system to compare against other systems in your network to ensure that your other
systems have the same level of fixes as the model system.
You should collect your fixes inventory on all systems before you perform the compare and
update task.
To compare and update fixes on your target systems, follow these steps:
1. In System i Navigator, expand Management Central.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
2. Expand Endpoint Systems or System Groups.

3. Right-click a system or a group, select Fixes, and then select Compare and Update.
Only those fixes identified as missing can be sent and installed. You cannot uninstall extra
fixes. You can only display them.

43-17
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:
Review the information on this window; then click Next.

43-19
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:

43-21
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:
Set up your model system
Set up a model system that has the appropriate fixes installed for the particular products,
all fixes for all products, or fixes for particular releases. In some instances, your model
system might be your central system. You should define a model system that works best in
your environment.
To set up your model system, follow these steps:
1. Determine which fixes you want installed on the model system.
2. Install those fixes.
3. Verify that the save file exists for the fixes on the model system.

43-23
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:
The Browse Systems and Groups dialog allows you to create a list of endpoint systems
and system groups or modify a list that was previously created. The list of system groups
can include groups that are created by applications other than Management Central. This
list can be different from the list of Power i system groups shown from the System i
Navigator window. The list of system groups available from the System i Navigator window
includes only those groups created by Management Central.
To add a system or group to the Selected systems and groups list, select it in the Available
systems and groups list, and then click Add.
To remove a system or group from the Selected systems and groups list, select it in the list,
and then click Remove.

43-25
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:

43-27
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:

43-29
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:

43-31
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:

43-33
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:
Set up your source system
Set up a source system that has the save files on it. In some instances, your source system
might be your model system. Get the save files to the source system by using the copy
from media function.

43-35
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:

43-37
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:
Refresh your inventory - The comparison is done based on the information in the inventory.
It is a good idea to refresh the inventory at this time.

43-39
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:
On the last window, the wizard will show all of your selections. If everything is correct, click
Finish to start the comparison.

43-41
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty

IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:
The Compare Results window shows you the overall status of the compare action. After
the compare finishes running, you can see a list of fixes by clicking each target system. The
list shows you fixes that either are missing for each target system or that are extra for each
target system when compared to the model system. A fix is listed as missing if it is installed
or permanently installed on the model system but not installed on the target system. A fix is
listed as extra if it is installed or permanently installed on the target system but not installed
on the model system.
The time and date shown in the upper right portion of the window shows the time and date
when the oldest inventory information was collected for the selected systems and groups,
which could be different from the inventory available on the selected systems and groups.
The Compare and Update wizard uses the inventory on the central system for the compare
data.
You can display the cover letters for those fixes that have them. Right-click the fix in the list
and select Properties. If the fix is missing, the cover letter is displayed from the model
system. If the fix is extra, the cover letter is displayed from the target system.

43-43
Instructor Guide
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Install Fixes (1 of 5)
IBM i
Figure 43-21. Install Fixes (1 of 5)
AS248.1
Notes:
You can use Management Central to install an individual fix on your Power if:
It is present on your Power in the form of a save file (and the corresponding licensed
program is installed on your system).
It was loaded on your system using the Load PTF (LODPTF) command.
It was temporarily removed (uninstalled) from your system.
You sent the fix without installing it.
In all these cases, before the fix is installed, Management Central reports the status of the
fix as available.
If the corresponding licensed program is not on the system, the fix can be present only as a
save file and cannot be installed on the system. The fix has a status then of supported only,
which means that you can only send it to and install it on other IBM i servers that do have
the product installed.

43-45
Instructor Guide
To send fixes to an endpoint system, the save files containing the fixes must be present on
the source system. These fixes have a status of either available or supported only.
Management Central provides more than one path to install fixes. See the online help for a
complete list of all those paths. One way to install a fix would be to do the following:
1. In System i Navigator, expand Management Central.
2. Expand Endpoint systems.
3. Expand the system or group where the fixes you want to install are stored.
5. Expand Fixes Inventory.
6. Select the fixes that you want to install, right-click, and select Install. Be sure the fixes
you select are available (as shown in the Status column).
7. Follow the instructions of the wizard.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

43-47
Instructor Guide
IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

43-49
Instructor Guide
IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

43-51
Instructor Guide
IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

43-53
Instructor Guide
IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:
If everything is correct, click either Finish or Schedule.
Click Finish to start the install now. Click Schedule to put this on a scheduler.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

43-55
Instructor Guide
Verifying the status of the fixes (1 of 2)

IBM i
Figure 43-26. Verifying the status of the fixes (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
To display the status for a specific fix perform the following steps:
1. Click and expand Configuration and Service
2. Click and expand Fixes Inventory
3. Click All fixes to see the right pane captured on this window
4. Right click the specific fix you are interested in
5. Click Properties on the pop down menu to see the visual on the next page in the
student guide
Note
Fixes inventory must be collected before you can perform these steps.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

43-57
Instructor Guide
Verifying the status of the fixes (2 of 2)

IBM i
Figure 43-27. Verifying the status of the fixes (2 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

43-59
Instructor Guide
Advanced fixes
IBM i
Figure 43-28. Advanced fixes
AS248.1
Notes:
From the Advanced menu, you can perform one of the following actions:
Cancel Actions: This dialog allows you to select fixes that have restart actions against
them and then cancel those actions. Restart actions include:
-
Install at next restart

Install permanently at next restart
Uninstall at next restart
Uninstall permanently at next restart
You can also specify what fixes to cancel actions on if the cancel actions are being done
on a group of systems. You can cancel actions immediately or schedule that activity to
begin at a later time.
Uninstall: This option is only available when the fix is installed temporarily.
Install Permanently: The original version of the program is deleted and only the fix can
be used.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

43-61
Instructor Guide
Clean up fixes (1 of 2)
IBM i
Figure 43-29. Clean up fixes (1 of 2)
AS248.1
Notes:
System i Navigator provides a wizard that you can use to clean up fixes on your system. To
start this wizard perform the following steps:
1. Right click your system
2. Click Fixes on the drop down menu
3. Click Cleanup on the secondary drop down menu to see the window on the next page
of the student notebook.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

43-63
Instructor Guide
Clean up fixes (2 of 2)
IBM i
Figure 43-30. Clean up fixes (2 of 2)
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Play.

43-65
Instructor Guide
Checkpoint
IBM i
1. True or False: System i Navigator provides the option to

install a single PTF.
2. Which of the following is not supported by the Management
Central fix wizard?
a. Sending and installing fixes to multiple endpoint systems
b. Permanently installing fixes
c. Simultaneous installation of fixes to systems at different version
and release levels
d. Compare and update fixes on endpoint systems
3. Which of the following is not one of the inventories that can

be collected using Management Central?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Hardware
Software
Fixes
Authorization lists
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
IBM i
1. True or False: System i Navigator provides the option to install a single PTF.
The answer is True.
2. Which of the following is not supported by the Management Central fix

wizards?
c. Simultaneous installation of fixes to systems at different version and release
levels
The answer is Simultaneous installation of fixes to systems at different version
and release levels.
3. Which of the following is not one of the inventories that can be

collected using Management Central?
a. Hardware
b. Software
c. Fixes
d. Authorization lists
The answer is Authorization lists.

43-67
Instructor Guide
Unit summary
IBM i

AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose

43-69
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Unit 44. Class summary

Estimated time
00:15

This unit is used to review the objectives that were set in the beginning
of the class and that were covered throughout the course. Also to be
covered is what the next course would be that a student would attend
to continue learning about system operations or system
administration.

Perform Power i system operator functions
-

Monitor and control job and output queues, jobs, and devices
Start and stop the operating system

44-1
Instructor Guide
Course summary
IBM i
Having completed this course, you should be able to:

Perform Power i system operator functions:
Monitor and control job and output queues, jobs, and devices
Start and stop the operating system
Figure 44-1. Course summary
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

44-3
Instructor Guide
Additional education
IBM i
Advanced System Operator's Workshop for IBM i:

Classroom course AS27 or ILO course OV27
Three days
Prepares system operator for additional system operator
responsibilities
IBM i Administration and Control:

Classroom course OL19 or ILO course OV19
Five days
Prepares user for system administrator responsibilities
Figure 44-2. Additional education
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Perform a Web tour to show students where to
find information about the courses on the next slide.
To perform a Web tour:
1. Launch the Web tour by clicking the Earth icon in the Elluminate toolbar.
2. Then enter the URL for the IBM Training homepage.
http://www.ibm.com/training/global
3. Click the icon to the right of the URL address bar to past the URL into the text chat.
Remind the students to bookmark this for easy reference.
4. Search for each course and display the web page while promoting that course to the
students.
For a FTF (Face to Face) class:
1. Open a Web browser.
2. Then enter the URL for the IBM Training homepage.
http://www.ibm.com/training/global
3. Search for each course and display the Web page while promoting that course to the
students.
Encourage the students to follow along on their classroom computers, if possible.

44-5
Instructor Guide
Class evaluation
IBM i
Please fill out Student Evaluation form
Use class number _______

Use course number _______
Figure 44-3. Class evaluation
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

44-7
Instructor Guide

IBM i
Thank you!
Figure 44-4. System Operator Workshop for IBM i
AS248.1
Notes:

V6.0
Instructor Guide
Uempty
Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Transition statement End of unit and course.

44-9
Instructor Guide

V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions

IBM i

The answer is True.

the following?
a.
b.
c.
d.
OS/400
i5/OS
IBM i
All of the above
The answer is IBM i.


A-1
Instructor Guide
IBM i

a.
b.
c.
d.
Operating system
Memory
Disk
All of the above

The answer is True.

system console.
A-2

V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i

The answer is True.

a. F1
b. F3
c. F9
d. F12
The answer is F1.

previously entered?
a. F1
b. F3
c. F9
d. F12
The answer is F9.

A-3
Instructor Guide
IBM i

The answer is True.

The answer is True.

system.
The answer is True.
A-4

V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i


following?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Messages
Jobs
Security
All of the above

The answer is True.

A-5
Instructor Guide
IBM i

Windows.
The answer is True.

a function?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Sort
Include
Columns
Auto refresh
The answers are Include and Columns.

32-bit or 64-bit.
The answer is True.
A-6

V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i


included in the OS?
The answer is True.

a.
b.
c.
d.
Basic operations
Work management
Management Central
The answer is Management Central.


A-7
Instructor Guide
IBM i

Director Navigator for IBM i ?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Admin
Admin2
Admin3
Qhttpsvr
The answer is Admin2.


cannot customize the startup page
A-8

V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i
1.
Which of the following message types is requesting a reply?

a. Informational
b. Questioning
c. Inquiry
d. User
The answer is Inquiry.

created?

emulation session?
a. Informational
b. Inquiry
c. Workstation
d. Break
The answer is Break.

A-9
Instructor Guide
IBM i
1. True or False: You can allocate an application message queue when

you sign on.
The answer is True.
2. Which of the following delivery value will direct the system to take the
default reply to a message?
a. Hold
b. Break
c. Notify
d. Default
The answer is Default.
3. When the system creates a work station device description, which of

the following is automatically created?
A-10 System Operator Workshop for IBM i

V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i

system.
The answer is True.

a.
b.
c.
d.
Informational
Inquiry
Workstation
Break
e. The answer is Break.

*Notify.
The answer is True.

A-11
Instructor Guide
IBM i

messages.

GUI?
a. Informational
b. Inquiry
c. User
d. All of the above
3. Which customize option allows you to specify that you want

to view messages for a different user?
a. Sort
b. Include
c. Columns
d. Auto refresh
The answer is Include.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i
4. True or False. A break message will interrupt a user who is


a.
b.
c.
d.
Basic operations
Work management
Network
The answer is Basic operations.


A-13
Instructor Guide
IBM i

The answer is True.

a.
b.
c.
d.
Users
Workstations
System operator
All of the above


V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i


program.
The answer is True.

command.
The answer is True.

A-15
Instructor Guide
IBM i

help.

a command?
a. F1
b. F3
c. F4
d. F9
The answer is F4.

a. F1
b. F3
c. F4
d. F9
The answer is F9.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i


command?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Main
User
Major
Command
The answer is Major.

The answer is True.

A-17
Instructor Guide
Unit 12. Concepts: Objects, library, and the IFS
IBM i
1. True or False: An object is anything that exists in storage and on

which operations can be performed.
The answer is True.
2. A _____ is a special object that has a named set of objects associated

with it and is used to group objects. (Select all that apply.)
a. Directory
b. Link
c. Library
d. File system
The answers are Directory and Library.
3. A PC object is stored in which of the following file systems in the IFS?

a. Root
b. QDLS
c. QSYS.LIB
d. QOPT
The answer is Root.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i

The answer is True.

library.
a.
b.
c.
d.
QUSRSYS
QGPL
QSPL
QSYS
The answer is QSYS.

library QGPL.
The answer is True.

A-19
Instructor Guide
IBM i

copy a file.
The answer is True.

a. DSPOBJ
b. LSTOBJ
c. SHWOBJ
d. WRKOBJ
The answer is WRKOBJ.
3. The command used to display an objects description is

______?
a. DSPOBJD
b. LSTOBJD
c. SHWOBJD
d. WRKOBJD
The answer is DSPOBJD.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i


a group of objects.
a.
b.
c.
d.
DSPOBJD
RSTOBJ
CRTDUPOBJ
WRKOBJ
The answer is CRTDUPOBJ.

The answer is True.

A-21
Instructor Guide
IBM i
1. True or False: System i Navigator GUI allows you to

duplicate an object.
The answer is True.

a. Basic operations
b. Work management
d. Users and groups
The answer is Users and groups.

library?
a. Right-click your system
b. Work management
c. Integrated file systems
d. Database
The answer is Work management.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i

command once, and it can be run on multiple systems
The answer is True.

on the system.
The answer is True.

prompt a command.

A-23
Instructor Guide
Unit 15. Object management using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i
IBM i


run a command?
a.
b.
c.
d.
System
Work management
Security


V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i

library?
a.
b.
c.
d.
System
Database
File system
Network
The answer is Network.

The answer is True.
6. True or False: Using Systems Director Navigator does not

display a list of libraries.

A-25
Instructor Guide
IBM i

The answer is True.

a.
b.
c.
d.
Interactive
Batch
Autostart
Spooling
The answer is Spooling.

a.
b.
c.
d.
System memory
Subsystem
Job queue
Output queue
The answer is Job queue.


V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i

nine.

a.
b.
c.
d.
QHTTP
QINTER
QBATCH
QSPL
The answer is QSPL.


A-27
Instructor Guide
IBM i

QDFTJOBD.
The answer is True.

a.
b.
c.
d.
DSPUSRPRF
WKRJOBD
DSPJOBD
DSPOBJD
The answer is DSPJOBD.


V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i
1. The Work with User Jobs command allows you to select which of the
following types of jobs?
a. Active
b. Job queue
c. Output queue
d. All of these
The answer is All of these.
2. On the Work with User Jobs display, which of the following options will
show you all of the characteristics of a job?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Option 2 - Change
Option 5 Work with
The answer is Option 5 Work with.
3. True or False: You can use option 3 Hold, on the Work with Active
Jobs display, to hold a subsystem.

A-29
Instructor Guide
IBM i
1. Which branch under Basic Operations will show details for your active
jobs?
a. Messages
b. Printer Output
c. Printers
d. Jobs
The answer is Jobs.
2. Which branch under Work Management will show details for all of the
active jobs on the system?
a. Active Jobs
b. Server Jobs
c. Subsystems
d. Memory Pools
The answer is Active Jobs.
3. True or False: The Active Jobs branch will basically show the same
information as running the Work with Active Jobs WRKACTJOB
command.
The answer is True.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i
1. True or False: Systems Director Navigator allows you to display

information relating to your jobs on the system.
The answer is True.
2. The Active jobs link is available under which of the following tasks in
Systems Director Navigator?
a. Basic Operations
b. Work Management
d. Users and Groups
3. Which task is used to display details about subsystems running on your

system?
a. Basic Operations
b. Work Management
d. Users and Groups

A-31
Instructor Guide
IBM i
1. Which of the following are created on the system when a printer is

connected (Select all that apply)?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Device description
Message queue
Output queue
Printer profile
The answers are Device description and Output queue.
2. What is the first place the system looks to determine where to send
your output file?
a. Printer device file
b. Job description
c. User profile
d. System value
The answer is Printer device file.
3. True or False: The system administrator can create an output queue on

the system with the Create Output Queue (CRTOUTQ) command.
The answer is True.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i

a. WRKPRTF
b. WRKSPLF
c. WRKJOBF
d. WRKPRT
The answer is WRKSPLF.

a. Option 2 - Change
b. Option 4 - Delete
c. Option 5 Display
d. Option 8 Attributes

have to do for an expired file to be deleted on the system.

A-33
Instructor Guide
IBM i

The answer is True.

found?
a. Basic Operations
b. Work Management
c. Users and Groups
d. File Systems
The answer is Basic Operations.

a. Start
b. Stop
c. Create
d. Change which output queue is assigned
The answer is Create. Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i

The answer is True.

a.
b.
c.
d.
Origin / Expiration
Layout
Other 1
Other 2
The answer is Origin / Expiration.
The answer is True.

A-35
Instructor Guide
IBM i

records.
The answer is True.

a. 5
b. 8
c. 10
d. 15
The answer is 10.

The answer is True.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i
1. True or False: You can use the Change IPL Attributes command to
control the time it takes for your system to perform an IPL.
The answer is True.
2. Which type of IPL requires an operator to complete the power on

process?
a. Attended
b. Unattended
c. Automatic
d. Restart
The answer is Attended.
3. Which type of IPL is used to reload your system from tape after a disk
failure?
a.
b.
c.
d.
A
B
C
D
The answer is D.

A-37
Instructor Guide
IBM i


users profile?
a. Password
b. User class
c. List of owned objects
d. System values
The answer is System values.

system privileges?
a. Programmer
b. System operator
c. Security administrator
d. Security officer
The answer is Security officer.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i

The answer is Option 2 Change.

The answer is True.

A-39
Instructor Guide
IBM i

System i Navigator.
The answer is True.

a.
b.
c.
d.

Job control and Save / restore
The answer is Job control and Save / restore.

3. True or False: System i Navigator does not allow you to display who
is authorized to work with an object.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i

The answer is True.

a. System
b. Work Management
c. Security
d. Users and Groups

a. Basic
b. Details
c. Columns
d. Location
The answer is Location.

A-41
Instructor Guide
IBM i

turned off.

hardware?
a. CD-ROM
b. Tape systems
c. Controllers
d. LAN adapters
The answer is LAN adapters.

a. Twinax console
b. Operations console
c. HMC
d. Wireless console
The answer is Wireless console.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i

hardware?
a. QSECURITY
b. QPRTDEV
c. QAUTOCFG
d. *SYSCTL
The answer is QAUTOCFG.
a. QSECURITY
b. QPRTDEV
c. QAUTOCFG
d. *SYSCTL
The answer is QPRTDEV.

a. WRKSYSSTS
b. WRKDSKSTS
c. WRKCFGSTS
d. WRKHDWSTS
The answer is WRKCFGSTS.

A-43
Instructor Guide
IBM i

Navigator?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Communication
LAN resources
OS information
The answer is OS information.

The answer is True.

installed.
The answer is True.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i

The answer is True.

a.
b.
c.
d.
Processor
Memory
Disk units
LPAR
The answer is Disk units.


A-45
Instructor Guide
IBM i
1. True or False: Objects that are considered temporary do not get saved
on the system.
The answer is True.
2. When you save an object, which of the following is not saved?

a.
b.
c.
d.
Object name
Object type
The answer is Address of this data on disk.
3. Which of the following is not one of the supported media for a save
operation?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Physical tape
Save file
Virtual tape
Memory stick

V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i
1. True or False: Running the display tape command, with the *LABELS
format, will show a listing by name of all of the objects that are saved
on this tape.
2. Which of the following is not supported by the Duplicate Tape

(DUPTAP) command?
a. Duplicate virtual tape to physical tape
b. Duplicate physical tape to virtual tape
c. Duplicate virtual tape to save file
d. Duplicate only specific sequence items
The answer is Duplicate virtual tape to save file.
3. On the Save menu, which option is used to save the entire system?
a. Option 20
b. Option 21
c. Option 22
d. Option 23
The answer is Option 21.

A-47
Instructor Guide
IBM i

save operation.
The answer is True.
5. Which command is used to clear the contents of a save file?

a.
b.
c.
d.
DSPSAVF
INZSAVF
WRKSAVF
CLRSAVF
The answer is CLRSAVF.
The answer is True.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i

The answer is True.

a.
b.
c.
d.
Daily
Weekly
Monthly
Customized
The answer is Customized.

The answer is True.

A-49
Instructor Guide
Unit 37. Save using System Director Navigator for IBM i
IBM i

for i.
The answer is True.
2. True or False: Installing BRMS allow you to backup objects

using IBM System Director Navigator for i.
The answer is True.
tape?
a.
b.
c.
d.
64
128
256
*nomax
The answer is 256.


V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i

a.
b.
c.
d.
RSTCFG
RSTDLO
RSTLIB
RSTOBJ
The answer is RSTCFG.

a. Physical tape
b. Virtual tape
c. Save file
d. Memory stick

a. A
b. B
c. C
d. D
The answer is D.

A-51
Instructor Guide
IBM i

The answer is True.

information?
a. WRKSYSSTS
b. WRKACTJOB
c. WRKDSKSTS
d. WRKUSRJOB
The answer is WRKSYSSTS.
3. Which of the following commands will display information about your

job?
a. WRKSYSSTS
b. WRKACTJOB
c. WRKDSKSTS
d. WRKUSRJOB
The answer is WRKACTJOB.

V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
Unit 40. Program determination using System i Navigator
IBM i
1. True or False: Running the analyze problem function is available

using 5250 emulation and using System i Navigator.
2. Which of the following requires signing on to system service tools?

a. WRKACTJOB
b. WRKSYSSTS
c. WRKDSKSTS
d. WRKSSTSTS
The answer is WRKDSKSTS.
3. Which of the following is not supported by Electronic Service Agent?

a. Reporting system detected problems
b. Requesting cumulative fix packages
c. Reporting hardware and software problems
d. Reporting a failed system backup
The answer is Reporting a failed system backup.

A-53
Instructor Guide
IBM i

The answer is True.

from IBM?
a.
b.
c.
d.
Single fix
Cumulative package
Service pack
The answer is Temporary correctional fix.


V6.0
Instructor Guide
AP
IBM i

PTF menu.

a. CPYPTFCVR
b. INSPTF
c. SNDPTFORD
d. DSPPTFCVR
The answer is SNDPTFORD.

on tape.

A-55
Instructor Guide
IBM i
1. True or False: System i Navigator provides the option to install a single PTF.
The answer is True.
2. Which of the following is not supported by the Management Central fix

wizards?
c. Simultaneous installation of fixes to systems at different version and release
levels
The answer is Simultaneous installation of fixes to systems at different version
and release levels.
3. Which of the following is not one of the inventories that can be

collected using Management Central?
a. Hardware
b. Software
c. Fixes
d. Authorization lists
The answer is Authorization lists.

V6.0
backpg
Back page

Admin - 6Z0XU - As248inst PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Admin - 6Z0XU - As248inst PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

V6.

System Operator Workshop

Adobe is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in

December 2011 edition

Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2001, 2011.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011

Operations console (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-77

System Operator Workshop for IBM i

Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part

Unit 4. Overview of System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Web console interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

System Operator Workshop for IBM i

Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part

How messages are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unit 8. Messaging using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

System Operator Workshop for IBM i

Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part

Unit 13. Object management using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-46

System Operator Workshop for IBM i

Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part

Unit 17. Work management using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

Job Properties (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-21

System Operator Workshop for IBM i

Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part

Work with All Spooled Files (WRKSPLF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-6

Properties: Copies/Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-22

System Operator Workshop for IBM i

Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part

System values using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unit 26. System security concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1

Capabilities: System privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-13

System Operator Workshop for IBM i

Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part

Unit 31. Configuration using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-1

System operator message queue (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33-11

Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part

Image Commands menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unit 36. Save using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-1

System Operator Workshop for IBM i

Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part

Problem determination steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-7

Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40-37

Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part

Compare and Update fixes (8 of 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unit 44. Class summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011

xxiv System Operator Workshop for IBM i

Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part

Adobe is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in

Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011